Nissan Xtrail Car Book 2016 ENG

NISSAN X-TRAIL
X-TRAIL
BETRIEBSANLEITUNG
Deutschland : Österreich : Schweiz :
00800/83 83 80 80 0800/100 990 0800 647 726
International : International : International :
+49 (0)2232/57 23 45 +43 (0)1 317 77 27 +41 (0) 22 341 08 41
Printing: June 2015 (01)
T32-G4
Publication No.: OM15G-0T32E0E
Printed in France
OM15G-0T32E0E Nissan International SA - Switzerland T32-G4
G
T32
Foreword
Welcome to the growing family of new NISSAN owners. This vehicle is delivered to you with confidence. It is produced using the latest techniques and strict quality
control.
This manual was prepared to help you understand the operation and maintenance of your vehicle so that you may enjoy many kilometres (miles) of driving pleasure.
Please read through this manual before operating your vehicle.
A separate Warranty Information & Maintenance Booklet explains in detail the warranty coverage that applies to your vehicle.
Your NISSAN dealer knows your vehicle best. When you require any service or have any questions, your NISSAN dealer will be glad to assist you with the extensive
resources available for you.
IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE

REMINDERS FOR SAFETY! This vehicle should not be modified. Modifications could affect its performance,
safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition,
Follow these important driving rules to help ensure a safe and complete trip for damage or performance problems resulting from modifications may not be cov-
you and your passengers! ered under NISSAN warranties.
• NEVER drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs.
READ FIRST — THEN DRIVE SAFELY
• ALWAYS observe posted speed limits and never drive too fast for condi-
Before driving your vehicle, read this Owner’s Manual carefully. This will ensure
tions.
familiarity with controls and maintenance requirements, assisting you in the safe
• ALWAYS use your seat belts and appropriate child restraint systems. operation of your vehicle.
Preteen children should be seated in the rear seat.
Throughout this manual the following symbols and words are used:
• ALWAYS provide information about the proper use of vehicle safety fea-
tures to all occupants of the vehicle. WARNING
• ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manual for important safety information. Indicates the presence of a hazard that could cause death or serious per-
WHEN READING THE MANUAL sonal injury. To avoid or reduce the risk, the procedures described must be
followed precisely.
This manual includes information for all options available on this model. There-
fore, you may find some information that does not apply to your vehicle. CAUTION
Throughout this manual, some illustrations may only show the layout for Left- Indicates the presence of a hazard that could cause minor or moderate per-
Hand Drive (LHD) models. For Right-Hand Drive (RHD) models, the illustrated sonal injury, or damage to your vehicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the pro-
shape and location of some components may differ. cedures described must be followed carefully.
All information, specifications and illustrations in this manual are those in effect NOTE
at the time of printing. NISSAN reserves the right to change specifications or Indicates additional helpful information.
designs at any time without notice and without obligation.
< >:
Chevrons or angle brackets are used to indicate texts on controls like buttons or
switches inside or on the vehicle.
Air bag warning labels:
The Blue Citizenship symbol indicates environmentally friendly information and

best practices.
“NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE

AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.”
Be sure to read the “Airbag warning labels” description in the Safety section of
this manual; and the “Airbag label” description at the end of this manual.
ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD DRIVING (4WD models)
This symbol means “Do not do this” or “Do not let this happen”. This vehicle will handle and manoeuvre differently from an ordinary passenger
vehicle, because it has a higher centre of gravity. As with other vehicles with fea-
tures of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these point to the front of the vehicle. control or an accident.
Be sure to read “On-pavement and off-road driving precautions” and “Four-
wheel drive (4WD)” in the “5. Starting and driving” section of this manual.
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these indicate movement or action.
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these call attention to an item in the
illustration.
[ ]:
Square brackets are used to indicate messages, keys, or items displayed on a
screen.
BATTERY DISPOSAL
CAUTION
An improperly disposed battery can harm the environment. Always confirm
local regulations for battery disposal.
Examples of the batteries that the vehicle contains:
• Vehicle battery
• Remote controller battery (for Intelligent Key and/or Remote keyless entry
system)
• Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor battery
• Remote controller battery (for Mobile Entertainment system)
If in doubt, contact your local authority, or a NISSAN dealer, or a qualified work-
shop for advice on disposal.
Bluetooth® is a trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
and licensed to Visteon Corporation and Robert Bosch
m GmbH.
iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc.

m
Contents Illustrated table of contents 0
Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint
system 1
Instruments and controls 2
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio
system 4
Starting and driving 5
In case of emergency 6
Appearance and care 7
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8
Technical information 9
Index 10
0 Illustrated table of contents
Seats, seat belts and Supplemental Restraint Left-Hand Drive (LHD) model.............................. 0-10
System (SRS).......................................................... 0-2 Right-Hand Drive (RHD) model ........................... 0-11
Exterior front ............................................................ 0-3 Meters and gauges .................................................. 0-12
Exterior rear............................................................. 0-4 Engine compartment................................................ 0-13
Passenger compartment .......................................... 0-5 QR25DE engine model....................................... 0-14
Cockpit ................................................................... 0-6 MR16DDT engine model .................................... 0-14
Left-Hand Drive (LHD) model.............................. 0-6 MR20DD engine model ...................................... 0-15
Right-Hand Drive (RHD) model ........................... 0-8 R9M engine model ............................................. 0-16
Instrument panel ...................................................... 0-10
SEATS, SEAT BELTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
11. Child restraint anchor point (for top tether

strap child restraint) (P. 1-23)
12. Third row seats* (P. 1-7)
*: where fitted
JVC0589X
1. Supplemental front-impact air bags (P. 1-30) 6. Front seats (P. 1-2)
2. Seat belts (P. 1-10) 7. Supplemental side-impact air bags (P. 1-30)
3. Head restraints (P. 1-8) 8. Pre-tensioner seat belt system (P. 1-38)
4. Supplemental curtain side-impact air bags 9. Second row seats (P. 1-5)
(P. 1-30) — Child restraints (P. 1-15)
5. Child restraint anchor point (for top tether 10. ISOFIX child restraint system (for second row
strap child restraint)* (P. 1-15) seats) (P. 1-22)
0-2 Illustrated table of contents

EXTERIOR FRONT
11. Parking sensor system* (P. 5-49)

— Park Assist (PA)* (P. 4-14)
12. Tyres
— Tyres and wheels (P. 8-34, 9-7)
— Flat tyre (P. 6-2)
— Tyre placard (P. 9-9)
13. Outside mirrors (P. 3-30)
14. Side view camera* (P. 4-6)
15. Side turn signal light (P. 2-41)
16. Doors
— Keys (P. 3-2)
— Door locks (P. 3-4)
— Intelligent Key system* (P. 3-9)
— Remote keyless entry system* (P. 3-7)
— Security system (P. 3-20)
*: where fitted
JVC0642X
1. Engine bonnet (P. 3-23) 6. Power windows (P. 2-47)

2. Windscreen wiper and washer 7. Front view camera* (P. 4-6)
— Switch operation (P. 2-43)
8. Recovery hook (P. 6-13)
— Window washer fluid (P. 8-17)
9. Headlights and turn signal lights (P. 2-35)
3. Headlight cleaner* (P. 2-41)
10. Fog lights* (P. 2-42)
4. Front camera* (P. 4-6, 2-33, 5-36)
5. Sunroof* (P. 2-49)
Illustrated table of contents 0-3

EXTERIOR REAR
— Remote keyless entry system* (P. 3-7)

— Rear view camera* (P. 4-6)
9. Rear combination light (P. 8-25)
10. Fuel-filler lid (P. 3-28)
11. Child safety rear door locks (P. 3-6)
*: where fitted
JVC0599X
1. Rear window defogger (P. 2-46) 5. Roof rail* (P. 2-57)

2. Rear window wiper and washer 6. Parking sensor system* (P. 5-49)
— Switch operation (P. 2-45) — Park Assist (PA)* (P. 4-14)
— Window washer fluid (P. 8-17)
7. Rear fog light (P. 2-42)
3. High-mounted stop light
8. Back door (P. 3-24)
— Bulb replacement (P. 8-26)
— Intelligent Key system* (P. 3-9)
4. Antenna (P. 4-38)

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
11. Door armrest

— Power window switch (P. 2-47)
— Power door lock switch* (P. 2-6)
— Outside rearview mirror remote control
switch (Driver’s side) (P. 3-30)
12. Front cup holders (P. 2-53)
13. Heated seat switch* (P. 1-5)
14. Console box (P. 2-52)
15. Luggage room
— Storage (P. 2-54)
— Luggage hooks (P. 2-54)
— Tonneau cover* (P. 2-57)
— Power outlet (P. 2-51)
— Spare tyre (P. 6-2)
*: where fitted
JVC0654X
1. Inside rearview mirror (P. 3-29) 6. Sun visors (P. 2-58, 3-31)
2. Sunglasses holder (P. 2-52) 7. Room light* (P. 2-59)
3. Front map lights (P. 2-58) 8. Rear personal lights* (P. 2-59)
— Microphone (P. 4-56, P. 4-63)
9. Coat hook (Driver’s side) (P. 2-56)
4. Sunroof* (P. 2-49)
10. Rear armrest (Second row seats) (P. 1-7)
5. Cancel switch for ultrasonic and tilt sensors* — Rear cup holders (P. 2-53)
(P. 3-21)

COCKPIT
5. Steering wheel (P. 3-29)

— Horn (P. 2-47)
6. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-43)
7. Hazard indicator flasher switch (P. 6-2)
8. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (right side)
— Cruise control switches* (P. 5-41)
— Speed limiter switches* (P. 5-39)
— Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
(without navigation)* (P. 4-56)
(with navigation)* (P. 4-63)
9. Shift lever
— Xtronic Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) (P. 5-13)
— Manual Transmission (MT) (P. 5-16)
10. Electronic Stability Programme (ESP) OFF
switch (P. 5-27)
11. Headlight aiming control switch* (P. 2-37)
12. ECO switch* (P. 5-45)
NIC2485
13. Headlight cleaner switch* (P. 2-41)
14. Parking sensor system OFF switch* (P. 5-50)
LEFT-HAND DRIVE (LHD) MODEL 4. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left side) 15. Power back door switch* (P. 3-24)
— Audio control* (P. 4-54 or Navigation
1. Instrument brightness control (P. 2-3) system **) 16. Stop/Start OFF switch* (P. 5-21)
2. TRIP RESET switch (P. 2-2) — Vehicle information display control (P. 2-14) 17. Power back door main switch* (P. 3-24)
3. Headlight and turn signal switch (P. 2-35)/Fog (without navigation)* (P. 4-56) 18. Push-button ignition switch (model with Intel-
light switch* (P. 2-42) — Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System ligent Key system)* (P. 5-8)
(with navigation)* (P. 4-63) 19. Ignition switch (model without Intelligent Key
system)* (P. 5-7)

20. Parking brake (P. 3-31)
21. Hill descent control switch* (P. 5-32)
22. Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) mode switch*
(P. 5-22)
*: where fitted
**: See the separate Navigation System Owner’s
Manual (where fitted).

6. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (right side)
— Cruise control switches* (P. 5-41)
— Speed limiter switches* (P. 5-39)
(with navigation)* (P. 4-63)
7. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-43)
8. Power back door main switch* (P. 3-24)
9. Power back door switch* (P. 3-24)
10. Instrument brightness control (P. 2-3)
11. TRIP RESET switch (P. 2-2)
12. Electronic Stability Programme (ESP) OFF
switch (P. 5-27)
13. Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) mode switch*
(P. 5-22)
14. Shift lever
— Xtronic Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) (P. 5-13)
NIC2486
— Manual Transmission (MT) (P. 5-16)
15. Parking brake (Switch type)* (P. 3-31)
RIGHT-HAND DRIVE (RHD) MODEL — Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System 16. Steering wheel (P. 3-29)
(with navigation)* (P. 4-63) — Horn (P. 2-47)
1. Hill descent control switch* (P. 5-32)
3. Hazard indicator flasher switch (P. 6-2) 17. Ignition switch (model without Intelligent Key
2. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left side)
4. Headlight and turn signal switch (P. 2-35)/Fog system)* (P. 5-7)
— Audio control* (P. 4-54 or Navigation
system **) light switch* (P. 2-42) 18. Stop/Start switch* (P. 5-21)
— Vehicle information display control (P. 2-14) 5. Push-button ignition switch (model with Intel- 19. Parking sensor system OFF switch* (P. 5-50)
— Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System ligent Key system)* (P. 5-8)
(without navigation)* (P. 4-56) 20. ECO switch* (P. 5-45)

21. Headlight aiming control switch* (P. 2-37)
*: where fitted

INSTRUMENT PANEL
8. Bonnet release handle (P. 3-23)

9. Steering wheel lock lever (P. 3-29)
10. Driver’s front-impact air bag (P. 1-30)/Horn
(P. 2-47)
11. Heater/air conditioner control (P. 4-24)
12. Auxiliary (AUX) input jack* (P. 4-54) and USB
connection port* (P. 4-53)
13. Power outlet (P. 2-51)
14. Defogger switch (P. 2-46)/Heated windscreen
button (P. 4-30)
15. Glove box (P. 2-52)
16. Fuse box cover* (P. 8-21)
*: where fitted
JVC0663X
LEFT-HAND DRIVE (LHD) MODEL — Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System

1. Side vent (P. 4-23) — Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
2. Meters and gauges (P. 2-2)/Clock (P. 4-40) (with navigation)* (P. 4-63)
3. Centre vent (P. 4-23) 5. Passenger’s front-impact air bag (P. 1-30)
4. Audio system* (P. 4-30) or Navigation 6. Fuse box cover (P. 8-21)
system** 7. Fuel-filler lid release handle (P. 3-28)
— Around view monitor* (P. 4-6)

7. Glove box (P. 2-52)
— Fuse box (P. 8-21)
8. Heater/air conditioner control (P. 4-24)
9. Power outlet (P. 2-51)
10. Auxiliary (AUX) input jack* (P. 4-54) and USB
connection port* (P. 4-53)
11. Defogger switch (P. 2-46)/Heated windscreen
button (P. 4-30)
12. Steering wheel lock lever (P. 3-29)
13. Bonnet release handle (P. 3-23)
14. Fuel-filler lid release handle (P. 3-28)
15. Fuse box cover* (P. 8-21)
*: where fitted
JVC0662X
RIGHT-HAND DRIVE (RHD) MODEL (without navigation)* (P. 4-56)

1. Side vent (P. 4-23) (with navigation)* (P. 4-63)
2. Passenger’s front-impact air bag (P. 1-30) 4. Centre vent (P. 4-23)
3. Audio system* (P. 4-30) or Navigation 5. Meters and gauges (P. 2-2)/Clock (P. 4-40)
system**
— Around view monitor* (P. 4-6) 6. Driver’s front-impact air bag (P. 1-30)/Horn
— Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System (P. 2-47)

METERS AND GAUGES
JVC0581X
1. Tachometer (P. 2-2) 6. Fuel gauge (P. 2-3)

2. Warning/indicator lights (P. 2-5)
3. Vehicle information display (P. 2-14)
— Odometer/twin trip odometer (P. 2-2)
4. Speedometer (P. 2-2)
5. Engine coolant temperature gauge (P. 2-3)

ENGINE COMPARTMENT
NIC2487
QR25DE ENGINE MODEL 6. Window washer fluid reservoir (P. 8-17)

1. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-5) 7. Engine drive belts (P. 8-11)
2. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-7) 8. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-7)
3. Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-14) 9. Radiator cap (P. 8-5)
— Vehicle overheat (P. 6-11)
4. Air cleaner (P. 8-16)
10. Fuse/fusible link box (P. 8-21)
5. Battery (P. 8-18)

10. Battery (P. 8-18)
JVC0813X
MR16DDT ENGINE MODEL 5. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-5)

1. Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (P. 8-14) 6. Window washer fluid reservoir (P. 8-17)
— RHD model 7. Engine drive belts (P. 8-11)
2. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-7) 8. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-7)
3. Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (P. 8-14) 9. Radiator cap (P. 8-5)
— LHD model — Vehicle overheat (P. 6-11)

*: For Manual Transmission (MT) Model
NIC2488
MR20DD ENGINE MODEL 6. Engine drive belts (P. 8-11)

1. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-5) 7. Radiator cap (P. 8-5)
— Vehicle overheat (P. 6-11)
2. Brake and clutch* fluid reservoir (P. 8-14)
8. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-7)
9. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-7)
10. Battery (P. 8-18)
5. Window washer fluid reservoir (P. 8-17)

*: For Manual Transmission (MT) Model
JVC0640X
R9M ENGINE MODEL 5. Air cleaner (P. 8-16)

1. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-5) 6. Window washer fluid reservoir (P. 8-17)
2. Brake and clutch* fluid reservoir (P. 8-14) 7. Engine drive belts (P. 8-11)
— RHD model 8. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-7)
3. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-7) 9. Battery (P. 8-18)
4. Brake and clutch* fluid reservoir (P. 8-14) 10. Fuse/fusible link box (P. 8-21)
— LHD model

1 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental
restraint system
Seats....................................................................... 1-2 Seat belt maintenance ........................................ 1-15

Front seats ......................................................... 1-2 Child restraints ........................................................ 1-15
Second row seats............................................... 1-5 Precautions on child restraint usage.................... 1-15
Third row seats (where fitted) ............................. 1-7 Universal child restraints for front seat and rear
Armrest .............................................................. 1-7 seats (except for Ukraine and Kazakhstan) .......... 1-16
Head restraints ........................................................ 1-8 ISOFIX child restraint system (for second row
Adjustable head restraint .................................... 1-8 seats) ................................................................. 1-22
Non-adjustable head restraint.............................. 1-8 Child restraint anchorage (for second row
Remove .............................................................. 1-8 seats) ................................................................. 1-23
Install.................................................................. 1-9 Child restraint installation using ISOFIX .............. 1-24
Adjust................................................................. 1-9 Child restraint installation using 3-point type
Seat belts ................................................................ 1-10 seat belt ............................................................. 1-26
Precautions on seat belt usage ........................... 1-10 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ..................... 1-30
Child safety ........................................................ 1-12 Precautions on Supplemental Restraint
Pregnant women ................................................ 1-13 System (SRS)..................................................... 1-30
Injured persons................................................... 1-13 Supplemental air bag systems ............................ 1-36
Centre mark on seat belts................................... 1-13 Pre-tensioner seat belt system ............................ 1-38
Three-point type seat belts.................................. 1-14 Repair and replacement procedure ..................... 1-39
SEATS
SSS0133AZ
FRONT SEATS
WARNING
• Do not drive and/or ride in the vehicle with WARNING
the seatback reclined. This can be danger-
Do not adjust the driver’s seat while driving so
ous. The shoulder belt will not be properly
that full attention may be given to vehicle opera-
against the body. In an accident, you and your
tion.
passengers could be thrown into the shoul-
der belt and receive neck or other serious Manual seat adjustment
injuries. You and your passengers could also
slide under the lap belt and receive serious WARNING
injuries.
After adjusting a seat, gently shake the seat to
• For the most effective protection while the confirm that the seat is locked securely. If the
vehicle is in motion, the seatback should be seat is not locked securely, it may move sud-
upright. Always sit well back in the seat and denly and could cause the loss of control of the
adjust the seat belt properly. (See “Seat belts” vehicle.
later in this section.)
CAUTION
When adjusting the seat positions, be sure not to
contact any moving parts to avoid possible inju-
ries and/or damages.
1-2 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Power seat adjustment
WARNING
Never leave children or adults who would nor-
mally require the support of others alone in the
vehicle. Pets should not be left alone either. They
could unknowingly activate switches or controls
and inadvertently become involved in a serious
accident and injure themselves.
JVR0332XZ
Operating tips:
Forward and backward: Seat lifter (where fitted): • The power seat motor has an auto-reset over-
load protection circuit. If the motor stops during
1. Pull up the adjusting lever j
1. the seat adjustment, wait 30 seconds, then reac-
2. Slide the seat to the desired position. tivate the switch.
3. Release the adjusting lever to lock the seat in • To avoid discharge of the battery, do not operate
position. the power seats for a long period of time when
the engine is not running.
Reclining:
2.
2. Tilt the seatback to the desired position.
JVR0333XZ
3. Release the adjusting lever to lock the seatback
in position.
Pull up or push down the adjusting lever to adjust
The reclining feature allows the adjustment of the
the seat height until the desired position is achieved.
seatback for occupants of different sizes to help
obtain the proper seat belt fit. (See “Seat belts” later
in this section.)
The seatback may be reclined to allow occupants to
rest when the vehicle is parked.
Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3

Lumbar support (where fitted):
JVR0334XZ
SSS1053Z
Forward and backward: Seat lifter (where fitted):

The lumbar support feature provides lower back
Move forward or backward the adjusting switch j
1
support to the driver.
to the desired position.
Push each side of the adjusting switch to adjust the
Reclining:
seat lumbar area until the desired position is
Move forward or backward the adjusting switch j
2 achieved.
to the desired position.
The reclining feature allows the adjustment of the
seatback for occupants of different sizes to help
obtain the proper seat belt fit. (See “Seat belts” later
in this section.) JVR0119XZ
The seatback may be reclined to allow occupants to

rest when the vehicle is parked. Pull up or push down the adjusting switch to adjust
the seat height until the desired position is achieved.

Heated seats (where fitted) When the vehicle’s interior is warmed, or before SECOND ROW SEATS
you leave the vehicle, be sure to turn off the
switch. Adjustment
CAUTION
• The battery could run down if the seat heater
is operated while the engine is not running.
• Do not use the seat heater for extended peri-
ods or when no one is using the seat.
• Do not put anything on the seat which insu-
JVR0322XZ lates heat, such as a blanket, cushion, seat
cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat may become
JVR0330XZ
The front seats can be warmed by built-in heaters. overheated.
The switches located on the centre console can be • Do not place anything hard or heavy on the
Forward and backward (where fitted):
operated independently of each other. seat or pierce it with a pin or similar object.
This may result in damage to the seat heater. 1.
1. Start the engine.
2. Select heat range. • Any liquid spilled on the heated seat should 2. Slide the seat to the desired position.
be removed immediately with a dry cloth. 1 to lock the seat in
3. Release the adjusting lever j
• For high heat, push the HI (High) side of the
• When cleaning the seat, never use petrol, thin- position.
switch j1.
ner, or any similar materials. Reclining (where fitted):
• For low heat, push the LO (Low) side of the
1. Pull the adjusting lever j
2.
switch j
2.
• The indicator light j
3 will illuminate when low 2. Tilt the seatback to the desired position.
or high is selected. 2 to lock the seat-
3. Release the adjusting lever j
3. To turn off the heater, return the switch to the back in position.
level position. Make sure the indicator light turns The reclining feature allows the adjustment of the
off. seatback for occupants of different sizes to help
The heater is controlled by a thermostat, auto- obtain the proper seat belt fit. (See “Seat belts” later
matically turning the heater on and off. The indi- in this section.)
cator light will remain on as long as the switch is
on.

The seatback may be reclined to allow occupants to • Do not fold down the second row seats when • When operating the walk-in mechanism, be
rest when the vehicle is parked. occupants are in the second row seat area or sure that the second row seats are not occu-
any luggage is on the second row seats. pied by passengers and/or any objects to
avoid possible injuries and/or damage.
• Properly secure all luggage to help prevent it
from sliding or shifting. Do not place luggage • Do not operate the walk-in mechanism with
higher than the seatbacks. objects, drinks, etc. on the seat. This may
cause objects to break or cause the passen-
• When returning the seatbacks to the upright
ger room to be soiled.
position, be certain they are completely se-
cured in the latched position. If they are not
completely secured, passengers may be in-
jured in an accident or sudden stop.
JVR0449XZ
Walk-in mechanism (Three-row model):
Folding: The second row seats can tilt and slide for easy
entry/exit to/from the third row seats.
1. For vehicles not equipped with third row seat:
Pull up the lever j
1 and fold the seatback flat. WARNING
For vehicles equipped with third row seat: Pull After operating the walk-in mechanism, be sure
up the lever j 1 and pull the strap j
2 on the to return the seat to the rearmost position and
lower side of the outboard seats to fold the then tilt up the seatback until it latches.
seatback flat.
CAUTION
2. To return the seats to a seating position, push up
on the seatback until it latches in place. • When operating the walk-in mechanism, push
and hold the seatback and operate slowly. If
WARNING the seatback is tilted down quickly and then
allowed to slide, there is a risk that it could
• Never allow anyone to ride in the luggage area contact your face or other parts of your body,
or on the rear seats when they are in the fold- or pinch your hand or foot, causing injury.
down position. Use of these areas by passen-
gers without proper restraints could result in • When operating the walk-in mechanism, be
serious injury or death in an accident or sud- sure not to contact any moving parts to avoid
den stop. possible injuries and/or damage.

THIRD ROW SEATS (where fitted) WARNING
Folding When the seat is returned to the normal seating
position, the head restraints must be returned to
the upright position to properly protect vehicle
occupants.
ARMREST
Pull the armrest down until it rests on the seat cush-
ion.
JVR0329XZ
To fold the third row seats flat for maximum cargo

capacity:
1. Make sure the head restraints are all the way
down.
2. Pull the strap j
1 to release the seat. JVR0337XZ
Second row seats
2.
3. Once released, push the seatback forward j
Fold down the armrest while pulling the strap (where
To return the third row seats to a seating position:
JVR0355X fitted) until it rests on the seat cushion.
Use the pull straps j1 to raise each seatback. Pull
back until the seatback latches into position. Make
1. Pull the lever j
1 to tilt down the seatback.
sure to properly raise each seatback to an upright
2. Slide the seat forward. and secured position.
3. When returning the seat to its original position,
slide the seat backward, tilt the seatback up and
then secure it in place.

HEAD RESTRAINTS
– If your ear position is still higher than the rec- NON-ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINT
WARNING ommended alignment, place the head
Head restraints supplement the other vehicle restraint at the highest position.
safety systems. They may provide additional pro-
tection against injury in certain rear end colli-
• If the head restraint has been removed, ensure
that it is reinstalled and locked in place before
sions. Adjustable head restraints must be ad- riding in that designated seating position.
justed properly, as specified in this section.
Check the adjustment after someone else uses ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINT
the seat. Do not attach anything to the head re-
straint stalks or remove the head restraint. Do
not use the seat if the head restraint has been
JVR0203XZ
removed. If the head restraint was removed, re-
install and properly adjust the head restraint be-
fore an occupant uses the seating position. Fail- 1. Removable head restraint
ure to follow these instructions can reduce the
effectiveness of the head restraint. This may in- 2. Single notch
crease the risk of serious injury or death in a col- 3. Lock knob
lision.
SSS0992Z 4. Stalks
• Your vehicle is equipped with a head restraint
REMOVE
that may be integrated, adjustable or non-adjust-
1. Removable head restraint
able.
2. Multiple notches
• Adjustable head restraints have multiple notches
along the stalk to lock them in a desired adjust- 3. Lock knob
ment position.
4. Stalks
• The non-adjustable head restraints have single
locking notch to secure them to the seat frame.
• Proper Adjustment:
– For the adjustable type, align the head re-
SSS1037Z
straint so the centre of your ear is approxi-
mately level with the centre of the head re-
straint. Use the following procedure to remove the head
restraint.

1. Pull the head restraint up to the highest position. ADJUST For non-adjustable head restraint
2. Push and hold the lock knob. Make sure the head restraint is positioned from the
stored position or any non-latch position so the lock
3. Remove the head restraint from the seat.
knob is engaged in the notch before riding in that
4. Store the head restraint properly in a secure designated seating position.
place so it is not loose in the vehicle.
Raise
5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head restraint
before an occupant uses the seating position.
INSTALL
SSS0997Z
For adjustable head restraint

Adjust the head restraint so the centre is level with
the centre of your ears. If your ear position is still
higher than the recommended alignment, place the SSS1035Z
head restraint at the highest position. Type A
To raise the head restraint, pull it up.

SSS1038Z
1. Align the head restraint stalks with the holes in

the seat. Make sure that the head restraint is fac-
ing the correct direction. The stalk with the ad-
justment notch j 1 must be installed in the hole
with the lock knob j2.
2. Push and hold the lock knob and push the head JVR0259XZ
restraint down.
SSS1037Z
3. Properly adjust the head restraint before an oc- Type B
cupant uses the seating position.
To raise the head restraint, push and hold the lock
knob. Then, pull it up.

SEAT BELTS
Make sure the head restraint is positioned from the PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT
stored position or any non-latch position so the lock USAGE
knob is engaged in the notch before riding in that
designated seating position. If you are wearing the seat belt properly adjusted
and sitting upright and well back in the seat, chances
Lower of being injured or killed in an accident and/or the
severity of injury may be greatly reduced. NISSAN
strongly encourages you and all of your passengers
to buckle up every time you drive, even if your seat-
ing position includes the supplemental air bag sys-
tems.
SSS1036Z
To lower, push and hold the lock knob and push the
head restraint down.
Make sure the head restraint is positioned so the
lock knob is engaged in the notch before riding in
that designated seating position.

SSS0134AZ SSS0014Z
SSS0136AZ SSS0016Z

WARNING dren should be properly restrained in the rear • It is essential to replace the entire assembly
seat and, if appropriate, in a child restraint after it has been worn in a severe impact even
• Seat belts are designed to bear upon the bony system. if damage to the assembly is not obvious.
structure of the body, and should be worn low
across the front of the pelvis or the pelvis, • Do not run the belt behind your back or under • Once the pre-tensioner seat belt has acti-
chest and shoulders, as applicable; wearing your arm. Always route the shoulder belt over vated, it cannot be reused. It must be replaced
the lap section of the belt across the abdomi- your shoulder and across your chest. The belt together with the retractor. Contact a NISSAN
nal area must be avoided. Serious injury may should be away from your face and neck, but dealer or qualified workshop.
not falling off your shoulder. Serious injury
occur if a seat belt is not worn properly.
may occur if a seat belt is not worn properly. • Removal and installation of the pre-tensioner
seat belt system components should be done
• Position the lap belt as low and snug as pos-
• No modifications or additions should be made by a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
sible around the hips, not the waist. A lap belt
worn too high could increase the risk of inter- by the user which will either prevent the seat
belt adjusting devices from operating to re- CHILD SAFETY
nal injuries in an accident.
move slack, or prevent the seat belt assembly
• Do not allow more than one person to use the from being adjusted to remove slack. WARNING
same seat belt. Each belt assembly must only
be used by one occupant; it is dangerous to • Care should be taken to avoid contamination • Infants and children need special protection.
of the webbing with polishes, oils and chemi- The vehicle’s seat belts may not fit them prop-
put a belt around a child being carried on the erly. The shoulder belt may come too close to
occupant’s lap. cals, and particularly battery acid. Cleaning
may safely be carried out using mild soap and the face or neck. The lap belt may not fit over
• Never carry more people in the vehicle than water. The belt should be replaced if webbing their small hipbones. In an accident, an im-
there are seat belts. becomes frayed, contaminated or damaged. properly fitted seat belt could cause serious
or fatal injury.
• Never wear seat belts inside out. Belts should • All seat belt assemblies including retractors
not be worn with straps twisted. Doing so may and attaching hardware should be inspected • Always use an appropriate child restraint sys-
reduce their effectiveness. after any collision by a NISSAN dealer or quali- tem.
fied workshop. NISSAN recommends that all
• Seat belts should be adjusted as firmly as
seat belt assemblies in use during a collision
Children need adults to help protect them. They
possible, consistent with comfort, to provide need to be properly restrained. The proper restraint
the protection for which they have been de- be replaced unless the collision was minor depends on the child’s size.
signed. A slack belt will greatly reduce the and the belts show no damage and continue
protection afforded to the wearer. to operate properly. Seat belt assemblies not
in use during a collision should also be in-
• Every person who drives or rides in this ve- spected and, when necessary, replaced if ei-
hicle should use a seat belt at all times. Chil- ther damage or improper operation is noted.

Infants and small children If the child’s seating position has a shoulder belt that CENTRE MARK ON SEAT BELTS
fits close to the face or neck, the use of a booster
seat (commercially available) may help overcome Selecting correct set of seat belts
this. The booster seat should raise the child so that
the shoulder belt is properly positioned across the
top, middle portion of the shoulder and the lap belt
is low on the hips. The booster seat should also fit
the vehicle seat. Once the child has grown so that
the shoulder belt is no longer on or near the face or
neck of the child, use the shoulder belt without the
booster seat. In addition, there are many types of
SSS0099Z child restraint systems available for larger children
that should be used for maximum protection.
SSS0671Z
NISSAN recommends that infants and small chil- PREGNANT WOMEN
dren be seated in a child restraint system. You
should choose a child restraint system that fits your NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use The centre seat belt buckle is identified by the CEN-
vehicle and the child, and always follow the manu- seat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug, and TER mark. The centre seat belt tongue can be fas-
facturer’s instructions for installation and use. always position the lap belt as low as possible tened only into the centre seat belt buckle.
around the hips, not the waist. Place the shoulder
Large children belt over your shoulder and across your chest. Never
run the lap/shoulder belt over your abdominal area.
WARNING Contact your doctor for specific recommendations.
• Never allow children to stand or kneel on any INJURED PERSONS
seats.
NISSAN recommends that injured persons use seat
• Never allow children in the cargo areas while belts. Contact your doctor for specific recommen-
the vehicle is moving. A child could be seri- dations.
ously injured in an accident or sudden stop.
Children who are too large for a child restraint sys-
tem should be seated and restrained by the seat
belts that are provided.

THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELTS • The retractor is designed to lock during a Shoulder belt height adjustment
sudden stop or on impact. A slow pulling (where fitted)
motion permits the seat belt to move, and
allows you some freedom of movement in
the seat.
• If the seat belt cannot be pulled from its
fully retracted position, firmly pull the belt
and release it. Then smoothly pull the belt
out of the retractor.
SSS0292Z
SSS0351AZ
WARNING
Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle WARNING
should use a seat belt at all times. • The shoulder belt anchor height should be
adjusted to the position best for you. Failure
Fastening seat belts
to do so may reduce the effectiveness of the
SSS0467Z entire restraint system and increase the
WARNING chance or severity of injury in an accident.
The seatback should not be in a reclined position
any more than needed for comfort. Seat belts are
3. Position the lap belt portion low and snug on the • The shoulder belt should rest on the middle
hips as shown. of the shoulder. It must not rest against the
most effective when the passenger sits well back neck.
and straight up in the seat. 4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the retrac-
1. Adjust the seat. (See “Seats” earlier in this sec-

tor to take up extra slack. Be sure the shoulder • Be sure that the seat belt is not twisted in any
belt is routed over your shoulder and is snug way.
tion.) across your chest.
2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor and
• Be sure that the shoulder belt anchor is se-
cured by trying to move the shoulder belt an-
insert the tongue into the buckle until you hear
chor up and down after adjustment.
and feel the latch engage.
The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted
to the position best for you.

CHILD RESTRAINTS
The belt should be away from your face and neck, • When the vehicle slows down rapidly. PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD
but not falling off your shoulder. RESTRAINT USAGE
To increase your confidence in the seat belts, check
To adjust, pull the release button j1 and move the the operation by grasping the shoulder belt and pull-
shoulder belt anchor to the proper position j 2 , so ing forward quickly. The retractor should lock and
that the belt passes over the centre of the shoulder. restrict further belt movement. If the retractor does
not lock during this check, contact a NISSAN dealer
Release the button to lock the shoulder belt anchor
or qualified workshop immediately.
into position.
Unfastening seat belts SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE
Periodically check that the seat belt and all the metal
Push the button on the buckle. The seat belt auto-
components, such as buckles, tongues, retractors,
matically retracts.
flexible wires and anchors, work properly. If loose
SSS0099Z
Belt hook (where fitted) parts, deterioration, cuts or other damage on the
seat belt webbing is found, the entire seat belt as-
sembly should be replaced. WARNING
If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt guide of the seat
belt anchors, the seat belts may retract slowly. Wipe
• Infants and small children should always be
placed in an appropriate child restraint while
the shoulder belt guide with a clean, dry cloth. riding in the vehicle. Failure to use a child
To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a mild soap restraint can result in serious injury or death.
solution or any solution recommended for cleaning • Infants and small children should never be
upholstery or carpet. Then wipe with a cloth and carried on your lap. It is not possible for even
allow the seat belts to dry in the shade. Do not allow the strongest adult to resist the forces of a
JVR0438XZ the seat belts to retract until they are completely dry. severe accident. The child could be crushed
between the adult and parts of the vehicle.
Seat belt can be hooked on the belt hook. Also, do not put the same seat belt around
both your child and yourself.
Checking seat belt operation
Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat belt
• NISSAN recommends that the child restraints
be installed in the rear seat. According to ac-
movement: cident statistics, children are safer when prop-
• When the seat belt is pulled quickly from the erly restrained in the rear seat than in the front
retractor. seat.

• Improper use or improper installation of a • Never install a rear-facing child restraint on UNIVERSAL CHILD RESTRAINTS FOR
child restraint can increase the risk or sever- the front passenger’s seat when the front pas- FRONT SEAT AND REAR SEATS
ity of injury for both the child and other occu- senger’s air bag is available. Supplemental
pants of the vehicle and can lead to serious front-impact air bags inflate with great force.
(except for Ukraine and Kazakhstan)
injury or death in an accident. A rear-facing child restraint could be struck
by the supplemental front-impact air bags in WARNING
• Follow all of the child restraint manufacturer’s
an accident and could seriously injure or kill In vehicles equipped with a side air bag system,
instructions for installation and use. When
your child. do not let any infants or small children sit in the
purchasing a child restraint, be sure to select
front passenger’s seat as the air bag may cause
one which will fit your child and vehicle. It may • If the seat belt in the position where a child
serious injury in case of deployment during a col-
not be possible to properly install some types restraint is installed requires a locking device
of child restraint in your vehicle. and if it is not used, injuries could result from lision.
a child restraint tipping over during normal NOTE
• The direction of the child restraint, either
vehicle braking or cornering.
front-facing or rear-facing, depends on the Child restraints approved to ECE Regulation NO.
type of the child restraint and the size of the CAUTION 44.04 are clearly marked with the categories such
child. Refer to the child restraint manufactur- as Universal, Semi-universal or ISOFIX.
Remember that a child restraint system left in a
er’s instructions for details.
closed vehicle can become very hot. Check the When selecting any child restraint, keep the follow-
• Adjustable seatbacks should be positioned to seating surface and buckles before placing your ing points in mind:
ensure full contact between child restraint and child in a child restraint.
seatback.
NISSAN recommends that infants and small chil-
• Choose a child restraint that complies with the
latest European safety standard, ECE Regula-
• After attaching a child restraint, test it before dren be seated in a child restraint. You should tion NO. 44.04.
you place the child in it. Push it from side to choose a child restraint that fits your vehicle and
side and tug it forward to make sure that it is always follow the manufacturer’s instructions for in- • Place your child in the child restraint and check
held securely in place. The child restraint stallation and use. In addition, there are many types the various adjustments to be sure the child re-
should not move more than 25 mm (1 in). If of child restraints available for larger children that straint is compatible with your child. Always fol-
the restraint is not secure, tighten the belt as should be used for maximum protection. low all of the recommended procedures.
necessary, or install the restraint in another • Check the child restraint in your vehicle to be
seat and test it again. sure it is compatible with vehicle’s seat belt sys-
tem.
• When the child restraint is not in use, keep it
secured with the ISOFIX child restraint sys- • Refer to the tables later in this section for a list of
tem or a seat belt to prevent it from being the recommended fitment positions and the ap-
thrown around in case of a sudden stop or proved child restraints for your vehicle.
accident.

Mass group of child seat
Mass group Child’s weight
Group 0 up to 10 kg
Group 0+ up to 13 kg
Group I 9 to 18 kg
Group II 15 to 25 kg
Group III 22 to 36 kg
Examples of child seat types:

JVR0373XZ
Child safety seat categories II and III
JVR0371XZ
Child safety seat categories 0 and 0+
JVR0372XZ
Child safety seat categories 0+ and I

Approved child restraint positions
The following restriction is applied when using child restraints varying by infants weight and installation
position.
Suitability
Front pas-
Mass group Front pas-
senger seat 2nd row 2nd row
senger seat 3rd row seat
(Air bag outer seat centre seat
(Air bag ON)
OFF)
0 <10 kg X X U*2 X X
0+ <13 kg X L*2 U/L*2 X X
I 9 - 18 kg X L*2 U*2 X X
II 15 - 25 kg X L*1*2 UF/L*1*2 X X
III 22 - 36 kg X L*1*2 UF/L*1*2 X X
X: Not suitable for child restraint system.

U: Suitable for universal category child restraint system approved for this weight group.
UF: Suitable for forward-facing universal category child restraint system approved for this weight group.
L: Suitable for particular child restraints given in the following table, or vehicle list of child restraint manufacturer.
*1: If you install a child seat, remove the head restraint.
*2: If you install a child seat on sliding seat, set to most rearward slide position.

Permissible options for fitting an ISOFIX child restraint
Suitability
Mass group Front pas- 2nd row 2nd row 3rd row
senger seat outer seat centre seat seat
F ISO/L1 X X X X
Carry-cot
G ISO/L2 X X X X
0+ (<10 kg) E ISO/R1 X IL* X X
E ISO/R1 X IL X X
0+ (<13 kg) D ISO/R2 X IL* X X
C ISO/R3 X IL* X X
D ISO/R2 X IL* X X
C ISO/R3 X IL* X X
I (9 - 18 kg) B ISO/F2 X IUF X X
B1 ISO/F2X X IL*1/IUF X X
A ISO/F3 X IUF X X
II (15 - 25 kg) — — X IL*1 X X
III (22 - 36 kg) — — X IL*1 X X
X: Not suitable for child restraint system.

IUF: Suitable for universal category forward facing child restraint system approved for this weight group.
IL: Suitable particular ISOFIX category child restraint system (CRS) given in the below list or vehicle list of child seat
manufacturer.
IL*: Suitable particular ISOFIX category child restraint system (CRS) given in the vehicle list of child seat manufacturer.
*1: If you install a child seat, remove the head restraint.

List of Universal recommended child restraints
Front passenger
2nd row centre
seat 2nd row outer seat 3rd row seat
seat
(Air bag OFF)
Maxi Cosi Cabrio Maxi Cosi Cabrio
0+ (<13 kg) — —
Fix Fix
Römer King plus Römer King plus — —
I (9 - 18 kg)
— Römer Duo plus — —
Römer Kid fix Römer Kid fix
II (15 - 25 kg) — —
(belt mounted) (belt mounted)
Römer Kid fix Römer Kid fix
III (22 - 36 kg) — —
(belt mounted) (belt mounted)

List of Semi-universal recommended child restraints
Front passenger
2nd row centre
seat 2nd row outer seat 3rd row seat
seat
(Air bag OFF)
Maxi Cosi Cabrio Maxi Cosi Cabrio
Fix plus Fix plus — —
Easy Fix Easy Fix
0+ (<13 kg)
Maxi Cosi Cabrio
— Fix plus — —
Easy Fix Base
Maxi Cosi pearl
I (9 - 18 kg) — — —
plus family fix
Römer Kid fix
II (15 - 25 kg) — — —
(ISOFIX mounted)
Römer Kid fix
III (22 - 36 kg) — — —
(ISOFIX mounted)

List of approved child restraints ISOFIX CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM
(for second row seats)
Name of CRS Fixture of CRS Facing position Category
Römer Baby safe
ISOFIX and sup-
0+ (<13 kg) plus SHR II+ Rear facing Semi-universal
port leg
ISOFIX base
ISO/F2X top
I (9 - 18 kg) Römer Duo plus *1 Front facing Universal
tether
*1: The fitting arm of the CRS (Child Restraint System) must be engaged with the ISOFIX lower anchor with the 2nd
row seatback in the rearmost position. Then the seatback should be notched forwards to give good support (0 — 3
notches from the rearmost position) (for models with sliding seats).
JVR0351XZ
ISOFIX label location
Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor points

that are used with ISOFIX child restraint systems.
ISOFIX lower anchor point locations
The ISOFIX anchor points are provided to install
child restraints in the second row outboard seating
positions only. Do not attempt to install a child
restraint in the centre seating position using the
ISOFIX anchors.

to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the child re- • The child restraint top tether strap may be
straint. Check your child restraint for a label stating damaged by contact with the tonneau cover
that it is compatible with the ISOFIX child restraints. (where fitted) or items in the luggage area.
This information may also be in the instructions pro- Remove the tonneau cover from the vehicle
vided by the child restraint manufacturer. or secure it and any luggage. Your child could
be seriously injured or killed in a collision if
ISOFIX child restraints generally require the use of
the top tether strap is damaged.
a top tether strap or other anti-rotation devices such
as support legs. When installing ISOFIX child re- Anchorage location
straints, carefully read and follow the instructions in
SSS0637Z this manual and those supplied with the child re-
ISOFIX lower anchor location straints. (See “Child restraint installation using
ISOFIX” later in this section.)
The ISOFIX anchors are located at the rear of the
seat cushion near the seatback. A label is attached CHILD RESTRAINT ANCHORAGE (for
to the seatback to help you locate the ISOFIX an- second row seats)
chors.
Your vehicle is designed to accommodate a child
ISOFIX child restraint anchor restraint system on the second row seat. When in-
attachments stalling a child restraint system, carefully read and
follow the instructions in this manual and those sup-
plied with the child restraint system.
WARNING
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to
withstand only those loads imposed by cor-
rectly fitted child restraints. Under no circum-
stances are they to be used for adult seat
belts, harnesses or for attaching other items
SSS0644Z or equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could
Anchor attachment damage the child restraint anchorages. The
child restraint will not be properly installed
ISOFIX child restraints include two rigid attach- using the damaged anchorage, and a child
ments that can be connected to two anchors lo- could be seriously injured or killed in a colli-
JVR0447X
cated in the seat. With this system, you do not have Type A
sion.

• Do not secure a child restraint in the centre Installation on rear outboard seats
rear seating position using the ISOFIX lower
anchors. The child restraint will not be se-
cured properly.
• Inspect the lower anchors by inserting your
fingers into the lower anchor area and feeling
to make sure there are no obstructions over
the ISOFIX anchors, such as seat belt web-
bing or seat cushion material. The child re-
JVR0448XZ straint will not be secured properly if the
Type B (example) ISOFIX anchors are obstructed. SSS0646AZ
Anchorages are located as illustrated. • Child restraint anchorages are designed to Steps 1 and 2
withstand only those loads imposed by cor- Front-facing:
Position the top tether strap over the top of the rectly fitted child restraints. Under no circum-
seatback and secure it to the tether anchorage that stance are they to be used for adult seat belts, Be sure to follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
provides the straightest installation. Tighten the harnesses or for attaching other items or the proper use of your child restraint. Follow these
tether strap according to the manufacturer’s instruc- equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could steps to install a front-facing child restraint on the
tion to remove any slack. damage the child restraint anchorages. The second row outboard seats using ISOFIX:
CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION child restraint will not be properly installed 1. Position the child restraint on the seat j
1.
USING ISOFIX using the damaged anchorage, and a child
could be seriously injured or killed in a colli- 2. Secure the child restraint anchor attachments to
sion. the ISOFIX lower anchors j 2.
WARNING
3. For Europe (Mass group I-F2X, II, III):
• Attach ISOFIX child restraints only at the
The back of the child restraint should be secured
specified locations. For the ISOFIX lower an-
chor locations, see “ISOFIX child restraint sys- against the vehicle seatback. The head restraint
tem (for second row seats)” earlier in this sec- should be removed to obtain the correct child
tion. If a child restraint is not secured properly, restraint fit. Store the head restraint in a secure
your child could be seriously injured or killed place. Be sure to install the head restraint when
in an accident. the child restraint is removed. (See “Head
restraints” earlier in this section, “Universal child
• Do not install child restraints that require the restraints for front seat and rear seats (except for
use of a top tether strap to seating positions Ukraine and Kazakhstan)” earlier in this section)
that do not have a top tether anchor.

For Europe (except for Mass group I-F2X, II, seat cushion and seatback. Adjustable Rear-facing:
III): seatbacks should be positioned to ensure full
contact between child restraint and seatback.
For Ukraine and Kazakhstan:
5. If the child restraint is equipped with a top tether
The back of the child restraint should be secured
strap, route the top tether strap and secure the
against the vehicle seat back. If necessary, ad-
tether strap to the tether anchor point. (See
just or remove the head restraint to obtain the
“Child restraint anchorage (for second row
correct child restraint fit. If the head restraint is
seats)” earlier in this section.)
removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure to
install the head restraint when the child restraint 6. If the child restraint is equipped with other anti-
is removed. If the seating position does not have rotation devices such as support legs, use them
SSS0649AZ
an adjustable head restraint and it is interfering instead of the top tether strap following the child
Steps 1 and 2
with the proper child restraint fit, try another seat- restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
ing position or a different child restraint. (See Be sure to follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
“Head restraints” earlier in this section, “Univer- the proper use of your child restraint. Follow these
sal child restraints for front seat and rear seats steps to install a rear-facing child restraint on the
(except for Ukraine and Kazakhstan)” earlier in second row outboard seats using ISOFIX:
this section.)
1. Position the child restraint on the seat j
1.
2. Secure the child restraint anchor attachments to
the ISOFIX lower anchors j 2.
SSS0755AZ
Step 7
7. Test the child restraint before you place the child

in it j
5 . Push the child restraint from side to side
and tug it forward to make sure that it is held
SSS0754AZ
securely in place.
Step 4
8. Check to make sure that the child restraint is
4. Shorten the rigid attachment to have the child
properly secured prior to each use. If the child SSS0756AZ
restraint firmly tightened; press downward j 3
restraint is loose, repeat steps 3 through 7. Step 3
and rearward j 4 firmly in the centre of the child
restraint with your knee to compress the vehicle

3. Shorten the rigid attachment to have the child CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION Installation on rear outboard seats (for Europe
restraint firmly tightened; press downward j 3 USING 3-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT (except for Mass group II and III)):
and rearward j 4 firmly in the centre of the child
Installation on rear outboard seats (for
restraint with your hand to compress the vehicle Installation on rear seats - without
Ukraine and Kazakhstan):
seat cushion and seatback. automatic locking mode
Adjust the head restraint to its highest position.
4. If the child restraint is equipped with a top tether Front-facing:
(See “Head restraints” earlier in this section,
strap, route the top tether strap and secure the
“Universal child restraints for front seat and rear
tether strap to the tether anchor point. (See
seats (except for Ukraine and Kazakhstan)” ear-
“Child restraint anchorage (for second row
lier in this section.)
seats)” earlier in this section.)
5. If the child restraint is equipped with other anti-
rotation devices such as support legs, use them
instead of the top tether strap following the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
SSS0758AZ
Step 1
Be sure to follow the manufacturer’s instructions for

the proper use of your child restraint. Follow these SSS0493AZ
steps to install a front-facing child restraint on the Step 3
rear seats using 3-point type seat belt without auto-
3. Route the seat belt tongue through the child re-
matic locking mode:
straint and insert it into the buckle j
2 until you
1. hear and feel the latch engage.
SSS0757AZ
Step 6 2. Installation on rear outboard seats (for Europe 4. To prevent slack in the seat belt webbing, it is
(Mass group II and III)): necessary to secure the seat belt in place with
Remove the head restraint. (See “Head locking devices attached to the child restraint.
in it j
and tug it forward to make sure that it is held restraints” earlier in this section, “Universal child
securely in place. restraints for front seat and rear seats (except for
Ukraine and Kazakhstan)” earlier in this section.)
properly secured prior to each use. If the child
restraint is loose, repeat steps 3 through 6.

in it j
securely in place.
properly secured prior to each use. If the child
restraint is loose, repeat steps 3 through 5.
Rear-facing:
SSS0647AZ SSS0654AZ
Step 5 Step 2
5. Remove any additional slack from the seat belt; 2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child re-
press downward j 3 and rearward j 4 firmly in straint and insert it into the buckle j
2 until you
the centre of the child restraint with your knee to hear and feel the latch engage.
compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback
3. To prevent slack in the seat belt webbing, it is
while pulling up on the seat belt. Adjustable
necessary to secure the seat belt in place with
seatbacks should be positioned to ensure full
locking devices attached to the child restraint.
contact between child restraint and seatback. SSS0759AZ
Step 1
Be sure to follow the manufacturer’s instructions for

the proper use of your child restraint. Follow these
steps to install a rear-facing child restraint on the
rear seats using 3-point type seat belt without auto-
matic locking mode:
1.
SSS0639AZ
SSS0638AZ
Step 4
Step 6

4. Remove any additional slack from the seat belt; Installation on front passenger’s seat
press downward j 3 and rearward j 4 firmly in
the centre of the child restraint with your hand to
compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback
while pulling up on the seat belt.
JVR0285XZ
For Europe (Mass group II and III)
SSS0658AZ
Step 5

in it j
securely in place.
properly secured prior to each use. If the child SSS0300AZ
restraint is loose, repeat steps 3 through 5. For Europe (except for Mass group II and III) and for Ukraine and Kazakhstan
WARNING by the supplemental front-impact air bags in

an accident and could seriously injure or kill
• Never install a rear-facing child restraint on your child.
the front passenger’s seat when the front pas-
senger’s air bag is available. Supplemental • Never install a child restraint with a top tether
front-impact air bags inflate with great force. strap on the front seat.
A rear-facing child restraint could be struck

• NISSAN recommends that a child restraint be
installed on the rear seat. However, if you
must install a child restraint on the front pas-
senger’s seat, move the passenger’s seat to
the rearmost position.
• Child restraints for infants must be used in
the rear-facing direction and therefore must
not be used on the front passenger’s seat
when the front passenger’s air bag is avail-
able. SSS0627Z SSS0360CZ
• Failure to use the seat belts will result in the Steps 2 and 3 Step 5
child restraint system not being properly se- 1.

2. Move the seat to the rearmost position j 5. Route the seat belt tongue through the child re-
cured. It could tip over or otherwise be unse- straint and insert it into the buckle j
3 until you
cured and cause injury to the child in a sud- 3. For Europe (Mass group II and III):
hear and feel the latch engage.
den stop or collision. Remove the head restraint j 2 . (See “Head
6. To prevent slack in the seat belt webbing, it is
Front-facing: restraints” earlier in this section, “Universal child
necessary to secure the seat belt in place with
restraints for front seat and rear seats (except for
Be sure to follow the manufacturer’s instructions for locking devices attached to the child restraint.
Ukraine and Kazakhstan)” earlier in this section.)
the proper use of your child restraint. Follow these
steps to install a front-facing child restraint on the For Europe (except for Mass group II and III):
front passenger’s seat using 3-point type seat belt For Ukraine and Kazakhstan:
without automatic locking mode:
Adjust the head restraint j 2 to its highest posi-
1. Turn off the front passenger’s air bag using the tion. (See “Head restraints” earlier in this sec-
front passenger air bag switch. (See “Supple- tion, “Universal child restraints for front seat and
mental Restraint System (SRS)” later in this sec- rear seats (except for Ukraine and Kazakhstan)”
tion.) Place the ignition switch in the “ON” posi- earlier in this section.)
tion and make sure that the front passenger air
bag status light (OFF) illuminates. 4. Position the child restraint in the seat. SSS0647BZ
Step 7

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEM (SRS)
7. Remove any additional slack from the seat belt; 9. Check to make sure that the child restraint is PRECAUTIONS ON SUPPLEMENTAL
press downward j 4 and rearward j 5 firmly in properly secured prior to each use. If the child RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
the centre of the child restraint with your knee to restraint is loose, repeat steps 6 through 8.
compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) section
while pulling up on the seat belt. contains important information concerning the driv-
er’s and passenger’s supplemental front-impact air
bags, supplemental side-impact air bags, supple-
mental curtain side-impact air bags and pre-ten-
sioner seat belts.
Supplemental front-impact air bag
system
This system can help cushion the impact force to
the head and chest area of the driver and/or front
passenger in certain frontal collisions. The supple-
JVR0286XZ
mental front-impact air bag is designed to inflate on
Step 8 (for Europe (Mass group II and III))
the front where the vehicle is impacted.
Supplemental side-impact air bag
system
This system can help cushion the impact force to
the chest area of the driver and front passenger in
certain side-impact collisions. The supplemental
side-impact air bag is designed to inflate on the side
where the vehicle is impacted.
Supplemental curtain side-impact air
SSS0302GZ bag system
Step 8 (For Europe (except for Mass group II and III) and for
Ukraine and Kazakhstan This system can help cushion the impact force to
8. Test the child restraint before you place the child the head of the driver and passengers in front and
in it j
6 . Push the child restraint from side to side rear outboard seating positions in certain side-im-
and tug it forward to make sure that it is held pact collisions. The supplemental curtain side-im-
securely in place. pact air bag is designed to inflate on the side where
the vehicle is impacted.

The SRS is designed to supplement the accident
protection provided by the driver’s and passenger’s
seat belts and is not designed to substitute for
them. The SRS can help save lives and reduce seri-
ous injuries. However, inflating air bags may cause
abrasions or other injuries. Air bags do not provide
protection to the lower body. Seat belts should al-
ways be correctly worn and the occupants should
always be seated a suitable distance away from the
steering wheel and instrument panel. (See “Seat
SSS0131AZ
belts” earlier in this section.) The air bags inflate
quickly in order to help protect the occupants. The
force of the air bags inflating can increase the risk of
injury if the occupants are too close to, or are
against, the air bag modules during inflation. The air
bags will deflate quickly after deployment.
The SRS operates only when the ignition switch
is in the ON position.
When the ignition switch is in the ON position,
the SRS air bag warning light illuminates for
about 7 seconds and then turns off. This indi-
cates that the SRS air bag system is operational. SSS0132AZ
(See “SRS air bag warning light” later in this sec-

tion.)
• The seat belts and the supplemental front-im-
pact air bags are most effective when you are
WARNING sitting well back and upright in the seat. The
• The supplemental front-impact air bags ordi- front-impact air bags inflate with great force.
If you and your passengers are unrestrained,
narily will not inflate in the event of a side
impact, rear impact, rollover, or lower sever- leaning forward, sitting sideways, or out of
ity frontal collision. Always wear the seat belts position in any way, you and your passengers
to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in are at greater risk of injury or death in an acci-
accidents. dent. You and your passengers may also re-
ceive serious or fatal injuries from the supple-

mental front-impact air bag if you are up
against it when it inflates. Always sit back
against the seatback and as far away as prac-
tical from the steering wheel or instrument
panel. Always use the seat belts.
SSS0008Z SSS0099Z
SSS0006Z
SSS0009Z SSS0100Z
WARNING
SSS0007Z • Never let children ride unrestrained or extend

their hands or face out of the window. Do not
attempt to hold them in your lap or arms.
Some examples of dangerous riding positions
are shown in the illustrations.

• Children may be severely injured or killed • The seat belts and the supplemental side-im-
when the supplemental front-impact air bags, pact air bags and supplemental curtain side-
supplemental side-impact air bags, or supple- impact air bags are most effective when you
mental curtain side-impact air bags inflate if are sitting well back and upright in the seat.
they are not properly restrained. The supplemental side-impact air bags and
supplemental curtain side-impact air bags in-
• Never install a rear-facing child restraint sys-
flate with great force. If you and your passen-
tem on the front seat. An inflating supplemen-
gers are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting
tal front-impact air bag could seriously injure
sideways, or out of position in any way, you
or kill your child. (See “Child restraints” ear-
and your passengers are at greater risk of
lier in this section.) SSS0159Z
injury or death in an accident.
• Do not allow anyone to place their hands, legs,
or face near the supplemental side-impact air
bags and supplemental curtain side-impact
air bags on the sides of the seatback of the
front seats or near the side roof rails. Do not
allow anyone sitting in the front seats or rear
outboard seats to extend their hands out of
the windows or lean against the doors. Some
examples of dangerous riding positions are
SSS0059AZ
shown in the illustrations.
SSS0162Z
• When sitting in the rear seats, do not hold
onto the seatback of the front seats. If the
supplemental side-impact air bags and
WARNING supplemental curtain side-impact air bags in-
flate, you may be seriously injured. Be espe-
• The supplemental side-impact air bags and cially careful with children, who should always
supplemental curtain side-impact air bags or- be properly restrained.
dinarily will not inflate in the event of a front
impact, rear impact, rollover, or lower sever- • Do not use seat covers on the front seatbacks.
ity side collision. Always wear the seat belts They may interfere with the supplemental
to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in side-impact air bag inflations.
SSS0140Z accidents.

Pre-tensioner seat belt system The label(s) warn you not to fit a rear-facing child SRS air bag warning light
restraint system on the front passenger seat as such
The pre-tensioner seat belt system activates in con- a restraint system used in this position could cause
junction with the supplemental front-impact air bag. serious injury to the infant in case of air bag deploy-
Working with the seat belt retractor and anchor, it ment during a collision.
helps tighten the seat belt the instant the vehicle
becomes involved in certain types of collisions, help-
ing to restrain front seat occupants. (See “Pre-
tensioner seat belt system” later in this section.)
Air bag warning labels
SPA1097Z
The SRS air bag warning light, displaying in

the meter, monitors the circuits for the air bag sys-
JVR0243XZ
Air bag warning label
tems, pre-tensioner seat belt systems and all related
wiring.
The label j
1 warns:
When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the
“NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a SRS air bag warning light illuminates for about 7
SSS1023Z
seat protected by an ACTIVE AIR BAG in front of it, seconds and then turns off. This indicates that the
DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can SRS air bag systems are operational.
occur.”
Warning labels about the supplemental air bag sys- If any of the following conditions occur, the air bag
tem are placed in the vehicle as shown in the illus- In vehicles equipped with a front-impact passenger and/or pre-tensioner seat belt systems need servic-
tration. air bag system, use a rear-facing child restraint sys- ing:
tem only on the rear seats.
The warning label j 1 is located on the surface of • The SRS air bag warning light remains on after
the driver’s and/or passenger’s sun visor. When installing a child restraint system in your ve- approximately 7 seconds.
hicle, always follow the child restraint system manu-
The warning label j
2 (where fitted) is located on the facturer’s instructions for installation. For additional • The SRS air bag warning light flashes intermit-
side of the passenger’s side body panel. information, see “Child restraints” earlier in this sec- tently.
tion. • The SRS air bag warning light does not illumi-
nate at all.

Under these conditions, the air bag and/or pre-
tensioner seat belt systems may not operate prop-
erly. They must be checked and repaired. Contact a
NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop immediately.

9. Pre-tensioner seat belt retractors (where fit-
ted)
10. Lap outer pre-tensioner (where fitted)
11. Satellite sensors (where fitted)
WARNING
• Do not place any objects on the steering wheel
pad, on the instrument panel, and near the
front door finishers and the front seats. Do
not place any objects between any occupants
and the steering wheel pad, on the instru-
ment panel, and near the front door finishers
and the front seats. Such objects may become
dangerous projectiles and cause injury if a
supplemental air bag inflates.
• Immediately after inflation, several supple-
mental air bag system components will be hot.
Do not touch them: you may severely burn
yourself.
• No unauthorised changes should be made to
any components or wiring of the supplemen-
JVR0460X
tal air bag systems. This is to prevent acci-
dental inflation of the supplemental air bags
SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS 5. Supplemental air bag diagnosis sensor unit or damage to the supplemental air bag sys-
tems.
1. Crash zone sensor 6. Supplemental curtain side-impact air bag infla-
2. Supplemental front-impact air bag modules
tors (where fitted) • Do not make unauthorised changes to your
vehicle’s electrical system, suspension sys-
7. Supplemental curtain side-impact air bag
3. Front passenger air bag switch (where fitted) tem, front end structure, and side panels. This
modules (where fitted)
could affect proper operation of the supple-
4. Supplemental side-impact air bag modules 8. Satellite sensors (where fitted) mental air bag systems.
(where fitted)

• Tampering with the supplemental air bag sys- although it may inflate if the forces in another type of When the ignition switch is placed in the ON posi-
tems may result in serious personal injury. collision are similar to those of a higher severity fron- tion, the front passenger air bag status ON and
Tampering includes changes to the steering tal impact. It may not inflate in certain frontal colli- OFF lights illuminate and then turn off or remain on
wheel and the instrument panel by placing sions. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an depending on the front passenger air bag status.
materials over the steering wheel pad and indication of proper supplemental front-impact air
above, around or on the instrument panel or bag system operation. • When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position and the front passenger air bag is ac-
by installing additional trim materials around Front passenger air bag status light: tive, the front passenger air bag status OFF light
the supplemental air bag systems.
will turn off after about 7 seconds.
• Work around and on the supplemental air bag
The front passenger air bag status ON light
systems should be done by a NISSAN dealer
will illuminate and then turn off after 1 minute
or qualified workshop. The SRS wiring should
when the front passenger air bag switch is in the
not be modified or disconnected. Unautho-
ON position.
rised electrical test equipment and probing
devices should not be used on the supple- • When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
mental air bag systems. position and the front passenger air bag is inac-
tive, the front passenger air bag status ON light
• The SRS wiring harness connectors are yel-
will turn off after about 7 seconds.
low and/or orange for easy identification. JVR0374XZ
OFF light The front passenger air bag status OFF light
When the air bags inflate, a fairly loud noise may be
will illuminate and remain on as long as the
heard, followed by the release of smoke. This smoke
front passenger air bag switch is in the OFF
is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care
position.
should be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irri-
tation and choking. Those with a history of a breath- If the front passenger air bag status light operates in
ing condition should get fresh air promptly. a way other than described above, the front passen-
ger air bag may not function properly. Have the sys-
Supplemental front-impact air bag tem checked, and if necessary repaired, by a
system NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop promptly.
The driver’s supplemental front-impact air bag is
located at the centre of the steering wheel. The pas-
JVR0264XZ
senger’s supplemental front-impact air bag is lo-
ON light
cated at the instrument panel above the glove box.
The front passenger air bag status light is located
The supplemental front-impact air bag system is de-
on the instrument panel.
signed to inflate in higher severity frontal collisions,

Front passenger air bag switch: 2. Open the glove box and insert the mechanical Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an indi-
key into the front passenger air bag switch. cation of proper supplemental side-impact air bag
system operation.
3. Push and turn the key to the ON position.
4. Place the ignition switch in the ON position. The Supplemental curtain side-impact air
front passenger air bag status ON light will bag system
illuminate. The supplemental curtain side-impact air bag is lo-
5. After 1 minute, the front passenger air bag status cated at the roof rails.
ON light will turn off. The supplemental curtain side-impact air bag sys-
Supplemental side-impact air bag tem is designed to inflate in higher severity side col-
JVR0365XZ lisions, although it may inflate if the forces in another
system type of collision are similar to those of a higher se-
The front passenger air bag can be turned off with verity side impact. It may not inflate in certain side
the front passenger air bag switch located in the collisions. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not al-
glove box. ways an indication of proper supplemental curtain
side-impact air bag system operation.
To turn off the front passenger air bag:
PRE-TENSIONER SEAT BELT
1. Place the ignition switch in the OFF position.
SYSTEM
2. Open the glove box and insert the mechanical
key into the front passenger air bag switch. For WARNING
the mechanical key usage, see “Mechanical key”
in the “3. Pre-driving checks and adjustments”
SSS0978Z
• The pre-tensioner seat belt cannot be reused
section. after activation. It must be replaced together
The supplemental side-impact air bag is located at with the retractor and buckle as a unit.
3. Push and turn the key to the OFF position. the outside of the front seats’ seatbacks. • If the vehicle becomes involved in a collision
4. Place the ignition switch in the ON position. The The supplemental side-impact air bag system is de- but the pre-tensioner is not activated, be sure
front passenger air bag status OFF light signed to inflate in higher severity side collisions, to have the pre-tensioner system checked
will illuminate and remain on. although it may inflate if the forces in another type of and, if necessary, replaced by a NISSAN
To turn on the front passenger air bag: collision are similar to those of a higher severity side dealer or qualified workshop.
impact. It may not inflate in certain side collisions.

• No unauthorised changes should be made to REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT When maintenance work is required on the vehicle,
any components or wiring of the pre-tensioner PROCEDURE information about the air bags, pre-tensioner seat
seat belt system. This is to prevent accidental belts and related parts should be pointed out to the
activation of the pre-tensioner seat belt or person performing the maintenance. The ignition
WARNING
damage to the pre-tensioner seat belt sys- switch should always be in the LOCK position when
tem. • Once the air bags have been inflated, the air working under the bonnet or inside the vehicle.
bag modules will not function and must be
• Work around or on the pre-tensioner seat belt
replaced. The air bag modules must be re-
system should be done by a NISSAN dealer or
placed by a NISSAN dealer or qualified work-
qualified workshop. The SRS wiring should
shop. The inflated air bag modules cannot be
not be modified or disconnected. Unautho-
repaired.
rised electrical test equipment and probing
devices should not be used on the pre-ten- • The air bag systems should be inspected by a
sioner seat belt system. NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop if there
is any damage to the front end portion of the
• If you need to dispose of the pre-tensioner
vehicle.
seat belt system, or scrap the vehicle, contact
a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop. Cor- • If you need to dispose of the SRS or scrap the
rect pre-tensioner disposal procedures are vehicle, contact a NISSAN dealer or qualified
set forth in the appropriate NISSAN Service workshop. Correct disposal procedures are
Manual. Incorrect disposal procedures could set forth in the appropriate NISSAN Service
cause personal injury. Manual. Incorrect disposal procedures could
cause personal injury.
The pre-tensioner is encased with the front seat
belt’s retractor and anchor. These seat belts are The air bags and pre-tensioner seat belts are de-
used the same as conventional seat belts. signed to activate on a one-time-only basis. As a
reminder, unless the SRS air bag warning light is
When the pre-tensioner seat belt activates, a fairly
damaged, the SRS air bag warning light remains
loud noise may be heard, followed by the release of
illuminated after inflation has occurred. The repair
smoke. This smoke is not harmful and does not indi-
and replacement of the SRS should be done only by
cate a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as
a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a his-
tory of a breathing condition should get fresh air
promptly.

2 Instruments and controls
Meters and gauges .................................................. 2-2 Turn signal switch............................................... 2-41

Speedometer and odometer ............................... 2-2 Fog light switch ....................................................... 2-42
Tachometer ........................................................ 2-2 Front fog lights (where fitted) .............................. 2-42
Engine coolant temperature gauge...................... 2-3 Rear fog light ...................................................... 2-42
Fuel gauge ......................................................... 2-3 Wiper and washer switch ........................................ 2-43
Instrument brightness control.............................. 2-3 Windscreen wiper and washer switch................. 2-43
Xtronic Continuously Variable Transmission Rain-sensing auto wiper system (where fitted)..... 2-44
(CVT) position indicator (where fitted)................. 2-4 Rear window wiper and washer switch ............... 2-45
Warning lights, indicator lights and audible Headlight cleaner switch (where fitted) ............... 2-46
reminders ................................................................ 2-5 Defogger switch ...................................................... 2-46
Checking bulbs .................................................. 2-6 Horn ........................................................................ 2-47
Warning lights .................................................... 2-6 Windows ................................................................. 2-47
Indicator lights .................................................... 2-10 Power windows .................................................. 2-47
Audible reminders............................................... 2-13 Sunroof (where fitted) .............................................. 2-49
Vehicle information display ....................................... 2-14 Automatic sunroof and sunshade ........................ 2-49
How to use the vehicle information display .......... 2-14 Power outlets .......................................................... 2-51
Startup display.................................................... 2-14 Storage ................................................................... 2-52
Settings.............................................................. 2-14 Glove box ........................................................... 2-52
Vehicle information display warnings and Console box ....................................................... 2-52
indicators............................................................ 2-22 Sunglasses holder .............................................. 2-52
Oil control system (for diesel engine model) ........ 2-28 Cup holders ....................................................... 2-52
Trip computer ..................................................... 2-29 Soft bottle holders .............................................. 2-53
Clock and outside air temperature ...................... 2-31 Card holder ........................................................ 2-54
Driver Attention Alert (where fitted) ..................... 2-32 Luggage hooks................................................... 2-54
Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) (where fitted) ...... 2-33 Luggage compartment (where fitted) .................. 2-54
Headlight and turn signal switch............................... 2-35 Coat hook .......................................................... 2-56
Headlight switch ................................................. 2-35 Tonneau cover (where fitted) .............................. 2-57
Headlight aiming control ..................................... 2-37 Roof rail (where fitted) ............................................. 2-57
Battery saver system........................................... 2-41 Sun visors ............................................................... 2-58
Headlight cleaner (where fitted) .......................... 2-41 Interior lights............................................................ 2-58
Interior light switch ............................................. 2-58 Rear personal lights (where fitted)....................... 2-59
Console light ...................................................... 2-58 Vanity mirror light................................................ 2-59
Map lights........................................................... 2-58 Luggage room light............................................. 2-59
Room light (where fitted)..................................... 2-59 Battery saver system........................................... 2-59
METERS AND GAUGES
SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER Distance to empty (dte — km or mile): Changing twin trip odometer display:
Speedometer The distance to empty (dte) j1 provides you with an Push the TRIP RESET switch j 3 (located on the
estimation of the distance that can be driven before instrument panel) to change the display as follows:
refuelling. The dte is constantly being calculated,
based on the amount of fuel in the fuel tank and the ODO → TRIP A → TRIP B → ODO
actual fuel consumption. Resetting twin trip odometer:
The display is updated every 30 seconds. Push the TRIP RESET switch j 3 for more than 1
The dte mode includes a low range warning feature. second to reset the trip odometer to zero.
If the fuel level is low, the warning is displayed on TACHOMETER
the screen.
When the fuel level drops even lower, the dte dis-
JVI1006XZ
play will change to “———”.
The speedometer indicates the vehicle speed (km/h

• If the amount of fuel added is small, the distance
to empty shown just before the ignition switch is
or MPH). placed in the “OFF” position may continue to be
Distance to empty (dte — km or displayed.
mile)/Odometer • When driving uphill or rounding curves, the fuel
in the tank shifts, which may momentarily change
JVI0951XZ
the display.
Odometer/Twin trip odometer:
The tachometer indicates the engine speed in revo-
The odometer/twin trip odometer is displayed in the lutions per minute (rpm). Do not rev the engine
vehicle information display when the ignition switch into the red zone j1.
is in the ON position.
The red zone varies with models.
The odometer j 2 displays the total distance the
vehicle has been driven.
JVI0771XZ The twin trip odometer j
2 displays the distance of
individual trips.
2-2 Instruments and controls

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE engine. (See “Engine overheat” in the “6. In There is a small reserve of fuel in the tank when the
GAUGE case of emergency” section for immediate ac- fuel gauge reads the empty (0) position.
tion required.)
INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS
FUEL GAUGE CONTROL
JVI0999XZ
The engine coolant temperature gauge indicates the JVI0640XZ JVI0644XZ

engine coolant temperature.
The engine coolant temperature is normal when the The fuel gauge indicates the approximate fuel level
gauge needle points within the zone j 1 shown in in the tank when the ignition switch is in the ON
the illustration. position.
The engine coolant temperature will vary with the The gauge may move slightly during braking, turn-
outside air temperature and driving conditions. ing, accelerating, or going up and down hills due to
movement of fuel in the tank.
CAUTION
The low fuel warning appears on the vehicle
• If the gauge indicates the engine coolant tem- information display when the fuel level in the tank is
perature is near the hot (H) end of the normal getting low. Refuel as soon as it is convenient, pref-
range, reduce vehicle speed to decrease the erably before the gauge reads 0 (empty). JVI0661MZ
temperature.
The arrow, , indicates the fuel-filler lid is lo-
• If the gauge is over the normal range, stop cated on the right side of the vehicle. The instrument brightness control switch can be op-
the vehicle as soon as safely possible and let erated when the ignition switch is in the ON posi-
the engine idle. CAUTION tion. When the switch is operated, the vehicle infor-
mation display switches to the brightness adjust-
• If the engine is overheated, continued opera- Refuel before the gauge reads the empty (0) po-
sition. ment mode.
tion of the vehicle may seriously damage the
Instruments and controls 2-3

Push the + side of the switch j A to brighten the
meter panel lights and instrument panel lights. The
bar j
1 moves to the + side.
Push the - side of the switch j
B to dim the lights.
The bar j
1 moves to the − side.
The vehicle information display returns to the normal
display when the instrument brightness control
switch is not operated for more than 5 seconds.
XTRONIC CONTINUOUSLY
VARIABLE TRANSMISSION (CVT)
POSITION INDICATOR (where fitted)
The Xtronic CVT position indicator indicates the shift
lever position when the ignition switch is in the ON
position.

WARNING LIGHTS, INDICATOR LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warn- Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

High beam indicator light
ing light air bag warning light
Electronic Stability Programme (ESP) Hill descent control system on indicator
Brake warning light (red)
warning light light*
Water-in-fuel-filter warning light (diesel Hill Start Assist system on indicator
Charge warning light
engine model) light
Electric power steering warning light Dipped beam indicator light Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
Electronic parking brake system warn-

Door lock indicator light* Rear fog light indicator light
ing light (yellow)
Electronic parking brake warning light ECO mode system indicator light* Security indicator light
Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) AUTO indica-

Small light indicator light
Forward emergency braking system tor light (4WD model)
warning light* Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) LOCK indica-
High beam assist indicator light*
tor light (4WD model)
Low tyre pressure warning light* Front fog lights indicator light* Trailer direction indicator light
Malfunction warning light (red) (diesel

Front passenger air bag status light Turn signals/hazard indicator lights
engine model)
Glow plug indicator light (diesel engine Electronic Stability Programme (ESP)
Seat belt warning light
model) off indicator light
Master warning light * where fitted

CHECKING BULBS If the ABS warning light illuminates while the engine Low brake fluid warning indicator:
is running, or while driving, it may indicate the ABS When the ignition switch is placed in the ON posi-
With all doors closed, apply the parking brake, fas- is not functioning properly. Have the system
ten the seat belts and place the ignition switch in the tion, the brake warning light illuminates, and then
checked by a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop turns off (models equipped with electronic parking
ON position without starting the engine. Where fit- promptly.
ted, the following lights will illuminate: , brake system).
, (red). If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock function If the brake warning light illuminates while the en-
is turned off. The brake system then operates nor- gine is running, or while driving, and the parking
Where fitted, the following lights will illuminate briefly mally, but without anti-lock assistance. (See “Brake
and then turn off: , , , , , , brake is released, it may indicate the brake fluid
system” in the “5. Starting and driving” section.) level is low.
, , , , , (red),
Brake warning light (red) When the brake warning light illuminates while driv-
(yellow).
ing, stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible.
If any lights fail to illuminate, it may indicate a burned- WARNING Stop the engine and check the brake fluid level. If
out bulb or an open circuit in the electrical system. the brake fluid level is at the minimum mark, add
Have the system checked, and if necessary re- • If the brake fluid level is below the minimum brake fluid as necessary. (See “Brake fluid” in the
paired, by a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop mark on the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.)
promptly. the vehicle until the brake system has been
checked by a NISSAN dealer or qualified If the brake fluid level is sufficient, have the brake
Some indicators and warnings are also displayed on workshop. system checked by a NISSAN dealer or qualified
the vehicle information display between the speedo- workshop promptly.
meter and tachometer. (See “Vehicle information • Even if you judge it to be safe, have your ve-
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning
display” later in this section.) hicle towed because driving it could be dan-
indicator:
gerous.
WARNING LIGHTS When the parking brake is released and the brake
• Depressing the brake pedal without the en- fluid level is sufficient, if both the brake warning light
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) gine running and/or with a low brake fluid and the Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning
warning light level could increase the stopping distance and light illuminate, it may indicate the ABS is not func-
require greater pedal travel distance and ef- tioning properly. Have the brake system checked,
fort. and if necessary repaired, by a NISSAN dealer or
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light illumi-
nates and then turns off. This indicates the ABS is qualified workshop promptly. (See “Anti-lock Brak-
The brake warning light indicates a low brake fluid ing System (ABS) warning light” earlier in this sec-
operational.
level of the brake system and/or an Anti-lock Brak- tion.)
ing System (ABS) malfunction.

Charge warning light If the electric power steering warning light illumi- When the ignition switch is placed in the ON posi-
nates while the engine is running, it may indicate the tion, the electronic parking brake warning light illu-
When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the electric power steering system is not functioning minates. When the engine is started and the parking
charge warning light illuminates, and then turns off. properly and may need servicing. Have the electric brake is released, the warning light turns off.
This indicates the charging system is operational. power steering system checked by a NISSAN dealer
If the parking brake is not fully released, the elec-
or qualified workshop.
If the charge warning light illuminates while the en- tronic parking brake warning light remains on. Be
gine is running, or while driving, it may indicate the When the electric power steering warning light illu- sure that the electronic parking brake warning light
charging system is not functioning properly and may minates with the engine running, the power assist to has turned off before driving (see “Parking brake” in
need servicing. the steering will cease operation but you will still the “3. Pre-driving checks and adjustments” sec-
have control of the vehicle. At this time, greater tion).
When the charge warning light illuminates while driv- steering efforts are required to operate the steering
ing, stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible. If the electronic parking brake warning light illumi-
wheel, especially in sharp turns and at low speeds.
Stop the engine and check the alternator belt. If the nates or flashes while the electronic parking brake
alternator belt is loose, broken or missing, the charg- (See “Electric power steering system” in the system warning light (yellow) illuminates, it
ing system needs repair. (See “Drive belt” in the “5. Starting and driving” section.) may indicate that the electronic parking brake sys-
“8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.) tem is not functioning properly. Have the brake sys-
Electronic parking brake system tem checked, and if necessary repaired, by a
If the alternator belt appears to be functioning cor- warning light (yellow) NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop promptly.
rectly but the charge warning light remains illumi-
The electronic parking brake system warning light or Forward emergency
nated, have the charging system checked by a
functions for the electronic parking brake system.
NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop promptly.
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON posi-
braking system
CAUTION tion, the light illuminates for a few seconds. If the warning light (where
warning light illuminates at any other time, it may fitted)
Do not continue driving if the alternator belt is
loose, broken or missing. indicate that the electronic parking brake system is When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the
not functioning properly. Have the brake system forward emergency braking system warning light
Electric power steering warning checked, and if necessary repaired, by a NISSAN illuminates and then turns off.
light dealer promptly.
This light illuminates when the forward emergency
When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the Electronic parking brake braking system is set to OFF on the vehicle informa-
electric power steering warning light illuminates. Af- warning light tion display.
ter starting the engine, the electric power steering
warning light turns off. This indicates the electric The electronic parking brake warning light indicates
power steering system is operational. that the electronic parking brake system is operat-
ing.

If the light illuminates when the forward emergency Depending on a change in the outside temperature, • If the light illuminates while driving, avoid sud-
braking system is ON, it may indicate that the sys- the low tyre pressure warning light may illuminate den steering manoeuvres or abrupt braking,
tem is unavailable. See “Forward emergency brak- even if the tyre pressure has been adjusted prop- reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road to a
ing system (where fitted)” in the “5. Starting and erly. Adjust the tyre pressure to the recommended safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as
driving” section for more details. COLD tyre pressure again when the tyres are cold, possible. Driving with under-inflated tyres may
and reset the TPMS. permanently damage the tyres and increase
Low tyre pressure warning light the likelihood of tyre failure. Serious vehicle
(where fitted) If the low tyre pressure warning light still continues
damage could occur and may lead to an acci-
to illuminate after the resetting operation, it may indi-
When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the dent and could result in serious personal in-
cate that the TPMS is not functioning properly. Have
low tyre pressure warning light illuminates and then jury. Check the tyre pressure for all four tyres.
the system checked by a NISSAN dealer or quali-
turns off. This indicates that the low tyre pressure Adjust the tyre pressure to the recommended
fied workshop.
warning system is operational. COLD tyre pressure shown on the tyre plac-
For additional information, see “Tyre Pressure Moni- ard to turn the low tyre pressure warning light
This light illuminates if there is low tyre pressure or toring System (TPMS) (where fitted)” in the “5. Start- off. If you have a flat tyre, replace it with a
a tyre pressure warning system malfunction. ing and driving” section. spare tyre as soon as possible.
The Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) moni-
tors the tyre pressure of all tyres except the spare.
TPMS malfunction: • After adjusting the tyre pressure, be sure to
If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the low tyre reset the TPMS. Otherwise, the TPMS will not
Low tyre pressure warning: pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 warn of low tyre pressure.
If the vehicle is being driven with low tyre pressure, minute when the ignition switch is placed in the ON • When a spare tyre is mounted or a wheel is
the low tyre pressure warning light will illuminate. position. The light will remain on after the 1 minute. replaced, the TPMS will not function and the
Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer or low tyre pressure warning light will flash for
When the low tyre pressure warning light illuminates, qualified workshop. approximately 1 minute. The light will remain
you should stop and adjust the tyre pressure to the
For additional information, see “Tyre Pressure Moni- on after the 1 minute. Contact your NISSAN
recommended COLD tyre pressure shown on the
toring System (TPMS) (where fitted)” in the “5. Start- dealer or qualified workshop as soon as pos-
tyre placard. Use a tyre pressure gauge to check
ing and driving” section. sible for tyre replacement and/or system re-
the tyre pressure. The low tyre pressure warning
setting.
light may not automatically turn off when the tyre
pressure is adjusted. After the tyre is inflated to the WARNING • Replacing tyres with those not originally speci-
recommended pressure, reset the tyre pressures fied by NISSAN could affect the proper opera-
registered in your vehicle and then drive the vehicle
• If the light does not illuminate with the igni-
tion of the TPMS.
tion switch placed in the ON position, have
at speeds above 25 km/h (16 MPH). These opera-
the vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as
tions are required to activate the TPMS and turn off
soon as possible.
the low tyre pressure warning light.

CAUTION Master warning light • Key battery low warning (where fitted)
• The TPMS is not a substitute for the regular
• Battery Voltage Low Charge Battery warning
tyre pressure check. Be sure to check the tyre
pressure regularly. master warning light illuminates if any of the follow- • Headlight system fault warning (where fitted)
• If the vehicle is being driven at speeds of less

ing are displayed on the vehicle information display. • Chassis control system fault warning (where fit-
• Steering lock release malfunction indicator ted)
than 25 km/h (16 MPH), the TPMS may not
operate correctly. • No Key detected warning (where fitted) • Second row seat belt warning (where fitted)
• Be sure to install the specified size of tyres to • Key ID incorrect warning (where fitted) • Other warning
all four wheels correctly.
• Shift to Park warning (Xtronic (CVT) Continu- See “Vehicle information display” later in this sec-
Malfunction warning light (red) ously Variable Transmission models) tion.
(diesel engine model) Seat belt warning light
• Door/back door open warning
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON posi-
tion, the malfunction warning light illuminates in red.
• Low fuel warning When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the
This means that the system is operational. After • Release parking brake warning front seat belt warning light on the meter illuminates.
starting the engine, the warning light turns off. The light will continue to illuminate until the driver’s
• Engine start operation indicator (Xtronic (CVT)
and/or passenger’s seat belts are fastened. (See
For the orange Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL), Continuously Variable Transmission models)
“Seat belts” in the “1. Safety — seats, seat belts
see “ Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” later in this
section for details.
• Key System Fault warning (where fitted) and supplemental restraint system” section.)
If the malfunction warning light (red) illuminates con-

• Low Tyre Pressure warning (where fitted) When the vehicle speed exceeds 15 km/h (10
MPH), the light will blink and the chime will sound
tinuously while the engine is running, it may indicate • Tyre pressure system fault (where fitted)
unless the front seat belt is securely fastened. The
an engine control system malfunction. Have your
vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer or qualified
• CVT System Fault warning (Xtronic (CVT) Con- chime will continue to sound for about 95 seconds
tinuously Variable Transmission models) until the seat belt is fastened. (See “Seat belts” in
workshop. You do not need to have your vehicle the “1. Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental
towed to the dealer. • Low oil pressure Stop vehicle warning (where
restraint system” section.)
fitted)
CAUTION For second row seats, see “Vehicle information dis-
Continuing vehicle operation without proper ser-
• 4WD system fault warning (where fitted)
play warnings and indicators” later in this section.
vicing of the engine control system could lead to • 4WD High Temp. Stop vehicle warning (where
poor driveability, reduced fuel economy, and fitted)
damage to the engine control system, which may • Tyre size incorrect warning (where fitted)
affect the vehicle’s warranty coverage.

Supplemental Restraint System The warning light blinks when the ESP system is Door lock indicator light
(SRS) air bag warning light operating. (where fitted)
When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the When the warning light blinks while driving, the driv- The door lock indicator light, located on the instru-
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) air bag warning condition is slippery and the vehicle’s traction ment panel, illuminates when all the doors are
ing light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then limit is about to be exceeded. locked.
turns off. This indicates the SRS air bag system is If the ESP warning light illuminates while the engine
operational. is running or while driving, it may indicate that the
• With the ignition switch in the ON position, the
door lock indicator light will illuminate and stay
If any of the following conditions occur, the SRS air ESP system is not functioning properly and may on when the doors are locked using the power
bag system and/or pre-tensioner seat belt need ser- need servicing. Have the system checked, and if door lock switch.
vicing. Have the system checked, and if necessary necessary repaired, by a NISSAN dealer or quali-
repaired, by a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop fied workshop promptly. If a malfunction occurs, the • With the ignition switch in the OFF or LOCK
ESP function is turned off, but the vehicle is still driv- position, the door lock indicator light will operate
promptly.
able. (See “Electronic Stability Programme (ESP) as follows:
• The SRS air bag warning light remains illumi- system” in the “5. Starting and driving” section.) – When the doors are locked with the power
nated after about 7 seconds.
Water-in-fuel-filter warning light door lock switch, the door lock indicator light
• The SRS air bag warning light flashes intermit-
(diesel engine model) will illuminate for 30 minutes.
tently.
– When the doors are locked by pushing the
If the water-in-fuel-filter warning light illuminates
• The SRS air bag warning light does not come on
while the engine is running, contact a NISSAN
LOCK button (on the integrated keyfob or
at all. Intelligent Key) or the request switch (Intelli-
dealer or qualified workshop as soon as possible.
gent Key system equipped models), the door
Unless checked and repaired, the SRS air bag sys-
CAUTION lock indicator light will illuminate for 1 minute.
tem and/or pre-tensioner seat belt may not function
properly. (See “SRS air bag warning light” in the Continuing vehicle operation without properly The door lock indicator light turns off when any door
“1. Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental draining could cause serious damage to the en- is unlocked.
restraint system” section.) gine.
For locking or unlocking doors, see “Door locks” in
Electronic Stability Programme INDICATOR LIGHTS the “3. Pre-driving checks and adjustments” sec-
(ESP) warning light tion.
Dipped beam indicator light
Electronic Stability Programme (ESP) warning light The dipped beam indicator light illuminates when
illuminates and then turns off. the headlight low beam is on. (See “Headlight
switch” later in this section.)

ECO mode system indicator Front fog lights indicator light that the high beam assist system is operational. (See
light (where fitted) (where fitted) “High beam assist (where fitted)” later in this sec-
tion.)
The ECO mode indicator light illuminates when the The front fog lights indicator light illuminates when
ECO mode system is turned on. the front fog lights are on. (See “Front fog lights High beam indicator light
(where fitted)” later in this section.)
(See “ECO mode system (where fitted)” in the The high beam indicator light illuminates when the
“5. Starting and driving” section. / Front passenger air headlight high beam is on. The indicator turns off
Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) AUTO bag status light when the low beam is selected. (See “Headlight
indicator light (4WD model) The front passenger air bag status light ( ) lo- switch” later in this section.)
cated on the instrument panel will illuminate when Hill descent control system on
the front passenger air bag is turned off with the indicator light (where fitted)
Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) AUTO indicator light illu-
front passenger air bag switch. When the front pas-
minates and then turns off. When the ignition switch is placed in the ON posi-
senger air bag is turned on, the front passenger air
When selecting 4WD AUTO mode while the engine bag status light ( ) will illuminate. tion the hill descent control system on indicator light
is running, the 4WD AUTO indicator light illumi- illuminates briefly and then turns off. This indicates
For more details, see “Front passenger air bag sta- that the hill descent control system is operational.
nates. (See “Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) (where
tus light” in the “1. Safety — seats, seat belts and
fitted)” in the “5. Starting and driving” section.) The light illuminates when the hill descent control
supplemental restraint system” section.
Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) LOCK system is activated.
Glow plug indicator light (diesel
indicator light (4WD model) engine model) If the hill descent control switch is on and the indi-
When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the cator light blinks, the system is not engaged.
Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) LOCK indicator light illu- If the indicator light does not illuminate or blink when
glow plug indicator light illuminates and turns off
minates and then turns off. the hill descent control switch is on, the system may
after the glow plugs have warmed up.
When selecting 4WD LOCK mode while the engine not be functioning properly. Have the system
If the glow plugs have already warmed up, the glow checked by a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
is running, the 4WD LOCK indicator light illumi-
plug indicator flashes briefly and then turns off.
nates simultaneously with the 4WD AUTO indicator For additional information, see “Hill descent control
light illuminating. (See “Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) High beam assist indicator light system (where fitted)” in the “5. Starting and driving”
(where fitted)” in the “5. Starting and driving” sec- (where fitted) section.
tion.)
The indicator light illuminates when the headlights
CAUTION come on while the headlight switch is in the AUTO
Do not drive on dry hard surface roads in the position with the high beam selected. This indicates
LOCK mode.

Hill Start Assist system on may indicate that the engine control system is not If security system is malfunctioning, this light will
indicator light (where fitted) functioning properly and may need servicing. Have remain on while the ignition switch is in the ON posi-
the vehicle checked, and if necessary repaired, by a tion. (See “Security system” in the “3. Pre-driving
The light illuminates when the conditions of the hill NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop promptly. checks and adjustments” section for additional in-
start assist system are satisfied when the vehicle is formation.)
stopped on a hill. If the MIL blinks (where fitted) while the engine is
running, it may indicate a potential malfunction in the Small light indicator light
Then, the light blinks when the brake pedal is re- emission control system. In this case, the emission
leased, which indicates that the hill start assist sys- control system may not function properly and may The light illuminates when the headlight switch is
tem is activated. need servicing. Have the system checked, and if turned to the position.
For additional information, see “Hill Start Assist necessary repaired, by a NISSAN dealer or quali-
system” in the “5. Starting and driving” section. fied workshop promptly. Trailer direction indicator light
Precautions:
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) The light will illuminate whenever an additional elec-
To reduce or avoid possible damage to the engine trical load is detected by the direction indicator sys-
CAUTION
control system when the MIL blinks: tem.
• Continuing vehicle operation without proper
• Avoid driving at speeds above 70 km/h (43 For additional information, see “Trailer towing” in
servicing of the engine control system and/or
MPH). the “5. Starting and driving” section.
Xtronic (CVT) Continuously Variable Trans-
mission could lead to poor driveability, re- • Avoid sudden acceleration or deceleration. Turn signals/hazard indicator
duced fuel economy, and damage to the en- lights
gine control system and/or Xtronic CVT sys-
• Avoid going up steep uphill grades.
tem, which may affect the vehicle’s warranty • Avoid carrying or towing unnecessary loads. The turn signals/hazard indicator lights blink when
the turn signal switch or hazard indicator flasher
coverage.
Rear fog light indicator light switch is turned on. (See “Turn signal switch” later
• Incorrect setting of the engine control system in this section or “Hazard indicator flasher switch” in
may lead to non-compliance of local and na- The rear fog light indicator light illuminates when the the “6. In case of emergency” section.)
tional emission laws and regulations. rear fog light is on. (See “Fog light switch” later in
this section.) Electronic Stability Programme
When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the (ESP) off indicator light
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) illuminates. After Security indicator light
starting the engine, the MIL turns off. This indicates Electronic Stability Programme (ESP) off indicator
that the engine control system and/or Xtronic CVT The security indicator light blinks when the ignition
switch is in the LOCK, OFF position. This function light illuminates and then turns off.
system is operational.
indicates the security system* equipped on the ve- The ESP off indicator light illuminates when the ESP
If the MIL illuminates while the engine is running, it hicle is operational. (* immobilizer) off switch is pushed to the OFF position.

When the ESP off switch is pushed to the OFF When the buzzer sounds, be sure to check both the For more information, see “Stop/Start System
position, the ESP system is turned off. vehicle and the Intelligent Key. (See “Intelligent Key (where fitted)” in the “5. Starting and driving” sec-
system (where fitted)” in the “3. Pre-driving checks tion.
For details, see “Electronic Stability Programme
and adjustments” section.)
(ESP) system” in the “5. Starting and driving” sec-
tion. Light reminder chime
AUDIBLE REMINDERS The chime will sound if the driver’s side door is
opened while the headlight switch is in either the
Brake pad wear warning or position and the ignition switch is in
The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings. the OFF or LOCK position.
When a brake pad requires replacement, it will make
Be sure to turn the light switch to the OFF or AUTO
a high pitched scraping sound when the vehicle is in
(where fitted) position when you leave the vehicle.
motion. This scraping sound will first occur only
when the brake pedal is depressed. After more wear Parking brake reminder chime
of the brake pad, the sound will always be heard
The chime will sound if the vehicle is driven at more
even if the brake pedal is not depressed. Have the
than 4 km/h (2 MPH) with the parking brake ap-
brakes checked as soon as possible if the wear
plied. Stop the vehicle and release the parking
warning sound is heard.
brake.
Have the system checked, and if necessary re-
paired, by a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop Stop/Start System reminder buzzer
promptly. (See “Brakes” in the “8. Maintenance and (where fitted)
do-it-yourself” section.) The engine will shift to the normal stopped state if
Intelligent Key buzzer (where fitted) any of the following operations is made during Stop/
Start System activation, and the Stop/Start System
The Intelligent Key buzzer sounds if any one of the buzzer will sound if:
following improper operations is found.
• The driver’s seat belt is unfastened and the driv-
• The ignition switch is not returned to the LOCK er’s door is open (MT models).
position when locking the doors.
• The vehicle engine bonnet is open.
• The Intelligent Key is left inside the vehicle when
Close the bonnet or the driver’s door, or fasten the
locking the doors.
seat belt then restart the engine using the ignition
• Any doors are not closed securely when locking switch.
the doors.

VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY
HOW TO USE THE VEHICLE For more information on warnings and indicators,
INFORMATION DISPLAY see “Vehicle information display warnings and
indicators” later in this section.
To control what items display in the vehicle informa-
tion display, see “Settings” later in this section.
SETTINGS
The setting mode allows you to change the informa-
tion displayed in the vehicle information display:
JVI0641XZ
• [Driver Assistance] (where fitted)
The vehicle information display j

1 is located be- JVI0887XZ
• [Clock]
tween the tachometer and the speedometer. It dis- • [Display Settings]
plays such items as: The vehicle information display can be changed us- • [Vehicle Settings]
• Vehicle settings ing the switches and <ENTER> j 1 located on
• [Maintenance]
the steering wheel.
• Trip computer information
j1— - navigate through the items in vehicle • [Alert]
• Driver Assistance (where fitted) information display • [Tyre Pressures] (where fitted)
• Speed limiter information (where fitted) j2— - go back to the previous menu
• [Units]
• Cruise control system information (where fitted) STARTUP DISPLAY • [Language] (where fitted)
• Intelligent Key operation information (where fit- When the ignition switch is placed in the ON posi-
• [Factory Reset]
ted) tion, the screens that display in the vehicle informa-
tion display include: Driver Assistance (where fitted)
• Audio information (where fitted)
• Navigation - turn by turn (where fitted) • Trip computer To change the status, warnings or turn on or off any
of the systems/warnings displayed in the [Driver As-
• Indicators and warnings • Fuel economy
sistance] menu, use the switch j 1 to select
• Tyre pressure information (where fitted) • Warnings and the <ENTER> j 1 to change a menu item:
• Chassis Control
Warnings will only display if there are any present. • [Driving Aids]
• Other information • [Driver Attention]

• [Traffic Sign] • [Front Sensor] • [Engine Brake] (where fitted)
• [Parking Aids] – Front parking sensor ON/OFF – For more details, see “Active Engine Brake
(Xtronic Continuously Variable Transmission
• [Chassis Control] • [Rear Sensor]
(CVT) model)” in the “5. Starting and driving”
Driving Aids: – Rear parking sensor ON/OFF section.
To change the status, warnings or turn on or off any • [Display] Clock
of the systems/warnings displayed in the [Driving
Aids] menu, use the switch j1 to select and – Parking sensor display ON/OFF For models without navigation or audio system:
the <ENTER> j 1 to change a menu item: • [Volume] Set Clock:
• [Lane] – Parking sensor buzzer volume [Low]/[Med.]/ The clock settings can be changed using the
– Lane Departure Warning (LDW) ON/OFF [High] j1 and the <ENTER> j 1 buttons.
• [Blind Spot] • [Range] 12H/24H:
– Blind Spot Warning (BSW) ON/OFF – Parking sensor detection range [Far]/[Mid.]/ The time setting can be selected from 12 hour and
[Near] 24 hour formats.
• [Emergency Brake]
For more details, see “Around view monitor (where For models with navigation or audio system:
– Emergency Brake ON/OFF fitted)” in the “4. Display screen, heater and air con- To set the clock, see “Clock” in the “4. Display
Driver Attention: ditioner, and audio system” section. screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio
[Driver Attention] ON/OFF Chassis Control: system” section, “SETUP button” in the “4. Display
screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio
Traffic Sign: To change the status, warnings or turn on or off any
system” section, or “Audio main operation” in the
of the systems/warnings displayed in the [Chassis
[Traffic Sign] ON/OFF “4. Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and
Control] menu, use the switch j 1 to select
audio system” section in this manual or the separate
Parking Aids: and the <ENTER> j 1 to change a menu item:
Navigation Owner’s Manual.
To change the status or turn on or off any of the sys- • [Trace Control]
Display Settings
tems displayed in the [Parking Aids] menu, use the
– For more details, see “Active Trace Control”
switch j
1 to select and the <ENTER> j 1 to The meter settings allows the customer to choose
in the “5. Starting and driving” section.
change a menu item: from the various meter selections.
• [Moving Object] The meter settings can be changed using the
– Moving Object Detection (MOD) ON/OFF j1 and the <ENTER> j 1 buttons.

Contents Selection: [Display]: • [Trip CO2 Saving]
The items that display when the ignition switch is The Trip CO2 saving and engine stop time mode
placed in the ON position can be enabled/disabled. shows the CO2 saving and engine stop time
To change the items that are displayed, use the since the last reset. The CO2 saving and engine
j1 to scroll and the <ENTER> j 1 to select a stop time can be reset by pushing <ENTER>
menu item. j1.
Body Colour: • [Total CO2 Saving]
The colour of the vehicle that displays in the vehicle The Total CO2 saving and engine stop time
information display when the ignition switch is mode shows:
placed in the ON position can be changed.
JVI0665XZ – The estimated CO2 exhaust emissions pre-
1. Use the switch j
1 until [Body Colour] is vented.
selected, and press <ENTER> j 1.
This setting allows the customer to enable/disable – The engine stop time that the engine has been
2. Select the body colour using the switch j
1 the ECO pedal guide function. stopped by the Stop/Start System.
and press <ENTER> j 1.
1. Use the switch j
1 to select [Display]. NOTE
ECO Mode Settings (where fitted):
1 to select [Pedal Guide]
2. Press the <ENTER> j The Total CO2 saving and engine stop time
This setting allows the customer to change the ECO or [Fuel Econ.]. values cannot be reset and show accumu-
mode system settings.
For more details, see “ECO mode system (where lated Stop/Start System information since
Use the switch j
1 until [ECO Mode Settings] fitted)” in the “5. Starting and driving” section. the vehicle was built.
is selected, and press <ENTER> j 1.
Stop/Start (where fitted): ECO Drive Report (where fitted):
[Eco Glow]: [Display]:
To change the status, warnings or turn on or off any
This setting allows the customer to enable/disable of the systems/warnings displayed in the [Stop/ This setting allows the customer to enable/disable
the ambient ECO indicator in the vehicle information Start] menu, use the switch j1 to select and the ECO Drive Report in the vehicle information dis-
display. the <ENTER> j 1 to change a menu item: play.
1. Use the switch j
1 to select [Eco Glow]. • [Display] 1. Use the switch j
1 to select [ECO Drive
2. Press the <ENTER> j 1 to turn ON/OFF the – Stop/Start display ON/OFF Report].
ambient ECO in the vehicle information display. 2. Press the <<ENTER>> j1 to turn ON/OFF the
ECO management display in the vehicle informa-
tion display.

[View History]: Lighting: Turn Indicator:
This setting allows the customer to reset the past The [Lighting] menu has the following options: The [3 Flash On] overtaking feature can be set to be
history of the fuel economy and the best fuel ON or OFF. From the [Turn Indicator] menu, select
economy.
• [Welcome Light]
[3 Flash On]. Use the <ENTER> j 1 to turn this fea-
The welcome lighting can be set to be ON or ture ON or OFF.
Welcome Effect:
OFF. From the [Lighting] menu, select [Wel-
Unlocking:
You can choose whether or not to display the welcome Light]. Use the <ENTER> j 1 to turn this
come screen when the ignition switch is placed in feature ON or OFF. There are the following options in the [Unlocking]
the ACC or ON position. You can also choose the menu:
following items to define how the welcome screen • [Int. Lamp Timer]
looks: The internal light timer can be set to be ON or
• [I-Key Door Lock]
OFF. From the [Lighting] menu, select [Int. Lamp When this item is turned on, the request switch
• [Dial and Pointer]
Timer]. Use the <ENTER> j 1 to turn this feature on the door is activated. From the [Unlocking]
• [Display Effect] ON or OFF. menu, select [I-Key Door Lock]. Use the
<ENTER> button to activate or deactivate this
Select [Welcome Effect] using the switch j
1 • [Auto Lights] function.
and press the <ENTER> j 1 to select this menu.
The sensitivity of the automatic lighting can be
Use the switch j
1 to navigate between the
adjusted. From the [Lighting] menu, select [Auto
• [Selective Unlock]
menu options and press the <ENTER> j 1 to turn When this item is turned on, and the door handle
Lights]. Use the switch j 1 and the
each function ON/OFF. request switch on the driver’s or front passen-
<ENTER> j 1 to select the required sensitivity.
Vehicle Settings The following options are available: ger’s side door is pushed, only the correspond-
ing door is unlocked. All the doors can be un-
The vehicle settings allows the customer to change – [On Earliest] locked if the door handle request switch is
settings for the following settings. pushed again within 1 minute. When this item is
– [On Earlier]
• Lighting – [Standard]
turned to off, all the doors will be unlocked when
the door handle request switch is pushed once.
• Turn Indicator – [On Later] From the [Unlocking] menu, select [Selective
• Unlocking
• [Headlight Off Delay] (where fitted)
Unlock]. Use the <ENTER> button to activate or
deactivate this function.
• Wipers
The duration of the automatic headlights can be
The vehicle settings can be changed using the changed from 0 to 180 seconds. From the [Light-
j1 , and the <ENTER> j 1 switches. ing] menu, select [Headlight Off Delay]. Use the
<ENTER> j 1 to change the duration.

• [Answer Bk. Horn] (where fitted) Maintenance Filter (where fitted):
When the answer back horn is on the horn will This indicator appears when the customer set dis-
chirp and the hazard indicators will flash once tance comes for changing the oil filter. You can set
when locking the vehicle with the Intelligent Key or reset the distance for checking or replacing these
or remote keyless entry function. items. For scheduled maintenance items and inter-
vals, see a separate maintenance booklet.
Wipers:
Tyre:
• Speed Dependent (where fitted)
This indicator appears when the customer set dis-
The [Speed Dependent] feature can be activated tance comes for replacing tyres. You can set or
or deactivated. From the [Wipers] menu, select reset the distance for replacing tyres.
[Speed Dependent]. Use the <ENTER> j 1 to JVI0978XZ
turn this feature ON or OFF.
WARNING
• Rain Sensor (where fitted) 1. Service
The tyre replacement indicator is not a substitute
The [Rain Sensor] feature can be activated or 2. Filter (where fitted) for regular tyre checks, including tyre pressure
deactivated. From the [Wipers] menu, select checks. See “Changing tyres and wheels” in the
3. Tyre
[Rain Sensor]. Use the <ENTER> j1 to turn this “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.
feature ON or OFF. 4. Other Many factors including tyre inflation, alignment,
driving habits and road conditions affect tyre
• Reverse Link The maintenance mode allows you to set alerts for
wear and when tyres should be replaced. Setting
the reminding of maintenance intervals. To change
The [Reverse Link] wiper feature can be set to the tyre replacement indicator for a certain driv-
an item:
be ON or OFF. From the [Wipers] menu, select ing distance does not mean your tyres will last
[Reverse Link]. Use the <ENTER> j 1 to turn Select [Maintenance] using the switch j
1 and that long. Use the tyre replacement indicator as
this feature ON or OFF. press <ENTER> j 1. a guide only and always perform regular tyre
checks. Failure to perform regular tyre checks,
• Drip Wipe Service:
including tyre pressure checks could result in
The [Drip Wipe] feature can be set to be ON or This indicator appears when the customer set dis- tyre failure. Serious vehicle damage could occur
OFF. From the [Wipers] menu, select [Drip tance comes for changing the engine oil and filter. and may lead to a collision, which could result in
Wipe]. Use the <ENTER> j 1 to turn this feature You can set or reset the distance for checking or serious personal injury or death.
ON or OFF. replacing these items. For scheduled maintenance
items and intervals, see a separate maintenance Other:
booklet. This indicator appears when the customer set dis-
tance comes for checking or replacing maintenance
items other than the engine oil, oil filter and tyres.

Other maintenance items can include such things 2. Press the <ENTER> j
1 to turn ON/OFF the • Tyre Pressure Unit
as air filter or tyre rotation. You can set or reset the alert.
distance for checking or replacing the items. • Calibrate
Phone (where fitted):
Target Front:
Alert This setting allows the customer to enable/disable
The [Target Front] tyre pressure is the pressure
This setting allows the customer to set alarms. the alert for navigation in the vehicle information dis-
specified for the front tyres on the tyre placard. (See
play.
Select [Alert] using the switch j
1 and press “Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (where
<ENTER> j 1. 1. Use the switch j
1 to select [Phone]. fitted)” in the “5. Starting and driving” section and
“Tyre placard” in the “9. Technical information” sec-
Outside Temp. (where fitted): 1 to turn ON/OFF the
2. Press the <ENTER> j
tion).
alert.
This setting allows the customer to enable/disable Use the
Mail (where fitted): 1 and the <ENTER> j
j 1 buttons to
the alert for outside temperature in the vehicle infor-
select and change the value for the [Target Front]
mation display. This setting allows the customer to enable/disable tyre pressure.
1. Use the switch 1 to select [Outside
j the alert for navigation in the vehicle information dis-
play. Target Rear:
Temp.].
The [Target Rear] tyre pressure is the pressure
2. Press <ENTER> j
1 to turn the alert ON/OFF. 1. Use the switch j
1 to select [Mail].
specified for the rear tyres on the tyre placard. (See
Timer: 1 to turn ON/OFF the
2. Press the <ENTER> j “Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (where
alert. fitted)” in the “5. Starting and driving” section and
This setting allows the customer to set an alert to
“Tyre placard” in the “9. Technical information” sec-
notify the driver that the set time has been reached. Tyre pressures (where fitted) tion).
1. Use the switch j
1 to select [Timer]. The settings in the [Tyre Pressures] menu are all
Use the 1 and the <ENTER> j
j 1 buttons to
related to the Tyre pressure monitoring system
1.
2. Press the <ENTER> j select and change the value for the [Target Rear]
TPMS (See “Tyre Pressure Monitoring System
tyre pressure.
3. To change the timer amount, use the switch (TPMS) (where fitted)” in the “6. In case of
j1 and the <ENTER> j 1 to save the selected emergency” section, “Tyre Pressure Monitoring Tyre Pressure Unit:
time amount. System (TPMS) (where fitted)” in the “5. Starting The unit for tyre pressure that displays in the vehicle
Navigation (where fitted): and driving” section and “Tyre Pressure Monitoring information display can be changed to:
System (TPMS) (where fitted)” in the “8. Mainte-
This setting allows the customer to enable/disable nance and do-it-yourself” section). • kPa
the alert for navigation in the vehicle information dis-
play. • Target Front • bar
1. Use the switch j

1 to select [Navigation]. • Target Rear • psi
• Kgf/cm2

Use the 1 and the <ENTER> j
j 1 buttons to
select and change the unit.
If necessary, refer to the following table to convert
between units.
JVI0938XZ
Calibrate: Units (where fitted)

The tyre pressure is affected by the temperature of The units that are shown in the vehicle information
the tyre; the tyre temperature increases when the display can be changed:
car is driven. To be able to accurately monitor the
tyre air leakage and to prevent false TPMS warnings • Distance/Fuel
due to changes in temperature, the TPMS system
uses temperature sensors in the tyres to perform
• Tyre pressures
temperature compensation calculations. • Temperature
On rare occasions it may be necessary to recalibrate Use the 1 , and the <ENTER> j
j 1 switches to
the TPMS system reference temperature. This op- select and change the units of the vehicle informa-
eration should only be performed when the actual tion display.
tyre pressure has been adjusted, whilst the current Distance/Fuel:
ambient temperature is significantly different to the
The unit for the mileage that displays in the vehicle
current calibration temperature. (See “Tyre Pres-
information display can be changed to:
sure Monitoring System (TPMS) (where fitted)” in
the “5. Starting and driving” section). • km, l/100km
Use the j1 , and the <ENTER> j 1 switches to • km, km/l
start or cancel the calibration process. While the
calibration process is active, the message: [Reset-
• miles, MPG (UK)
ting tyre pressure system] will be displayed. Use the j1 and the <ENTER> j
1 switches to
select and change the unit.

Tyre pressures: For models with navigation system, see “Vehicle
For more details, see “Tyre pressures (where fitted)” information and settings (models with navigation
earlier in this section. system)” in the “4. Display screen, heater and air
conditioner, and audio system” section.
Temperature:
For models without navigation system, see “Audio
The temperature that displays in the vehicle informa- system (where fitted)” in the “4. Display screen,
tion display can be changed from: heater and air conditioner, and audio system” sec-
• °C (Celsius) tion.
• °F (Fahrenheit) Factory Reset

1 to toggle choices.
Use the <ENTER> j The settings in the vehicle information display can
be reset back to the factory default. To reset the
Language (where fitted) vehicle information display:
The language of the vehicle information display can 1. Select [Factory Reset] using the switch
be changed to: j1 and press the <ENTER> j 1.
• English 2. Select [Yes] to return all settings back to default
• French by pressing the <ENTER> j 1.
• German
• Italian
• Portuguese
• Dutch
• Spanish
• Turkish
• Russian
Use the 1 , and the <ENTER> j
j 1 switches to
select and change the language of the vehicle infor-
mation display. The language of the centre display/
navigation can be changed independently of the ve-
hicle information display.

VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY WARNINGS AND INDICATORS
JVI1311X

1. Engine start operation indicator 4. No Key detected warning For more details, see “Battery replacement” in the
(Xtronic (CVT) Continuously Variable (where fitted) “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.
Transmission models) This warning appears when the door is closed with 7. Engine start operation for Intelligent
This indicator appears when the shift lever is in the the Intelligent Key left outside the vehicle and the Key system indicator (where fitted)
P (Park) position. ignition switch in the ON position. Make sure that
This indicator appears when the Intelligent Key bat-
the Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle.
This indicator means that the engine will start by tery is running out of power and when the Intelligent
pushing the ignition switch with the brake pedal de- For more details, see “Intelligent Key system (where Key system and vehicle are not communicating nor-
pressed. You can start the engine directly in any fitted)” in the “3. Pre-driving checks and mally.
position of the ignition switch. adjustments” section.
If this indicator appears, touch the ignition switch
2. Engine start operation indicator 5. Shift to Park warning (Xtronic (CVT) with the Intelligent Key while depressing the brake
Continuously Variable Transmission pedal.
(Manual Transmission (MT) models)
This indicator means that the engine will start by
models) For more details, see “Intelligent Key battery
discharge” in the “5. Starting and driving” section.
pushing the ignition switch with the clutch pedal This warning appears when the ignition switch is
depressed. You can start the engine directly in any pushed to stop the engine with the shift lever in any 8. Key ID incorrect warning
position of the ignition switch. position except the P (Park) position. (where fitted)
You can also start the engine by pushing the ignition If this warning appears, move the shift lever to the P This warning appears when the ignition switch is
switch with the brake pedal depressed when the (Park) position or place the ignition switch in the ON placed from the LOCK position and the Intelligent
shift lever is in the N (Neutral) position. position. Key cannot be recognised by the system. You can-
3. Steering lock release malfunction An inside warning chime will also sound. not start the engine with an unregistered key. Use
the registered Intelligent Key.
indicator For more details, see “Intelligent Key system (where
fitted)” in the “3. Pre-driving checks and For more details, see “Intelligent Key system (where
This indicator appears when the steering lock can-
adjustments” section. fitted)” in the “3. Pre-driving checks and
not be released.
adjustments” section.
If this indicator appears, push or turn the ignition 6. Key battery low warning (where fitted)
switch while lightly turning the steering wheel right 9. Release parking brake warning
This indicator appears when the Intelligent Key bat-
and left. tery is running out of power. This warning appears when the vehicle speed is
For more details, see “Steering lock” in the “5. Start- above 4 km/h (2 MPH) and the parking brake is
If this indicator appears, replace the battery with a applied. Stop the vehicle and release the parking
ing and driving” section. new one. brake.

10. Low fuel level warning 13. Key System Fault warning 15. Tyre pressure system fault warning
This warning appears when the fuel level in the fuel (where fitted) (where fitted)
tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is conve- This warning appears if there is a malfunction in the This warning illuminates when there is a problem
nient, preferably before the fuel gauge reaches 0 Intelligent Key system. with the Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).
(Empty). There will be a small reserve of fuel in the
tank when the fuel gauge needle reaches 0 (Empty). If this warning appears while the engine is stopped, If this warning comes on, have the system checked
the engine cannot be started. If this warning ap- by a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
11. Door/back door open warning pears while the engine is running, the vehicle can be
For more details, see “Low tyre pressure warning
driven. However, contact a NISSAN dealer or quali-
This warning appears if any of the doors and/or the light (where fitted)” earlier in this section, “Tyre Pres-
fied workshop for repair as soon as possible.
back door are open or not closed securely. The sure Monitoring System (TPMS) (where fitted)” in
vehicle icon indicates which door or the back door 14. Low tyre pressure warning the “6. In case of emergency” section, “Tyre Pres-
is open on the display. (where fitted) sure Monitoring System (TPMS) (where fitted)” in
the “5. Starting and driving” section and “Tyre Pres-
12. Second row seat belt warning This warning ([Low tyre pressure] and a vehicle icon sure Monitoring System (TPMS) (where fitted)” in
(where fitted) - where fitted) appears when the low tyre pressure the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.
warning light in the meter illuminates and low tyre
This second row seat belt warning appears after the
pressure is detected. The warning appears each 16. Low oil pressure Stop vehicle
ignition switch is placed in the ON position. If any of
the second row seat passenger seat belts is not fas-
time the ignition switch is placed in the ON position warning (where fitted)
as long as the low tyre pressure warning light re-
tened, a chime will sound and the seat icon illumi- This warning appears if low engine oil pressure is
mains illuminated. If this warning appears, stop the
nates in red to show which seat belt is not fastened. detected. If the warning appears during normal driv-
vehicle and adjust the pressure to the recommended
The seat icon illuminates in red until the corresponding, pull off the road in a safe area, stop the engine
COLD tyre pressure shown on the tyre placard.
ing second row seat passenger’s seat belt is fas- immediately and call a NISSAN dealer or qualified
tened. The warning will automatically turn off after For more details, see “ Low tyre pressure warning workshop.
approximately 35 seconds. light (where fitted)” earlier in this section, “Tyre Pres-
The low oil pressure warning is not designed to indi-
For more details and precautions on seat belt us- cate a low oil level. Use the dipstick to check the oil
the “6. In case of emergency” section, “Tyre Pres-
age, see “Seat belts” in the “1. Safety — seats, seat level.
belts and supplemental restraint system” section.
the “5. Starting and driving” section and “Tyre Pres- For more details, see “Engine oil” in the “8. Mainte-
sure Monitoring System (TPMS) (where fitted)” in nance and do-it-yourself” section.
the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.

CAUTION 19. 4WD system fault warning 22. Battery Voltage Low Charge Battery
Running the engine with the engine oil pressure (where fitted) warning
warning displayed could cause serious damage This warning appears when the four-wheel drive This warning appears when the battery voltage is
to the engine. (4WD) system is not functioning properly while the low and the battery needs to be charged.
17. Oil Level Low indicator (for diesel engine is running. Reduce vehicle speed and have
your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer or quali- 23. Shipping Mode On Push Storage
engine model) Fuse warning
fied workshop.
If the low level indicator is displayed, the engine oil This warning may appear if the extended storage
For more details, see “4WD warning” in the
level is low. If the low level reminder is displayed, fuse switch is not pushed in (switched on). When
“5. Starting and driving” section.
check the level using the engine oil dipstick. this warning appears, push in (switch on) the ex-
For more details, see “Oil control system (for diesel 20. 4WD High Temp. Stop vehicle tended storage fuse switch to turn off the warning.
engine model)” later in this section. warning (where fitted) For more details, see “Extended storage fuse
CAUTION This warning may appear while trying to free a stuck switch” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself”
vehicle due to increased oil temperature. The driv- section.
The oil level should be checked regularly using ing mode may change to Two-Wheel Drive (2WD).
the engine oil dipstick. Operating with an insuffi- If this warning is displayed, stop the vehicle with the 24. Headlight system fault warning
cient amount of oil can damage the engine and engine idling, as soon as it is safe to do so. Then if (where fitted)
such damage is not covered by the warranty. the warning turns off, you can continue driving. This warning appears if the LED headlights are mal-
18. Oil level sensor warning (for diesel For more details, see “4WD warning” in the functioning. Have the system checked by a NISSAN
engine model) “5. Starting and driving” section. dealer or qualified workshop.
If the oil sensor warning is displayed, the engine oil 21. Tyre size incorrect warning 25. Power will turn off to save the
level sensor may be malfunctioning. Contact a (where fitted) battery warning
This warning may appear if there is a large differ- This warning appears after a period of time if the
For more details, see “Oil control system (for diesel ence between the diameters of the front and rear shift lever has not moved from the P (Park) position
engine model)” later in this section. wheels and tyres. Pull off the road in a safe area, while the ignition is in the ON position for a certain
with the engine idling. Check that all the tyre sizes period of time.
are the same, that the tyre pressure is correct and 26. Power turned off to save the battery
that the tyres are not excessively worn.
warning
For more details, see “4WD warning” in the
This warning appears after the ignition switch is au-
“5. Starting and driving” section.
tomatically turned OFF to save the battery.

27. Turn off headlights warning 32. Chassis control system fault warning 36. ECO mode system indicator
This warning appears when the driver side door is This warning appears if the chassis control module (where fitted)
opened with the headlight switch is left ON and the detects an error in the chassis control system. Have The ECO mode indicator appears when the ECO
ignition switch is placed in the “OFF” or LOCK the system checked by a NISSAN dealer or quali- mode system is turned on.
position. Place the headlight switch in “OFF” or fied workshop.
“AUTO” (where fitted) position. For more details, see “ECO mode system (where
For more details, see “Chassis control” in the fitted)” in the “5. Starting and driving” section.
For more details, see “Headlight and turn signal “5. Starting and driving” section.
switch” later in this section. 37. System fault warning (where fitted)
33. Speed limiter indicator (where fitted)
28. Press brake pedal warning This warning appears when the Blind Spot Warn-
This indicator shows the speed limiter system sta- ing/Lane Departure Warning systems are not func-
This indicator appears in the following situations: tus. The status is shown by the colour. tioning properly.
• The driver tries to release the electronic parking For more details, see “Speed limiter (where fitted)” For more details, see “Blind Spot Warning (BSW)
brake manually without depressing the brake in the “5. Starting and driving” section. system (where fitted) ” in the “5. Starting and driving”
pedal. section and “Lane Departure Warning (LDW) sys-
34. Cruise indicator (where fitted)
tem (where fitted)” in the “5. Starting and driving”
• The vehicle is stopped on a steep hill and there
This indicator shows the cruise control system sta- section.
is a possibility of moving backward, even if the
electronic parking brake is applied. tus. The status is shown by the colour.
38. System fault warning (where fitted)
For more details, see “Cruise control (where fitted)”
29-30. Time for a driver break? indicator in the “5. Starting and driving” section. This warning appears when the Lane Departure
This indicator appears when the set [Time for a driver Warning system is not functioning properly.
break?] indicator activates. You can set the time for 35. CVT position indicator (Xtronic
For more details, see “Lane Departure Warning
up to 6 hours. (CVT) Continuously Variable (LDW) system (where fitted)” in the “5. Starting and
Transmission models) driving” section.
31. Low outside temperature warning
(where fitted) This indicator shows the automatic shift position. 39. System fault warning (where fitted)
This warning appears if the outside temperature is In the manual shift mode, when the transmission This warning appears when the Blind Spot Warning
below 3°C (37°F). The warning can be set not to be does not shift to the selected gear due to a trans- system is not functioning properly.
displayed. mission protection mode, the Xtronic CVT position
indicator will blink and a chime will sound. For more details, see “Blind Spot Warning (BSW)
system (where fitted) ” in the “5. Starting and driving”
For more details, see “Driving with Xtronic Continu- section.
ously Variable Transmission (CVT)” in the “5. Start-
ing and driving” section.

40. Not available Clean Rear Camera 44. Stop/Start System indicator emergency braking system warning light (orange)
warning (where fitted) (where fitted) will illuminate and the [Not Available Front Radar
Obstructed] warning message will appear in the ve-
This warning appears if dirt, rain or snow accumu- This indicator shows the Stop/Start System status. hicle information display. If the [Not Available Front
lates on the rear camera and cannot be removed by Radar Obstructed] warning message appears, park
For more details, see “Stop/Start System (where
the automatic washer and blower. the vehicle in a safe location and turn the engine off.
fitted)” in the “5. Starting and driving” section.
For more details, see “Blind Spot Warning (BSW) Check to see if the sensor area of the front bumper
system (where fitted) ” in the “5. Starting and driving” 45. System fault warning (where fitted)
is blocked. If the sensor area of the front bumper is
section and “Lane Departure Warning (LDW) sys- This warning appears when the Driver Attention Alert blocked, remove the blocking material. Restart the
tem (where fitted)” in the “5. Starting and driving” system malfunctions. engine. If the warning light continues to illuminate,
section. have the forward emergency braking system
For more details, see “Driver Attention Alert (where
41. Not available Clean Rear Camera fitted)” later in this section. checked by a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
warning (where fitted) 46. System fault warning (where fitted) 49. Not available High cabin
This warning appears if dirt, rain or snow accumu- temperature warning (where fitted)
This warning appears when the Traffic Sign Recog-
lates on the rear camera and cannot be removed by nition system malfunctions. This warning appears if the interior temperature of
the automatic washer and blower. the vehicle has reached such a high temperature
For more details, see “Traffic Sign Recognition that the sensor for the Traffic Sign Recognition and
For more details, see “Blind Spot Warning (BSW) (TSR) (where fitted)” later in this section.
system (where fitted) ” in the “5. Starting and driving” Lane Departure warning systems can no longer
section. 47. System fault warning (where fitted) function reliably. Once the interior temperature has
reached normal levels, the warning should disap-
42. CVT System Fault warning (Xtronic This warning appears when the forward emergency pear.
(CVT) Continuously Variable braking system malfunctions.
If the warning continues to display, have the system
Transmission models) For more details, see “Forward emergency braking checked by a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
system (where fitted)” in the “5. Starting and driving”
This warning appears when there is a malfunction
section. 50. Parking Sensor System Fault
with the Xtronic CVT system. If this warning comes
on, have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer 48. Not Available Front radar obstructed warning (where fitted)
or qualified workshop. warning (where fitted) This warning illuminates when there is a problem
with the parking sensor system. If this warning
43. Navigation indicator (where fitted) If the sensor area of the front bumper is covered comes on, have the system checked by a NISSAN
This indicator appears when a corner point is com- with dirt or obstructed, making it impossible to de- dealer or qualified workshop.
ing. tect a vehicle ahead, the forward emergency brak-
ing system is automatically turned off. The forward

OIL CONTROL SYSTEM (for diesel 1. Distance to oil change 4. Oil level sensor warning
engine model) The distance to oil change is displayed if the dis- If the oil sensor warning is displayed, the engine oil
tance to oil change is less than 1,500 km (930 miles). level sensor may be malfunctioning. Contact a
2. Oil replacement indicator
When the set mileage approaches, the engine oil
replacement indicator will appear on the display.
After the oil is changed, reset the distance to oil
change. The oil replacement indicator will not be
reset automatically. To reset this indicator, see
“Settings” earlier in this section.
The distance to oil change interval cannot be ad-
justed manually. The distance to oil change interval
is set automatically.
CAUTION
If the oil replacement indicator is displayed,
change the engine oil as soon as possible. Oper-
ating your vehicle with deteriorated oil can dam-
age the engine.
3. Low level reminder
If the low level indicator is displayed, the engine oil
level is low. If the low level reminder is displayed,
NIC2584
check the level using the engine oil dipstick.
For more details, see “Engine oil” in the “8. Mainte-
When the ignition switch is in the ON position, en- nance and do-it-yourself” section.
gine oil information is displayed. CAUTION
Engine oil information informs the distance to oil The oil level should be checked regularly using
change, oil level indication and malfunction of oil the engine oil dipstick. Operating with an insuffi-
level sensor. cient amount of oil can damage the engine and
such damage is not covered by the warranty.

TRIP COMPUTER
NIC2483

1-2. Driving aids (where fitted) 4. Elapsed time and trip odometer (km • When driving uphill or rounding curves, the fuel
or mile) in the tank shifts, which may momentarily change
The driving aids mode shows the operating condi- the display.
tion for the following systems. Elapsed time:
6-7. Fuel economy (l (litre)/100 km,
• Lane Departure Warning (LDW) The elapsed time mode shows the time since the
km/l(litre) or MPG)
last reset. The displayed time can be reset by push-
• Blind Spot Warning (BSW)
ing the <ENTER> j 1 switch for longer than 1 sec- Current fuel consumption:
• Forward Emergency Braking (where fitted) ond. (The trip odometer is also reset at the same
The current fuel consumption mode shows the cur-
time.)
For more details, see “Blind Spot Warning (BSW) rent fuel consumption.
system (where fitted)” in the “5. Starting and driving” Trip odometer:
Average fuel consumption:
section, “Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system The trip odometer mode shows the total distance
(where fitted)” in the “5. Starting and driving” sec- The average fuel consumption mode shows the av-
the vehicle has been driven since the last reset.
tion and “Forward emergency braking system erage fuel consumption since the last reset. Reset-
Resetting is done by pushing the <ENTER> j 1
(where fitted)” in the “5. Starting and driving” sec- ting is done by pushing the <ENTER> j 1 switch for
switch for longer than 1 second. (The elapsed time
tion. longer than 1 second.
is also reset at the same time.)
3. Speed and Average speed (km/h or The display is updated every 30 seconds. For about
5. Distance to empty (dte — km or mile) the first 500 m (1/3 mile) after a reset, the display
MPH) shows “——”.
The distance to empty (dte) mode provides you with
The (digital) speed shows the current speed at an estimation of the distance that can be driven
which the vehicle is travelling. 8. Audio (where fitted)
before refuelling. The dte is constantly being calcu-
The average speed mode shows the average ve- lated, based on the amount of fuel in the fuel tank The audio mode shows the status of audio informa-
hicle speed since the last reset. Resetting is done and the actual fuel consumption. tion.
by pushing the <ENTER> j 1 switch for longer than The display is updated every 30 seconds. 9. Navigation (where fitted)
1 second.
The dte mode includes a low range warning feature. When the route guidance is set in the navigation
The display is updated every 30 seconds. The first If the fuel level is low, the warning is displayed on system, this item shows the navigation route infor-
30 seconds after a reset, the display shows “—--”. the screen. mation.
When the fuel level drops even lower, the dte dis- 10. Compass (where fitted)
play will change to “——”.
This display indicates the heading direction of the
• If the amount of fuel added is small, the display vehicle.
just before the ignition switch is placed in the
“OFF” position may continue to be displayed.

11. “4x4-i” display (where fitted) 14. Driver Attention Alert system NOTE
When the [4x4-i] display is selected, you can view (where fitted) The Total CO2 or fuel saving and engine stop
the distribution ratio of the transmission torque to When the [Driver Attention] alert display is selected, time values cannot be reset and show accumu-
the front and rear wheels during driving. you can view your attention level as detected by the lated Stop/Start System information since the
system. vehicle was built.
12. Chassis control
For more details, see “Driver Attention Alert (where 16. Traffic Sign Recognition
When Active Trace Control, Active Engine Brake or
Active Ride Control system is operated, it shows
fitted)” later in this section. (where fitted)
the operating condition. It also shows operating con- 15. Stop/Start System (where fitted) The Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) system provides
dition of Hill Start Assist or the Hill Descent Control. the driver with information about the most recently
The Stop/Start System mode shows the CO2 or detected speed limit.
For more details, see “Active Trace Control” in the fuel savings and the engine stop time.
“5. Starting and driving” section, “Active Engine For more details, see “Traffic Sign Recognition
Brake (Xtronic Continuously Variable Transmission For more details, see “Stop/Start System (where (TSR) (where fitted)” later in this section.
(CVT) model)” in the “5. Starting and driving” sec- fitted)” in the “5. Starting and driving” section.
tion, “Active Ride Control” in the “5. Starting and Trip CO2 or fuel saving and engine stop time:
CLOCK AND OUTSIDE AIR
driving” section, “Hill Start Assist system” in the TEMPERATURE
The trip CO2 or fuel saving and engine stop time
“5. Starting and driving” section and “Hill descent
mode shows amount of CO2 or fuel saved and the
control system (where fitted)” in the “5. Starting and
engine stop time since the last reset.
driving” section.
The CO2 or fuel saving and engine stop time can be
13. Tyre Pressures (where fitted) reset by pushing the <ENTER> switch j 1 in the
The tyre pressure mode shows the pressure of all Stop/Start menu.
four tyres while the vehicle is driven. For more details, see “Display Settings” earlier in
When the Low Tyre Pressure warning appears, the this section.
display can be switched to the tyre pressure mode Total CO2 or fuel saving and engine stop time:
by pushing the <ENTER> button j 1 to reveal addi- JVI0932XZ
tional details on the displayed warning. The total CO2 or fuel saving and engine stop time
mode shows:
The clock j 1 and outside air temperature j 2 are
• The estimated CO2 exhaust emissions displayed on the upper side of the vehicle informa-
prevented. tion display.
• The time that the engine has been stopped for by
the Stop/Start System.

Clock It does this by monitoring driving style, and steering Attention level indicator:
behaviour, and it notes deviations from the normal
For clock adjustment, see “Clock” earlier in this pattern. If the system detects that driver attention is
section, “Vehicle information and settings (models decreasing, the system uses an audible and visual
with navigation system)” in the “4. Display screen, warning to suggest that the driver take a break.
heater and air conditioner, and audio system” sec-
tion and “ SETUP button” in the “4. Display screen,
WARNING
heater and air conditioner, and audio system” sec-
tion. This system is not designed to assist driving im-
paired due to fatigue, or other causes. Be atten-
Outside air temperature (°C or °F) tive at all times, and avoid driving when tired.
The outside air temperature is displayed in °C or °F Failure to do so could cause you to lose control JVI0992XZ
in the range of −40 to 60°C (−40 to 140°F). of the vehicle, resulting in a serious accident.
The outside air temperature mode includes a low System operation When the [Driver Attention] display is selected, you
temperature warning feature. If the outside air tem- can view your attention level as detected by the sys-
perature is below 3°C (37°F), the warning j3 is dis- tem.
played on the screen (where fitted). For more details, see “Settings” earlier in this sec-
The outside temperature sensor is located in front of tion.
the radiator. The sensor may be affected by road or
NOTE
engine heat, wind directions and other driving con-
ditions. The display may differ from the actual out- • The attention level indicator consists of eight
side temperature or the temperature displayed on levels.
various signs or billboards.
• When stopping the engine, the system is re-
DRIVER ATTENTION ALERT JVI0991XZ set.
(where fitted) Turning the Driver Attention Alert system
If the system detects that driver attention is decreas-
The [Driver Attention] option can be used to activate on and off
ing, the message [Time for a driver break?] appears
or deactivate the Driver Attention Support feature. To activate or deactivate this function, see “Settings”
in the vehicle information display and a buzzer
This system is able to detect whether the driver is earlier in this section.
sounds when the vehicle is driven at speeds above
displaying a lack of attention, or is distracted.
60 km/h (37 MPH).
NOTE
The setting will be retained even if the engine is
restarted.

System Malfunction displayed is based on a combination of navigation
system data and live camera recognition. TSR infor-
If the Driver Attention Alert system malfunctions, the mation is always displayed at the top of the vehicle
system warning message will appear in the vehicle information display, and optionally in the main cen-
information display and the function will be stopped tral area of the display screen.
automatically.
Action to take: WARNING
Stop the vehicle in a safe location, and then turn off The TSR system is only intended to be a support
and restart the engine. If the system warning mes- device to provide the driver with information. It is
sage continues to appear, have the system checked not a replacement for the driver’s attention to
by a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop. traffic conditions or responsibility to drive safely.
TRAFFIC SIGN RECOGNITION (TSR) It cannot prevent accidents due to carelessness.
It is the driver’s responsibility to stay alert and
(where fitted) drive safely at all times.
System operation
The traffic recognition system displays the following
types of road sign:
JVI0973X
JVI0975XZ
A
j Latest detected speed limit.
The Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) system provides
the driver with information about the most recently B
j National speed limit
detected speed limit. The system captures the road JVI1004XZ C
j No speed limit information.
sign information with the multi-sensing front camera
unit j1 located on the windscreen in front of the D
j No-overtaking zone.
inside rearview mirror and displays the detected E
j End of no-overtaking zone.
signs in the vehicle information display. For vehicles
equipped with navigation system, the speed limit

F Conditional speed limit, with the following
j – In areas not covered by the navigation sys- System Malfunction
available conditions: tem.
If the TSR system malfunctions it will be turned off
G
j Snow – If there are deviations in relation to the automatically and the system [Malfunction]/[System
navigation, for example due to changes in fault] warning message will appear in the vehicle
H
j Slip (rain 1)
the road routing. information display.
I
j Rain (rain 2)
– When overtaking buses or trucks with Action to take:
J
j Towing speed stickers.
If the TSR [Malfunction]/[System fault] message ap-
K
j Generic Turning the TSR system on and off pears, pull off the road at a safe location and stop
the vehicle. Turn the engine off and restart the en-
CAUTION Turning the TSR system on or off is done using the gine. If the TSR [Malfunction]/[System fault] mes-
[Settings] menu in the vehicle information display.
• The Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) system is
For details, see “Vehicle information display” earlier
sage continues to appear, have the system checked
intended as an aid to careful driving. It is the by a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive in this section.
safely, and observe all road regulations that Perform the following steps to enable or disable the
Maintenance
currently apply, including looking out for road TSR system: The TSR uses the same multi-sensing front camera
signs. unit that is used by the Lane Departure Warning
1. In the [Settings] menu, select the [Driver Assis-
(LDW) system, located in front of the inside rearview
• The Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) system tance] key.
mirror. For maintenance of the camera, see “Cam-
may not function properly under the following
conditions: 2. Touch [Traffic Sign] to turn the system ON/OFF. era unit maintenance” in the “5. Starting and driving”
section.
– When rain, snow or dirt adheres to the System temporarily unavailable
windscreen in front of the TSR camera unit. If the vehicle is parked in direct sunlight under high
– When the headlights are not bright due to temperature conditions (over approximately 40°C
dirt on the lens or if the aiming is not ad- (104°F) and then started, the TSR system may be
justed properly. deactivated automatically. The [Not available High
cabin temperature] warning message will appear in
– When strong light enters the camera unit. the vehicle information display.
(For example, the light directly shines on
the front of the vehicle at sunrise or sun- Action to take:
set.) When the interior temperature is reduced, the TSR
– When a sudden change in brightness oc- system will resume operating automatically.
curs. (For example, when the vehicle en-
ters or exits a tunnel or under a bridge.)

HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL
SWITCH
HEADLIGHT SWITCH m position The sensor senses the brightness level and con-
trols the autolight function. If the sensor is cov-
The position turns on the headlights in addition ered, it reacts as if it is dark, and the headlights
to the other lights. will illuminate.
AUTO position (where fitted) Headlight beam

When the ignition switch is in the ON position and
the headlight switch is in the AUTO position, the
headlights, front clearance lights, instrument panel
lights, rear combination lights and other lights turn
on automatically depending on the brightness of the
JVI0854XZ
surroundings.
Type A
The headlights will turn on automatically at twilight
or in rainy weather (when the windscreen wiper is
operated continuously).
JVI0856XZ
When the ignition switch is placed in the LOCK or Type A
OFF position, the lights will turn off automatically.
JVI0859XZ
Type B
NISSAN recommends that you consult the local

regulations concerning the use of lights.
JVI0994XZ
m position JVI0510XZ
Type B
The position turns on the front clearance, tail, To turn on the high beam, push the lever towards
CAUTION
number plate and instrument panel lights. the front position j
1.
Do not place any objects on top of the sensor j
A.
To turn off the high beam, return the lever to the
neutral position j
2.

To flash the headlights, pull the lever towards the – When a light source similar to a headlight – When only one light on the oncoming ve-
rearmost position j
3 . The headlights can be flashed or tail light is in the vicinity of the vehicle. hicle or the leading vehicle is illuminated.
even when the headlights are not on.
– When the headlights of the oncoming ve- – When the oncoming vehicle or the leading
Where fitted, when the lever is pulled towards the hicle or the leading vehicle are turned off, vehicle is a two-wheeled vehicle.
rearmost position j 3 after the ignition switch is when the colour of the light is affected due
– Road conditions (incline, curve, the road
placed to the OFF or LOCK position, the headlight to foreign materials on the lights, or when
surface, etc.).
will turn on and stay on for 30 seconds. The lever the light beam is out of position.
can be pulled 4 times for up to 2 minutes. – The number of passengers and the amount
– When there is a sudden, continuous
of luggage.
High beam assist (where fitted) change in brightness.
The high beam assist system will operate when the – When driving on a road that passes over
vehicle is driven at speeds of approximately 40 km/h rolling hills, or a road that has level differ-
(25 MPH) and above. If an oncoming vehicle or ences.
leading vehicle appears in front of your vehicle when – When driving on a road with many curves.
the headlight high beam is on, the headlight will be
switched to the low beam automatically. – When a sign or mirror-like surface is re-
flecting intense light towards the front of
Precautions on high beam assist: the vehicle.
WARNING – When the container, etc. being towed by a
leading vehicle is reflecting intense light.
• The high beam assist system is a convenience
but it is not a substitute for safe driving opera- – When a headlight on your vehicle is dam-
tion. The driver should remain alert at all aged or dirty.
times, ensure safe driving practices and – When the vehicle is leaning at an angle
switch the high beam and low beam manually due to a punctured tyre, being towed, etc.
when necessary.
• The high beam or low beam may not switch
• The timing of switching the low beam and high
beam may change under the following situa-
automatically under the following conditions. tions.
Switch the high beam and low beam manu-
ally. – The brightness of the headlights of the on-
coming vehicle or leading vehicle.
– During bad weather (rain, fog, snow, wind,
etc.). – The movement and direction of the oncom-
ing vehicle and the leading vehicle.

High beam assist operations: the system is not functioning properly. Have the sys- • Do not strike or damage the areas around the
tem checked by a NISSAN dealer or qualified work- ambient image sensor. Do not touch the sensor
shop. lens that is located on the ambient image sensor.
When the vehicle speed lowers to less than approxi- If the ambient image sensor is damaged due to an
mately 25 km/h (16 MPH), the headlight remains the accident, contact a NISSAN dealer or qualified
low beam. workshop.
To turn off the high beam assist system, turn the Daytime running light system
headlight switch to the position or select the
low beam position by placing the lever in the neutral Even if the headlight switch is C position, the day-
position. time running lights will come on after starting the
JVI0974XZ engine.
Type A Ambient image sensor maintenance:
When the light switch is turned to the position,
the daytime running light will turn off.
HEADLIGHT AIMING CONTROL
JVI0975XZ
JVI0996XZ
Type B
The ambient image sensor j 1 for the high beam
To activate the high beam assist system, turn the assist system is located in front of the inside rearview JVI0477XZ
headlight switch to the AUTO position j 1 and push mirror. To keep the proper operation of the high
the lever forward j2 (high beam position). The high beam assist system and prevent a system malfunc-
beam assist indicator light in the meter will illuminate tion, be sure to observe the following:
Manual type
while the headlights are turned on. The headlight aiming control operates when the ig-
If the high beam assist indicator light does not illu-
• Always keep the windscreen clean.
nition switch is in the ON position and the headlight
minate in the above condition, it may indicate that • Do not attach a sticker (including transparent is on to allow the headlight axis to be adjusted ac-
material) or install an accessory near the ambient cording to the driving condition.
image sensor.

When driving with no heavy load/luggage or driving
on a flat road, select the normal position 0.
If the number of occupants and load/luggage in the
vehicle changes, the headlight axis may become
higher than normal.
If the vehicle is travelling on a hilly road, the head-
lights may directly shine on the rearview and outside
mirrors of a vehicle ahead or the windscreen of an
oncoming vehicle, which may obscure other drivers’
vision.
To adjust to the proper aiming height, turn the switch
accordingly. The higher the number, designated on
the switch, the lower the headlight axis.

Select the switch position by referring to the following samples.
Second row seats (two row model):
Number of Number of
Switch
front seat rear seat Weight of load in luggage compartment (APPROX. kg (lb))
position
occupants occupants
2WD 4WD
MR16 MR20 QR25 R9M MR20 QR25 R9M
MT MT M-CVT CVT M-CVT CVT MT M-CVT M-CVT CVT M-CVT CVT MT
No
0 1 or 2
occupants No load
1 2 3
178
169 kg 102 kg 111 kg 65 kg 120 kg 64 kg 170 kg 117 kg 75 kg 152 kg 123 kg 252 kg
kg
2 2 3 (373 (225 (245 (143 (265 (141 (375 (258 (165 (335 (271 (556
(392
lb) lb) lb) lb) lb) lb) lb) lb) lb) lb) lb) lb)
lb)
371
363 kg 305 kg 318 kg 251 kg 318 kg 266 kg 365 kg 322 kg 269 kg 359 kg 332 kg 436 kg
No kg
3 1 (800 (673 (701 (553 (701 (587 (805 (710 (593 (792 (732 (961
occupants (818
lb) lb) lb) lb) lb) lb) lb) lb) lb) lb) lb) lb)
lb)

Third row seats (three row model):
Number of Number of
Number of
Switch second third row
front seat Weight of load in luggage compartment (APPROX. kg ( lb ))
position row seat seat
occupants
occupants occupants
2WD 4WD
MR16 MR20 QR25 R9M QR25 R9M
MT MT M-CVT CVT M-CVT CVT MT M-CVT M-CVT MT
No No
0 1 or 2
occupants occupants
No No load
1 2 occupants 2
or 3
105 kg 95 kg 62 kg 61 kg 134 kg 57 kg 137 kg 142 kg 30 kg 141 kg
2 2 3 2
(232 lb) (209 lb) (137 lb) (135 lb) (295 lb) (126 lb) (302 lb) (313 lb) (66 lb) (311 lb)
475 kg 472 kg 509 kg 524 kg 515 kg 474 kg 525 kg
No No 438 kg 428 kg 420 kg
3 1 (1047 (1041 (1122 (1155 (1136 (1045 (1158
occupants occupants (966 lb) (944 lb) (926 lb)
lb) lb) lb) lb) lb) lb) lb)

Automatic type • Pull the windscreen washer switch toward you. TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
The headlights are equipped with the automatic lev- – The headlight cleaner operates with the wind-
elling system. Headlight axis is controlled automati- screen washer operation. This operation acti-
cally. vates once each time either the ignition switch
or the headlight switch is turned off and on.
BATTERY SAVER SYSTEM
– After the first operation, the headlight cleaner
The light reminder chime will sound if the headlight operates once at every fifth operation of the
switch is in either the or position and windscreen washer.
when the driver’s door is opened with the ignition
switch in the OFF or LOCK position. See “Wiper and washer switch” later in this section.
If the ignition switch is placed in OFF or LOCK CAUTION JVI0857XZ

Type A
position while the headlight switch is in the or
position, the battery saver function will turn off
• Do not operate the washer if the window
washer fluid reservoir is empty.
the lights after opening the driver’s side door.
HEADLIGHT CLEANER (where fitted)
JVI0995XZ
Type B
CAUTION
JVI1002XZ
The turn signal switch will not be cancelled auto-
Headlight cleaner switch (where fitted)
matically if the steering wheel turning angle does
The headlight cleaner operates when the headlight not exceed the preset amount. After the turn or
is on and the ignition switch is in the ON position. lane change, make sure that the turn signal
switch is returned to its original position.
To operate the headlight cleaner:
• Push the headlight cleaner switch (where fitted)

FOG LIGHT SWITCH
Turn signal FRONT FOG LIGHTS (where fitted) REAR FOG LIGHT
To turn on the turn signals, move the lever up j1 or The rear fog light should be used only when visibility
down j 2 to the point where the lever latches. When is seriously reduced (generally, to less than 100 m
the turn is completed, the turn signal cancels auto- (328 ft)).
matically.
To turn on the rear fog light, turn the headlight switch
Lane change signal to the or AUTO (where fitted) position, then
turn the fog light switch to the position. The
To turn on the lane change signals, move the lever rear fog light and indicator light on the meter
up j1 or down j 2 to the point where the light be- illuminate. The fog light switch will return to the
gins to flash.
position automatically.
JVI0861XZ
If the lever is moved back right after moving up j
1
Type A If the front fog lights (where fitted) are already turned
or down j 2 , the light will flash 3 times. on with the headlight switch in the position,
To cancel the flashing, move the lever to the oppo- you can turn on the rear fog light without first turn-
site direction. ing the headlight switch to the or AUTO (where
fitted) position.
To turn the rear fog light off, turn the fog light switch
to the position again.
JVI0954XZ
Type B
To turn on the front fog lights, turn the headlight

switch to the or or AUTO (where fitted)
position, then turn the fog light switch to the
position. The front fog lights and indicator light
on the meter illuminate. The fog light switch will
return to the position automatically.
To turn the front fog lights off, turn the fog light
switch to the position again.

WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH
WARNING
In freezing temperatures, the washer fluid may
freeze on the windscreen and obscure your vi-
sion. Warm the windscreen with the defogger be-
fore you wash the windscreen.
CAUTION
• Do not operate the washer continuously for
longer than 30 seconds.
JVI0865XZ JVI0863XZ
• Do not operate the washer if the window Type B Type D
washer reservoir is empty.
The windscreen wiper and washer operate when
WINDSCREEN WIPER AND WASHER the ignition switch is in the ON position.
SWITCH Wiper operation
The lever position <AUTO> (Type A/Type C) j 1
operates the rain-sensing auto wiper system (where
fitted) (see “Rain-sensing auto wiper system (where
fitted)” later in this section).
The lever position (INT) j 1 (Type B/Type D)
JVI1214XZ operates the wiper intermittently.
Type C
• The intermittent operation can be adjusted by
turning the adjustment control knob, (longer) j
A
JVI1213XZ or (shorter) j
B.
Type A
• The speed of the intermittent operation varies
depending on the vehicle speed. (where fitted).
The lever position j
2 operates the wiper at low
speed.
3 operates the wiper at high
speed.

To stop the wiper operation, move the lever up to prevent an accident or damage when pulling RAIN-SENSING AUTO WIPER
the OFF position. up the wiper arm, be sure to observe the fol- SYSTEM (where fitted)
lowing precautions.
4 operates the wiper one sweep.
The lever automatically returns to its original posi- – Make sure the shift lever is in the P (Park)
tion. position (Xtronic CVT (Continuously Vari-
able Transmission) models).
If the windscreen wiper operation is interrupted
by snow or ice, the wiper may stop moving to – Make sure the shift lever is in the N (Neu-
protect its motor. If this occurs, turn the wiper tral) position, with the parking brake fully
switch to the OFF position and remove the snow applied (MT (Manual Transmission) mod-
or ice on and around the wiper arms. In approxi- els).
mately 1 minute, turn the switch on again to op-
– Never allow the passengers to operate the
erate the wiper. JVI0866XZ
windscreen wiper switch inadvertently.
Type A
Pulling up the wiper arm:
• Do not operate the windscreen wiper while
The wiper arm should be in the up position when the wiper arm is pulled up. The wiper arm may
replacing the wiper. be damaged.
To pull the wiper arm up to the service position, Washer operation
when the ignition switch is in the “OFF” position,
within 1 minute, push the lever j4 up twice (within To operate the washer, pull the lever toward the rear
0.5 seconds). The wiper operation stops in mid-op- of the vehicle j5 until the desired amount of washer
eration. fluid is spread on the windscreen.
To return the wiper arm to its normal position, place The headlight cleaner (where fitted) will also oper-
the wiper arm in the down position and then push ate with operation of the windscreen washer. See
JVI0997XZ
the lever j “Headlight cleaner (where fitted)” earlier in this sec-
4 up once. Type B
tion.
For more information on replacing the windscreen The rain-sensing auto wiper system can automati-
Wiper drip wipe system:
wiper blades, see “Wiper blades” in the “8. Mainte- cally turn on the wipers and adjust the wiper speed
nance and do-it-yourself” section. The wiper will also operate once about 3 seconds depending on the rainfall and the vehicle speed by
after the washer and wiper are operated. This op- using the rain sensor located on the upper part of
CAUTION eration is to wipe washer fluid that has dripped on the windscreen.
• This function can be operated even if the igni- the windscreen.
tion switch is in the ON position. However, to To activate or deactivate this function, see “Settings”
earlier in this section.

To set the rain-sensing auto wiper system, push the • Using genuine wiper blades is recommended Wiper operation
lever down to the AUTO position j 1 . The wiper will for proper operation of the rain-sensing auto
sweep once while the ignition switch is in the ON wiper system. (See “Wiper blades” in the The switch position j
1 operates the wiper intermit-
position. “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section tently.
for wiper blade replacement.) The switch position j
2 operates the wiper at low
The rain sensor sensitivity level can be adjusted by
speed.
turning the knob toward the front j 2 (High) or to- REAR WINDOW WIPER AND
ward the rear j3 (Low). WASHER SWITCH If the rear window wiper operation is interrupted
by snow or ice, the wiper may stop moving to
• High — High sensitive operation
protect its motor. If this occurs, turn the wiper
• Low — Low sensitive operation switch to the OFF position and remove the snow
To turn the rain-sensing auto wiper system off, push or ice on and around the wiper arms. In approxi-
up the lever to the OFF position, or pull down the mately 1 minute, turn the switch on again to op-
lever to the other. erate the wiper.
CAUTION Reverse synchronisation function:

When the windscreen wiper switch is on, moving
• Do not touch the rain sensor and around it
the shift lever to the R (Reverse) position will oper-
when the wiper switch is in the AUTO position
JVI0867XZ ate the rear window wiper.
and the ignition switch is in the ON position.
Type A
The wipers may operate unexpectedly and To activate or deactivate this function, see “Settings”
cause to an injury or a wiper damage. earlier in this section.
• When the windscreen glass is coated with wa- Washer operation
ter repellent, the speed of the rain-sensing
auto wipers may be higher even though the To operate the washer, push the lever toward the
amount of the rainfall is small. front of the vehicle j3 until the desired amount of
washer fluid is spread on the windscreen. The wiper
• Be sure to turn off the rain-sensing auto wiper will automatically operate several times.
system when you use a car wash.
• The rain-sensing auto wipers may not operate
if rain does not hit the rain sensor even if it is JVI0869XZ
raining. Type B
The rear window wiper and washer operates when

the ignition switch is in the ON position.

DEFOGGER SWITCH
HEADLIGHT CLEANER SWITCH See “Window washer fluid” in the “8. Maintenance
(where fitted) and do-it-yourself” section for details on refilling the
reservoir tank.
NAA1546
Type A
SIC2255Z
Headlight cleaner switch (where fitted)
The headlight cleaner operates when the headlight

and turn signal switch is in the position and the
ignition switch is in the ON position.
To operate the headlight cleaner push the headlight
cleaner switch located on the driver’s side, lower
left side of the instrument panel.
CAUTION
JVI1009XZ
• Do not operate the cleaner continuously for Type B

more than 15 seconds. The defogger switch operates when the ignition
• Do not operate the cleaner if the washer fluid switch is in the ON position.
reservoir is empty or frozen. The defogger is used to reduce the moisture, fog or
NOTE frost on the rear window and outside door mirror
surface to improve the rear view.
• The headlight cleaner will automatically oper-
ate once every time the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position and the windscreen
washer switch is operated.

HORN WINDOWS
When the defogger switch is pushed, the indicator POWER WINDOWS

light j
A illuminates and the rear window defogger
operates for approximately 15 minutes. After the WARNING
preset time has passed, the defogger will turn off
automatically. • Make sure that all passengers have their
hands, etc. inside the vehicle before operat-
To turn off manually, push the defogger switch again. ing the power windows.
CAUTION
• Never leave children or adults who would nor-
• When operating the defogger continuously, mally require the support of others alone in
be sure to start the engine. Otherwise, it may the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate
JVI0851XZ
cause the battery to discharge. switches or controls and inadvertently
become involved in an accident.
• When cleaning the inner side of the window, The horn switch operates regardless of the ignition
be careful not to scratch or damage the elec- switch position except when the battery is The power windows operate when the ignition
trical conductors on the surface of the win- discharged. switch is in the ON position.
dow. To open a window, push down the power window
When the horn switch is pushed and held, the horn
NOTE will sound. Releasing the horn switch will cease the switch.
When the rear defogger is turned on, the Stop/ horn sound. To close a window, pull up the power window
Start System (where fitted) will not be activated. switch.
Driver’s window switch
SIC4522Z

The driver’s switch, the main switch, can control all Automatic function Auto-reverse function:
windows.
Locking passenger’s windows: WARNING
When the lock button j

A is pushed in, the passen- There is a small distance just before the closed
ger’s windows cannot be operated. position which cannot be detected. Make sure
that all passengers have their hands, etc. inside
To cancel the passenger’s windows lock, push the the vehicle before closing the windows.
lock button j
A again.
The auto-reverse function enables a window to au-
Passenger’s window switch tomatically reverse when something is caught in the
window as it is closing by the automatic function.
SIC4524Z When the control unit detects an obstacle, the win-
dow will be lowered immediately.
The automatic function is available for the switch Depending on the environment or driving conditions,
that has an mark on its surface. the auto-reverse function may activate if an impact
The automatic function enables a window to fully or load similar to something being caught in the win-
open or close without holding the switch down or dow occurs.
up. If the window does not close
SIC4523Z
To fully open the window, push the power window automatically
switch down to the second detent and release the
If the power window automatic function (closing
switch. To fully close the window, pull the power
The passenger’s switch can control its correspond- only) does not operate properly, perform the follow-
window switch up to the second detent and release
ing window. ing procedure to initialise the power window sys-
the switch. The switch does not have to be held dur-
tem.
When the passenger’s windows lock button on the ing window operation.
driver’s switch is pushed in, the passenger’s switch 1. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.
To stop the window open/close operation during
cannot be operated. the automatic function, push down or pull up the 2. Close the door.
switch in opposite directions. 3. Open the window completely by operating the
power window switch.
4. Pull the power window switch and hold it to close
the window, and then hold the switch more than
3 seconds after the window is closed completely.

SUNROOF (where fitted)
5. Release the power window switch. Operate the AUTOMATIC SUNROOF AND
window by the automatic function to confirm the WARNING
SUNSHADE
initialisation is complete. • In an accident you could be thrown from the
If the power window automatic function does not vehicle through an open sunroof. Adults
operate properly after performing the procedure should always use seat belts and children
above, have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN should always use seat belts or child restraint
dealer or qualified workshop. systems.
• Never allow anyone to stand up or extend any
portion of their body out of the opening while
the vehicle is in motion or while the sunroof is
closing.
CAUTION JVI0950XZ
• Remove water drops, snow, ice or sand from

the sunroof before opening. Sliding sunshade and sunroof
• Do not place any heavy objects on the sunroof When the sunroof switch is pushed to the OPEN
or surrounding area. position j
1 , the sunshade open fully. When a switch
is pushed again, the sunroof opens to the comfort
• Do not push or pull on the sunshade. Doing
mode position. When the switch is pushed again,
so can damage the sunshade.
the sunroof opens fully.
When the sunroof switch is pushed to the CLOSE
position j
2 , the sunroof will automatically close.
Push the switch again, and the sunshade will close.
When the sunroof switch is pushed to the OPEN
position j3 to the second detent, the sunshade
opens fully, and the sunroof opens to the comfort
mode position. When the switch is pushed again,
the sunroof opens fully. When the sunroof switch is
pushed to the CLOSE position j 4 to the second
detent, both the sunshade and sunroof close.

To stop the sunshade or sunroof during the opera- ing. When the control unit detects an obstacle, the If the sunroof does not operate properly after per-
tion, push the sunroof switch to either of the OPEN sunroof and sunshade will open immediately. forming the procedure above, have your vehicle
j1 , CLOSE j 2 or UP j 5 position. checked by a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
Depending on the environment or driving conditions,
Tilting sunroof the auto-reverse function may activate if an impact
or load similar to something being caught in the
To tilt up the sunroof, push the sunroof switch to the sunroof and sunshade occurs.
up position j 5.
If the auto-reverse function activates consecutively
To tilt down the sunroof, push the switch to the up or the battery is discharged, the sunroof and sun-
position j5 or push the switch to the CLOSE posi- shade may not close properly. In this case, push
tion j2. and hold the switch to the CLOSE position j 2 to
When the sunroof is tilted up, push the switch to the close the sunroof.
CLOSE position to the second detent j 4 . The sun-
roof will tilt down and the sunshade will close.
If sunroof does not operate
If the sunroof and sunshade do not operate prop-
Comfort mode erly, perform the following procedure to initialise the
This is the position used when driving with the operation system.
sunroof open. When driving with the sunroof fully 1. If the sunroof and sunshade are open, close them
open, wind noise may be very loud. Use the comfort fully by repeatedly pushing the sunroof switch to
mode position when driving. the CLOSE j 2 position.
Auto-reverse function 2. Push and hold the sunroof switch to the CLOSE
j2 position for 10 seconds.
WARNING
3. After the sunroof and sunshade move slightly to
There are some small distances just before the the closed position and then move back a little,
closed position which cannot be detected. Make release the sunroof switch.
sure that all passengers have their hands, etc.
inside the vehicle before closing the sunroof and 4. Push and hold the sunroof switch to the CLOSE
sunshade. j2 position for over 6 seconds.
The auto-reverse function enables the sunroof and 5. Release the sunroof switch. The sunroof and
sunshade to automatically reverse when something sunshade will fully open and then fully close.
is caught in the sunroof and sunshade as it is clos- 6. Check if the sunroof switch operates normally.

POWER OUTLETS
• Before inserting or disconnecting a plug, be

sure that the electrical accessory being used
is turned OFF.
• When not in use, be sure to close the cap. Do
not allow water or any liquid to contact the
outlet.
JVI0878XZ JVI0879XZ
Instrument panel Cargo area
To use the power outlet, pull the cover as illustrated.

CAUTION
• The outlet and plug may be hot during or im-
mediately after use.
• This power outlet is not designed for use with
a cigarette lighter unit.
• Do not use with accessories that exceed a 12
volt, 120W (10A) power draw. Do not use
double adapters or more than one electrical
JVI0880XZ accessory.
Console box
• Use this power outlet with the engine running
to avoid discharging the vehicle battery.
• Avoid using when the air conditioner, head-
lights or rear window defogger is on.
• Push the plug in as far as it will go. If good
contact is not made, the plug may overheat or
the internal temperature fuse may blow.

STORAGE
WARNING
CONSOLE BOX WARNING
• The storage compartments should not be Keep the sunglasses holder closed while driving
used while driving so that the full attention to avoid obstructing the driver’s view and to help
may be given to vehicle operation. prevent an accident.
• Keep the storage lids closed while driving to CAUTION
help prevent injury in an accident or sudden
stop. • Do not use for anything other than sunglasses.
GLOVE BOX • Do not leave sunglasses in the sunglasses

holder while parking in direct sunlight. The
JVI0877XZ
heat may damage the sunglasses.
To open the sunglasses holder, push and release.
To open the console box lid, push up the knob j
A Only store one pair of sunglasses in the holder.
and pull up the lid. CUP HOLDERS
To close, push the lid down until the lock latches.
WARNING
SUNGLASSES HOLDER
The driver must not remove or insert cups into
the cup holder while driving so that full attention
JVI0888XZ
may be given to vehicle operation.
CAUTION
Open the glove box by pulling the handle.
Avoid abrupt starting and braking especially
when the cup holder is being used to prevent
spilling the contents. If the contents are hot, they
could scald you or your passengers.
JVI0619XZ

Front Second row seat Front and second row seat
JVI0872XZ JVI0874XZ JVI0884XZ

Front side
To keep a drink cold or warm, The second row seat cup holders are located in the The front and second row seat soft bottle holders
rear fold-down armrest. are located on the doors.
1. Place the drink in the cup holder.
2. Choose the or mode by operating the SOFT BOTTLE HOLDERS Third row seat (where fitted)
heater and air conditioner. CAUTION
3. Open the cup holder vent by pulling the knob up • Do not use bottle holder for any other objects
1.
j that could be thrown about in the vehicle and
possibly injure people during sudden braking
• The airflow coming from the drink holder vent is
or an accident.
the same temperature as the air conditioner. The
temperature cannot be set independently. • Do not use bottle holder for open liquid con-
tainers.
• When the heater or the air conditioner is working
in high temperature, the cooling function will not
work even if the cup holder vent is opened. JVI0875XZ
When the cooling or warming function is not neces-

sary, close the cup holder vent by pushing the knob
down j 2.

CARD HOLDER • Unsecured luggage can become dangerous NOTE
in an accident or sudden stop.
The diversity of the luggage compartment may
• Do not apply a total load of more than 10 kg be restricted depending on the equipment of
(22 lb) to a single hook. each vehicle.
LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT
(where fitted)
You can use the luggage compartment in diverse
ways using the flexible luggage board.
JVI0952XZ WARNING
Do not put objects heavier than 75 kg (165 lbs)
Slide a card into the card holder j
A. on the load floor while in the mid position. In the
upper position, objects heavier than 20 kg (10
LUGGAGE HOOKS lbs) should not be placed on the load floor.
CAUTION
• Do not push the front edge of the luggage
board forcibly. Doing so may cause the lug-
gage board to be tilted, resulting in personal
injury.
• Do not handle the luggage board forcibly as
this may deform it.
JVI0871XZ • While in the upper position, do not recline the

Luggage room
seatbacks.
WARNING
• Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks.
In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo
• Always make sure that the luggage is prop- could cause personal injury.
erly secured. Use the suitable ropes and
hooks.

JVI0941X JVI0942X
Three-stage mode 4. Pull off the inner board toward the rear of the Vertical mode
vehicle from j B.
1. Pull the outer board upward to about 30°. 1. Pull the outer board upward to 90°.
5. Push the inner board into j
C.
2. Pull the outer board toward the rear of the ve- 2. Push down the board until it stops.
hicle and then push it into the bottom of the lug-
gage under space.
3. Pull the inner board upward until it stops at posi-
tion jA.

Separation mode Luggage under space (where fitted) COAT HOOK
JVI0944XZ SIC3505Z
Two row model
To use the luggage under space, pull off the outer The coat hook is located above the rear side win-
board. dow (on the driver’s side).
CAUTION
Do not apply a total load of more than 1 kg (2 lb)
to the hook.
JVI0943X
JVI0945XZ
Three row model
1. Place the inner board on the upper position. (See
“Three-stage mode” earlier in this section.) To use the luggage under space, pull off the board.
2. Pull the inner board upward about 10 cm (4 in)

and pull up the outer board to 90°.
3. Push down the board until it stops.

ROOF RAIL (where fitted)
TONNEAU COVER (where fitted) The tonneau cover keeps the luggage compartment
contents hidden from the outside.
To use the tonneau cover, open the flap j1 , pull it
out j
2 and insert both sides to the guide j
3.
To remove the tonneau cover, stow the cover and
pull the holder j
4.
WARNING
• Never put anything on the tonneau cover, no JVI0889XZ
matter how small. Any object on it could cause
an injury in an accident or sudden stop.
Luggage can be carried on the roof by securing
• Do not leave the tonneau cover in the vehicle crossbars to the roof rail. Follow all crossbar manu-
with it disengaged from the holder. facturers instructions for installing and use of the
crossbars. The roof rail is designed to carry loads
• The child restraint top tether strap may be
(luggage plus crossbars) below 100 kg (221 lb).
damaged by contact with the tonneau cover
or items in the luggage area. Remove the ton- Overloading may cause damage to the vehicle.
neau cover from the vehicle or secure it in the CAUTION
luggage area. Also secure any items in the
luggage area. Your child could be seriously • Do not put or hang anything on or around side
pipes or plastic covers.
injured or killed in a collision if the top tether
strap is damaged. • For crossbar installation on a roof rail with
driving lights, contact a NISSAN dealer or
qualified workshop.
JVI0955X

SUN VISORS INTERIOR LIGHTS
CAUTION lights will also go off after a period of time

when the doors are open.
• Do not leave the light switch on when the
engine is not running for extended periods of CONSOLE LIGHT
time to prevent the battery from being dis-
charged.
• Turn off the lights when you leave the vehicle.
INTERIOR LIGHT SWITCH
JVI0627XZ
The console light will turn on whenever the clear-

ance lights or headlights are illuminated.
JVI0626XZ MAP LIGHTS
1 The interior light can be turned ON regardless

j
of door position. The light will go off after a
period of time unless the ignition switch is
SIC2872
placed in the ON position when any door is
opened.
1. To block out glare from the front, swing down the
2 The interior lights can be set to operate when
j
sun visor j
1.
the doors are opened. To turn off the interior
2. To block glare from the side, remove the sun lights when a door open, push the switch, the
visor from the centre mount and swing it to the interior lights will not illuminate, regardless of JVI0628XZ
side j2. door position. The lights will go off when the
ignition switch is placed in the ON position, or Push the button to turn the map lights on. To turn
the driver’s door is closed and locked. The them off, push the button again.

ROOM LIGHT (where fitted) • Any door is opened and then closed with the VANITY MIRROR LIGHT
ignition switch in the LOCK position.
The interior light timer will be cancelled when:
• The driver’s door is locked.
• The ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
When the switch is in the OFF position j 3 , the
room light does not illuminate, regardless of any
condition.
SIC2063AZ
REAR PERSONAL LIGHTS SIC3869Z
(where fitted)
The room light has a three-position switch. To access the vanity mirror, pull the sun visor down
and flip open the mirror cover.
1 , the room
When the switch is in the ON position j
light illuminates. The vanity mirror light illuminates when the vanity
mirror cover is opened. When the cover is closed,
When the switch is in the DOOR position j 2 , the
the light will turn off.
room light illuminates when a door is opened.
The interior light timer will keep the room light on for LUGGAGE ROOM LIGHT
approximately 15 seconds when: The luggage room light illuminates when the back
door is opened. When the back door is closed, the
• The key is removed from the ignition switch with SIC3250Z
light will turn off.
the driver’s door closed. (model without Intelli-
gent Key system) BATTERY SAVER SYSTEM
To turn the rear personal lights on, push the switch.
• The ignition switch is placed in the OFF position. To turn them off, push the switch again. When the interior light stays on, it will automati-
(model with Intelligent Key system) cally turn off after a period of time when the igni-
• The doors are unlocked by pushing the UN- tion switch has been placed in the OFF position.
LOCK button (on the integrated keyfob or To turn on the light again, place the ignition
Intelligent Key) or the request switch (Intelligent switch in the ON position.
Key system equipped models), with the ignition
switch in the LOCK position.

The interior light will automatically turn off within a
period of time after the latest operation of the follow-
ing with the ignition switch in the OFF position:
• Opening or closing any door
• Locking or unlocking with a key, the power door
lock switch, or using the Intelligent Key system
• Pushing the ignition switch
The light will turn on again when any of the above
operations is performed after the light has turned off
automatically.

3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Keys ........................................................................ 3-2 NISSAN Anti-Theft System (NATS)..................... 3-22

NISSAN Anti-Theft System (NATS*) key Bonnet..................................................................... 3-23
(where fitted) ...................................................... 3-2 Opening bonnet.................................................. 3-23
Intelligent Key (where fitted)................................ 3-2 Closing bonnet ................................................... 3-23
Door locks ............................................................... 3-4 Back door................................................................ 3-24
Super lock system (where fitted)......................... 3-4 Operating manual back door............................... 3-24
Locking with key................................................. 3-4 Operating power back door (where fitted)........... 3-24
Locking with inside lock knob ............................. 3-5 Auto closure (where fitted).................................. 3-27
Locking with power door lock switch .................. 3-6 Back door release lever ...................................... 3-27
Child safety rear door lock .................................. 3-6 Garage mode system ......................................... 3-28
Remote keyless entry system (where fitted).............. 3-7 Fuel-filler lid ............................................................. 3-28
Using remote keyless entry system ..................... 3-7 Opening fuel-filler lid ........................................... 3-28
Hazard indicator operation .................................. 3-8 Fuel-filler cap...................................................... 3-28
Intelligent Key system (where fitted) ......................... 3-9 Steering wheel......................................................... 3-29
Operating range ................................................. 3-11 Mirrors..................................................................... 3-29
Using Intelligent Key system................................ 3-11 Inside rearview mirror ......................................... 3-29
Warning signals.................................................. 3-14 Outside rearview mirrors..................................... 3-30
Troubleshooting guide ........................................ 3-16 Vanity mirror ....................................................... 3-31
Using remote keyless entry function .................... 3-18 Parking brake .......................................................... 3-31
Hazard indicator and horn operation.................... 3-19 Automatic operation............................................ 3-31
Security system ....................................................... 3-20 Manual operation ................................................ 3-32
Theft warning system (where fitted)..................... 3-20
KEYS
Your vehicle can only be driven with the keys spe- Your vehicle can only be driven with the NATS keys, When storing the key press the release button and
cific to your vehicle. A key number plate is supplied which are registered to your vehicle’s NATS com- push key to fold the key back into fob slot.
with your key. Record the key number and keep the ponents. As many as 4 NATS keys can be regis-
key number plate in a safe place, except in the ve- tered and used with one vehicle. The new keys must INTELLIGENT KEY (where fitted)
hicle, in case of the need to duplicate the keys. be registered by a NISSAN dealer or qualified work-
shop prior to use with the NATS of your vehicle.
The key can only be duplicated using an original key
Since the registration process requires erasing all
or the original key number. The key number is re-
memory in the NATS components when registering
quired when you have lost all of the keys and do not
new keys, be sure to take all NATS keys that you
have the original key to duplicate from. If the key is
have to the NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
lost, or you need extra keys, provide an original key
or the key number to a NISSAN dealer or qualified *: Immobilizer
workshop.
CAUTION
CAUTION
Do not allow the NATS key, which contains an SPA2502Z
Do not leave the keys inside the vehicle when electrical transponder, to come into contact with Type A
leaving the vehicle. water or salt water. This could affect the system
function.
NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM
(NATS*) KEY (where fitted) Mechanical key
SPA2543Z
Type B
1. Intelligent Key (2)

JVP0277XZ JVP0298XZ
2. Mechanical key (in the Intelligent Key) (2)
To unfold the key from the fob, press the release 3. Key number plate (1)
1. NATS key (2)
button.
2. Key number plate (1)
3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Your vehicle can only be driven with the Intelligent – Do not place the Intelligent Key for an ex- Mechanical key
Keys, which are registered to your vehicle’s Intelli- tended period in a place where tempera-
gent Key system components and NISSAN Anti- tures exceed 60°C (140°F).
Theft System (NATS*) components. As many as 4
– Do not change or modify the Intelligent
Intelligent Keys can be registered and used with
Key.
one vehicle. The new keys must be registered by a
NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop prior to use – Do not use a magnet key holder.
with the Intelligent Key system and NATS of your – Do not place the Intelligent Key near equip-
vehicle. Since the registration process requires ment that produces a magnetic field such
erasing all memory in the Intelligent Key compo- as a TV, audio equipment, personal com-
nents when registering new keys, be sure to take all puters or mobile telephones.
Intelligent Keys that you have to the NISSAN dealer SPA2033Z
or qualified workshop. – Do not allow the Intelligent Key to come

into contact with water or salt water, and To remove the mechanical key, release the lock knob
*: Immobilizer do not wash it in a washing machine. This at the back of the Intelligent Key.
CAUTION could affect the system function.
To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it into the
• Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you. • If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN Intelligent Key until the lock knob returns to the lock
Do not leave the vehicle with the Intelligent recommends erasing the ID code of that In- position.
Key inside. telligent Key. This will prevent the Intelligent
Key from unauthorised use to unlock the ve- Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock the doors
• Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you
hicle. For information regarding the erasing and glove box (where fitted). (See “Door locks” later
when driving. The Intelligent Key is a preci- in this section and “Storage” in the “2. Instruments
procedure, please contact a NISSAN dealer
sion device with a built-in transmitter. To avoid and controls” section.)
damaging it, please note the following.
– The Intelligent Key is water resistant; how-
ever, wetting may damage the Intelligent
Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, imme-
diately wipe until it is completely dry.
– Do not bend, drop or strike it against an-
other object.
– If the outside temperature is below -10°C
(14°F) degrees, the battery of the Intelli-
gent Key may not function properly.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3

DOOR LOCKS
Locking the doors with the integrated keyfob, the LOCKING WITH KEY
WARNING Intelligent Key (where fitted) or the key will lock all
• Always look before opening any doors, to doors including the back door and activate the Su-
avoid an accident with oncoming traffic. per Lock System.
• Never leave children or adults who would nor- This means that none of the doors can be opened
mally require the support of others alone in from the inside in order to prevent theft.
the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate The system will be released when the door is un-
switches or controls and inadvertently locked with the integrated keyfob, Intelligent Key
become involved in a serious accident. (where fitted) or key.
SUPER LOCK SYSTEM (where fitted) The Super Lock System will not activate when the
JVP0289XZ
doors are locked with the power door lock switch.
WARNING
Emergency situations Model without Super Lock System
For Super Lock System equipped models, failure
to follow the precautions below may lead to haz- If the Super Lock System is activated due to a traf-
To lock the door, insert the key to the door key cyl-
ardous situations. Make sure the Super Lock Sys- fic accident or other unexpected circumstances
inder and turn the key to the front side of the vehicle
tem activation is always safely conducted. while you are in the vehicle:
j1.
• When the vehicle is occupied, never lock the • Place the ignition switch to the ON position, the
All doors including the back door will lock.
doors with the integrated keyfob or the Intel- Super Lock System will be released and all the
doors can be unlocked with the power door lock To unlock the door insert the key to the door key cyl-
ligent Key (where fitted). Doing so will trap
switch. You can then open the doors. inder and turn the key to the rear side of the vehicle
the occupants, since the Super Lock System
j2.
prevents the doors from being opened from • Remove the key from the ignition switch and un-
the inside of the vehicle. lock the door using the integrated keyfob or the All doors including the back door will unlock. In the
Intelligent Key (where fitted). The Super Lock selective door unlock mode, only the driver’s side
• Only operate the integrated keyfob or the In-
System will be released and you can open the door will unlock.
telligent Key (where fitted) lock button when
door.
there is a clear view of the vehicle. This is to Model with Super Lock System
prevent anybody from being trapped inside
the vehicle through the Supper Lock System To lock the door, insert the key to the door key cyl-
activation. inder and turn the key to the front side of the vehicle
j1.
All doors including the back door will lock and the
Super Lock System will activate.

To unlock the door insert the key to the door key cyl- Type A (for models without Super Lock Type B (for models with Super Lock
inder and turn the key to the rear side of the vehicle System) System)
j2.
All doors including the back door will unlock and the
Super Lock System will deactivate.
In the selective door unlock mode, only the driver’s
side door will unlock and Super Lock System will
deactivate for all doors.
When the key is in the ignition switch or the ignition
switch is pushed in (Intelligent Key equipped model),
turning the key cannot lock the doors.
SPA2726Z SPA2791Z
LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB
CAUTION To lock the front doors, push the inside lock knob to To unlock and open the door, pull the inside door
the lock position j1 , and then close the door while handle as illustrated.
When locking the doors using the inside lock
pulling the door handle.
knob, be sure not to leave the key in the vehicle. The doors cannot be opened by using the inside
To lock the rear doors, push the inside lock knob to door handle when the Super Lock System is acti-
the lock position j
1 and then close the door. vated.
Operating the driver’s side lock knob will lock or
unlock all the doors (where fitted).
To unlock, pull the inside lock knob to the unlock
position j
2.
When the driver’s door is locked, you do not need
to operate the inside lock knob. Just pull the inside
door handle to open the driver’s door.

LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR CAUTION CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK
LOCK SWITCH • When locking the doors using the power door
lock switch, be sure not to leave the key in the
vehicle.
• When the Intelligent Key is left in the vehicle,
and you try to lock the door using the power
door lock switch after getting out of the ve-
hicle, all the doors will unlock automatically
after the door is closed.
To unlock, push the power door lock switch to the
JVP0279XZ
unlock position j
2.
NPA1371
Driver’s armrest With the ignition switch in the ON position, the door The child safety rear door locks help prevent rear
lock indicator light (located on the instrument doors from being opened accidentally, especially
panel) (where fitted) will illuminate and stay on. With when small children are in the vehicle.
the ignition switch in the OFF or LOCK position, the
door lock indicator light will illuminate for 30 When the levers are in the lock position j
1 , the
minutes. child safety rear door locks engage and the rear
doors can only be opened by the outside door
handles.
To disengage, move the levers to the unlock posi-
tion j
2.
SPA2804Z
Passenger’s armrest (where fitted)
Operating the power door lock switch (located on

the driver’s and front passenger’s doors) will lock or
unlock all the doors.
To lock the doors, push the power door lock switch
to the lock position j
1.

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY
SYSTEM (where fitted)
The remote keyless entry system can operate all • Do not place the integrated keyfob for an ex- Locking doors
door locks (including the back door) using the inte- tended period in an area where temperatures
grated keyfob. The remote controller can operate at exceed 60°C (140°F). 1. Remove the ignition key.
a distance of approximately 1 m (3.3 ft) away from 2. Close all doors.
If an integrated keyfob is lost or stolen, NISSAN
the vehicle. The operating distance depends upon
recommends erasing the ID code of that integrated 3. Push the LOCK button j
2 on the inte-
the conditions around the vehicle.
keyfob from the vehicle. This may prevent the unau- grated keyfob.
As many as 4 integrated keyfobs can be used with thorised use of the integrated keyfob to unlock the
one vehicle. For information about the purchase and vehicle. For information regarding the erasing pro- 4. All doors will be locked. The door lock indicator
use of additional integrated keyfobs, contact a cedure, contact a NISSAN dealer or qualified work- light (located on the instrument panel) will
NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop. shop. illuminate for 1 minutes (where fitted).
The integrated keyfob will not function under the fol- For information regarding the replacement of a bat- 5. Operate door handles to confirm that the doors
lowing conditions: tery, see “Battery” in the “8. Maintenance and have been securely locked.
do-it-yourself” section. CAUTION
• When the distance between the integrated key-
fob and vehicle is more than approximately 1 m USING REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY After locking the doors using the integrated key-
(3.3 ft). SYSTEM fob, be sure that the doors have been securely
locked by operating the door handles.
• When the integrated keyfob battery is
discharged. Unlocking doors
• When the key is in the ignition switch. 1. Push the UNLOCK button j
3 on the inte-
CAUTION grated keyfob.
2. All doors will be unlocked.
• When locking the doors using the integrated
keyfob, be sure not to leave the key in the All doors will be locked automatically unless one of
vehicle. the following operations is performed within 30 sec-
onds or 1 minute after pushing the UNLOCK
• Do not allow the integrated keyfob, which
JVP0278XZ button j 3.
contains electrical components, to come into
contact with water or salt water. This could • Opening any doors.
affect the system function. 1
j Jackknife type key release button
• Inserting the key into the ignition switch.
• Do not drop the integrated keyfob. 2
j LOCK button
• Do not strike the remote controller sharply 3
j UNLOCK button
against another object.
4
j Battery indicator light

Selective door unlock mode: • Locking the doors with the integrated keyfob.
When you first receive the vehicle, the door unlock • Switching the interior light switch to the OFF
mode is set to unlock all the doors with one push of position.
the UNLOCK button j 3 . The door unlock
mode can be switched to the selective door unlock Battery indicator light
mode, which unlocks the passenger’s doors at the The battery indicator light j
4 illuminates when you
second push of the UNLOCK button j3. push any button. If the light does not illuminate, the
Selective door unlock mode: battery is weak or needs replacement. For informa-
tion regarding replacement of a battery, see
1. Push the UNLOCK button j
3 on the inte- “Battery” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself”
grated keyfob. section.
2. The driver’s door unlock. HAZARD INDICATOR OPERATION
3. Push the UNLOCK button j
3 on the inte- When you lock or unlock the doors, the hazard indi-
grated keyfob again. cator will flash as a confirmation.
4. All doors will be unlocked.
• LOCK: The hazard indicator flashes once.
To switch to the selective door unlock mode, per-
form the following procedure.
• UNLOCK: The hazard indicator flashes twice.
Push the LOCK j2 and UNLOCK but-

tons j
3 simultaneously for more than 5 seconds.
Perform the same procedure to deactivate the se-
lective door unlock mode.
Interior light timer (where fitted):
The interior light timer activates and the interior lights
illuminate for 15 seconds when a door is unlocked
and the interior light switch is in the DOOR position.
The interior lights can be turned off without waiting
for 15 seconds by performing one of the following
operations.
• Turning the ignition switch to the ON position.

INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM
(where fitted)
Hazard indicator mode

DOOR LOCK DOOR UNLOCK
Remote keyless entry system HAZARD - once HAZARD - twice
SPA2502Z
Type A
SPA2543Z
Type B
1. Intelligent Key (2)

2. Mechanical key (in the Intelligent Key) (2)
3. Key number plate (1)

The Intelligent Key is always communicating with Since the Intelligent Key is continuously receiving
WARNING the vehicle as it receives radio waves. The Intelligent radio waves, if the key is left near equipment which
• Radio waves could adversely affect electric Key system transmits weak radio waves. Environ- transmits strong radio waves, such as signals from
medical equipment. Those who use a pace- mental conditions may interfere with the operation a TV and personal computer, the battery life may
maker should contact the electric medical of the Intelligent Key system under the following become shorter.
equipment manufacturer for the possible in- operating conditions.
Because the steering wheel is locked electrically,
fluences before use.
• When operating near a location where strong unlocking the steering wheel with the ignition switch
• The Intelligent Key transmits radio waves radio waves are transmitted, such as a TV tower, in the LOCK position is impossible when the vehicle
when the buttons are pushed. The radio power station and broadcasting station. battery is completely discharged. Pay special atten-
waves may affect aircraft navigation and com- tion that the vehicle battery is not completely dis-
munication systems. Do not operate the Intel-
• When in possession of wireless equipment, such
charged.
as a mobile telephone, transceiver, and CB ra-
ligent Key while on an aeroplane. Make sure dio. As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be used with one
the buttons are not operated unintentionally vehicle. For information about the purchase and use
when the unit is stored during a flight. • When the Intelligent Key is in contact with or
of additional Intelligent Keys, contact a NISSAN
covered by metallic materials.
The Intelligent Key system can operate all the door dealer or qualified workshop.
and the back door using the integrated keyfob func- • When any type of radio wave remote control is
CAUTION
tion or pushing the request switch on the vehicle used nearby.
without taking the key out from a pocket or purse. • When the Intelligent Key is placed near an elec- • Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which con-
The operating environment and/or conditions may tains electrical components, to come into con-
tric appliance such as a personal computer.
affect the Intelligent Key system operation. tact with water or salt water. This could affect
Be sure to read the following before using the Intel-
• When the vehicle is parked near a parking meter. the system function.
ligent Key system. In such cases, correct the operating conditions be- • Do not drop the Intelligent Key.
fore using the Intelligent Key function or use the
CAUTION mechanical key. • Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply
against another object.
• Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you Although the life of the battery varies depending on
when operating the vehicle. the operating conditions, the battery’s life is approxi- • Do not change or modify the Intelligent Key.
• Never leave the Intelligent Key in the vehicle mately 2 years. If the battery is discharged, replace • Wetting may damage the Intelligent Key. If the
when you leave the vehicle. it with a new one. Intelligent Key gets wet, immediately wipe un-
til it is completely dry.
• When the outside temperature is extremely For information regarding replacement of a battery,
low, the Intelligent Key system may not func- see “Battery” in the “8. Maintenance and • Do not place the Intelligent Key for an ex-
tion properly. do-it-yourself” section. tended period in an area where temperatures
exceed 60°C (140°F).

• If the outside temperature is below −10°C OPERATING RANGE USING INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM
(14°F), the battery of the Intelligent Key may
not function properly.
• Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a key
holder that contains a magnet.
• Do not place the Intelligent Key near equip-
ment that produces a magnetic field, such as
a TV, audio equipment and personal comput-
ers.
If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN recom-
SPA2074Z SPA2408Z
mends erasing the ID code of that Intelligent Key
from the vehicle. This may prevent the unauthorised
use of the Intelligent Key to operate the vehicle. For The Intelligent Key functions can only be used when The request switch will not function under the fol-
information regarding the erasing procedure, con- the Intelligent Key is within the specified operating lowing conditions:
tact a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop. range from the request switch j 1.
• When the Intelligent Key is left inside the vehicle
For information regarding replacement of a battery, When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or
see “Battery” in the “8. Maintenance and strong radio waves are present near the operating • When the Intelligent Key is not within the opera-
tional range
do-it-yourself” section. location, the Intelligent Key system’s operating
The Intelligent Key function can be disabled. For
range becomes narrower, and the Intelligent Key • When any door is open or not closed securely
may not function properly.
information about disabling the Intelligent Key func- • When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged
tion, contact a NISSAN dealer or qualified work- The operating range is within 80 cm (31.50 in) from
shop. each request switch j1.
• When the ignition switch is in the ON position
If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door glass,

handle or rear bumper the request switches may not
function.
When the Intelligent Key is within the operating
range, it is possible for anyone, even someone who
does not carry the Intelligent Key, to push the re-
quest switch and lock/unlock the doors.

unlocked but will not open. Release the door When you lock or unlock the doors or open the back
handle once and pull it again to open the door. door, the hazard indicator will flash and the outside
chime will sound (where fitted) as a confirmation.
Welcome light and farewell light function
When you lock or unlock the doors including the
back door, the clearance lights, tail lights and the
number plate light will illuminate for a period of time.
The welcome light and farewell light function can be
disabled. For information about disabling the wel-
SPA2407Z
come light and farewell light function, contact a
NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
• Do not push the door handle request switch with SPA2710Z
Locking doors
the Intelligent Key held in your hand as illustrated.
The close distance to the door handle will cause 1. Place the ignition switch in the OFF position.
the Intelligent Key system to have difficulty rec-
2. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
ognising that the Intelligent Key is outside the
vehicle. 3. Close all doors.
• After locking the doors using the door handle A (driver’s

4. Push the door handle request switch j
request switch, make sure that the doors have or front passenger’s) or the back door request
been securely locked by operating the door switch jB.
handles. 5. All doors and the back door will be locked. The
• When locking the doors using the door handle door lock indicator light (located on the
request switch, make sure to have the Intelligent SPA2545Z instrument panel) will illuminate for 1 minutes
Key in your possession before operating the door (where fitted).
handle request switch to prevent the Intelligent When you carry the Intelligent Key with you, you can 6. Operate door handles to confirm that the doors
Key from being left in the vehicle. lock or unlock all doors by pushing the door handle have been securely locked.
request switch (driver’s or front passenger’s) j
A or
• The door handle request switch is operational
back door request switch j B within the range of Lockout protection:
only when the Intelligent Key has been detected
by the Intelligent Key system. operation. To prevent the Intelligent Key from being acciden-
tally locked in the vehicle, lockout protection is
• Do not pull the door handle before pushing the equipped with the Intelligent Key system.
door handle request switch. The door will be

• When the Intelligent Key is left in the vehicle and Unlocking doors handle to its original position will unlock the door. If
you try to lock the door using the driver’s inside the door does not unlock, after returning the door
lock knob after getting out of the vehicle, all the Switching door unlock mode: handle, push the door handle request switch to un-
doors will unlock automatically and a chime will To switch the door unlock mode from one to an- lock the door.
sound after the door is closed. other, see “Vehicle information display” in the “2. In-
All doors will be locked automatically unless one of
struments and controls” section.
• When the Intelligent Key is left in the vehicle the following operations is performed within 1 minute
while the driver’s door is opened and you try to Selective door unlock mode (where fitted): or 30 seconds after pushing the request switch while
lock the door using the power door lock switch 1. Carry the Intelligent Key with you. the doors are locked.
after getting out of the vehicle, an inside warning
chime will sound after the power door lock switch 2. Push the door handle request switch j
A or the • Opening any doors.
or the driver’s inside lock knob is operated. back door request switch j
B. • Pushing the ignition switch.
CAUTION 3. Driver’s door handle or back door request switch: If during the preset time period the UNLOCK
Only the corresponding door will be unlocked. button on the Intelligent Key is pushed, all doors will
The lockout protection may not function under
be locked automatically after the next preset time.
the following conditions: Front passenger’s door handle request switch:
Opening power back door (where fitted)
• When the Intelligent Key is placed on top of All doors (including the back door) will be un-
the instrument panel. locked. (Selective door unlock mode is not avail- 1. Carry the Intelligent Key.
• When the Intelligent Key is placed on the ton- able.) C.
2. Push the power back door opener switch j
neau cover (where fitted). 4. Push the door handle request switch again within 3. The back door will unlock and automatically
• When the Intelligent Key is placed inside of 5 seconds. open.
the glove box. 5. All doors will be unlocked. The hazard indicator flashes 4 times and the outside
• When the Intelligent Key is placed inside of 6. Operate the door handles to open the doors. chime sounds.
the door pockets.
All door unlock mode: To close the back door, push the power back door
• When the Intelligent Key is placed on or under
1. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
button on the Intelligent Key, the power back door
the spare tyre area. switch on the instrument panel or the lower part of
2. Push the door handle request switch j
A or back the back door. (See “Back door” later in this sec-
• When the Intelligent Key is placed inside or
door request switch j
B. tion.)
near metallic materials.
3. All doors and the back door will be unlocked.
The lockout protection may function when the
Intelligent Key is outside the vehicle but is too If a door handle is pulled while unlocking the doors,
close to the vehicle. that door may not be unlocked. Returning the door

WARNING SIGNALS
The Intelligent Key system is equipped with a func-
tion that is designed to minimise improper opera-
tions and to help prevent the vehicle from being sto-
len. The warning buzzer sounds and the warning
light illuminates or the warning display appears on
the vehicle information display when improper op-
erations are detected.
CAUTION
When the buzzer sounds and the warning light
illuminates or the warning display appears, be
sure to check both the vehicle and the Intelligent
Key.

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Symptom Possible cause Action to take

The Shift to Park warning appears on
the vehicle information display and the
When pushing the ignition switch to inside warning chime sounds continu- The shift lever is not in the P (Park) Shift the shift lever to the P (Park)
stop the engine ously or for a few seconds. (Xtronic position. position.
CVT (Continuously Variable Transmis-
sion) models)
When opening the driver’s door to get The inside warning chime sounds The ignition switch is in the OFF posi-
Close the door securely.
out of the vehicle continuously. tion.
The Key System Fault warning in the
meter blinks in yellow, the outside
The ignition switch is in the ON posi- Place the ignition switch in the OFF
chime sounds 3 times and the inside
tion. position.
warning chime sounds for a few
When closing the door after getting seconds.
out of the vehicle The Shift to Park warning appears on
the vehicle information display and the The ignition switch is in the OFF posi- Move the shift lever to the P (Park)
outside chime sounds continuously. tion and the shift lever is not in the P position and place the ignition switch
(Xtronic CVT (Continuously Variable (Park) position. in the OFF position.
Transmission) models)
When pushing the request switch or
The outside chime sounds for a few The Intelligent Key is inside the
the LOCK m button on the Intel- Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
seconds and all the doors unlock. vehicle.
ligent Key to lock the door
When closing the door with the inside The outside chime sounds for a few The Intelligent Key is inside the
Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
lock knob turned to LOCK seconds and all the doors unlock. vehicle or luggage room.
The Intelligent Key is inside the
vehicle or luggage room.
When pushing the door handle The outside chime sounds for a few
A door is not closed securely. Close the door securely.
request switch to lock the door seconds.
The door handle request switch is Push the door handle request switch
pushed before the door is closed. after the door is closed.

Symptom Possible cause Action to take
Replace the battery with a new one.
The Key System Fault warning in the
The battery charge is low. (See “Battery” in the “8. Maintenance
meter blinks in green.
and do-it-yourself” section.)
When pushing the ignition switch to
start the engine The Key System Fault warning in the
meter blinks in yellow and the inside The Intelligent Key is not in the
warning chime sounds for a few vehicle.
seconds.
It warns of a malfunction with the
The Key System Fault warning in the Contact a NISSAN dealer or qualified
When pushing the ignition switch electrical steering lock system or the
meter illuminates in yellow. workshop.
Intelligent Key system.

USING REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY Operating range CAUTION
FUNCTION It is possible to lock/unlock all doors including the After locking the doors using the Intelligent Key,
back door using the remote keyless entry system. be sure that the doors have been securely locked
The operating distance depends upon the condi- by operating the door handles.
tions around the vehicle. To securely operate the
Unlocking doors
lock and unlock buttons, approach the vehicle to
about 1 m (3.3 ft) from the door. When you first receive the vehicle, the door unlock
mode is set to unlock all the doors with one push of
The remote keyless entry system will not function
the UNLOCK button j B . The door unlock mode can
under the following conditions:
be switched to the selective door unlock mode
• When the Intelligent Key is not within the opera- (where fitted).
tional range. To change the door unlock mode from one to an-
SPA2349Z
Type A • When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged. other, see “Vehicle information display” in the “2. In-
struments and controls” section.
For information regarding the replacement of a bat-
tery, see “Battery” in the “8. Maintenance and All door unlock mode:
do-it-yourself” section. 1. Push the UNLOCK button j
B on the Intelligent
Locking doors Key.
1. Place the ignition switch in the OFF position and 2. All doors (including the back door) will be un-
carry the Intelligent Key. locked.
2. Close all doors (including the back door). Selective door unlock mode (where fitted):
3. Push the LOCK button j
A on the Intelligent Key. 1. Push the UNLOCK button j
SPA2546Z Key.
Type B 4. All doors will be locked. The door lock indicator
light (located on the instrument panel) will 2. The driver’s door will be unlocked.
A LOCK button
j illuminate for 1 minutes (where fitted). 3. Push the UNLOCK button j
B UNLOCK button
j Key again.
5. Operate the door handles to confirm that the
C Power back door button (where fitted)
j doors have been securely locked. 4. All doors (including the back door) will be un-
locked.

Automatic relock: HAZARD INDICATOR AND HORN
All doors will be locked automatically unless one of OPERATION
the following operations is performed within 30 sec-
When you lock or unlock the doors or the back door
onds or 1 minute after pushing the UNLOCK button
with the request switch or the remote keyless entry
jB on the Intelligent Key while the doors are locked. function, the hazard indicator will flash and the out-
If during this 30 seconds or 1 minute time period, side chime will sound as a confirmation.
the UNLOCK button j B on the Intelligent Key is
pushed, all doors will be locked automatically after The following descriptions show how the hazard
another 30 seconds or 1 minute. indicator will activate and the outside chime will
sound when locking or unlocking the doors or back
• Opening any door or back door. door.
• Pushing the ignition switch.
Opening or closing back door
(where fitted)
Opening:
1. Push the power back door button C for
j
more than 1 second.
2. The back door will automatically open.
The hazard indicator flashes 4 times and the outside
chime sounds.
Closing:
1. Push the power back door button C.
j
2. The back door will automatically close.
The hazard indicator flashes 4 times and the outside
chime sounds.
If the button jC is pushed while the back door
is being opened or closed, the back door will re-
verse.

SECURITY SYSTEM
Hazard indicator mode Your vehicle has either or both of the following se-
curity systems:
Operation DOOR LOCK DOOR UNLOCK
Intelligent Key system (using
• Theft warning
door handle or back door request HAZARD - once HAZARD - twice • NISSAN Anti-theft System (NATS)*
switch) The security condition will be shown by the security
Remote keyless entry system indicator light.
HAZARD - once HAZARD - twice
(using m or m button)
(* immobilizer)
THEFT WARNING SYSTEM
(where fitted)
The theft warning system provides visual and audio
alarm signals if parts of the vehicle are disturbed.
Security indicator light
SIC2045Z
The security indicator light, located on the meter

panel, operates whenever the ignition switch is in
the LOCK or OFF position. This is normal.

For models with ultrasonic sensor Theft warning system operation: Cancel switch for ultrasonic sensor:
How to activate system: The warning system will give the following alarm:
1. Close all windows and sunroof (where fitted). • The hazard indicator or headlight blinks and the
alarm sounds intermittently for approximately 30
2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF position. seconds. (The alarm will repeat 8 times.)
3. Carry the integrated keyfob or the Intelligent Key
with you and get out of the vehicle.
• The alarm automatically turns off after approxi-
mately 30 seconds. However, the alarm reacti-
4. Make sure the bonnet and the back door are vates if the vehicle is tampered with again.
closed. Close and lock all doors with the inte- The alarm is activated when:
grated keyfob, the Intelligent Key or the request JVP0311XZ
switch. • operating the door or the back door without us-
ing the integrated keyfob, the Intelligent Key or
If a door or the bonnet is open, the buzzer will The ultrasonic sensors j A (volumetric sensing), lo-
the request switch.
sound. The buzzer will stop when the door is cor- cated on the ceiling, detect movement in the pas-
rectly closed. • opening the bonnet. senger’s compartment. When the theft warning sys-
5. Confirm that the security indicator light comes • the volumetric sensing system (ultrasonic sen- tem is set to the armed position, it will automatically
switch on the ultrasonic sensor.
on. The security indicator light blinks rapidly for sors) is triggered (when it is activated).
approximately 20 seconds and then blinks slowly.
The system is now activated. If, during this 20-
• the power supply is disconnected. It is possible to exclude the ultrasonic sensors (for
example, when leaving pets inside the car or trans-
second time period, the door is unlocked by the How to stop alarm: porting the vehicle on a ferry).
integrated keyfob, the Intelligent Key or the re- • The alarm will stop by unlocking a door with the
To exclude the ultrasonic sensors:
quest switch, or the ignition switch is placed in request switch (where fitted) or the UNLOCK
the ON position, the system will not activate. button on the Intelligent Key. 1. Close all the windows.
Even when the driver and/or passengers are in • The alarm will stop if the ignition switch is placed 2. Place the ignition switch to the OFF position.
the vehicle, the system will activate with all doors in the ON position.
locked and the ignition switch off. Place the igni- 3. Push the cancel switch j B located on the ceil-
tion switch in the ON position to turn the system ing. The security indicator light will start flashing
off. rapidly.
If the system malfunctions, the short beep

sounds 5 times when the system is activated.
Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer or
qualified workshop.

4. Close the doors, bonnet and back door. Lock 5. Start the engine. Be sure to bring all NATS keys that you have
them using the integrated keyfob, the Intelligent when visiting a NISSAN dealer or qualified work-
6. Repeat the steps above until all possible interfer-
Key or the request switch. The security indicator shop for service.
ences are eliminated.
light will start flashing faster and a buzzer will
sound once. If this procedure allows the engine to start, NISSAN
recommends placing the registered NATS key sepa-
The ultrasonic sensor is now excluded from the theft
rate from other devices to avoid interference.
warning system. All other functions of the system
remain activated until the theft warning system is Security indicator light
disarmed again.
NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM (NATS)
The NISSAN Anti-Theft System (NATS) will not al-
low the engine to start without the use of the regis-
tered NATS key.
If the engine does not start using the registered
NATS key, it may be due to interference caused by:
• Another NATS key.
SIC2045Z
• Automated toll road device.
• Automated payment device. The security indicator light is located on the meter
• Other devices that transmit similar signals. panel. It indicates the status of NATS.
Start the engine using the following procedure: The light operates whenever the ignition switch is in
the LOCK, OFF or ÀCC position. The security indi-
1. Remove any items that may be causing the inter- cator light indicates that the security systems on the
ference away from the NATS key. vehicle are operational.
2. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position for If NATS is malfunctioning, this light will remain on
approximately 5 seconds. while the ignition switch is in the ON position.
3. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or LOCK If the light remains on and/or the engine does
position, and wait approximately 10 seconds. not start, contact a NISSAN dealer or qualified
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 again. workshop for NATS service as soon as possible.

BONNET
WARNING
• The bonnet must be closed and latched se-
curely before driving. Failure to do so could
cause the bonnet to fly open and result in an
accident.
• Never open the bonnet if steam or smoke is
coming from the engine compartment to
avoid injury.
JVP0288XZ
OPENING BONNET CLOSING BONNET

1. Pull the bonnet lock release handle j
1 located 1. While supporting the bonnet, return the support
below the instrument panel until the bonnet rod to its original position.
springs up.
2. Slowly lower the bonnet to about 20 to 30 cm (8
2. Locate the lever j 2 in between the bonnet and to 12 in) above the bonnet lock, then let it drop.
grille, and push the lever sideways with your fin-
3. Make sure it is securely latched.
gertips.
3. Raise the bonnet.
4. Remove the support rod and insert it into the slot
j3.
Hold the coated parts j A when removing or re-
setting the support rod. Avoid direct contact with
the metal parts, as they may be hot immediately
after the engine has been stopped.

BACK DOOR
The back door can be unlocked by: Power back door main switch
WARNING
• pushing the UNLOCK button on the key.
• Always be sure the back door has been closed
securely to prevent it from opening while driv- • pushing the back door request switch (where fit-
ing. ted).
• Do not drive with the back door open. This • pushing the door handle request switch (where
could allow dangerous exhaust gases to be fitted).
drawn into the vehicle. See “Exhaust gas (car- • pushing the power door lock switch to the un-
bon monoxide)” in the “5. Starting and driving” lock position.
section for exhaust gas.
To close the back door, pull down until it securely
• Do not leave children unattended inside the locks.
JVP0282XZ
vehicle. They could unknowingly activate

switches or controls. Unattended children OPERATING POWER BACK DOOR 1 Power open (hands-free operation)
j
could become involved in serious accidents. (where fitted)
2 Power open/close (switch operation)
j
• Always be sure that hands and feet are clear To operate the power back door, the shift lever must
3 Manual operation
j
of the door frame to avoid injury while closing be in the P (Park) position.
the back door. The power back door operation can be turned on or
The power back door will not operate if the battery
off with the power back door main switch on the
OPERATING MANUAL BACK DOOR voltage is low.
instrument panel.
When the power door main switch is pushed to the
OFF position j 3 (Type A) or j 2 (Type B), power
operation is available by using the power back door
button on the Intelligent Key.
JVP0281XZ
To open the back door, unlock it and push the

opener switch j
A . Pull up the back door to open.

Power open (switch operation) The hazard flashes 4 times and the outside chime
sounds when the back door starts opening.
NOTE
The back door can be opened by the power back
door switch j A or the power back door button
C even if the back door is locked. The back
j
door can be unlocked and opened independently
of the other doors, even when they are locked.
NIC2551 Power open (hands-free operation)
JVP0290XZ Power back door button - Key (where fitted)
Power back door switch — Instrument panel
JVP0286XZ
JVP0285XZ
JVP0283XZ Power back door switch — Back door

Back door opener switch When the back door is fully closed, the back door When the back door is fully closed, the back door
will fully open automatically by: will fully open automatically by hands-free operation.
1. Carry the Intelligent Key.
• pushing the power back door switch j A on the
instrument panel for more than 1 second 2. Put your hand or luggage near the hands-free
sensor j
E , as illustrated, for about 1 second.
• pushing the back door opener switch j
B
3. The back door will unlock and automatically
• pushing the power back door button j
C on the
open.
key for more than 1 second

The back door will open regardless of the lock sta- • All doors will lock while the hands-free sensor free sensor, place the power back door main
tus. is being used. switch to the j2 position or j
3 position.
The hands-free sensor will not function under the • If dirt attaches to the surface of the hands- • The hands-free sensor detects objects by in-
following conditions: free sensor, the sensor may not function. Wipe frared light. Never move the sensor. If the lo-
the sensor using a clean cloth. cation of the sensor, angle of the sensor or
• When the Intelligent Key is not carried with you.
direction of light irradiation change, it may
• When the back door is open. • If water is splashed to the area around the
lead to non-operation, incorrect detection or
hands-free sensor, it may cause a malfunc-
other operating malfunctions.
• When automatic operation of the back door is tion.
being performed.
• The operating range j
F of the hands-free sen- • If the automatic open/close operation is per-
formed consecutively, the safety mode acti-
• When the Power back door main switch is not in sor is within 80 mm (3.1 in) of the centre of
vates and the operation cannot be performed
position j1. the sensor.
for a certain period of time. In this case, wait
See, “Power back door main switch” earlier in
CAUTION for a while and then perform the operation.
this section.
The hazard flashes 4 times and the outside chime • The back door may open even if something Power close
other than your hand or luggage enters the
sounds when the back door starts opening. When the back door is fully opened, the back door
operating range of the hands-free sensor
when the Intelligent Key is carried with you. will fully close automatically by:
• Even if the Intelligent Key is carried with you, • pushing the power back door switch j
A on the
the back door cannot be opened when some- instrument panel
thing such as a leather glove which absorbs • pushing the power back door switch j
D on the
the light is put under the hands-free sensor. lower part of the back door
• The back door may not open, if the headlights, • pushing the power back door button j
C on the
sunlight or another light source shines directly key for more than 1 second
on the sensor, or an accessory such as a
frame is attached to the number plate, even if The hazard flashes 4 times and the outside chime
JVP0302XZ
your hand or luggage enters the operating sounds when the back door starts closing.
range of the hands-free sensor when the In- Reverse function
NOTE telligent Key is carried with you.
The power back door will reverse immediately if one
• The back door cannot be closed automati-
• When washing, waxing or maintaining your ve- of the following actions is performed during power
cally by using the hands-free sensor j
E. hicle, placing or replacing the body cover, or open or power close.
splashing water to the area around the hands-

• pushing the power back door switch j
A on the
WARNING
• Do not let children operate the back door.
instrument panel
BACK DOOR RELEASE LEVER
There is a small distance immediately before the
• pushing the power back door switch j
D on the
closed position that cannot be detected. Make
lower part of the back door
sure that all passengers keep their hands, etc.,
• pushing the power back door button C on
j clear from the back door opening before closing
the key. the back door.
The outside chime sounds when the back door starts Manual mode
to reverse.
If power operation is not available, the back door
Auto reverse function can be operated manually. Power operation may not
The auto-reverse function enables the back door to be available if multiple obstacles have been detected
automatically reverse when something is caught in in a single power cycle or if the battery voltage is JVP0280XZ
the back door as it is opening or closing. When the low. When the power back door main switch is in
control unit detects an obstacle, the back door will the OFF position, the back door can be opened
If the back door cannot be opened with the power
reverse and return to the full open or full close posi- manually by pushing the back door opener switch.
door lock switch due to a discharged battery, follow
tion. If the power back door opener switch is pushed
these steps.
during power open or close, the power operation
If a second obstacle is detected, the back door will be cancelled and the back door can be oper- 1. Fold the rear seats down. See “Folding” in the
motion will stop. The back door will enter the manual ated manually. “1. Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental
mode. restraint system” section.
AUTO CLOSURE (where fitted)
A pinch sensor is mounted on each side of the back 2. Insert a suitable tool in the access opening. Move
door. If an obstacle is detected by the pinch sensor If the back door is pulled down to a partly open posi- the release lever to the right. The back door will
during power close, the back door will reverse and tion, the back door will pull itself to the closed posi- be unlatched.
return to the full open position immediately. tion.
3. Push the back door up to open.
NOTE Do not apply excessive force when the auto clo-
sure is operating. Excessive force applied may Contact a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop as
If the pinch sensor is damaged or removed, the cause the mechanism to malfunction. soon as possible for repair.
power close function will not operate.
CAUTION
• The back door will automatically close from a
partly open position. To avoid pinching, keep
hands and fingers away from back door open-
ing.

FUEL-FILLER LID
GARAGE MODE SYSTEM WARNING

OPENING FUEL-FILLER LID
The back door can be set to open to a specific
height by performing the following: • Fuel is extremely flammable and highly explo-
sive under certain conditions. You could be
1. Open the back door using the request switch or burned or seriously injured if it is misused or
the Intelligent Key. mishandled. Always stop the engine and do
not smoke or allow open flames or sparks
2. Pull the back door down to the desired position
near the vehicle when refuelling.
and hold the back door (the back door will have
some resistance when being manually adjusted). • Fuel may be under pressure. Turn the cap a
3. While holding the back door in position, press half of a turn, and wait for any “hissing” sound
and hold the back door switch j to stop to prevent fuel from spraying out and
D located on the SPA2336Z
possibly causing personal injury. Then remove
back door for approximately 3 seconds or until 2
the cap.
beeps are heard. To open the fuel-filler lid, pull the fuel-filler lid release
The back door will open to the selected position set- • Use only an original equipment type fuel-filler handle.
ting. To change the position of the back door, re- cap as a replacement. It has a built-in safety
valve needed for proper operation of the fuel FUEL-FILLER CAP
peat steps 1-3 for setting the position of the back
door. system and emission control system. An in-
correct cap can result in a serious malfunc-
CAUTION tion and possible injury.
Do not set the height of the back door below
approximately 1/3 of the way to the floor using
garage mode. Even if you set the height below
approximately 1/3 of the way to the floor, the
height will automatically be set to approximately
1/3 of the way to the floor.
SPA2800Z
The fuel-filler cap is a ratcheting type. Turn the cap

anticlockwise j 1 to remove. Tighten the cap clock-
wise j 2 until ratchet clicks, more than twice, after
refuelling.

STEERING WHEEL MIRRORS
Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap holder j

A while
refuelling. WARNING
CAUTION Adjust the position of all mirrors before driving.

Do not adjust the mirror positions while driving
If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body, flush it away so that full attention may be given to vehicle op-
with water to avoid paint damage. eration.
INSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR
While holding the inside rearview mirror, adjust the
mirror angles until the desired position is achieved.
JVP0301XZ
Manual anti-glare type

WARNING
Never adjust the steering wheel while driving so
that full attention may be given to vehicle opera-
tion.
Pull the lock lever j
1 down and adjust the steering
wheel up, down, forward or rearward to the desired
position. Push the lock lever up securely to lock the
steering wheel in place.
SPA2143Z
Pull the adjusting lever j

1 when the glare from the
headlights of the vehicle behind you obstructs your
vision at night.
Push the adjusting lever j2 during the day for the
best rearward visibility.

Automatic anti-glare type OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRRORS 2. Adjust each mirror by pushing the switch until
the desired position is achieved j
2.
WARNING Defogging
• Never touch the outside rearview mirrors The outside rearview mirrors will be heated when
while they are in motion. Doing so may pinch the rear window defogger switch is operated.
your fingers or damage the mirror.
Folding
• Never drive the vehicle with the outside rear-
Remote control type:
view mirrors folded. This reduces rear view
visibility and may lead to an accident.
SPA2162Z • Objects viewed in the outside mirror are
closer than they appear (where fitted).
The inside rearview mirror is designed so that it • The picture dimensions and distance in the
automatically changes reflection according to the outside mirrors are not real.
intensity of the headlights of the vehicle following
you.
Adjusting
The anti-glare system will be automatically turned on
when you place the ignition switch in the ON posi- JVP0134XZ
tion.
When the system is turned on, the indicator light j
B The outside rearview mirror remote control operates
will illuminate and excessive glare from the head- when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON posi-
lights of the vehicle behind you will be reduced. tion.
Push the switch j A for 3 seconds to make the The outside rearview mirrors automatically fold when
inside rearview mirror operate normally and the indi- the outside rearview mirror folding switch is pushed
cator light will turn off. Push the switch again JVP0133XZ in. To unfold, push to the switch again.
for 3 seconds to turn the system on. CAUTION
Do not hang any objects on the mirror or apply The outside rearview mirror remote control operates
Continuously performing the fold/unfold opera-
glass cleaner. Doing so will reduce the sensitivity when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON posi-
tion of the outside rearview mirror may cause the
of the sensor j C , resulting in improper operation.
switch to stop the operation.
tion. 1. Turn the switch to select the left or right mirror
j1.

PARKING BRAKE
Manual control type: AUTOMATIC OPERATION

WARNING
The electronic parking brake is automatically ap-
• Never drive the vehicle with the parking brake
plied when the engine is turned off with the ignition
applied. The brake will overheat and fail to
switch (for MT model).
operate and will lead to an accident.
The electronic parking brake is automatically re-
• Never release the parking brake from outside
leased as soon as the vehicle starts while the accel-
the vehicle. If the vehicle moves, it will be
erator pedal is depressed.
impossible to push the footbrake pedal and
will lead to an accident. For Xtronic CVT model, the driver’s seat belt needs
to be fastened.
JVP0194XZ
• Never use the shift lever in place of the park-
ing brake. When parking, be sure the parking
brake is fully applied. WARNING
Fold the outside rearview mirror by pushing it to-
ward the rear of the vehicle. • Never leave children or adults who would nor- • The electronic parking brake will not be auto-
mally require the support of others alone in matically applied if the engine is stopped with-
VANITY MIRROR your vehicle. They could unknowingly release out using the ignition switch (for example, by
the parking brake and inadvertently become engine stalling).
involved in a serious accident. • Before leaving the vehicle, move the shift le-
ver to the 1 (1st) or R (Reverse) position (for
MT model) or P (Park) position (Xtronic CVT
model) and check that the electronic parking
brake warning light is illuminated to
confirm that the electronic parking brake is
applied. The electronic parking brake warning
light will remain on for a period of time after
the driver’s door is locked.
SPA1733Z
CAUTION
JVP0310XZ
To use the front vanity mirror, pull down the sun When parking in an area where the outside tem-
visor and pull up the cover. perature is below 0 °C (32 °F), do not apply the
The electronic parking brake can be applied or re- parking brake to prevent it from freezing.
leased automatically or by operating the parking
brake switch.

For safe parking, place the shift lever in the 1 NOTE • When pulling the electronic parking brake
(1st) or R (Reverse) position (MT model) or P switch up with the ignition switch in the OFF
(Park) position (Xtronic CVT model) and securely • A buzzer will sound if the vehicle is driven
or ACC position, the parking brake switch in-
without releasing the parking brake. See
block the wheels. dicator light will continue to illuminate for a
“Parking brake reminder chime” in the “2. In-
short period of time.
NOTE struments and controls” section.
• When towing a trailer
• To keep the electronic parking brake released While the electronic parking brake is applied
after the engine is turned off, place the igni- or released, an operating sound is heard from Depending on the weight of the vehicle and trailer
tion switch in the OFF position, depress the the lower side of the rear seat. This is normal and the steepness of the slope, there may be a ten-
brake pedal and push down the parking brake and does not indicate a malfunction. dency for the vehicle to move backwards when start-
switch before opening the driver’s door. ing from a standstill. When this occurs, you can use
• When the electronic parking brake is
the parking brake switch in the same way as a con-
• If a malfunction occurs in the electric parking frequently applied and released in a short pe-
ventional lever type parking brake.
brake system (for example, due to battery dis- riod of time, the parking brake may not oper-
charge), contact a NISSAN dealer or qualified ate in order to prevent the parking brake sys- Before starting on sloping roads when towing a
workshop. tem from overheating. If this occurs, operate trailer, be sure to read the following to prevent the
the electronic parking brake switch again af- vehicle from moving backward unintentionally.
MANUAL OPERATION ter waiting approximately 1 minute.
1. Pull and hold the parking brake switch while de-
The electronic parking brake will not be automati-
cally applied if the engine is stopped without using
• If the electronic parking brake must be ap- pressing the accelerator pedal and engaging the
plied while driving in an emergency, pull up clutch (MT models).
the ignition switch (for example, by engine stalling). and hold the parking brake switch. When you
In such a case, you have to apply the parking brake 2. Release the parking brake switch as soon as the
release the parking brake switch, the parking
manually. engine is delivering enough torque to the wheels.
brake will be released.
To apply: Pull the switch up j
1 . The indicator light
jA will illuminate.
• While pulling up the electronic parking brake
switch during driving, the parking brake is ap-
To release: With the ignition switch in the ON posi- plied and a chime sounds. The electronic
tion, depress the brake pedal and push the switch parking brake warning light in the meter and
down j 2 . The indicator light j
A will turn off. in the parking brake switch illuminate. This
does not indicate a malfunction. The elec-
Before driving, check that the electronic parking tronic parking brake warning light in the meter
brake warning light goes out. For additional and in the parking brake switch turn off when
information, see “ Electronic parking brake warning the parking brake is released.
light” in the “2. Instruments and controls” section.

NOTE

4 Display screen, heater and air conditioner,
and audio system
Safety precautions ................................................... 4-2 Manual air conditioner and heater ....................... 4-26
Centre multi-function control panel (models with Automatic air conditioner and heater ................... 4-28
navigation system) ................................................... 4-2 Servicing air conditioner ..................................... 4-29
How to use touch screen display ........................ 4-3 Heated Windscreen button (where fitted)................. 4-30
How to use brightness control/display on/off ThermaClear Heated Windscreen (where
button................................................................. 4-3 fitted).................................................................. 4-30
How to use ENTER/Scroll dial ............................ 4-3 Audio system (where fitted)...................................... 4-30
How to use BACK button ................................... 4-4 Audio operation precautions ............................... 4-30
Vehicle information and settings (models with Antenna.............................................................. 4-38
navigation system) ................................................... 4-4 FM-AM Radio with Compact Disc (CD) player
How to use INFO button..................................... 4-4 (Type A) ............................................................. 4-39
How to use SETUP button.................................. 4-4 FM-AM Radio with Compact Disc (CD) player
Around view monitor (where fitted)........................... 4-6 (Type B) ............................................................. 4-47
Available views ................................................... 4-7 NissanConnect App smartphone integration
Difference between predictive and actual (where fitted) ...................................................... 4-53
distances............................................................ 4-10 USB (Universal Serial Bus) connection port ........ 4-53
How to switch the display ................................... 4-11 AUX (Auxiliary) input jack .................................... 4-54
Camera aiding corner sensor function (where Steering wheel mounted controls for audio ......... 4-54
fitted).................................................................. 4-11 Disc/USB memory care and cleaning.................. 4-55
Moving Object Detection (MOD) function Car phone or CB radio (where fitted)....................... 4-55
(where fitted) ...................................................... 4-12 Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System (Type A)...... 4-56
Park Assist (PA) (where fitted) ............................ 4-14 Regulatory information ........................................ 4-56
How to adjust the screen .................................... 4-22 Control buttons and microphone......................... 4-57
Operating tips..................................................... 4-23 Bluetooth® settings ............................................ 4-57
Vents....................................................................... 4-23 Using the system ................................................ 4-59
Centre vents....................................................... 4-23 General settings ................................................. 4-62
Side vents .......................................................... 4-24 Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System (Type B)...... 4-63
Rear vents (where fitted)..................................... 4-24 Regulatory information ........................................ 4-63
Heater and air conditioner........................................ 4-24 Control buttons and microphone......................... 4-64
Operating tips (for automatic air conditioner)....... 4-25 Pairing procedure ............................................... 4-64
Phonebook ......................................................... 4-64 Ending a call....................................................... 4-65
Making a call ...................................................... 4-64 Bluetooth® settings ............................................ 4-65
Receiving a call................................................... 4-65 Telephone setup ................................................. 4-65
During a call ....................................................... 4-65
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS CENTRE MULTI-FUNCTION CONTROL PANEL (models with navigation
system)
WARNING
• Do not adjust the display controls, heater and
air conditioner controls or audio controls while
driving, so that full attention may be given to
vehicle operation.
• If you noticed any foreign objects entering the
system hardware, spilled liquid on the sys-
tem, or noticed smoke or fumes coming out
from the system, or any other unusual opera-
tion is observed, stop using the system imme-
diately and contact the nearest NISSAN dealer
or qualified workshop. Ignoring such condi-
tions may lead to an accident, fire or electric
shock.
• Do not disassemble or modify this system. If
you do, it may lead to an accident, fire, or
electric shock.
CAUTION
To prevent battery discharge, do not use the sys-
tem for extended periods of time when the en-
gine is not running. JVH0829X
1. Display screen (P. 4-3) 5. Brightness control/display on/off button

(P. 4-3)
2. For navigation system control buttons refer to
the separate Navigation System Owner’s 6. ENTER/Scroll dial (P. 4-3)
Manual.
7. BACK button (P. 4-4)
3. INFO button (P. 4-4)
8. SETUP button (P.4-4)
4. Power/VOLUME dial (P. 4-48)
4-2 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system
HOW TO USE TOUCH SCREEN Touch screen operation • Delete:
DISPLAY Deletes the last entered character with one
touch. Touch and hold the delete key to delete all
WARNING of the characters.
• The glass display screen may break if it is hit • OK:
with a hard or sharp object. If the glass screen
Completes the character input.
breaks, do not touch it. Doing so could result
in an injury. Touch screen maintenance
• To clean the display, never use a rough cloth, To clean the display screen, use a dry, soft cloth. If
alcohol, benzine, thinner or any kind of sol- additional cleaning is necessary, use a small amount
JVH0881XZ
vent or paper towel with a chemical cleaning of neutral detergent with a soft cloth. Never spray
agent. They will scratch or deteriorate the the screen with water or detergent. Dampen the
panel. Selecting items: cloth first and then wipe the screen.
• Do not splash any liquid such as water or car Touch an item to select. For example, to select the
HOW TO USE BRIGHTNESS
fragrance on the display. Contact with liquid [Treble] key, touch the [Treble] key on the screen.
Touch up/down arrow j 1 on the screen to display CONTROL/DISPLAY ON/OFF
will cause the system to malfunction.
the previous or the next page. BUTTON
To help ensure safe driving, some functions cannot
Adjusting items: Push the brightness control/display on/off [ ]
be operated while driving.
button to change the display brightness between
The on-screen functions that are not available while Touch the [+] or [-] j
2 key to adjust the settings of day mode and night mode. While the mode is being
driving will be “greyed out” or muted. an item. displayed, the brightness can be adjusted using the
Entering characters: scrolling dial.
Park the vehicle in a safe location and then operate
the navigation system. Touch the letter or number key on the keyboard Push and hold the brightness control/display on/off
screen. Options below are available when inputting [ ] button for more than 2 seconds to turn the
CAUTION
characters. display off. Push the button again to turn the display
• ALWAYS give your full attention to driving.
• 123/ABC: on.
• Avoid using vehicle features that could dis-
Changes the keyboard between numbers and HOW TO USE ENTER/SCROLL DIAL
tract you. If distracted, you could lose control
alphabets. Turn the ENTER/Scroll dial to select items on the
of your vehicle and cause an accident.
screen and to adjust the levels of setting items. Push
• Space:
the dial to confirm the selected item or setting.
Inserts a space.
Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-3
VEHICLE INFORMATION AND SETTINGS (models with navigation system)
HOW TO USE BACK BUTTON Vehicle information can be checked and various set- HOW TO USE SETUP BUTTON
tings can be adjusted on the display.
Push the BACK button to return to the previous
screen. Designs and items displayed on the screen may
vary depending on the models and specifications.
HOW TO USE INFO BUTTON
Push the INFO button to display the following infor-
mation on the display screen.
Available items:
• My Apps JVH0647XZ
• Traffic Messages Example
• Eco Score Push the SETUP button to view and adjust the fol-
lowing setting items.
My Apps
Available items:
Some application services can be used with this
system when linked to your smartphone. For details, • Audio
see “NissanConnect App smartphone integration
(where fitted)” later in this section.
• Navigation
• Telephone & Bluetooth
Traffic Messages
• System
Traffic Messages can be displayed on the display
screen when available. Refer to the separate Navi- – Display
gation System Owner’s Manual for details. – Clock
Eco Score – Language
The Eco Score feature analyses driving behaviour – Camera Display Settings (where fitted)
and provides an overall score.
– Temperature Unit
– Touch Click
– Beep Tones
– Factory Settings
• Traffic Messages Navigation settings Clock:
• Radio Navigation settings can be changed. See Naviga- Select the corresponding keys to adjust the set-
tion System Owner’s Manual for details. tings.
Audio settings
Audio settings can be adjusted from the audio setup Telephone & Bluetooth settings • Time Format:
screen. Telephone & Bluetooth settings can be changed. The time setting can be selected from 12 hour
See “Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System and 24 hour formats.
1. Push the SETUP button.
2. Select the [Audio] key.
(Type B)” later in this section for details. • Date Format:
System settings The day, month and year display can be selected
3. Select the item you wish to adjust. from five formats.
Various system settings can be adjusted from the
Bass/Treble/Balance/Fade: system settings. • Clock Mode:
Touch the adjustment bar next to the corresponding
1. Push the SETUP button. Select the clock mode from Manual, Time Zone
keys on the display to adjust the tone quality and
and Auto.
speaker balance. 2. Select the [System] key.
When [Manual] is selected, you can set the clock
The levels of these features can also be adjusted 3. Select the item you wish to adjust.
mode manually from the [SET CLOCK MANU-
with the ENTER/Scroll dial. See “FM-AM Radio with Display: ALLY] screen.
Compact Disc (CD) player (Type B)” later in this
section for audio operations. Select the corresponding keys to adjust the set- Select [Auto] to automatically maintain the time
tings. using GPS.
Speed Sensitive Vol.:
Speed sensitive volume function increases the vol-
• Brightness: • Set Clock Manually:
ume of the audio system as the speed of the vehicle Adjusts the brightness of the display. Mode (AM/PM) (where fitted), Hours, Minutes,
increases. Choose the desired effect level from 0 Day, Month and Year can be set manually if
(OFF) to 5. The higher the setting, the more the vol-
• Display Mode:
[Manual] is selected in the Clock Mode setting.
ume increases in relation to vehicle speed. Adjusts to fit the level of lighting in the vehicle.
Touch the [Display Mode] key to cycle through • Daylight Savings Time:
AUX Level:
options of the mode (Day, Night and Auto). Turns the daylight savings time on or off.
This feature controls the volume level of incoming
sound when an auxiliary device is connected to the • Scroll Direction: • Time Zone:
system. Select the level from [Low] (Quiet), [Me- Adjusts the direction of the menu scroll. Choose Select the applicable time zone from the list.
dium], and [High] (Loud). either the up arrow or the down arrow.
AROUND VIEW MONITOR
(where fitted)
Language: Radio settings

Select a language to be displayed on the screen. RDS and Traffic Announcement (TA) related set-
Camera Display Settings (where fitted): tings can be turned on or off. When this item is
turned on, the received traffic announcement infor-
See “How to adjust the screen” later in this section
mation will be tuned to automatically when received.
for details.
Traffic Announcement (TA) information can be re-
Temperature Unit:
ceived only in the area where the service is avail-
Select the temperature unit from °C and °F. able.
Touch Click: JVH0658XZ
Turns the touchscreen click feature on or off. When
turned on, a click sound will be heard every time a With the ignition switch in the ON position, push the
key on the screen is touched. CAMERA button or move the shift lever to the R
Beep Tones: (Reverse) position to operate the Around View Moni-
Turns the beep tones feature on or off. When turned tor. The monitor displays various views of the posi-
on, a beep sound will be heard as a pop-up mes- tion of the vehicle.
sage appears on the screen. Available views:
Factory Settings: • Bird’s-eye View
Select this key to return all settings to default. The surrounding view of the vehicle.
Traffic Messages settings • Front-side View
Traffic information guidance, announcement and The view around and ahead of the front passen-
warning settings can be adjusted. ger’s side wheel.
Traffic Announcement (TA) information can be re- • Front View
ceived only in the area where the service is avail-
able. The view to the front of the vehicle.
• Rear View
The view to the rear of the vehicle.
The system is designed as an aid to the driver in
situations such as slot parking or parallel parking.
CAUTION
WARNING
Clean the camera lens with soft cloth to keep it
• The Around View Monitor is a convenient fea- free from dirt, snow, etc. Do not scratch the lens
ture but it is not a substitute for proper ve- when cleaning.
hicle operation because it has areas where
objects cannot be viewed. Always look out AVAILABLE VIEWS
the windows and check mirrors to be sure
that it is safe to move. WARNING
• The driver is always responsible for safety dur- • The distance guide line and the vehicle width
ing parking and other manoeuvres. line should be used as a reference only when
the vehicle is on a paved, level surface. The
• Do not use the Around View Monitor with the
distance viewed on the monitor is for refer-
outside mirror in the stored position, and
ence only and may be different than the ac-
make sure that the back door is securely
tual distance between the vehicle and dis-
closed when operating the vehicle using the
played objects.
Around View Monitor.
• The distance between objects viewed on the • Use the displayed lines and the bird’s-eye
Around View Monitor differs from the actual view as a reference. The lines and the bird’s-
eye view are greatly affected by the number
distance.
of occupants, fuel level, vehicle position, road
• The cameras are installed above the front condition and road grade.
grille, the outside mirrors and above the rear
number plate. Do not put anything on the • If the tyres are replaced with different sized
cameras. tyres, the predictive course line and the bird’s-
JVH0730X
eye view may be displayed incorrectly.
• When washing the vehicle with high-pressure
• When driving the vehicle up a hill, objects
There are some areas where the system will not dis- water, be sure not to spray it around the cam-
eras. Otherwise, water may enter the camera viewed in the monitor are further than they
play objects. When in the front or the rear view dis-
unit causing water condensation on the lens, appear. When driving the vehicle down a hill,
play, an object below the bumper or on the ground
a malfunction, fire or an electric shock. objects viewed in the monitor are closer than
may not be displayed j 1 . When in the bird’s-eye
they appear.
view, a tall object near the seam of the camera de-
tecting areas will not appear in the monitor j2. • Do not strike the cameras. They are precision
• Use the mirrors or actually look to properly
instruments. Doing so could cause a malfunc-
tion or cause damage resulting in a fire or an judge distances to other objects.
electric shock.
• The vehicle width and predictive course lines • Red line j
1 : approx. 0.5 m (1.5 ft) • The displayed lines on the rear view will ap-
are wider than the actual width and course. pear slightly off to the right because the rear
• Yellow line j
2 : approx.1 m (3 ft)
view camera is not installed in the rear centre
Front and rear view • Green line j
3 : approx. 2 m (7 ft) of the vehicle.
• Green line j
4 : approx. 3 m (10 ft) NOTE
Vehicle width guide lines j
5: When the monitor displays the front view and the
Indicate the vehicle width when reversing. steering wheel turns about 90 degrees or less
from the neutral position, both the right and left
6:
Predictive course lines j predictive course lines j6 are displayed. When
Indicate the predictive course when operating the the steering wheel turns about 90 degrees or
vehicle. The predictive course lines will be displayed more, a predictive course line is displayed only
on the monitor when the steering wheel is turned. on the opposite side of the turn.
SAA1840Z The predictive course lines will move depending on Bird’s-eye view
Front view how much the steering wheel is turned and will not
be displayed while the steering wheel is in the
straight ahead position.
The front view will not be displayed when the vehicle
speed is above 10 km/h (6 MPH).
WARNING
• The distance between objects viewed in the
rear view may differ from the actual distance.
Objects in the monitor will appear visually op- SAA1841Z
SAA1896Z posite from those viewed in the inside and

Rear view outside mirrors. The bird’s-eye view shows the overhead view of the
Guiding lines, which indicate the vehicle width and • On a snow-covered or slippery road, there vehicle which helps confirm the vehicle position and
distances to objects with reference to the vehicle may be a difference between the predictive the predicted course to a parking space.
body line jA , are displayed on the monitor. course line and the actual course line. The vehicle icon j 1 shows the position of the ve-
Distance guide lines: hicle. Note that the distance between objects viewed
in the bird’s-eye view differs from the actual dis-
Indicate distances from the vehicle body.
tance.
The areas that the cameras cannot cover j
2 are Front-side view CAUTION
indicated in black.
• Do not scratch the camera lens when clean-
After the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, ing dirt or snow.
the nonviewable area j 2 is highlighted in yellow for
3 seconds after the bird’s-eye view is displayed. • The turn signal light may overlap with the side-
of-vehicle line. This is not a malfunction.
When the corner of the vehicle moves closer to an
object, the corner sensor indicators j 3 (where fit-
ted) appear. See “Parking sensor system (where
fitted)” in the “5. Starting and driving” section for
more information.
SAA1842Z
WARNING
Guiding lines:
• Objects in the bird’s-eye view will appear fur-
ther than the actual distance because the Guiding lines that indicate the width and the front
bird’s-eye view is a pseudo view that is pro- end of the vehicle are displayed on the monitor.
cessed by combining the views from the cam-
eras on the outside mirrors, the front and the The front-of-vehicle line j
1 shows the front part of
rear of the vehicle. the vehicle.
The side-of-vehicle line j
2 shows the vehicle width
• Tall objects, such as a kerb or vehicle, may be
including the outside mirrors.
misaligned or not displayed at the seam of
the views. The extensions j3 of both the front j
1 and side j
2
lines are shown with a green dotted line.
• Objects that are above the camera cannot be
displayed. The corner sensor indicator j 4 (where fitted) will
appear when a corner of the vehicle moves closer to
• The view for the bird’s-eye view may be mis-
an object. The corner sensor indicator j 4 (where
aligned when the camera position alters.
fitted) can be turned off when the Front Sensor set-
• A line on the ground may be misaligned and is ting is turned off on the vehicle information display.
not seen as being straight at the seam of the See “Driver Assistance (where fitted)” in the “2. In-
views. The misalignment will increase as the struments and controls” section.
line proceeds away from the vehicle.
DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTIVE B.
actual 1 m (3 ft) distance on the hill is the place j actual 1 m (3 ft) distance on the hill is the place j
B.
AND ACTUAL DISTANCES Note that any object on the hill is viewed in the moni- Note that any object on the hill is viewed in the moni-
tor further than it appears. tor closer than it appears.
Reversing on a steep uphill
Reversing on a steep downhill Reversing near a projecting object
JVH0207X
JVH0208X JVH0787X
When reversing the vehicle up a hill, the distance

guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines are When reversing the vehicle down a hill, the distance The predictive course lines jA do not touch the
shown closer than the actual distance. For example, guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines are object on the display. However, the vehicle may hit
the display shows 1 m (3 ft) to the place j
A , but the shown further than the actual distance. For example, the object if it projects over the actual moving
the display shows 1 m (3 ft) to the place j
A , but the course.
Reversing behind a projecting object HOW TO SWITCH THE DISPLAY The display automatically changes to the Around
View Monitor displaying front view/bird’s-eye view
when:
• The shift lever is in the D (Drive) position (Xtronic
CVT model) or the shift lever is out of the R
(Reverse) position (MT model), and the parking
sensor (where fitted) detects that the vehicle is
approaching an object.
The display will switch back to the previously dis-
played screen from the Around View Monitor screen
JVH0874XZ when:
• The shift lever is in the D (Drive) position (Xtronic
With the ignition switch in the ON position, push the CVT model) or the shift lever is out of the R
CAMERA button or move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) position (MT model), and the vehicle
(Reverse) position to operate the Around View Moni- speed increases above approximately 10 km/h
tor. (6 MPH).
The Around View Monitor can display two split • A different screen is selected.
views.
CAMERA AIDING CORNER SENSOR
If the shift lever is not in the R (Reverse) position, the
FUNCTION (where fitted)
available views are:
When the corner of the vehicle moves closer to the
• Front view/bird’s-eye view split screen object while the Around View Monitor is displayed,
JVH0211X • Front view/front-side view split screen an indicator is displayed and a tone is sounded by
the corner sensor function to warn the driver.
If the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position, the
The position j C is shown further than the position available views are: The colour of the corner sensor indicator and the
jB in the display. However, the position j
C is actu- pattern of the tone vary according to the distance to
ally at the same distance as the position j A . The
• Rear view/bird’s-eye view split screen
the object.
vehicle may hit the object when reversing to the • Rear view/front-side view split screen
position j A if the object projects over the actual
moving course.
• Rear view
Keep the corner sensors (located on the front and CAUTION • When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) posi-
rear bumper fascia) free from snow, ice and large tion and the vehicle speed is below approximately
Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as pos-
accumulations of dirt. Do not clean the sensors with 8 km/h (5 MPH), the MOD system detects mov-
sible to hear the tone clearly.
sharp objects. If the sensors are covered, the accu- ing objects in the rear view. The MOD system
racy of the corner sensor function will be dimin- MOVING OBJECT DETECTION (MOD) will not operate if the back door is open.
ished. FUNCTION (where fitted) The MOD system does not detect moving objects in
The tone sound and the sensor indicator display can The Moving Object Detection (MOD) system can the front-side view. The MOD icon is not displayed
be turn on/off, and the volume of the tone sound and inform the driver of moving objects when driving out on the screen when in this view.
the sensor detection range can be adjusted. (See of garages, maneuvering into parking lots and in
“Driver Assistance (where fitted)” in the “2. Instru- other such instances. WARNING
ments and controls” section.)
The MOD system detects moving objects by using • The MOD system is not a substitute for proper
image processing technology on the image shown vehicle operation and does not prevent con-
WARNING
on the display. The rear view camera is equipped tact with the objects surrounding the vehicle.
• The corner sensor function is not designed to with the automatic washer function using window When maneuvering, always use the outside
prevent the object. washer fluid. mirror and inside rearview mirror and turn and
look to check the surroundings to make sure
• The colours of the corner sensor indicator and The MOD system operates in the following condi-
it is safe to manoeuvre.
the distance guide lines in the front/rear view tions when the camera view is displayed:
indicate different distances to the object.
• When the shift lever is in the P (Park) or N (Neu- • The system is deactivated at speeds above 10
km/h (6 MPH). It is reactivated at lower
• Inclement weather may affect the function of tral) position (Xtronic CVT model) or the shift
speeds.
the corner sensor system; this may include lever is out of the R (Reverse) position (MT
reduced performance or a false activation. model) and the vehicle is stopped, the MOD sys- • The system is not designed to prevent contact
tem detects the moving objects in the bird’s-eye with all objects.
• This function is designed as an aid to the driver
view. The MOD system will not operate if the
in detecting large stationary objects to help
outside mirror is moving in or out or if either door
• The MOD system is not designed to detect
avoid damaging the vehicle. The system will surrounding stationary objects.
is opened.
not detect small objects below the bumper,
When the MOD system detects a moving object
and may not detect objects that are too close • When the shift lever is in the D (Drive) position surrounding the vehicle, the yellow frame will be dis-
to the bumper or on the ground. (Xtronic CVT model) or the shift lever is out of played on the view where the objects are detected
the R (Reverse) position (MT model), and the
• If your vehicle sustains damage to the bumper
vehicle speed is below approximately 8 km/h (5
and a chime will sound once. While the MOD sys-
fascia, leaving it misaligned or bent, the sens- tem continues to detect moving objects, the yellow
MPH), the MOD system detects moving objects frame continues to be displayed.
ing zone may be altered causing inaccurate
in the front view.
measurement of obstacles or false alarms.
The MOD icon j 3 is displayed in blue in the view • The MOD system performance will be limited
where the MOD system is operative. The MOD icon according to environmental conditions and
j3 is displayed in grey in the view where the MOD surrounding objects such as:
system is not operative.
– When there is low contrast between back-
If the MOD system is turned off, the MOD icon j
3 ground and the moving objects.
is not displayed.
– When there is blinking source of light.
The MOD system will activate automatically under
– When strong light such as another vehi-
the following conditions:
cle’s headlight or sunlight is present.
JVH0872XZ • When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) posi-
– When there is dirt, water drops or snow on
bird’s-eye view tion.
the camera lens.
• When the CAMERA button is pushed to switch
– When the position of the moving objects in
from a different screen to the camera view on the
the display is not changed.
display.
• When vehicle speed decreases below approxi- • The MOD system might detect flowing water
droplets on the camera lens, white smoke
mately 8 km/h (5 MPH).
from the muffler, moving shadows, etc.
• When the ignition switch is placed in the OFF
• The MOD system may not function properly
position and then back to the ON position.
depending on the speed, direction, distance
The MOD system can be set to remain inactive in or shape of the moving objects.
the vehicle information display. (See “Driver Assis-
JVH0873XZ
tance (where fitted)” in the “2. Instruments and • If your vehicle sustains damage to the parts
front view/rear view where the camera is installed, leaving it mis-
controls” section.)
aligned or bent, the sensing zone may be al-
In the bird’s-eye view, the yellow frame j1 is dis-
tered and the MOD system may not detect
played on each camera image (front, rear, right, left) WARNING objects properly.
depending on where moving objects are detected.
The yellow frame j2 is displayed on view in the front
• Excessive noise (for example, audio system
• When the temperature is extremely high or
volume or open vehicle window) will interfere low, the screen may not display objects
view or rear view modes. with the chime sound, and it may not be heard. clearly. This is not a malfunction.
While the sensor is beeping, the MOD system does
not chime.
Turning the MOD system on or off WARNING
Parallel parking
The MOD system is turned on or off using the ve- Displayed keys and icons:
hicle information display. See “Driver Assistance • PA is designed to support the driver’s steer-
ing wheel operation in a parking lot. It does
(where fitted)” in the “2. Instruments and controls”
not automatically lower the vehicle speed or
section.
avoid contact with objects. As when perform-
MOD malfunction ing ordinary parking manoeuvres, always look
out the windows and check with your own
When the orange MOD icon is displayed in the view,
eyes to be sure that the surrounding and road
the system is not functioning properly. This will not
conditions are safe for the manoeuvres be-
hinder normal driving operation but the system
fore operating the vehicle. Operate the ve-
should be inspected by a NISSAN dealer or quali-
hicle slowly during the parking manoeuvres. If
fied workshop.
the vehicle gets close to people or objects JVH0909XZ
Camera maintenance near the vehicle, avoid making contact by us-

ing the brakes and performing other manoeu-
If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the camera, the vres.
MOD system may not operate properly. Clean the
camera. • Do not touch the spoke of the steering wheel
while the PA is operating. It could cause inju-
The camera washer operates automatically when ries to hands or fingers. Keep neckties,
dirt is detected on the camera during driving. The scarves. etc. away from the steering wheel
washer then stops operation after a period of time. since they may get entangled and cause un-
PARK ASSIST (PA) (where fitted) expected accidents.
Park Assist (PA) is designed to assist drivers with
parallel and perpendicular parking. JVH0908XZ
This system will operate the steering wheel to park

the vehicle in the parking space set by the driver on
the bird’s-eye view screen (perpendicular mode), or
measured by parking sensors in the left/right side of
the front bumper (parallel mode). Screen guidance
for the shift lever operation is also provided during
the parking manoeuvres.
Parallel parking operation 1 Starting the system:
j
JVH0899XZ
JVH0836XZ
1
j :
Touch this key to activate the PA system.
• Drive forward at reduced speed.
2
j :
• Push the CAMERA button, and touch on
the display.
The green PA icon indicates that the PA is
NOTE
operating.
3 Cancel:
j • At a vehicle speed over 30 km/h (19 MPH),
the system will close and the display will dis-
Touch this key to cancel the PA operation. appear.
4
j : • If the bird’s-eye view is not displayed on the
front passenger side of the screen, push the
Touch this key to select perpendicular mode.
JVH0835X
CAMERA button until the bird’s-eye view is
5
j : displayed.
Indicates that an automated steering control is • At a vehicle speed over 10 km/h (6 MPH), the
operating. camera view will not display.
• Parallel parking mode is selected by default.
2 Finding a parking space:
j 4 Moving the vehicle backward:
j 5 Finishing the parking operation:
j
When the vehicle is positioned in the parking space,
depress the brake and stop the vehicle. Touch the
[Cancel] key to terminate the PA system.
NOTE
• Make any necessary adjustments manually
and make turns in reverse as required. De-
pending on the situation, shift lever opera-
tions may be required several times for ma-
JVH0837XZ JVH0838XZ neuvering the vehicle into the parking space.
• If the vehicle reaches the approximate area of
• Slowly move the vehicle forward, and the system • Place the shift lever in the R (Reverse) position. the target parking space found, a chime will
will search for a parking space. sound. A message indicating that the PA op-
• Gently place hands on the steering wheel (the eration is finishing will appear on the display
• The system will indicate that a parking space has steering wheel will be operated automatically) and the PA operation will terminate automati-
been found. and slowly move the vehicle in reverse into the cally.
parking space by moderating the amount of pres-
NOTE sure you apply to the brake. Deactivation of PA:
• Use the turn signal switch to select the pre-
• Stop the vehicle completely when the vehicle The PA will deactivate under the following condi-
ferred side for parking. reaches the proper position to change the move- tions.
• The system cannot detect a parking space ment direction. Then change the shift lever for • When the steering wheel is operated manually.
that is not bordered by objects such as ve- forward or rearward movement. Repetitions of
hicles. this operation may be required for aligning the • When the shift lever is placed in the P (Park)
vehicle straight. position (Xtronic CVT model).
3 Moving the vehicle forward:
j
Slowly move the vehicle forward further to the posi- NOTE • When 5 seconds have passed since the shift
lever was placed and kept in the N (Neutral)
tion for reversing, and then stop the vehicle com-
pletely. The system will provide guidance using
• The system will guide the vehicle to a position position.
where a direction change is required.
chime, indicating that the vehicle has reached the • When the system judges that the conditions
proper position for starting the automatic steering • A warning chime will sound when the vehicle (such as worn out or low pressure tyres, road
operation. speed exceeds the speed limit for the PA op- conditions, etc.) are not suitable for correct
eration. course predictions.
• When the vehicle speed exceeds approximately 8 Clearance guidelines (red):
j
7 km/h (4 MPH).
Indicates an approximate space required for
• When the parking operation by the driver devi- parking.
ates from the PA guidance to some extent.
9 Reverse starting position rectangle (green):
j
Perpendicular parking Indicates a position at which to make a turn in
Displayed keys and icons: reverse.
j
10 :
JVH0902XZ
Indicates that an automated steering control is
operating.
1
j :
Touch this key to activate the PA system.
2 Target parking rectangle (blue):
j
Indicates the target parking position.
JVH0909XZ
3
j :
The green PA icon indicates that the PA is
operating.
4 Cancel:
j
Touch this key to cancel the PA operation.
5 Start:
j
Touch this key to start the PA operation.
6
j :
JVH0910XZ Touch this key to select the parallel mode.
7
j :
Touch this key to adjust the location of the
target parking rectangle.
Perpendicular parking operation 2 Setting the target parking position and
j
starting the operation:
JVH0836XZ
JVH0842XZ
NOTE
If the bird’s-eye view is not displayed on the 1. Slowly move the vehicle forward and stop ap-
front passenger side of the screen, push the proximately 1 m (3 ft) beside the parking space.
CAMERA button until the bird’s-eye view is Adjust the target parking rectangle (blue) posi-
displayed. tion by touching .
3. Touch to select the perpendicular parking NOTE
mode.
• Use the turn signal switch to select a pre-
ferred side for parking.
• The target parking rectangle needs to be
positioned near the actual parking space
JVH0840X before fine adjustments can be made by
touching . The instructions for vehicle
1 Starting the system and selecting parking
j movement during the adjustment are as
mode: follows.
1. Stop the vehicle near the space where you wish – Check the position of the lines and rect-
to park. JVH0911XZ angles with the actual parking space
on the screen while the vehicle is not in
2. Push the CAMERA button and touch on motion.
the display.
– Move the vehicle at a low speed while • The steering wheel is in the straight position. NOTE
checking the surroundings for safety
with your own eyes. • The shift lever is in the positions for forward A warning chime will sound when the vehicle
movement, such as D (Drive) position (Xtronic speed exceeds the speed limit for the PA opera-
– Stop the vehicle again to make sure CVT model) or 1 (1st) position (MT model). tion.
that the vehicle position is in the right
3 Moving the vehicle forward:
j 4 Moving the vehicle backward:
j
place.
• Make sure that any objects are located out-
side the clearance guidelines (red). Other-
wise, the vehicle may hit the objects dur-
ing the manoeuvres. Refer to the following
examples.
Example of perpendicular parking:
JVH0843XZ JVH0844XZ
• Gently place hands on the steering wheel (the • Place the shift lever in the R (Reverse) position.
steering wheel will be operated automatically)
and slowly move the vehicle forward to the re- • Gently place hands on the steering wheel (the
steering wheel will be operated automatically)
verse starting position rectangle (green) by mod-
and slowly move the vehicle in reverse into the
erating the amount of pressure you apply to the
parking space by moderating the amount of pres-
JVH0719XZ brake.
sure you apply to the brake.
• Stop the vehicle completely when the vehicle 5 Finishing the parking operation:
j
1 : Good example
j reaches the reverse starting position rectangle
(green). When the vehicle is positioned in the parking space,
2 : Bad example
j depress on the brake and stop the vehicle. Touch
2. Touch the [Start] key on the screen.
• Depress the brake pedal and stop the vehicle the [Cancel] key to terminate the PA system.
completely when it approaches another vehicle
The PA operation can be started when the fol- or object, or when the vehicle reaches the re-
lowing conditions are met. verse starting position.
• The vehicle is completely stopped.
NOTE 2. Touch the arrow on the screen for fine adjust- • When the system judges that the conditions
ments of the target parking rectangle (blue) posi- (such as worn out or low pressure tyres, road
• Make any necessary adjustments manually
tion. conditions, etc.) are not suitable for correct
and make turns in reverse as required. De-
course predictions.
pending on the situation, shift lever opera- Fine adjustments may be required at parking lots
tions may be required several times for ma- without parking lines or when the automatic fine • When the vehicle backs up to a position behind
neuvering the vehicle into the parking space. adjustments using the parking lines do not work. the place from which PA operation started.
• If the vehicle reaches the approximate area of Make sure that any objects are located outside • When the vehicle passes the reverse starting
the target parking space, a chime will sound. the clearance guidelines (red). position by over 2 m (7 ft).
A message indicating that the PA operation is
ending will appear on the display and the sys-
Operating tips: • When the vehicle speed exceeds approximately
7 km/h (4 MPH).
tem will terminate automatically. • When the target parking rectangle (blue) does
Adjusting the target parking position:
not fit in the actual parking space following the • When the parking operation by the driver devi-
correct procedure, check the surroundings and ates from the PA guidance to some extent.
adjust the location of your vehicle.
Safety notes
• Up to approximately 70 cm (27 in) of fine adjust-
ments can be made. WARNING
Deactivation of PA:
• Do not drive looking only at the screen. It could
The PA will deactivate under the following condi- cause unexpected accidents or cause the ve-
tions. hicle to contact surrounding objects.
• When the steering wheel is operated manually. • When assistance from the PA is no longer nec-
essary, turn off the PA by touching the Cancel
JVH0917XZ
• When the shift lever is placed in the P (Park)
key on the screen. If the PA remains on, the
position (Xtronic CVT model).
steering wheel may operate automatically and
When setting a target parking position, you can
make a fine adjustment of the target parking rect-
• When 5 seconds have passed since the shift may cause unexpected accidents.
lever was placed and kept in the N (Neutral)
angle (blue) position. position. • Make sure that there is enough space for
parking manoeuvres before starting to use the
1. Touch on the screen. • When reverse operations are conducted more PA.
than 10 times for steering corrections.
At parking lots with parking lines on the ground,
the PA system will search for the lines and make
• Keep in mind that the front of the vehicle may
swing out towards oncoming traffic while the
fine adjustments automatically. PA functions.
CAUTION – When sudden start, sudden stop or sud- – Parking spaces with objects that absorb
den operation of the shift lever occurs. ultrasonic waves such as fabric and snow.
Do not use the PA under the following condi-
tions. – When the tyre pressure is too low or the – During snowfall or heavy rain.
tyre is worn out.
• On unpaved roads. – Near objects that emits ultrasonic waves
– When tyres are installed that are of a dif- such as horns of other vehicle, noise from
• On slippery roads such as snow-covered or
ferent size from the ones that were a motorcycle engine and large automobile
frozen roads.
equipped at the time of factory shipment. air brake, or sensors of surrounding ve-
• On uneven roads with slants, bumps, kerb-
• When using the parallel parking mode, it is
hicles.
stones, wheel tracks, etc.
not always possible for the system to find an – When the conditions surrounding the park-
• On curved roads. appropriate parking space and may indicate ing space change (i.e., another vehicle en-
parking spaces that are not suitable for park- ters the target parking space after you
• At mechanical parking facilities.
ing. Following are example conditions for pass it).
• Where parking or stopping is prohibited. which the system may not find a parking space Operating tips:
correctly.
• When tyre chains or a spare tyre are installed.
• The parking sensor will automatically turn on
– Parking spaces with objects located above
• When the vehicle is being towed.
the height range of parking sensors (i.e.,
when the PA is activated. When the PA opera-
tion ends, the status of the parking sensor will
• When the doors (including the back door) are overhanging loads, tail sections or loading return to the mode that it was in before the PA
not closed. ramps of goods vehicles). was activated.
• When transporting a load that protrudes from – Parking spaces that are partially occupied
• Depending on the situation, the shift lever opera-
your vehicle. by trailer drawbars. tions may be required several times.
• When the vehicle is laden with heavy loads. – Parking spaces that are littered or over- Malfunction:
grown.
NOTE A warning message will be displayed and the sys-
– Parking spaces where a kerb exists (caus- tem will terminate operation when a malfunction is
• Under the conditions listed below, there may
ing damage of the wheels and tyres). detected in the PA.
be instances in which surrounding objects or
vehicles cut into the vehicle pathway, or when – Parking spaces that are blocked by foli- When the warning message is displayed during the
the vehicle cannot be parked in the correct age, grass, paving, blocks, etc. PA operation, park the vehicle in a safe place and
spot following the PA operation, etc. restart the engine.
– Parking spaces bordered by an obstacle
– When the shift lever is operated while driv- (i.e., a tree, a post or a trailer).
ing.
If the warning message is shown on the display HOW TO ADJUST THE SCREEN
repeatedly or if the PA cannot be operated after
restarting the engine, this may indicate a system Adjusting screen
malfunction. It should not hinder normal driving, but Operation with touch screen:
the vehicle should be inspected by a NISSAN dealer
1. Push the SETUP button.
2. Select the [System] key.
Maintenance
3. Select the [Camera Settings] key.
Refer to “Camera maintenance” earlier in this sec-
tion for maintenance of the camera lens. 4. Select the item you wish to adjust.
Blockages like dirt, ice, and objects such as stick- • Display Mode:
ers and accessories installed within the detection Adjusts to fit the level of lighting in the vehicle.
range of the parking sensor may cause incorrect Touch the [Display Mode] key to cycle through
function of the PA. Clean the sensors regularly with options of the mode (Day, Night and Auto).
care, and do not scratch or damage them.
• Brightness:
Adjusts the brightness of the display.
• Contrast:
Adjusts the level of contrast.
• Colour:
Adjusts the level of the colour.
JVH0916X
Parking sensors are located on the bumpers: 6 on

the front bumper and 4 on the rear bumper.
VENTS
Operation with buttons: after the CAMERA button has been pushed while CENTRE VENTS
the shift lever is in a position other than the R
(Reverse) position.
• The display of images on the screen may be
delayed after screens are switched. Objects in
the Around View Monitor may be distorted mo-
mentarily until the Around View Monitor screen
is displayed completely.
• When the temperature is extremely high or low,
the screen may not display objects clearly. This
JVH0649XZ
is not a malfunction. JVH0662XZ
To adjust the screen brightness when the Around

• When strong light directly shines on the camera,
objects may not be displayed clearly. This is not Open/close the vents by moving the control to ei-
View Monitor is displayed, push the display control/ a malfunction. ther direction.
display on/off button j1.
: This symbol indicates that the vents are
Adjust brightness to the preferred setting using the
• The screen may flicker under fluorescent light.
open. Moving the side control to this di-
This is not a malfunction.
ENTER/Scroll dial j 2. rection will open the vents.
OPERATING TIPS
• The colours of objects on the Around View Moni- : This symbol indicates that the vents are
tor may differ somewhat from those of the actual closed. Moving the side control to this di-
CAUTION object. rection will close the vents.
• Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to clean • Objects on the monitor may not be clear and the Adjust the air flow direction of the vents by moving
the camera. This will cause discoloration. To colour of the object may differ in a dark location the centre knob (up/down, left/right) until the de-
clean the camera, wipe with a cloth damp- or at night. This is not a malfunction. sired position is achieved.
ened with a diluted mild cleaning agent and
then wipe with a dry cloth.
• There may be differences in clearness between
each camera view of the bird’s eye view.
• Do not damage the camera as the monitor
• If dirt, rain or snow attaches to the camera, the
screen may be adversely affected. Around View Monitor may not display objects
• The screen displayed on the Around View Moni- clearly. Clean the camera.
tor will automatically return to the previous screen
when no operation takes place for 3 minutes
• Do not use wax on the camera window. Wipe off
any wax with a clean cloth that has been damp-
ened with a mild detergent diluted with water.
HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER
SIDE VENTS REAR VENTS (where fitted) WARNING

• The heater and air conditioner operate only
when the engine is running.
mally require the support of others alone in
the vehicle. Pets should not be left alone ei-
ther. They could unknowingly activate
switches or controls and inadvertently
become involved in a serious accident and
JVH0663XZ JVH0879XZ injure themselves. On hot, sunny days, tem-
peratures in a closed vehicle could quickly
become high enough to cause severe or pos-
Open/close the vents by moving the control to ei- Open/close the vents by moving the control to ei- sibly fatal injuries to people or animals.
ther direction. ther direction.
: This symbol indicates that the vents are : This symbol indicates that the vents are • Do not use the recirculation mode for long
open. Moving the side control to this di- open. Moving the side control to this di- periods as it may cause the interior air to be-
rection will open the vents. rection will open the vents. come stale and the windows to fog up.
: This symbol indicates that the vents are : This symbol indicates that the vents are • Do not adjust the heating and air conditioning
closed. Moving the side control to this di- closed. Moving the side control to this di- controls while driving so that full attention may
rection will close the vents. rection will close the vents. be given to vehicle operation.
Adjust the air flow direction of the vents by moving Adjust the air flow direction of the vents by moving The heater and air conditioner operate when the
the centre knob (up/down, left/right) until the de- the centre knob (up/down, left/right) until the de- engine is running. The air blower will operate even if
sired position is achieved. sired position is achieved. the engine is turned off and the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position.
NOTE
• Condensation forms inside the air condition-
ing unit when the air conditioner (where fit-
ted) is running, and is safely discharged un-
derneath your vehicle.
Traces of water on the ground are therefore
normal.
• Odours from inside and outside the vehicle OPERATING TIPS (for automatic air The sensors j 1 and j 2 , located on the instrument
can build up in the air conditioner unit. Odour conditioner) panel, help maintain a constant temperature. Do not
can enter the passenger compartment put anything on or around the sensors.
through the vents.
• When parking, set the heater and air condi-
tioner controls to turn off air recirculation to
allow fresh air into the passenger compart-
ment. This should help reduce odours inside
the vehicle.
For models with Stop/Start System:
While the engine is stopped by the Stop/Start Sys-
JVH0727XZ
tem, switching the airflow to the front defogger will
cause the engine to automatically restart.
While the engine is running, selecting airflow to the
front defogger will prevent the Stop/Start System
from automatically stopping the engine.
When the engine is stopped by the Stop/Start Sys-
tem, heater and air conditioner performance may be
reduced. To keep full heater and air conditioner per-
formance, restart the engine by pushing the Stop/
Start System OFF switch, or by placing the ignition
switch in the ON position. For more details see
“Stop/Start OFF switch” in the “5. Starting and JVH0728XZ
driving” section.
When the engine coolant temperature and outside
air temperature are low, the air flow from the foot
outlets may not operate. However, this is not a mal-
function. After the coolant temperature warms up,
the air flow from the foot outlets will operate nor-
mally.
Air flow control:
Push the air flow control buttons to select the air
flow outlets. More than one air flow control button
can be selected at a time.
Air flows mainly from centre and side
m — vents.
Air flows mainly from the foot outlet.
m —
Air flows mainly from the front
JVH0827XZ
m — defogger.
MAX defogging/defrosting:
MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER AND Controls
HEATER Push the front defogger MAX button to turn on
Turning system on/off: the MAX defogging/defrosting mode and quickly
1. Fan speed control dial To turn on the system, turn the fan speed control defog/defrost the windscreen. When this mode is
2. Front defogger MAX button dial out of the OFF position. Turn the dial turned on, the A/C indicator light will turn on and the
anticlockwise to the OFF position to turn off the sys- air circulation will be fixed at the outside air circula-
3. A/C button tem. tion mode. The indicator light will also turn on.
4. Air recirculation button For the best performance, turn the temperature con-
Fan speed control:
trol dial to the maximum hot position and set the fan
5. Rear window defogger button (See Turn the fan speed control dial clockwise to speed at its maximum.
“Defogger switch” in the “2. Instruments and increase the fan speed.
controls” section.) Outside air circulation:
Turn the fan speed control dial anticlockwise
Push the air recirculation button. (The indica-
6. Temperature control dial to decrease the fan speed.
tor light will turn off.) The air flow is drawn from out-
7. Air flow control buttons Temperature control: side the vehicle.
For models with Stop/Start System: Turn the temperature control dial to set the desired Select the outside air circulation mode for normal
temperature. Turn the dial between the middle and heating or air conditioning operation.
The Stop/Start System will not activate when the the right position to select the hot temperature. Turn
front defogger is turned on. the dial between the middle and the left position to Air recirculation:
select the cool temperature. Push the air recirculation button. (The indica-
tor light will illuminate.)
The air will recirculate inside the vehicle.
A/C (Air Conditioner) operation: 4. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired 4. Push the A/C button. (The indicator light will turn
Push the A/C button to turn on or off the air condi- position between the middle and the hot (right) on.)
tioner. When the air conditioner is on, the A/C indi- position.
5. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired
cator light on the button illuminates. Heating and defogging: position between the middle and the cool (left)
This mode heats the interior and defogs the win- position.
Heater operation
dows. A visible mist may be seen coming from the vents in
Heating:
1. Push the air recirculation button. (The indi- hot, humid conditions as the air is cooled rapidly.
This mode is used to direct heated air from the foot This does not indicate a malfunction.
cator light will turn off.)
outlets.
2. Push the and buttons. (The indicator Dehumidified heating:
1. Push the air recirculation button for normal
lights will turn on.) This mode is used to heat and dehumidify the air.
heating. (The indicator light will turn off.)
3. Turn the fan speed control dial to the de- 1. Push the air recirculation button. (The indi-
2. Push the button. (The indicator light will
sired position. cator light will turn off.)
turn on.)
4. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired 2. Push the button. (The indicator light will
3. Turn the fan speed control dial to the de-
position between the middle and the hot (right) turn on.)
sired position.
position.
4. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired
position between the middle and the hot (right) Air conditioner operation sired position.
position. The air conditioner system should be operated for 4. Push the A/C button. (The indicator light will turn
Ventilation: approximately 10 minutes at least once a month. on.)
This helps prevent damage to the air conditioner 5. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired
This mode directs outside air from the side and system due to the lack of lubrication.
centre vents. position between the middle and the hot (right)
Cooling: position.
1. Push the air recirculation button. (The indi-
cator light will turn off.) This mode is used to cool and dehumidify the air.
2. Push the button. (The indicator light will 1. Push the air recirculation button. (The indi-
turn on.) cator light will turn off.)
3. Turn the fan speed control dial to the de- 2. Push the button. (The indicator light will
sired position. turn on.)
sired position.
cator light will turn on) allows the user to inde-
pendently change the driver and passenger
side temperatures with the corresponding
temperature control dial.
• To cancel the separate temperature setting,
push the <DUAL> button (the indicator light
will turn off) and the driver’s side temperature
setting will be applied to both the driver and
passenger sides.
JVH0828XZ A visible mist may be seen coming from the vents in
hot, humid conditions as the air is cooled rapidly.
AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONER AND For models with Stop/Start System: This does not indicate a malfunction.
HEATER The Stop/Start System will not activate when the MAX defrosting/defogging:
1. A/C (Air Conditioner) button front defogger is turned on. Push the front defogger MAX button to turn on
the MAX defogging/defrosting mode and quickly
2. Front defogger MAX button Turning the system on/off
defog/defrost the windscreen. When this mode is
3. Air recirculation button Push the <ON–OFF> button to turn on and off the turned on, the fan will be at its maximum speed, the
system. A/C indicator light will turn on, and the air circulation
4. Fan speed control button will be fixed at the outside air circulation mode.
Automatic operation (AUTO)
5. ON–OFF button Do not set the temperature too low when the front
The AUTO mode may be used year-round as the
6. Rear defogger button (See “Defogger defogger mode is on (the MAX indicator light
system automatically controls the air conditioner to
switch” in the “2. Instruments and controls” is illuminated), because doing so may fog up the
a constant temperature, air flow distribution and fan
section.) windscreen.
speed after the desired temperature is set manually.
7. <AUTO> button/Temperature control dial (for Cooling and dehumidified heating: Manual operation
left side seat)
1. Push the <AUTO> button (the indicator light will The manual mode can be used to control the heater
8. Air flow control buttons turn on). and air conditioner to your desired settings.
9. <DUAL> button/Temperature control dial (for 2. Turn the temperature control dial to set the de- Fan speed control:
right side seat) sired temperature. Push the fan speed control button ( side or
side) to manually control the fan speed.
• When the DUAL indicator light is not illumi-
nated, pushing the <DUAL> button (the indi-
Air flow control: Select the outside air circulation mode for normal “Air conditioner system refrigerant and lubricant” in
Push one of the air flow control buttons to select or heating or air conditioning operation. the “9. Technical information” section.)
deselect the air flow outlets. More than one air flow Air recirculation: A NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop will be able
control button can be selected at a time. Push the air recirculation to service your environmentally friendly air condi-
button to circulate
— Air flows mainly from the centre and side the air flow inside the vehicle. (The indicator light will tioner system.
vents. turn on.) Air conditioner filter
— Air flows mainly from the foot outlet and
NOTE The air conditioner system is equipped with an air
partly from the defogger.
Even if the system is manually set to the air recir- conditioner filter. To make sure the air conditioner
— Air flows mainly from the front defogger
culation mode, when outside temperature and heats, defogs, and ventilates efficiently, replace the
outlets.
coolant temperature are both low, the system filter according the specified maintenance intervals
Temperature control: may automatically switch to the outside air circu- listed in a separate maintenance booklet. To replace
Turn the temperature control dial to set the desired lation mode. the filter, contact a NISSAN dealer or qualified work-
temperature. shop.
SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER
• When the DUAL indicator light is not illuminated, The filter should be replaced if the air flow decreases
pushing the <DUAL> button (the indicator light significantly or if windows fog up easily when oper-
WARNING ating the heater or air conditioner.
will turn on) allows the user to independently
change the driver and passenger side tempera- The air conditioner system contains refrigerant
tures with the corresponding temperature con- under high pressure. To avoid personal injury,
trol dial. any air conditioner service should be done only
by an experienced technician with the proper
• To cancel the separate temperature setting, push equipment.
the <DUAL> button (the indicator light will turn
off) and the driver’s side temperature setting will The air conditioner system in your vehicle is charged
be applied to both the driver and passenger with a refrigerant designed with the environment in
sides. mind.
Outside air circulation: This refrigerant will not harm the earth’s ozone
layer. However, it may contribute in a small part to
To turn on the outside air circulation mode, push the
global warming.
air recirculation button. (The indicator light will
turn off.) The air flow is drawn from outside the Special charging equipment and lubricant are re-
vehicle. quired when servicing your vehicle’s air conditioner.
Using improper refrigerants or lubricants will cause
severe damage to the air conditioner system. (See
HEATED WINDSCREEN BUTTON AUDIO SYSTEM (where fitted)
(where fitted)
THERMACLEAR HEATED If damage occurs to the windscreen have the AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS
WINDSCREEN (where fitted) ThermaClear system checked by a NISSAN
dealer or qualified workshop. WARNING
• Rear window defogger and ThermaClear Do not adjust the audio system while driving so
Heated Windscreen performance may be re- that full attention may be given to vehicle opera-
duced or deactivated to preserve the battery. tion.
• NISSAN recommends using the ThermaClear
Radio
system to support defogging of the
windscreen. For more information, see • Radio reception is affected by station signal
“Heater and air conditioner” in the “4. Display strength, distance from radio transmitter, build-
screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio ings, bridges, mountains and other external influ-
NIC2550 system” section. ences. Intermittent changes in reception quality
Models with ThermaClear Heated Windscreen (where fitted) normally are caused by these external influences.
• During use of the ThermaClear system the
A ThermaClear Heated Windscreen On/Off
j Stop/Start System is unavailable. • Using a mobile phone in or near the vehicle may
influence radio reception quality.
To defog/defrost the windscreen glass, start the
engine and push the ThermaClear button j A . The • Some mobile phones or other devices may cause
indicator light will come on. Push the button again to interference or a buzzing noise to come from the
turn the ThermaClear system off. audio system speakers. Storing the device in a
different location may reduce or eliminate the
The ThermaClear system will turn off automatically noise.
after approximately 4 minutes — if the windscreen
clears before this time, push the button again to turn Compact Disc (CD) player
the ThermaClear system off. • During cold weather or rainy days, the player
NOTE may malfunction due to the humidity. If this oc-
curs, remove the CD from CD player and dehu-
• Before activating the ThermaClear system midify or ventilate the player completely.
make sure to remove excess snow/ice from
the windscreen • The player may skip while driving on rough roads.
• Electrical conductors embedded in the wind- • The CD player sometimes may not function when
screen provide the heating of the windscreen. the passenger compartment temperature is ex-
tremely high. Lower the temperature before use.
• Do not expose the CD to direct sunlight.
• CDs that are of poor quality, or are dirty, • This audio system can only play prerecorded
scratched, covered with fingerprints, or that have CDs. It has no capabilities to record or burn
pin holes may not work properly. CDs.
• The following CDs may not work properly. USB (Universal Serial Bus) connection
– Copy control compact discs (CCCD) port
– Recordable compact discs (CD-R)
WARNING
– Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)
Do not connect, disconnect or operate the USB
• This audio system can only play prerecorded device while driving. Doing so can be a distrac-
CDs. It has no capabilities to record or burn tion. If distracted you could lose control of your
CDs. vehicle and cause an accident or serious injury.
CAUTION
• Do not force the USB device into the USB
port. Inserting the USB device tilted or up-
side-down into the port may damage the port.
Make sure that the USB device is connected
correctly into the USB port (Some USB de-
vices come with a mark as a guide. Make
sure that the mark is facing the correct direc-
tion before inserting the device.).
SAA0480 • Do not grab the USB port cover (where fitted)

when pulling the USB device out of the port.
This could damage the port and the cover.
• Do not use the following CDs as they may cause
the CD player to malfunction. • Do not leave the USB cable in a place where
it can be pulled unintentionally. Pulling the
– 8 cm (3.1 in) discs cable may damage the port.
– CDs that are not round The vehicle is not equipped with a USB device.
– CDs with a paper label USB devices should be purchased separately as
necessary.
– CDs that are warped, scratched or have un-
usual edges.
This system cannot be used to format USB devices. • An iPod nano (2nd Generation) will continue to • The playback of Bluetooth® audio will be paused
To format a USB device, use a personal computer. fast-forward or rewind if it is disconnected dur- under the following conditions. The playback will
ing a seek operation. be resumed after the following conditions are
In some areas, the USB device for the front seats
completed.
plays only sound without images for regulatory rea- • An incorrect song title may appear when the Play
sons, even when the vehicle is parked. Mode is changed while using an iPod nano (2nd – while using a hands-free phone
Generation)
This system supports various USB connection port – while checking a connection with a mobile
devices, USB hard drives and iPod players. Some • Audiobooks may not play in the same order as phone
USB devices may not be supported by this system. they appear on an iPod.
• The in-vehicle antenna for Bluetooth® communi-
• Partitioned USB devices may not play correctly. • Large video files cause slow responses in an cation is built in the system. Do not place the
iPod. The vehicle centre display may momen- Bluetooth® audio device in an area surrounded
• Some characters used in other languages (Chi-
tarily black out, but will soon recover. by metal, far away from the system or in a narrow
nese, Japanese, etc.) may not appear properly in
space where the device closely contacts the
the display. Using English language characters • If an iPod automatically selects large video files
body or the seat. Otherwise, sound degradation
with a USB device is recommended. while in the shuffle mode, the vehicle centre dis-
or connection interference may occur.
play may momentarily black out, but will soon
General notes for USB use:
recover. • While a Bluetooth® audio device is connected
Refer to your device manufacturer’s owner informa- through the Bluetooth® wireless connection, the
tion regarding the proper use and care of the de- Bluetooth® Audio player (where fitted) battery power of the device may discharge
vice. • Some Bluetooth® audio devices may not be quicker than usual.
used with this system. For detailed information
Notes for iPod use:
about Bluetooth® audio devices that are avail-
• This system is compatible with the Bluetooth®
iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the AV profile (A2DP and AVRCP).
able for use with this system, contact a NISSAN
U.S. and other countries. dealer or qualified workshop. Bluetooth® is a trademark
owned by Bluetooth SIG,
• Improperly plugging in the iPod may cause a • Before using a Bluetooth® audio system, the ini- m Inc. and licensed to Visteon
checkmark to be displayed on and off (flicker- tial registration process for the audio device is Corporation and Robert
ing). Always make sure that the iPod is con- necessary. Bosch GmbH.
nected properly.
• Operation of the Bluetooth® audio system may
• An iPod nano (1st Generation) may remain in vary depending on the audio device that is con-
fast forward or rewind mode if it is connected nected. Confirm the operation procedure before
during a seek operation. In this case, please use.
manually reset the iPod.
Compact Disc (CD)/USB device with • Multisession — Multisession is one of the meth- Playback order:
MP3/WMA ods for writing data to media. Writing data once
to the media is called a single session, and writ-
Terms: ing more than once is called a multisession.
• MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures Ex-
• ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is the part
perts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the most well of the encoded MP3 or WMA file that contains
known compressed digital audio file format. This information about the digital music file such as
format allows for near “CD quality” sound, but at song title, artist, album title, encoding bit rate,
a fraction of the size of normal audio files. MP3 track time duration, etc. ID3 tag information is
conversion of an audio track from CD can re- displayed on the Album/Artist/Track title line on
duce the file size by approximately 10:1 ratio the display.
(Sampling: 44.1 kHz, Bit rate: 128 kbps) with
virtually no perceptible loss in quality. MP3 com- * Windows® and Windows Media® are registered
pression removes the redundant and irrelevant trademarks and/or trademarks of Microsoft Corpo-
parts of a sound signal that the human ear ration in the United States of America and/or other
doesn’t hear. countries.
• WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA) is a

compressed audio format created by Microsoft
as an alternative to MP3. The WMA codec offers
greater file compression than the MP3 codec,
enabling storage of more digital audio tracks in
the same amount of space when compared to
MP3s at the same level of quality.
• Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number of bits NAA984
per second used by a digital music files. The size
and quality of a compressed digital audio file is
A Root folder
j
determined by the bit rate used when encoding
the file. B Folder
j
• Sampling frequency — Sampling frequency is C Audio file
j
the rate at which the samples of a signal are con- Music playback order of the CD with MP3/WMA is
verted from analog to digital (A/D conversion) as illustrated above.
per second.
• The folder names of folders not containing MP3/
WMA files are not shown in the display.
• If there is a file in the top level of the disc, [Root
Folder] is displayed.
• The playback order is the order in which the files
were written by the writing software, so the files
might not play in the desired order.
Specification chart (for CD player/Radio Type A):
Supported media CD, CD-R, CD-RW, USB2.0

ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Romeo, Joliet
* ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.
Supported file systems
* Files saved using the Live File System Component (on a Windows Vista-based
computer) are not supported.
Version MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5
MP3 Sampling frequency 8 kHz - 48 kHz
Bit rate 32 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR*4
Supported versions*1
Version WMA7, WMA8, WMA9 (except WMA9 Pro, WMA9 Lossless, WMA9 Voice)
WMA*3 Sampling frequency 32 kHz - 48 kHz
Bit rate 32 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR*4
ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3, VER2.4 (MP3 only)
Tag information (Song title and Artist name)
WMA tag (WMA only)
Folder levels Folder levels: 8, Folders:255 (including root folder), files: 512
01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04:
Displayable character codes*2 UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM Big Endian), 05: UNICODE (UTF-8), 06:
UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM Little Endian)
*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.
*2 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.
*3 Protected WMA files (DRM) cannot be played.
*4 When VBR files are played, the playback time may not be displayed correctly. WMA7 and WMA8 are not applied to VBR.
Specification chart (for CD player/Radio Type B):
Supported media CD, CD-R, CD-RW, USB2.0

ISO9660 LEVEL 1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Apple ISO, Romeo, Joliet
Supported file systems
*ISO9660 LEVEL 3 (packet writing) is not supported.
Version MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5
MP3 Sampling frequency 8 kHz - 48 kHz
Supported Bit rate 8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR
versions*1 Version WMA7, WMA8, WMA9
WMA*2 Sampling frequency 32 kHz - 48 kHz
Bit rate 48 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR
Tag information ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3 (MP3 only)
Folder levels Folder levels: 8, Max folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 512 (Max. 255 files for one folder)
01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-
Displayable character codes*2
BOM Big Endian), 05: UNICODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM Little Endian)
*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.
*2 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.
Troubleshooting guide:
Symptom Cause and Countermeasure

Check if the disc was inserted correctly.
Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.
Check if there is condensation inside the player, and if there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before
using the player.
If there is a temperature increase error, the CD player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.
If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and MP3/WMA files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data)
Cannot play will be played.
Files with extensions other than “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes
and number of characters for folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications.
Check if the disc or the file is generated in an irregular format. This may occur depending on the variation or the setting of
MP3/WMA writing applications or other text editing applications.
Check if the finalisation process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.
Check if the disc is protected by copyright.
Poor sound quality Check if the disc is scratched or dirty or if the bit rate may be too low.
It takes a relatively long time If there are many folder or file levels on the MP3/WMA disc or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be required
before the music starts playing. before the music starts playing.
The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc.,
Music cuts off or skips
might not match the specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.
Skipping with high bit rate files Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.
Move immediately to the next song When a non-MP3/WMA file has been given an extension of “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma”, or when play is
when playing. prohibited by copyright protection, the player will skip to the next song.
The songs do not play back in the The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software, so the files might not play in the
desired order. desired order.
ANTENNA CAUTION
To avoid damaging or deforming the antenna, be
sure to remove the antenna under the following
conditions.
• The vehicle enters an automatic car wash.
• The vehicle enters a garage with a low ceiling.
• The vehicle is covered with a car cover.
JVH0666X
The antenna can be removed if necessary.

Hold the bottom of the antenna and remove by turn-
ing anticlockwise.
To install the antenna, turn the antenna clockwise
and tighten.
11. Phone button
12. Power/VOL (Volume) dial
13. RPT (repeat) button
14. MIX button
15. Station memory buttons
16. A-Z button
17. MENU/ENTER dial
Anti-theft system (where fitted)
Use of a 4-digit radio PIN (Personal Identification
Number) code, known only to the vehicle owner,
effectively reduces the possibility of the audio unit
being stolen. Without the PIN code the audio unit
cannot be activated.
If force is used to try and remove the audio unit, the
Anti-theft system activates and the audio unit is
locked. The only way to unlock the audio unit is to
enter the radio code number shown on an identifica-
tion card supplied with the vehicle documentation.
JVH0830X NOTE
• The 4 digit radio code is shown on a card that
FM-AM RADIO WITH COMPACT 5. Seek/track (rewind) button you received with your vehicle documenta-
tion.
DISC (CD) PLAYER (Type A) 6. Seek/track (fast forward) button
1. DISP (Display) button 7. SETUP button
• Contact a NISSAN dealer or qualified work-
shop if you do lose the 4 digit radio code of
2. RADIO button 8. Back button the audio unit.
3. Day/Night button 9. CD eject button
4. TA button 10. MEDIA button
Unlocking the unit: For example, if the radio code is 5169: for the Power/VOL dial:
If the battery supply to the vehicle is interrupted, the first digit, “5”, push the preset j
1 five times.
audio unit will lock. Power ON/OFF:
4. The second, third, and fourth digits of the radio
When the power is restored and the unit switched code must be entered in the same way, only now To turn on the audio system, push the
on, the display will show [Radio Code] and it will be using preset j
2,j 3 , and j4. Power/<VOL> dial.
unlocked when the codes have been entered cor- 2 once, j
For example, push j 3 six times, and The system will turn on in the mode, which was
rectly. 4 nine times.
j used immediately before the system was turned off.
Unlocking procedure: 5. Push the <MENU/ENTER> dial j 5 to confirm To turn off the audio system, push the
Read this section very carefully. It is important that the code. If you entered the code correctly the Power/<VOL> dial.
the instructions are followed precisely. unit will switch on.
Volume control:
To unlock the audio unit, proceed as follows: 6. If the code is entered incorrectly a notification
To control the volume, turn the Power/<VOL> dial.
message [Incorrect Pin], [Please re-enter Pin]
and the number of attempts left [Remaining Tries: Turn the Power/<VOL> dial clockwise to make the
xx] will be shown. sound louder.
After reading the message, push the <MENU/ Turn the Power/<VOL> dial anticlockwise to make
ENTER> dial j 5 to return to the entry screen and the sound quieter.
enter the correct radio code. SETUP button:
• If the wrong code is entered after the third at-
To configure Audio, Clock, Radio, or Language set-
tempt, the audio unit will lock for 60 minutes. The
display will show a count down timer from 60 to tings, perform the following procedure:
JVH0832XZ 0 (minutes). After 60 minutes enter the correct 1. Push the <SETUP> button.
radio code.
2. Turn the <MENU/ENTER> dial to select the set-
1. Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON posi- • If the wrong code is entered after eight sets of ting item from the following:
tion. three entries, the audio unit will lock permanently.
Contact a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop Audio ⇔ Clock ⇔ Radio ⇔ Language
2. [Radio Code] is displayed along with four nu-
for further details. 3. Push the <MENU/ENTER> dial.
merical zero digits.
3. Push preset j 1 the number of times correspond- Audio main operation After the desired levels have been set, push the
ing with the first digit of the radio code. The audio system operates when the ignition switch Back button repeatedly or push the <SETUP> but-
is placed in the ON or ACC position. ton.
Audio adjustments: • Speed Vol. (Volume) menu push the <MENU/ENTER> dial. The minute dis-
play will start flashing. Turn the <MENU/ENTER>
Turn the <MENU/ENTER> dial to select Audio, and This mode controls the volume output from the
dial to adjust the minute and push the <MENU/
push the <MENU/ENTER> dial. speakers automatically in relation to vehicle
ENTER> dial to finish the clock adjustment.
speed.
Turn the <MENU/ENTER> dial to select the pre-
ferred audio setting item and the push the <MENU/ Adjusting the setting to 0 (zero) turns off the • ON/OFF
ENTER> dial. speed volume feature. The clock display can be turned on and off. When
[ON] is selected, the clock will be displayed.
Turn the <MENU/ENTER> dial clockwise or anti- • Bass Boost menu
(The clock will keep being displayed even after
clockwise to adjust the following items and push the
Turn on or off the Bass Boost feature which the power of the audio unit is turned off). When
<MENU/ENTER> dial to confirm.
emphasizes the lower audio frequencies. [OFF] is selected, the clock will not be displayed.
The items that can be set for Audio are shown be-
low: • Audio Default menu • Format
The audio unit has a saved preset settings as a Switch the clock display between 24-hour mode
• Sound menu
factory default. Select [Yes] to change all set- and 12-hour clock mode.
Bass: tings back to the factory preset settings. Select
Radio setting:
[No] to exit the menu keeping the current set-
Use this control to enhance or attenuate bass
tings. Turn the <MENU/ENTER> dial to select Radio and
response sound.
push the <MENU/ENTER> dial.
Clock setting:
Treble:
Turn the <MENU/ENTER> dial to select the Clock
Use this control to enhance or attenuate the ferred radio setting item and then push the <MENU/
and push the <MENU/ENTER> dial.
treble. ENTER> dial.
Bal. (Balance): The items that can be set for Radio are shown be-
ferred clock setting item and then push the <MENU/
low:
Use this control to adjust the balance of the vol- ENTER> dial.
ume between the left and right speakers.
The items that can be set for Clock are shown be- • TA (where fitted)
Fade: low: Set the Traffic Information to on or off. When
turned on, Traffic Information will interrupt the
Use this control to adjust the balance of the vol- • Set Time
currently playing music and inform the driver of
ume between the front and the rear speakers.
Select [Set Time] then adjust the clock as fol- any traffic information when it is received.
• AUX In menu lows:
• Ref. FM List
Use this control to adjust the volume output from The hour display will start flashing. Turn the
the auxiliary source. The list of FM stations that can be received will
<MENU/ENTER> dial to adjust the hour and
be updated.
Language setting: Radio operation To change the radio bands, push the <RADIO> but-
ton until the desired band appears.
Turn the <MENU/ENTER> dial to select Language Frequency range and step change:
and push the <MENU/ENTER> dial. FM 1 → FM 2 → AM → FM 1
To change the frequency range and step specifica-
Select the appropriate language and push the tion of the radio, perform the following operations. When the <RADIO> button is pushed for more than
<MENU/ENTER> dial. Upon completion, the screen 1.5 seconds, the six stations with the strongest sig-
1. Turn on the audio system.
will automatically adapt the language setting. nals are stored in the preset (1 to 6) buttons of the
2. Push the <RADIO> button and select AM or FM band. During the search, a notification message ap-
Day/Night button:
mode. pears on the display and the sound is muted until the
Push the Day/Night button to switch the display operation is complete. Once completed, the radio
3. Push and hold the <SETUP> button for more
brightness between the daytime and nighttime selects preset button.
than 3 seconds.
modes. Seek/track buttons:
4. After the 3 seconds, keep holding the <SETUP>
The switches on the audio unit will also illuminate in button and turn the <MENU/ENTER> dial anti-
Push or button briefly to manually change
the nighttime mode. clockwise until you hear 3 clicks, clockwise until
the frequency.
Phone button: you hear 3 clicks, and then anticlockwise until
you hear 3 clicks. To adjust the broadcasting station frequency auto-
For operation on how to use phone button, see matically, push and hold the or button.
5. Turn the <MENU/ENTER> dial until [Region] is
“Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System (Type A)” When the system detects a broadcasting station, it
highlighted, and push the <MENU/ENTER> dial.
later in this section. will stop at the station.
6. Select an appropriate region.
MEDIA button: Station memory buttons:
7. To apply the setting, turn off the audio system, During radio reception, pushing the station memory
Push the <MEDIA> button to play a compatible de- place the ignition switch in the [OFF] position, button for less than 2 seconds will select the stored
vice when it is connected. and then place the ignition switch back in the radio station.
[ON] position.
Each time the <MEDIA> button is pushed, the audio The audio system can store up to 12 FM station fre-
source will change as follows: RADIO button: quencies (6 in each of FM 1 and FM 2) and 6 AM
station frequencies.
CD → USB (iPod) → Bluetooth → AUX → CD When the <RADIO> button is pushed while the au-
dio system is off, the audio system will turn on and To store the station frequency manually:
Any source that is not available will be skipped.
the radio will turn on. 1. Tune to the desired broadcasting station fre-
When the <RADIO> button is pushed while another quency.
audio source is playing, the other audio source will
turn off and the radio will turn on.
2. Push and hold a station memory button - until a RDS functions CD player operation
beep sounds. (The radio mutes when the memory
When an RDS station is tuned in with seek or manual Loading:
button is pushed.)
tuning, the RDS data is received and the Programme
Insert a CD into the slot with the label side facing
3. The channel indicator will display, indicating that Service (PS) name is displayed.
up. The CD will be guided automatically into the slot
the memory is stored properly. TA (Traffic announcement) button: and will start playing. After loading the CD, the num-
4. Perform steps 1 - 3 for all other memory buttons. The TA functions are available in the mode of Radio ber of tracks and the playtime will appear on the dis-
(FM) or any other audio source. play.
If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the audio
fuse blows, the station memory will be erased. In CAUTION
the event of this, reset the desired stations.
• Pushing the <TA> button selects the TA mode.
The TA indicator is displayed while TA mode is Do not force the CD into the slot. This could dam-
Radio Data System (RDS) operation: on. age the player.
The RDS is a system through which encoded digital • When the <TA> button is pushed again. The NOTE
information is transmitted by FM radio stations in mode will be switched off and the TA indicator
addition to the normal FM radio broadcasting. The will disappear from the display. • The CD player accepts normal audio CDs or
RDS provides information services such as station CDs containing MP3/WMA files.
Traffic announcement interrupt function
name, traffic information, or news.
When a traffic announcement is received, the an-
• The audio unit will automatically detect if a
NOTE CD containing MP3/WMA files is inserted, and
nouncement is tuned in and the display shows a [MP3CD] will be indicated.
In some countries or regions, some of these ser- notification message with the radio station name.
vices may not be available. Once the traffic announcement has finished, the unit
• An error notification message will be
displayed when inserting an incompatible disc
Alternative Frequency (AF) mode returns to the source that was active before the traf- type (e.g. DVD), or if the player cannot read
fic announcement started. the CD. Eject the disc and insert another disc.
The AF mode operates in the FM (radio) mode.
If the <TA> button is pushed during a traffic an- MEDIA button:
• The AF mode operates in the FM (radio), AUX or nouncement, the traffic announcement interrupt
CD mode (if FM was previously selected in the mode is cancelled. The TA mode returns to the
radio mode). To change to the CD mode, push the <MEDIA>
standby mode and the audio unit returns to the pre- button with a CD inserted until the CD mode is
• The AF function compares signal strengths and vious source. selected.
selects the station with the optimum reception
conditions for the currently tuned-in station.
List view: To select a preferred folder: DISP button:
While the track is being played, push the <MENU/ 1. Push the <MENU/ENTER> dial to display a list of
ENTER> dial to display the available tracks in a listed While a CD with recorded music information tags
tracks in the current folder.
view mode. To select a track from the list, or a track (CD-text/ID3-text tags) is being played, the title of
2. Push the Back button. the played track is displayed when available.
to start listening to, turn the <MENU/ENTER> dial
then push <MENU/ENTER> dial. 3. Turn the <MENU/ENTER> dial to select the pre- When the <DISP> button is pushed repeatedly, fur-
Quick search: ferred folder. ther information about the track can be displayed
along with the track title as follows:
In the list view mode, a quick search can be per- 4. Push the <MENU/ENTER> dial to access the
formed to find a track from the list. Push the <A-Z> folder. Push the <MENU/ENTER> dial again to Track time → Artist name → Album title → Track
button, turn the <MENU/ENTER> dial to the first start playing the first track or turn the <MENU/ time
alphabetic letter of the song title and then push the ENTER> dial, and push the <MENU/ENTER>
Track details:
<MENU/ENTER> dial. When found, a list of the dial to select another track.
available songs will be displayed. Select, and push Pushing and holding the <DISP> button will turn the
If the current selected folder contains sub folders,
the <MENU/ENTER> dial to play the preferred track. display into a detailed overview. Push the Back but-
push the <MENU/ENTER> dial, a new screen with
ton to return to the previous screen.
Seek/track button: a list of sub folders will be displayed. Turn the
<MENU/ENTER> dial for the sub folder then push CD eject button:
Push and hold the Seek/track button to fast forward the <MENU/ENTER> dial to select. Select the root
or rewind through the track. When the button is folder item when songs are recorded additionally in When the CD eject button is pushed while the igni-
released, the track will play at normal playing speed. the root folder. tion switch is placed in the ON or ACC position, the
CD will be ejected.
Track up/down: To return to the previous folder screen, push the
Back button. If a CD is ejected by pushing the CD eject button,
Pushing the Seek/track button once, the track will and it is not taken out from the loading slot within 20
skip forward to the next track or backward to the RPT button: seconds, the CD will automatically be reloaded to
beginning of the current track. Push the Seek/track the slot to protect the CD.
button more than once to skip through the tracks. Push the <RPT> button and the current track will be
played continuously. USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection
Folder browsing:
MIX button: Port
If the recorded media contains folders with music
files, pushing the Seek/track button will play the USB device main operation:
Push the <MIX> button and all the tracks will be
tracks of each folder in sequence. played in a random order. The USB port is located on the lower part of the
instrument panel. See “USB (Universal Serial Bus)
connection port” later in this section. Connect a
USB memory device into the connector. The USB When the <DISP> button is pushed repeatedly, fur- • iPad 1, 2 and 3
memory device will be activated automatically. ther information about the track can be displayed
along with the track title as follows: NOTE
Refer to your device manufacturer’s owner informa-
tion regarding the proper use and care of the de- Track time → Artist → Album → Track time This audio system do not support iPad charging.
vice. MEDIA button:
Track details:
If the system has been turned off while the USB
Pushing and holding the <DISP> button will turn the To operate the iPod, push the <MEDIA> button re-
memory device was playing, pushing the Power/
display into a detailed overview. Push the Back but- peatedly until the USB (iPod) mode is selected and
<VOL> dial will start the USB memory device.
ton to return to the display for the main display mode. then push the <MENU/ENTER> dial.
The following operations are identical to the audio
iPod player operation iPod main operation:
main operation of the Compact Disc (CD) opera-
tion. For details, see “CD player operation” earlier in Connecting iPod: Interface:
this section. The USB port is located on the lower part of the The interface for iPod operation shown on the audio
• List view instrument panel. See “USB (Universal Serial Bus) system display is similar to the iPod interface. Use
the <MENU/ENTER> dial to play a track on the
connection port” later in this section.
• Quick search iPod.
When the iPod is connected to the vehicle, the iPod
• (Seek/track) music library can only be operated by the vehicle The following items can be chosen from the menu
• MIX (Random play) audio controls. list screen.
• RPT (Repeat track) * iPod and iPhone are a trademark of Apple Inc., • Playlists
registered in the U.S. and other countries.
• Folder browsing • Artists
Compatibility:
MEDIA button: • Albums
The system unit shall be compatible with all devices
To operate the USB memory device, push the <ME- (past and future) supporting Apple Accessory Pro- • Tracks
DIA> button repeatedly until the USB mode is se- tocol on USB link, including (and not limited to): • More
lected.
• iPod Generation 5 devices For further information about each item, see the
DISP button: iPod owner’s manual.
• iPod Classic I and II (Generation 6 and 7)
The following operations are identical to the audio
While a track with recorded music information tags • iTouch Generation OS 1, 2, 3, 4 and next
main operation of the Compact Disc (CD) opera-
(ID3-tags) is being played, the title of the played
track is displayed.
• iPhone Generation OS 1, 2, 3, 4 and next tion. For details, see “CD player operation” earlier in
this section.
• iPod Nano (1G, 2G, 3G)
• List view CE statement: MEDIA button:
• Quick search Hereby Visteon Corp. declares that this system is in To operate the Bluetooth® audio streaming, push
compliance with the essential requirements and the <MEDIA> button repeatedly until [BT Audio] is
• (Seek/track) other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. shown.
• MIX (Random play)
The type of display, j
A or j
B , shown on the audio
• RPT (Repeat track) system can vary depending on the Bluetooth® ver-
sion of the device.
• Folder browsing
DISP button: Fast Forward (Cue), Fast Re-
verse (Review) buttons:
NOTE
While a track with recorded music information tags When (Cue) or (Review) button is
(ID3-tags) is being played, the title of the played The audio system only supports Bluetooth® de- pushed continuously, the track will be played at high
track is displayed. vices with AVRCP (Audio Video Remote Control speed. When the button is released, the track will
Profile) version 1.3, or 1.0 or earlier. be played at normal playing speed.
When the <DISP> button is pushed repeatedly, fur-
ther information about the track can be displayed Bluetooth® audio player main operation: Track up/down buttons:
along with the track title as follows:
Pushing (Cue) or (Review) button once,
Track time → Artist → Album → Track time the track will be skipped forward to the next track or
Track details: backward to the beginning of the current played
track. Push (Cue) or (Review) button
Pushing and holding the <DISP> button will turn the more than once to skip through the tracks.
display into a detailed overview. To return to the
main display, push the Back button. DISP button:
If the song contains music information tags (ID3–
Bluetooth® audio player operation
tags), the title of the played song will be displayed.
Regulatory information: JVH0848XZ If tags are not provided then the display will not
Bluetooth® is a trademark show any messages.
owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. To play Bluetooth® audio, the Bluetooth® audio When the <DISP> button is pushed repeatedly fur-
m and licensed to Visteon
Corporation.
device needs to be paired to the in-vehicle system. ther information about the song can be displayed
For the pairing operation, see “Bluetooth® settings” along with the song title.
later in this section.
A long push on <DISP> will turn the display into a FM-AM RADIO WITH COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER (Type B)
detailed overview which after a few seconds returns
to the main display; or push <DISP> briefly.
AUX device player operation
The AUX jack is located on lower part of the instru-
ment panel. (See “AUX (Auxiliary) input jack” later in
this section.) The AUX input jack accepts any stan-
dard analog audio input such as from a portable
cassette tape/CD player, MP3 player or laptop com-
puter.
NISSAN strongly recommends using a stereo mini
plug cable when connecting your music device to
the audio system. Music may not play properly when
a monaural cable is used.
MEDIA button:
To switch to the AUX mode, push the <MEDIA>

button repeatedly until the AUX mode is selected.
JVH0678X
Models with RADIO button
Audio main operation
The audio system operates when the ignition switch
is placed in the ON or ACC position.
Power/VOLUME dial:
Push Power/VOLUME dial to turn on and off the

audio system.
Turn the Power/VOLUME dial to adjust the volume.
This vehicle may be equipped with Speed Sensitive
Volume (SSV) function for audio. When this func-
tion is turned on, the audio volume will be adjusted
automatically as the vehicle speed changes. For op-
erations to turn on and off the SSV function, see
“Audio settings” earlier in this section.
Audio settings:
For the operations to adjust the audio settings, see
“Audio settings” earlier in this section.
Traffic Announcement:
Touch [TA] on the audio screen to turn on or off the
Traffic Information setting. When it is turned on, the
JVH0850X
Traffic Information will interrupt the music that was
Models with FM-AM button
playing and informs the driver of the received traffic
1. CD button 7. AUX (auxiliary) button information.
2. RADIO/FM-AM button 8. ENTER/Scroll dial Radio operation
3. Disc eject button 9. BACK button The audio system operates when the ignition switch
is placed in the ON or ACC position.
4. Disc insert slot 10. SETUP button
5. Seek/Track buttons
6. Power/VOLUME dial
Radio band select button: Station memory keys: rently selected station. If extra stations are not
Push the <RADIO> band select button to change Up to six stations can be stored for AM band, and available within the group, the key will not oper-
the band as follows: up to twelve stations can be stored for each of the ate.
AM → DAB → FM → AM
other bands. • Radio text:
1. Choose the radio band using the Radio band Radio text is shown on the DAB main screen
If another audio source is playing when the RADIO/
select button. underneath the DAB station name. This displays
FM-AM button is pushed, the audio source playing
will automatically be turned off and the last radio sta- 2. Tune to the desired station using manual or seek radio programme and song information as deter-
tion played will begin playing. tuning. Touch and hold any of the desired station mined by the DAB station.
memory keys until a beep sound is heard. EAS in EAS test (displayed on the screen as a PTY
Radio tuning:
For FM and DAB, touch the [7-12] key to display name) is an abbreviation of Emergency Alert Sys-
When in radio mode, the radio can be tuned using tem.
the touchscreen. To bring up the visual tuner, touch the 7 - 12 memory keys.
the [Tune] key on the lower part of the screen. A 3. The channel indicator will then come on and the Occasionally, in areas of poor DAB signal strength,
screen appears with a bar running from low fre- sound will resume. Programming is now com- the full station name in the DAB List and DAB main
quencies on the left to high frequencies on the right. plete. screen might be distorted. In this situation it may still
be possible to listen to the particular radio station, at
One of the following operations can be used for tun- DAB operation: a reduced level of sound quality, but this is not al-
ing. ways possible. This may also be shown in the ve-
In the DAB mode, the following operation keys and
• Touching the bar on the screen information are available. hicle information display.
• Touching [ ]/[ ] on the screen • DAB List: CD player operation

• Turning ENTER/Scroll dial Touch to display the available station list. Loading disc:
To return to the regular radio display screen, touch • TA: Insert a CD into the slot with the label side facing
up. The CD will be guided automatically into the slot
the [OK] key.
Touch this key to turn on and off the TA (Traffic and will start playing. If the radio is already playing,
Station List: Announcement) mode. When turned on, it will automatically turn off, and the CD will start
When in FM or DAB (where fitted) mode, touch [FM received TA will interrupt the audio source that is playing.
List] or [DAB List] to display the station lists. playing.
CAUTION
Seek/Track buttons: • Extra chan.:
Do not force the compact disc into the slot. This
The [Extra chan] key will allow access to extra could damage the player.
When in radio mode, push the Seek/Track buttons stations transmitted within the group of the cur-
to tune from low to high or high to low frequencies
and to stop at the next broadcasting station.
button: Mix: Disc eject button:
Touching the [Mix] key while an CD or MP3 CD is
When the CD button is pushed with the system off When the Disc eject button is pushed while a CD is
playing will alternate the random play pattern as fol-
and the CD loaded, the system will turn on and the loaded, the CD will be ejected.
lows:
CD will start to play.
If the CD is not removed within 10 seconds, the CD
(CD)
When the CD button is pushed with a CD loaded will be reloaded.
while the radio playing, the radio will turned off and (Normal) → Mix → (Normal)
the CD will start to play. USB device operation
(CD with compressed audio files)
Seek/Track button: The audio system operates when the ignition switch
(Normal) → Random Folder → Random All → (Nor- is placed in the ON or ACC position.
mal)
When the Seek/Track (rewind/fast forward) button The USB port is located on the lower part of the
is pushed for more than 1.5 seconds while the CD Repeat: instrument panel. See “USB (Universal Serial Bus)
is being played, the CD will play while fast forward- connection port” later in this section. Connect a
Touching the [Repeat] key while an CD or MP3 CD
ing or rewinding. When the button is released, the USB memory device into the connector. The USB
is playing will alternate the repeat play pattern as fol-
CD will return to normal play speed. memory device will be activated automatically.
lows:
When the Seek/Track (rewind) or Seek/Track (fast Refer to your device manufacturer’s owner informa-
(CD)
forward) button is pushed for less than 1.5 seconds tion regarding the proper use and care of the de-
while the CD is being played, the next track or the (Normal) → Repeat → (Normal) vice.
beginning of the current track on the CD will be
(CD with compressed audio files) USB main operation:
played. Push the button several times to skip through
the tracks on the CD. If the last track on a CD is (Normal) → Repeat Track → Repeat Folder → (Nor- If another audio source is playing and a USB memory
skipped, the first track on the disc will play. If the mal) device is inserted, push the AUX button until the
last track in a folder of an MP3 CD is skipped, the screen on the display changes to the USB memory
Browse:
first track of the next folder will play. mode.
Touch the [Browse] key to display the titles on the
CD/MP3/WMA display mode: If the system has been turned off while the USB
CD in list format. Touch the title of a song in the list
While listening to a CD or an MP3/WMA CD, cer- memory device was playing, push the Power/VOL-
to begin playing that song. If an MP3 CD is playing,
tain text may be displayed (when a CD encoded UME dial to restart the USB memory device.
touching the [Browse] key will also list the folders
with text is being used). Depending on how the CD on the disc. Touch the [Folder Up] key to view the Touch the name of a song on the screen to begin
or MP3/WMA CD is encoded, the text is displayed lists in the upper layer. Follow the procedure for playing that song.
listing the artist, album and song title. Operation selecting a song with the touchscreen to choose a
keys are also displayed on the screen. folder.
USB screen operation: skip forward several tracks. if the last track on the * Some features of this iPod may not be fully func-
While files on a USB memory device are playing, USB memory device is skipped, the first track of the tional.
the play pattern can be altered so that songs are next folder is played.
Make sure that your iPod firmware is updated to the
repeated or played randomly. iPod player operation version indicated above.
Mix: Connecting iPod: iPod main operation:
Touching the [Mix] key on the screen while an USB The USB port is located on the lower part of the If the system has been turned off while the iPod was
memory device is playing will alternate the random instrument panel. See “USB (Universal Serial Bus) playing, pushing the Power/VOLUME dial will start
play pattern as follows: connection port” later in this section. the iPod.
(Normal) → Random Folder → Random All → (Nor- If your iPod supports charging via a USB connec- If another audio source is playing and a iPod is con-
mal) tion, its battery will be charged while connected to nected, push the AUX button until the screen on the
the vehicle with the ignition switch placed in the ON display changes to the iPod mode.
Repeat:
or ACC position. Refer to your device manufacturer’s owner informa-
Touching the [Repeat] key on the screen while an
Compatibility: tion regarding the proper use and care of the de-
USB memory device is playing will alternate the re-
vice.
peat play pattern as follows: The following models are compatible:
Interface operation:
(Normal) → Repeat Track → Repeat Folder → (Nor- • iPod 5th Generation (firmware version 1.2.3 or
mal) later)
Browse: • iPod Classic (firmware version 1.1.1 or later)
Touch [Browse] key to display USB interface. Se- • iPod Touch (firmware version 2.0.0 or later)*
lect the songs you wish to play by touching the item
on the screen. • iPod nano - 1st generation (firmware version
1.3.1 or later)
Seek/Track buttons:
• iPod nano - 2nd generation (firmware version
Push the Seek/Track (rewind) button while an audio 1.1.3 or later)
file on the USB memory device is playing to return • iPod nano - 3rd generation (firmware version JVH0680XZ
to the beginning of the current track. Push the but- 1.1.3 or later)
ton several times to skip backward several tracks. The interface for iPod operation shown on the vehi-
• iPod nano - 4th generation (firmware version
cle’s audio system display screen is similar to the
Push the Seek/Track (fast forward) button while an 1.0.4 or later)
audio file on the USB memory device is playing to iPod interface. Use the touchscreen, BACK button
advance one track. Push the button several times to • iPod nano - 5th generation (firmware version or the ENTER/Scroll dial to navigate the menus on
1.0.1 or later) the screen.
When the iPod is playing, touch the [Menu] key to the first character in the name. To activate character being played. The track plays at an increased speed
bring up the iPod interface. indexing, touch the [A-Z] key in the upper right cor- while reversing or fast forwarding. When the button
ner of the screen. Turn the ENTER/Scroll dial to is released, the track returns to normal play speed.
Depending on the iPod model, the following items
choose the number or letter to jump to in the list and
may be available on the menu list screen. For further
then push the ENTER/Scroll dial. Bluetooth® audio player operation
information about each item, see the iPod Owner’s
Manual. If no character is selected after thirty seconds, the If you have a compatible Bluetooth® audio device
display returns to normal. that is capable of playing audio files, the device can
• Playlists be connected to the vehicle’s audio system so that
Random and repeat play mode: the audio files on the device play through the vehi-
• Artists
cle’s speakers
While the iPod is playing, the play pattern can be
• Albums altered so that songs are repeated or played ran- Bluetooth® trademark:
• Genres domly. Bluetooth® is a trademark
• Songs Mix: owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
• Composers Touching the [Mix] key on the screen while an iPod m and licensed to Robert Bosch
GmbH.
is playing will alternate the random play pattern as
• Audiobooks follows: Connecting Bluetooth® audio:
• Podcasts (Normal) → Shuffle Songs → (Normal)
Scrolling menus:
Repeat:
Touching the [Repeat] key on the screen while an
iPod is playing will alternate the repeat play pattern
as follows:
(Normal) → Repeat Song → (Normal)
Seek/Track buttons:
JVH0682XZ
Push the Seek/Track (rewind) or Seek/Track (fast Example
forward) button to skip backward or forward one
JVH0681XZ track. To connect your Bluetooth® audio device to the
vehicle, follow the procedure below:
Push and hold the Seek/Track (rewind) or Seek/
While navigating long lists of artists, albums or songs Track (fast forward) button for 1.5 seconds while a 1. Push the <SETUP> button.
in the music menu, it is possible to scroll the list by track is playing to reverse or fast forward the track 2. Select the [Telephone & Bluetooth] key.
3. Select the [Pair New Device] key. NISSANCONNECT APP • For Vehicles without Navigation, Apple
SMARTPHONE INTEGRATION iPhones must be paired via Bluetooth® for
4. The system acknowledges the command and
NissanConnect Apps to function.
asks you to initiate connecting from the phone (where fitted)
handset. The connecting procedure of the mo-
This vehicle is equipped with Smartphone Integra- • For Android phones, NissanConnect Apps RE-
bile phone varies according to each mobile phone QUIRES the phone to be paired via Blue-
tion technology. This allows many compatible Smart-
model. See the Bluetooth® device Owner’s tooth®.
phone applications to be displayed and easily con-
Manual for details.
trolled through the vehicle’s touchscreen. Application download
Bluetooth® audio player main operation:
NOTE Once connected, the NissanConnect Mobile App
To switch to the Bluetooth® audio mode, push the will search your phone to determine which compat-
AUX button repeatedly until the Bluetooth® audio A compatible smartphone and registration is re-
ible applications are currently installed. The vehicle
mode is displayed on the screen. quired to use mobile applications or to access
will then download the in-vehicle interface for each
connected features of certain vehicle applica-
The controls for the Bluetooth® audio are displayed of these compatible applications. Once down-
tions.
on the screen. loaded, the user can access many smartphone Ap-
Registering with NissanConnect App plications through the vehicle touchscreen by push-
AUX device player operation ing the INFO button followed by touching the [My
To use the Smartphone Integration feature, it is nec-
The AUX input jack is located on the lower part of Apps] key. For more information on application avail-
essary for the user to register. In order to register,
the instrument panel. (See “AUX (Auxiliary) input ability visit the NissanConnect website.
visit the NissanConnect website for more informa-
jack” later in this section.) The AUX audio input jack tion and to sign up. Once registered, download the USB (Universal Serial Bus)
accepts any standard analog audio input such as NissanConnect Mobile App from your compatible
from a portable cassette tape/CD player, MP3
CONNECTION PORT
phone’s application download source and then log
player or laptop computer. into the application. WARNING
NISSAN strongly recommends using a stereo mini Connecting phone
plug cable when connecting your music device to Do not connect, disconnect or operate the USB
the audio system. Music may not play properly when To use this feature, a compatible smartphone must device while driving. Doing so can be a distrac-
a monaural cable is used. be connected via Bluetooth® or USB to the vehicle. tion. If distracted you could lose control of your
For the Bluetooth® connecting procedure, see vehicle and cause an accident or serious injury.
button: “Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System (Type B)”
To switch to the AUX mode, push the AUX button
until the AUX mode is selected while the ignition NOTE
switch is placed in the ON or ACC position.
• For Apple iPhones, NissanConnect Apps RE-
QUIRES the phone to be plugged in via USB.
CAUTION AUX (Auxiliary) INPUT JACK STEERING WHEEL MOUNTED
• Do not force the USB device into the USB CONTROLS FOR AUDIO
port. Inserting the USB device tilted or up-
side-down into the port may damage the port.
Make sure that the USB device is connected
correctly into the USB port.
• Do not grab the USB port cover (where fitted)
when pulling the USB device out of the port.
This could damage the port and the cover.
• Do not leave the USB cable in a place where
JVH0684XZ
it can be pulled unintentionally. Pulling the
JVH0922XZ
cable may damage the port.
The AUX input jack is located on the lower part of
Refer to your device manufacturer’s owner informa- the instrument panel. Compatible audio devices, 1. Tuning button
tion regarding the proper use and care of the de- such as some MP3 players, can be connected to
vice. the system through the AUX input jack. 2. Volume control button
Before connecting a device to a jack, turn off the Tuning button

power of the portable device. Radio:
With a compatible device connected to the jack, • Push the tuning button for less than 1.5 seconds
push the corresponding button (depends on the au- to change the next or previous radio preset.
dio system) repeatedly until the display switches to
the AUX mode. • Push the tuning button for more than 1.5 sec-
onds to seek the next or previous radio station.
NISSAN strongly recommends using a stereo mini
CD:
plug cable when connecting your music device to
JVH0683XZ the audio system. Music may not play properly when • Push the tuning button for less than 1.5 seconds
a monaural cable is used. to shift to the next track or the beginning of the
current track (the previous track if the button is
The USB port is located on the lower part of the
pushed immediately after the current track starts
instrument panel. Insert USB devices or iPod con-
playing).
nectors into this port.
• Push the tuning button for more than 1.5 sec-
onds to forward or rewind the track.
CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO
(where fitted)
CD with MP3, iPod, USB memory or Bluetooth® • Always place the discs in the storage case when When installing a CB, ham radio or a car phone in
Audio: they are not being used. your vehicle, be sure to observe the following cau-
• tions, otherwise the new equipment may adversely
Push the tuning button for less than 1.5 seconds
to shift to the next track or the beginning of the
• To clean a disc, wipe the surface from the centre
affect the Engine Control System and other elec-
to the outer edge using a clean, soft cloth. Do
current track (the previous track if the button is tronic parts.
not wipe the disc using a circular motion.
pushed immediately after the current track starts CAUTION
playing). Do not use a conventional record cleaner or al-
cohol intended for industrial use. • Keep the antenna as far away as possible from
• CD Player/Radio: the Electronic Control Module.
• A new disc may be rough on the inner and outer
Push the tuning button for more than 1.5 sec-
onds to forward or rewind the track.
edges. Remove the rough edges by rubbing the • Keep the antenna wire at least 20 cm (8 in)
inner and outer edges with the side of a pen or away from the Engine Control harnesses. Do
Volume control button pencil as illustrated. not route the antenna wire next to any har-
nesses.
Push the + or − button to increase or USB memory
decrease the volume. • Do not touch the terminal portion of the USB
• Adjust the antenna standing wave ratio as rec-
ommended by the manufacturer.
DISC/USB MEMORY CARE AND memory.
CLEANING • Do not place heavy objects on the USB memory.
• Connect the ground wire from the radio chas-
sis to the body.
Disc • Do not store the USB memory in highly humid
• For details, consult a NISSAN dealer or quali-
locations. fied workshop.
• Do not expose the USB memory to direct sun-
light.
• Do not spill any liquids on the USB memory.
Refer to the USB memory Owner’s Manual for the
details.
SAA0451Z
• Handle a disc by its edges. Never touch the sur-

face of the disc. Do not bend the disc.
BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE
PHONE SYSTEM (Type A)
*Type A is for models without navigation system. When a call is active, the audio system, microphone, REGULATORY INFORMATION
and steering wheel mounted control buttons enable
WARNING hands-free communication. Bluetooth® trademark
Bluetooth® is a trademark
• Use a phone after stopping your vehicle in a If the audio system is in use at the time, the radio,
CD, iPod, USB audio, Bluetooth® audio or AUX
owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
safe location. If you have to use a phone while
driving, exercise extreme caution at all times source mode will be muted and will stay muted until m and licensed to Visteon Corpo-
ration.
so full attention may be given to vehicle op- the active call has ended.
eration. The Bluetooth® system may not be able to connect CE statement
• If you find yourself unable to devote full atten- with your mobile phone for the following reasons: Hereby Visteon Corp. declares that this system is in
tion to vehicle operation while using the
phone, pull off the road to a safe location and
• The mobile phone is too far away from the ve- compliance with the essential requirements and
hicle. other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
stop your vehicle before doing so.
CAUTION
• The Bluetooth® mode on your mobile phone has
not been activated.
To avoid draining the vehicle battery, use a phone
after starting the engine.
• Your mobile phone has not been paired with the
Bluetooth® system of the audio unit.
Bluetooth® is a wireless radio communication stan-
dard. This system offers a hands-free facility for your
• The mobile phone does not support Bluetooth® NOTE
technology.
mobile phone to enhance driving comfort. The audio system only supports Bluetooth® de-
NOTE vices with AVRCP (Audio Video Remote Control
To use the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System,
Profile) version 1.3, or 1.0 or earlier.
your mobile phone must first be setup. For details, • For details, see your mobile phone’s Owner’s
see “Bluetooth® settings” later in this section. Once Manual.
it has been setup, the hands-free mode is automati-
cally activated on the registered mobile phone (via
• For assistance with your mobile phone inte-
gration, please visit your local NISSAN dealer
Bluetooth®) when it comes into range. or qualified workshop.
A notification message appears on the audio display
when the phone is connected, when an incoming
call is being received, as well as when a call is initi-
ated.
CONTROL BUTTONS AND 1. Volume control -/ + buttons 3. The display will return to the current audio source
MICROPHONE status after the connection is complete.
Push the buttons to increase or decrease the vol-
Instrument panel: ume of the speakers. • While the Bluetooth® connection is active, the
following icons will appear on the display.
2. Phone send < > button
– : Signal strength indicator
• Accept an incoming call by pushing once.
– : Battery status indicator*
• Redial the last outgoing call by pushing the
button for more than 2 seconds. – : Bluetooth® connection ON indicator
3. Phone end button *: If low battery is indicated, the Bluetooth®
device must be recharged soon.
• Reject an incoming call by pushing the button
during an incoming call. • Up to five different Bluetooth® devices can be
registered. However, only one device can be
JVH0856XZ • End an active call by pushing the button once.
used at a time. If five different Bluetooth® regis-
Microphone: tered devices are registered, a new device can
1. Phonebook quick search button only replace one of the five existing paired de-
Microphone is located near the map lights.
vices.
2. Back button
BLUETOOTH® SETTINGS
3. Phone button • The pairing procedure and operation may vary
Pairing device according to device type and compatibility. See
4. <MENU/ENTER> dial the Bluetooth® device Owner’s Manual for fur-
Enter the phone setup menu via the < > button ther details.
Steering wheel mounted control: on the instrument panel, select the [Bluetooth] key,
and then check if the Bluetooth® is set to on. (If not
push the <MENU/ENTER> dial to turn it on.)
To setup the Bluetooth® system to pair (connect or
register) your preferred mobile phone, follow the fol-
lowing procedure.
1. To pair a device, select the [Scan device] key or
the [Pair device] key on the display.
2. A notification message will be displayed when
JVH0854XZ the phone is successfully paired.
Setting items • Settings b. Device with PIN code:
To set up the Bluetooth® system with a device, the Sets the phone volume, ringtone, and allows the Two different ways of pairing are possible
following items are available: phonebook from your mobile phone to be down- depending on the device:
loaded to the system. See “General settings”
later in this section. • Type A:
The message [To pair] and [Enter Pin] 0000
• Bluetooth
will be displayed.
If this setting is turned off, the connection be-
Confirm the PIN code on the device. The
tween the Bluetooth® devices and the in-vehicle
Bluetooth® connection will be made.
Bluetooth® module will be cancelled.
Scan device: • Type B:
1. Push the < > button on the instrument panel. The message [Pairing request] and [Confirm
Select [Scan device] key. The audio unit password] together with a 6 digit code will be
JVH0847XZ
searches for the Bluetooth® devices and shows displayed. The unique and identical code
all devices that were found. should be displayed on the device. If the code
• Scan device is identical confirm on the device.
Make sure your Bluetooth® device is available at
Shows all available visible Bluetooth® devices The Bluetooth® connection will be made.
this time.
and initializes Bluetooth® connection from the
Pair device:
audio unit. 2. Select the device to be paired using the <MENU/
• Pair device
ENTER> dial. • Turn on the Bluetooth® on the audio unit. See
“Bluetooth” later in this section.
3. The pairing procedure depends on the device
Initializes Bluetooth® connection from the mo-
bile device.
being connected: • Use the audio unit to pair:
a. Device without PIN code: Push the < > button on the instrument panel.
• Sel. device Select the [Pair Device] key.
The Bluetooth® will be connected automati-
Paired Bluetooth® devices are listed and can be The pairing procedure depends on the Blue-
cally without any further input.
selected for connection. tooth® device to be connected:
• Del. device 1) Device without PIN code:
A registered Bluetooth® device can be deleted. The Bluetooth® connection will be automati-
cally connected without any further input.
2) Device with PIN code: Del. device: Receiving a call
Two different ways of pairing are possible A registered device can be removed from Blue-
depending on the device. For the correct pro- tooth® system registration. Select a registered de-
cedure details, see “Scan device” earlier in vice and push the <MENU/ENTER> dial to confirm
this section. to deletion.
• Use the Bluetooth® audio/mobile phone device Settings:

to pair: Sets the phone volume, ringtone, and allows the
1) Switch on the search mode for Bluetooth® phonebook from your mobile phone to be down-
devices. loaded to the system. See “General settings” later
in this section.
If the search mode finds the audio unit it will JVH0857XZ
be shown on the device display. Bluetooth:
If the Bluetooth® signal has been turned off, a noti- When receiving an incoming call, the display on the
2) Select the unit device shown as [My Car].
fication message [ON/OFF] appears when you se- audio unit will show the caller’s phone number (or a
3) Enter the number code shown on the rel- lect [Bluetooth] from the phone menu. (Push the notification message that the caller’s phone number
evant device with the device’s own keypad, < > button to display the phone menu.) To turn cannot be shown) and three operation icons as illus-
and push the confirmation key on the Blue- the Bluetooth® signal on, push the <MENU/ trated. To highlight different icons, turn the <MENU/
tooth® device. ENTER> dial and a follow up screen will appear. ENTER> dial. Push the <MENU/ENTER> dial to se-
Refer to the relevant Bluetooth® device Owner’s Select [ON] and push the <MENU/ENTER> dial to lect the highlighted icon.
Manual for further details. display the Bluetooth® settings menu screen.
1 Answering and during a call:
j
Sel. device: USING THE SYSTEM Answer the call by selecting on the display or by
The paired device list shows which Bluetooth® au- The hands-free mode can be operated using the pushing / on the steering wheel.
dio or mobile phone devices have been paired or < > button on the instrument panel.
During the call, the following icons are available:
registered to the system. Select the appropriate de-
vice to connect to the system. • :
The following icons (where fitted) indicate the capa- Select this item to end the call.
bility of the registered device:
• :
• : Mobile phone integration Select this item to put the call on hold.
• : Audio streaming (A2DP – Advanced Audio
Distribution Profile)
• : NOTE
Select this item to transfer the call from the Phone book data will be erased when:
hands-free phone system to your mobile phone.
• Switching to another registered mobile
• : phone.
Select this item to transfer the call back to the • Mobile phone is disconnected.
hands-free phone system from the mobile phone.
• The registered mobile phone is deleted from
• #123: the audio system.
Select this item to enter numbers during a call. JVH0863XZ
1. Push the < > button on instrument panel.
For example, use this function when directed by
2. Turn the <MENU/ENTER> dial to highlight
an automated phone system to dial an extension
A call can be initiated using one of the following [Phone Book] and push the <MENU/ENTER>
number.
methods: dial.
2 Putting a call on hold:
j 3. Scroll down through the list, select the appropri-
To put a call on hold, select . Select to return • Making a call from the phonebook
ate contact name (highlighted), and push the
to the call. To reject the call select . • Manually dialling a phone number <MENU/ENTER> dial.
3 Rejecting a call:
j • Redialing 4. The screen will show the number to be dialled.
To reject an incoming call, select or by push- • Using call history (Call List menu) Push the <MENU/ENTER> dial to dial the num-
ber.
ing on the steering wheel.
– Dialled
Making a call If more than one number is registered, select an
– Received appropriate icon.
– Missed
WARNING • : Home
Making a call from the phonebook:
Park the vehicle in a safe location, and apply the • : Mobile phone
parking brake before making a call. Once the Bluetooth® connection has been made
between the registered mobile phone and the hands- • : Office
free phone system, phonebook data will be trans-
ferred automatically to the hands-free phone sys-
tem. The transfer may take a while before comple-
tion.
Quick searching the phonebook: Manually dialling a phone number: 4. After entering the last number, highlight the
icon and push the <MENU/ENTER> dial to dial
the number.
Redial:
To redial or call the last number dialled, push and
hold the < > button on the instrument panel or
the steering wheel for more than 2 seconds.
Using call history (Call list menu):
JVH0858XZ JVH1196XZ
The quick search mode can be used as follows: To dial a phone number manually, perform the fol-
lowing operation:
1. Push the <A-Z> button.
1. Push the < > button on the instrument panel
2. Turn the <MENU/ENTER> dial for the first alpha- and turn the <MENU/ENTER> dial to highlight
betic or numerical letter of the contact name. [Dial Number].
Once highlighted, push the <MENU/ENTER>
dial to select the letter. 2. Push the <MENU/ENTER> dial to select [Dial JVH0860XZ
Number].
3. The display will show the corresponding contact
name(s). Where necessary, use the <MENU/ 3. Turn the <MENU/ENTER> dial to scroll along A number from the dialled, received, or missed call
ENTER> dial to scroll further for the appropriate and highlight each number of the phone number. lists can also be used to make a call.
contact name to call. Push the <MENU/ENTER> dial to select the 1. Push the < > button on the instrument panel
highlighted number. and select [Call List] on the display.
4. The screen will show the number to be dialled.
Push the <MENU/ENTER> dial to dial the num- To delete the last number entered, scroll to the 2. Turn the <MENU/ENTER> dial and scroll to an
ber. [←] (Backspace symbol) and once highlighted, item, and push the <MENU/ENTER> dial to se-
push the <MENU/ENTER> dial. The last number lect an item.
will be deleted. Pushing the <MENU/ENTER>
dial repeatedly will delete each subsequent num- Available items:
ber. • Dialled
Use the dialled call mode to make a call which
is based on the list of outgoing (dialled) calls.
• Received Ending a call Set the phone ringing volume.
Use the received call mode to make a call To end an active call, highlight the icon and – Call
which is based on the list of received calls. push the <MENU/ENTER> dial or push the < > Set the volume of the conversation during a
button on the steering wheel.
• Missed call.
Use the missed call mode to make a call which GENERAL SETTINGS • Ringtone
is based on the list of missed calls.
– Car
3. Scroll to the preferred phone number and push
Switch the ringtone to ring from the vehicle
the <MENU/ENTER> dial or the < > button
or the mobile phone.
on the instrument panel.
– Phone
Second incoming call
Switch the phone ringing volume on or off.
• PB download
Download the phonebook of the mobile device
JVH0862XZ
to the audio unit manually.
Using the <MENU/ENTER> dial, highlight [Settings]

from the phone menu and push the <MENU/
ENTER> dial.
JVH0861XZ
Volume settings and manually downloading the
phonebook can be done using this menu.
Whenever there is a second incoming call is shown Menu operation:

in the display. By selecting the icon the call is Turn the <MENU/ENTER> dial to change the high-
accepted and the current call is put on hold. lighted item and to change the volume settings.
Selecting the icon using the <MENU/ENTER> Push the <MENU/ENTER> dial to select the high-
dial rejects the second incoming call. When this is lighted item and to apply the setting.
done during the conversation it ends the call.
Menu items:
Selecting the icon using the <MENU/ENTER>
dial switches the call on line between the first and • Volume
the second call. – Ring
BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE
PHONE SYSTEM (Type B)
*Type B is for models with navigation system. You can register up to 5 different Bluetooth® mo- • Do not place the mobile phone in an area sur-
bile phones to the in-vehicle phone module. How- rounded by metal or far away from the in-vehicle
WARNING ever, you can talk on only one mobile phone at a phone module to prevent tone quality degrada-
time. tion and wireless connection disruption.
• Use a phone after stopping your vehicle in a
safe location. If you have to use a phone while Before using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone • While a mobile phone is connected through the
driving, exercise extreme caution at all times System, refer to the following notes. Bluetooth® wireless connection, the battery
so full attention may be given to vehicle op- power of the mobile phone may discharge
eration.
• Set up the wireless connection between a mo-
quicker than usual. The Bluetooth® Hands-Free
bile phone and the in-vehicle phone module be-
Phone System cannot charge mobile phones.
• If you are unable to devote full attention to fore using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
vehicle operation while talking on the phone, System. • Some mobile phones or other devices may cause
pull off the road to a safe location and stop interference or a buzzing noise to come from the
your vehicle.
• Some Bluetooth® enabled mobile phones may
audio system speakers. Storing the device in a
not be recognised by the in-vehicle phone mod-
different location may reduce or eliminate the
CAUTION ule.
noise.
To avoid discharging the vehicle battery, use a • You will not be able to use a hands-free phone
• Refer to the mobile phone owner’s manual re-
phone after starting the engine. under the following conditions:
garding the telephone charges, mobile phone
Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetooth® – Your vehicle is outside of the mobile service antenna and body, etc.
Hands-Free Phone System. If you have a compat- area.
ible Bluetooth® enabled mobile phone, you can set
• The signal strength display on the monitor will
– Your vehicle is in an area where it is difficult not coincide with the signal strength display of
up the wireless connection between your mobile to receive mobile signal; such as in a tunnel, some mobile phones.
phone and the in-vehicle phone module. With Blue- in an underground parking garage, near a tall
tooth® wireless technology, you can make or re- building or in a mountainous area. REGULATORY INFORMATION
ceive a hands-free telephone call with your mobile
phone in the vehicle. – Your mobile phone is locked to prevent it Bluetooth® trademark
from being dialled. Bluetooth® is a trademark
Once your mobile phone is connected to the in-ve- owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
hicle phone module, no other phone connecting pro- • When the radio wave condition is not ideal or
cedure is required. Your phone is automatically re- ambient sound is too loud, it may be difficult to m and licensed to Robert Bosch
GmbH.
connected with the in-vehicle phone module when hear the other person’s voice during a call.
the ignition switch is placed in the ON position with • Immediately after the ignition switch is placed in
the connected mobile phone turned on and carried the ON position, it may be impossible to receive
in the vehicle. a call for a short period of time.
CONTROL BUTTONS AND Microphone: NOTE
MICROPHONE Microphone is located near the map lights. To scroll quickly through the list, touch the [A-Z]
Steering wheel switch: key in the upper right corner of the screen. Turn
PAIRING PROCEDURE the ENTER/Scroll dial to choose a letter or num-
NOTE ber and then push the ENTER/Scroll dial. The list
will move to the first entry that begins with that
The connecting procedure must be performed number or letter.
when the vehicle is stationary. If the vehicle starts
moving during the procedure, the procedure will MAKING A CALL
be cancelled.
To make a call, follow the procedure below:
1. Push the <SETUP> button on the control panel.
1. Push the < > on the control panel. The
2. Select the [Telephone & Bluetooth] key. [Phone] screen will appear on the display.
JVH0852XZ 3. Select the [Pair New Device] key. 2. Select one of the following options to make a
call:
4. Initiate the pairing process from the handset. The
1. Volume control +/ − switch system will display the message asking if PIN is • [Contacts]: Select the name from an entry
displayed on your Bluetooth® device. If the PIN stored in the vehicle phonebook.
2. Phone send < > button
is displayed on your Bluetooth® device, select
3. Phone end < > button [Yes] to complete the pairing process.
• [Call Lists]: Select the name from the incom-
ing, outgoing or missed.
Instrument panel: For more information, see the Bluetooth® device’s
Owner’s Manual.
• [Redial]: Dial the last outgoing call from the
vehicle.
PHONEBOOK • [ ]: Input the phone number manually us-
To access the vehicle phonebook: ing a keypad displayed on the screen. For
information on how to use the touchscreen,
1. Push the < > button on the control panel. see “How to use the touchscreen” in this sec-
2. Select the [Contacts] key. tion.
3. Choose the desired entry from the displayed list.
4. The number of the entry will be displayed on the
JVH0704XZ
screen. Touch the number to initiate dialling.
1. Phone < > button
RECEIVING A CALL BLUETOOTH® SETTINGS • Bluetooth
When a call is placed to the connected phone, the To access the Bluetooth® settings screen: Select to toggle Bluetooth® on and off.
display will change to phone mode.
1. Push the <SETUP> button. TELEPHONE SETUP
To accept the incoming call, take one of the follow-
2. Touch the [Telephone & Bluetooth] key. To access the phone settings screen:
ing actions.
Available setting items: 1. Push the <SETUP> button.
• Push the < > button on the steering wheel.
• Touch the [ ] icon on the screen. • Telephone Setup 2. Touch the [Telephone & Bluetooth] key.
See “Telephone setup” later in this section for 3. Touch the [Telephone Setup] key.
To reject the incoming call, take one of the following
details.
actions. Available setting items:
• Push the < > button on the steering wheel. • Pair New Device
• Sort Phonebook By:
Select to pair a new Bluetooth® device to the
• Touch the red phone [ ] icon on the screen.
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.
Select [First Name] or [Last Name] to choose
how phonebook entries are alphabetically dis-
DURING A CALL • Select Paired Device played on the screen.
While a call is active, the following options are avail-
able on the screen:
Select to choose a Bluetooth® device from a list • From Phonebook/Use Phonebook from:
of those devices paired to the Bluetooth®
Select [Phone] to use the handset’s phonebook.
• [Handset] Hands-Free Phone System.
Select [SIM] to use the phonebook on the SIM
Select this option to switch control of the phone • Replace Paired Device card. Select [Both] to use both sources.
call over to the handset. Select to replace a phone from the displayed list. • Download Phonebook Now:
• [Mute Mic.] When a selection is made, the system will ask to
Select to download the phonebook to the ve-
confirm before proceeding. The recorded phone-
Select this option to mute the microphone. Se- hicle from the chosen source.
book for the phone being deleted will be saved
lect again to reactivate the microphone. as long as the new phone’s phonebook is the
• Red phone [ ] icon same as the old phone’s phonebook.
Select to end the phone call. • Delete Paired Device
ENDING A CALL Select to delete a Bluetooth® device from a list
of those devices connected/paired to the Blue-
To end a phone call, select the red phone [ ] tooth® Hands-Free Phone System.
icon on the screen or push the < > button on
the steering wheel.
5 Starting and driving
Running-in schedule ................................................ 5-2 Starting engine (model without Intelligent Key
Before starting engine.............................................. 5-2 system).................................................................... 5-11
Precautions when starting and driving ...................... 5-2 Starting engine (model with Intelligent Key
Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) .......................... 5-3 system).................................................................... 5-12
Three-way catalyst (where fitted)......................... 5-3 Driving vehicle ......................................................... 5-13
Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Driving with Xtronic Continuously Variable
(where fitted) ...................................................... 5-4 Transmission (CVT) ............................................ 5-13
Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) ............................. 5-6 Driving with Manual Transmission (MT) ............... 5-16
On-pavement and off-road driving precautions ......... 5-6 Stop/Start System (where fitted) .............................. 5-18
Care when driving ................................................... 5-6 Stop/Start System display................................... 5-20
Engine cold start period ...................................... 5-6 Stop/Start OFF switch ....................................... 5-21
Loading luggage................................................. 5-6 Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) (where fitted).................... 5-22
Driving in wet conditions ..................................... 5-6 Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) mode switch
Driving in winter conditions ................................. 5-7 operations .......................................................... 5-22
Ignition switch (model without intelligent Key 4WD warning ..................................................... 5-24
system).................................................................... 5-7 4WD mode indicator lights.................................. 5-25
Xtronic Continuously Variable Transmission Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) torque distribution
(CVT) ................................................................. 5-7 indicator ............................................................. 5-25
Manual Transmission (MT) .................................. 5-7 Off-road driving safety precautions...................... 5-25
Steering lock ...................................................... 5-8 Tyres of 4WD model........................................... 5-26
Key positions ...................................................... 5-8 Electronic Stability Programme (ESP) system........... 5-27
Push-button ignition switch (model with Intelligent Electronic Stability Programme (ESP) system
Key system)............................................................. 5-8 OFF switch ........................................................ 5-28
Precautions on push-button ignition switch Chassis control........................................................ 5-29
operation ............................................................ 5-8 Active Trace Control........................................... 5-29
Intelligent Key system ......................................... 5-8 Active Engine Brake (Xtronic Continuously
Steering lock ...................................................... 5-9 Variable Transmission (CVT) model) ................... 5-29
Ignition switch positions...................................... 5-10 Active Ride Control............................................. 5-30
Intelligent Key battery discharge.......................... 5-11 Hill Start Assist system ............................................ 5-31
Hill descent control system (where fitted) ................. 5-32
Hill descent control switch .................................. 5-32 Parking sensor system (where fitted)........................ 5-49
Blind Spot Warning (BSW) system (where fitted)..... 5-33 Parking sensor system OFF switch (where
BSW system operation ....................................... 5-33 fitted).................................................................. 5-50
BSW driving situations ....................................... 5-35 Parking sensor system setting............................. 5-51
BSW temporary disabled status.......................... 5-36 Trailer towing........................................................... 5-51
BSW automatic deactivation ............................... 5-36 Operating precautions ........................................ 5-51
BSW malfunction ............................................... 5-36 Tyre pressure ..................................................... 5-52
Camera unit maintenance ................................... 5-36 Safety chains ...................................................... 5-52
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system (where Trailer brakes...................................................... 5-52
fitted)....................................................................... 5-36 Trailer detection (where fitted) ............................ 5-52
LDW system operation ....................................... 5-37 Coupling device installation................................. 5-53
Temporary disabled status at high temperature ... 5-38 Electric power steering system ................................ 5-53
Multi-sensing camera unit maintenance ............... 5-38 Brake system........................................................... 5-54
Speed limiter (where fitted) ...................................... 5-39 Brake precautions .............................................. 5-54
Speed limiter operations ..................................... 5-39 Brake assist........................................................ 5-55
Cruise control (where fitted) .................................... 5-41 Anti-lock Braking System (ABS).......................... 5-55
Precautions on cruise control.............................. 5-41 Vehicle security........................................................ 5-56
Cruise control operations.................................... 5-41 Cold weather driving................................................ 5-56
Forward emergency braking system (where fitted) ... 5-42 Battery ............................................................... 5-57
System operation................................................ 5-43 Engine coolant.................................................... 5-57
ECO mode system (where fitted) ............................. 5-45 Tyre equipment................................................... 5-57
ECO Pedal Guide function ................................. 5-45 Special winter equipment.................................... 5-57
Ambient ECO ..................................................... 5-46 Parking brake ..................................................... 5-57
ECO Drive Report .............................................. 5-46 Corrosion protection........................................... 5-57
Parking .................................................................... 5-47
RUNNING-IN SCHEDULE BEFORE STARTING ENGINE PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING
AND DRIVING
During the first 1,600 km (1,000 miles), follow these

recommendations to obtain maximum engine per- WARNING WARNING
formance and ensure the future reliability and The driving characteristics of your vehicle will • Never leave children or adults who would nor-
economy of your new vehicle. Failure to follow these change remarkably by any additional load and its mally require the support of others alone in
recommendations may result in shortened engine distribution, as well as by adding optional equip- your vehicle. Pets should not be left alone
life and reduced engine performance. ment (trailer coupling, roof racks, etc.). Your driv- either. They could unknowingly activate
ing style and speed must be adjusted according switches or controls and inadvertently
• Do not drive at a constant speed, either fast or
to the circumstances. Especially when carrying become involved in a serious accident and
slow, for long periods of time.
heavy loads, your speed must be reduced ad- injure themselves. On hot, sunny days, tem-
• Do not run the engine over 4,000 rpm (for petrol equately. peratures in a closed vehicle could quickly
engine models). become high enough to cause severe or pos-
• Make sure the area around the vehicle is clear.
sibly fatal illness to people or animals.
• Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear.
• Visually inspect tyres for their appearance and
• Properly secure all luggage to help prevent it
• Do not start quickly. condition. Measure and check the tyre pressure
from sliding or shifting. Do not place luggage
• Do not brake hard as much as possible. for proper inflation.
higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop
• Do not tow a trailer for at least the first 800 km • Check that all windows and lights are clean. or collision, unsecured luggage could cause
personal injury.
(500 miles). • Adjust the seat and head restraint positions.
NOTE
• Adjust the inside and outside rearview mirror po-
sitions. During the first few months after purchasing a
new vehicle, if you smell strong odours of Vola-
• Fasten your seat belt and ask all passengers to
tile Organic Compounds (VOCs) inside the ve-
do the same.
hicle, ventilate the passenger compartment thor-
• Check that all doors are closed. oughly. Open all the windows before entering or
• Check the operation of the warning lights when while in the vehicle. In addition, when the tem-
the ignition switch is placed in the “ON” position. perature in the passenger compartment rises, or
when the vehicle is parked in direct sunlight for a
• Maintenance items in the “8. Maintenance and period of time, turn off the air recirculation mode
do-it-yourself” section should be checked peri- of the air conditioner and/or open the windows
odically. to allow sufficient fresh air into the passenger
compartment.
5-2 Starting and driving

EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide) • If a special body or other equipment is added The three-way catalyst is an emission control device
for recreational or other usage, follow the installed in the exhaust system. Exhaust gas in the
WARNING manufacturer’s recommendation to prevent three-way catalyst is burned at high temperatures to
carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle. help reduce pollutants.
• Do not breathe exhaust gas; it contains co- (Some recreational vehicle appliances such
CAUTION
lourless and odourless carbon monoxide. Car- as stoves, refrigerators, heaters, etc. may also
bon monoxide is dangerous. It can cause un- generate carbon monoxide.) • Do not use leaded petrol. (See “Recom-
consciousness or death. mended Fluids/lubricants and capacities” in
• The exhaust system and body should be in-
the “9. Technical information” section.) De-
• If you suspect that exhaust fumes are enter- spected by a qualified mechanic whenever:
posits from leaded petrol seriously reduce the
ing the vehicle, drive with all windows fully
open, and have the vehicle inspected imme- – Your vehicle is raised while being serviced. ability of the three-way catalyst to help reduce
diately. exhaust pollutants and/or damage the three-
– You suspect that exhaust fumes are enter-
way catalyst.
ing into the passenger compartment.
• Do not run the engine in closed spaces such
• Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunctions in
as a garage. – You notice a change in the sound of the
the ignition, fuel injection, or electrical sys-
exhaust system.
• Do not park the vehicle with the engine run- tems may cause overrich fuel to flow into the
ning for an extended period of time. – You have had an accident involving dam- three-way catalyst, causing it to overheat. Do
age to the exhaust system, underbody, or not keep driving if the engine misfires, or if
• Keep the back door closed while driving, oth-
rear of the vehicle. noticeable loss of performance or other un-
erwise exhaust gas could be drawn into the
passenger compartment. If you must drive usual operating conditions are detected. Have
THREE-WAY CATALYST (where fitted) the vehicle inspected promptly by a NISSAN
with the back door open, follow these precau-
tions: dealer or qualified workshop.
WARNING
– Open all the windows. • Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel level.
• The exhaust gas and the exhaust system are Running out of fuel could cause the engine to
– Turn the air recirculation mode off and set very hot. Keep people, animals and flammable misfire, damaging the three-way catalyst.
the fan speed control to the highest level materials away from the exhaust system com-
to circulate the air. ponents. • Do not race the engine while warming it up.
• If electrical wiring or other cable connections • Do not stop or park the vehicle over flam- • Do not push or tow your vehicle to start the
must pass to a trailer through the seal of the mable materials such as dry grass, wastepa- engine.
back door or the body, follow the manufactur- per or rags. They may ignite and cause a fire.
er’s recommendation to prevent carbon mon-
oxide entry into the vehicle.
Starting and driving 5-3

TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale minate even if the tyre pressure has been ad-
SYSTEM (TPMS) (where fitted) will flash for approximately one minute and then re- justed properly. Adjust the tyre pressure to the
main continuously illuminated. This sequence will recommended COLD tyre pressure again when
Each tyre, including the spare (if provided), should continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long the tyres are cold, and reset the TPMS.
be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction in-
inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle dicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to • You can check the pressure of all tyres in the
manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tyre inflation vehicle information display. (See “Trip computer”
detect or signal low tyre pressure as intended.
pressure label. (If your vehicle has tyres of a differ- in the “2. Instruments and controls” section.)
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of rea-
ent size than the size indicated on the vehicle plac- sons, including the installation of replacement or For additional information, see “Low tyre pressure
ard or tyre inflation pressure label, you should deter- alternate tyres or wheels on the vehicle that prevent warning light (where fitted)” in the “2. Instruments
mine the proper tyre inflation pressure for those the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check and controls” section.
tyres.) the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been more tyres or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that WARNING
equipped with a Tyre Pressure Monitoring System the replacement or alternate tyres and wheels allow
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tyre pressure telltale the TPMS to continue to function properly. • If the low tyre pressure warning light illumi-
nates while driving, avoid sudden steering
when one or more of your tyres is significantly un- Additional information manoeuvres or abrupt braking, reduce vehicle
der-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tyre pres- speed, pull off the road to a safe location and
sure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check • The TPMS does not monitor the tyre pressure of
stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Driving
your tyres as soon as possible, and inflate them to the spare tyre.
with under-inflated tyres may permanently
the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly un- • The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle is damage the tyres and increase the likelihood
der-inflated tyre causes the tyre to overheat and can driven at speeds above 25 km/h (16 MPH). Also, of tyre failure. Serious vehicle damage could
lead to tyre failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel this system may not detect a sudden drop in tyre occur and may lead to an accident and could
efficiency and tyre tread life, and may affect the vehi- pressure (for example a flat tyre while driving). result in serious personal injury. Check the
cle’s handling and stopping ability. tyre pressure for all four tyres. Adjust the tyre
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
• The low tyre pressure warning light may not au-
pressure to the recommended COLD tyre
tomatically turn off when the tyre pressure is ad-
proper tyre maintenance, and it is the driver’s re- pressure shown on the tyre placard to turn
justed. After the tyre is inflated to the recom-
sponsibility to maintain correct tyre pressure, even if the low tyre pressure warning light off. If the
mended pressure, reset the tyre pressures reg-
under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger light still illuminates while driving after adjust-
istered in your vehicle and then drive the vehicle
illumination of the TPMS low tyre pressure telltale. ing the tyre pressure, a tyre may be flat. If you
at speeds above 25 km/h (16 MPH) to activate
have a flat tyre, replace it with a spare tyre as
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS the TPMS and turn off the low tyre pressure
soon as possible. (See “Flat tyre” in the “6. In
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is warning light.
case of emergency” section for changing a
not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indi-
cator is combined with the low tyre pressure telltale.
• Depending on a change in the outside tempera- flat tyre.)
ture, the low tyre pressure warning light may illu-

• After adjusting the tyre pressure, be sure to Some devices and transmitters may temporarily in-
reset the TPMS. Otherwise, the TPMS will not terfere with the operation of the TPMS and cause
warn of low tyre pressure. the low tyre pressure warning light to illuminate.
Some examples are:
• When a spare tyre is mounted or a wheel is
replaced, the TPMS will not function and the • Facilities or electric devices using similar radio
low tyre pressure warning light will flash for frequencies are near the vehicle.
approximately 1 minute. The light will remain
on after the 1 minute. Contact a NISSAN • If a transmitter set to similar frequencies is being
used in or near the vehicle.
dealer or qualified workshop as soon as pos-
sible for tyre replacement and/or system re- • If a computer (or similar equipment) or a DC/AC JVS0434XZ
setting. converter is being used in or near the vehicle. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left side)
• Replacing tyres with those not originally speci- TPMS resetting 5. Use the switch j
1 until [Settings] appears,
fied by NISSAN could affect the proper opera- and press ENTER j1.
To keep the TPMS functioning properly, the reset
tion of the TPMS.
operation must be performed in the following cases. 6. Use the switch j
1 until [Tyre Pressures] is
• Do not inject any tyre liquid or aerosol tyre
• when the tyre pressure is adjusted selected, and press ENTER j 1.
sealant into the tyres, as this may cause a
7. Use the switch j
1 until [Calibrate] is se-
malfunction of the tyre pressure sensors. • when a tyre or a wheel is replaced
lected, and press ENTER j1.
CAUTION • when the tyres are rotated
8. Use the switch j1 until [Start] is selected,
• The TPMS may not function properly when the Perform the following procedures to reset the and press ENTER j 1 to reset the TPMS. When
wheels are equipped with tyre chains or the TPMS. the TPMS resetting starts, the message [Reset-
wheels are buried in snow. ting tyre pressure system] will be displayed.
1. Park the vehicle in a safe and level place.
• Do not place metalised film or any metal parts
2. Apply the parking brake and place the shift lever 9. After resetting the TPMS, drive the vehicle for
(antenna, etc.) on the windows. This may several minutes at speeds above 25 km/h (16
in the P (Park) position.
cause poor reception of the signals from the MPH).
tyre pressure sensors, and the TPMS will not 3. Adjust the tyre pressure on all four tyres to the
function properly. recommended COLD tyre pressure shown on If the low tyre pressure warning light illuminates af-
the tyre placard. Use a tyre pressure gauge to ter the resetting operation, it may indicate that the
check the tyre pressure. TPMS is not functioning properly. Have the system
checked by a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
4. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.

ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD CARE WHEN DRIVING
DRIVING PRECAUTIONS
For information regarding the low tyre pressure Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover Driving your vehicle to fit the circumstances is es-
warning light, see “Recommended Fluids/lubricants rate than other types of vehicles. sential for your safety and comfort. As a driver, you
and capacities” in the “9. Technical information” should be the one who knows best how to drive in
They have higher ground clearance than passenger
section. the given circumstances.
cars to make them capable of performing in a wide
DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER (DPF) variety of on-pavement and off-road applications. ENGINE COLD START PERIOD
This gives them a higher centre of gravity than ordi-
nary cars. An advantage of higher ground clearance Due to the higher engine speeds, when the engine
WARNING is cold, extra caution must be exercised when se-
is a better view of the road, allowing you to antici-
• Be careful not to burn yourself with exhaust pate problems. However, they are not designed for lecting a gear during the engine warm-up period
gases. cornering at the same speeds as conventional pas- after starting the engine.
• Do not park the vehicle over flammable mate- senger cars any more than low-slung sports cars
are designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road
LOADING LUGGAGE
rials such as dry grass, waste paper or rags,
conditions. If at all possible, avoid sharp turns or Loads and their distribution and the attachment of
as they may burn easily.
abrupt manoeuvres, particularly at high speeds. As equipment (coupling devices, roof luggage carriers,
• Use the specified engine oil for Diesel Par- with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate etc.) will considerably change the driving character-
ticulate Filter (DPF) equipped models. For de- this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or istics of the vehicle. Your driving style and speed
tails, see “Recommended Fluids/lubricants vehicle rollover. must be adjusted according to the circumstances.
and capacities” in the “9. Technical
information” section. CAUTION DRIVING IN WET CONDITIONS
CAUTION • Do not drive on dry hard surface roads in LOCK • Avoid accelerating or stopping suddenly.
The DPF becomes extremely hot after burning

mode. • Avoid sharp turning or lane changing suddenly.
particulate matter. • Driving on dry hard surface roads in LOCK • Avoid following too close to the vehicle in front.
mode may cause unnecessary noise and tyre
wear. NISSAN recommends driving in the When water covers the road surface with water
2WD or AUTO mode under these conditions. puddles, small water streams, etc., reduce speed to
(Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) model) prevent hydroplaning which can cause skidding and
loss of control. Worn tyres will increase this risk.
See “Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) (where fitted)” in the
“5. Starting and driving” section for more details.

IGNITION SWITCH (model without
intelligent Key system)
DRIVING IN WINTER CONDITIONS 3. Place the ignition switch to the “LOCK” position.
WARNING
• Drive cautiously.
Never remove the key or place the ignition switch
4. Remove the key.
• Avoid accelerating or stopping suddenly. in the “LOCK” position while driving. The steering If the ignition switch is turned to the “LOCK” posi-
wheel will lock and could cause the driver to lose tion, the shift lever cannot be moved from the “P”
• Avoid sharp turning or lane changing suddenly.
control of the vehicle. This could result in serious (Park) position. The shift lever can be moved if the
• Avoid sudden steering. vehicle damage or personal injury. ignition switch is in the “ON” position with the foot-
brake pedal depressed.
• Avoid following too close to the vehicle in front. XTRONIC CONTINUOUSLY
The “OFF” position j1 is between the “LOCK” and
VARIABLE TRANSMISSION (CVT) “ON” positions, although it is not marked on the
ignition switch.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION (MT)
JVS0409XZ
The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition

JVS0409XZ
switch cannot be turned to the “LOCK” position
until the shift lever is moved to the “P” (Park) posi-
tion. When moving the ignition switch to the “LOCK” The ignition switch includes a device that helps pre-
position, to remove the key from the ignition switch, vent accidental removal of the key while driving.
make sure the shift lever is in the “P” (Park) position.
The key can only be removed when the ignition
When the ignition switch cannot be turned to the switch is in the “LOCK” position.
“LOCK” position:
1. Turn the ignition switch slightly in the “ON” direc-
1. Move the shift lever to the “P” (Park) position. tion.
2. Turn the ignition switch slightly in the “ON” direc- 2. Place the ignition switch to the “LOCK” position.
tion.

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION
SWITCH (model with Intelligent Key
system)
3. Remove the key. • The electrical accessory power activates with- PRECAUTIONS ON PUSH-BUTTON
out the engine turned on. (ACC position) IGNITION SWITCH OPERATION
The “OFF” position j1 is between the “LOCK” and
“ON” positions, although it is not marked on the ON (2)
ignition switch. WARNING
The ignition system and the electrical accessory
STEERING LOCK power activate without the engine turned on. Do not operate the push-button ignition switch
while driving the vehicle except in an emergency.
To lock steering wheel START (3) (The engine will stop when the ignition switch is
1. Place the ignition switch in the “LOCK” position. The engine starter activates and the engine will start. pushed 3 consecutive times or the ignition switch
The ignition switch, when released, will automati- is pushed and held for more than 2 seconds.)
2. Remove the key, if it is inserted in the ignition The steering wheel will lock and could cause the
cally turn to the “ON” position.
switch. driver to lose control of the vehicle. This could
CAUTION result in serious vehicle damage or personal in-
3. Turn the steering wheel 1/6 of a turn clockwise
from the straight up position. As soon as the engine has started, release the jury.
ignition switch immediately. Before operating the push-button ignition switch, be
To unlock steering wheel
sure to move the shift lever to the P (Park) position
1. Insert the key into the ignition switch. (Xtronic CVT (Continuously Variable Transmission)
2. Gently turn the ignition switch while rotating the model) or the shift lever to the N (Neutral) position
steering wheel slightly right and left. (MT (Manual Transmission) model).
KEY POSITIONS INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM

LOCK (OFF)/LOCK (ACC) (0) The Intelligent Key system can operate the ignition
switch without taking the key out from your pocket
• The ignition key can only be removed at this po- or bag. The operating environment and/or condi-
sition. tions may affect the Intelligent Key system opera-
• The steering lock can only be locked at this position. Some indicators and warnings for operation
are displayed on the vehicle information display and/
tion.
or in the meter. (See “Vehicle information display” in
• The electrical accessory power activates with- the “2. Instruments and controls” section and
out the engine turned on. (ACC position) “Warning lights, indicator lights and audible
OFF/OFF(ACC) (1) reminders” in the “2. Instruments and controls” sec-
tion.)
• The engine is turned off with the steering wheel
unlocked.

CAUTION the operating location, the Intelligent Key system’s 4. Open the door. The ignition switch turns to the
operating range becomes narrower and may not LOCK position.
• Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you
function properly.
when operating the vehicle. For warnings and indicators on the vehicle informa-
If the Intelligent Key is within the operating range, it tion display, see “Vehicle information display” in the
• Never leave the Intelligent Key inside the ve-
is possible for anyone, even someone who does not “2. Instruments and controls” section.
hicle when you leave the vehicle.
carry the Intelligent Key, to push the ignition switch
If the ignition switch is switched to the LOCK posi-
• If the vehicle battery is discharged, the igni- to start the engine.
tion, the shift lever cannot be moved from the P
tion switch cannot be switched from the LOCK
position, and if the steering lock is engaged, • The luggage room area is not included in the (Park) position. The shift lever can be moved if the
operating range, but the Intelligent Key may func- ignition switch is in the ON position with the foot-
the steering wheel cannot be moved. Charge
tion. brake pedal depressed.
the battery as soon as possible. (See “Jump
starting” in the “6. In case of emergency” sec- • If the Intelligent Key is placed on the instrument STEERING LOCK
tion.) panel, inside the glove box, door pocket or the
corner of the interior compartment, the Intelli- The ignition switch is equipped with an anti-theft
Operating range gent Key may not function. steering lock device.
• If the Intelligent Key is placed near the door or To lock steering wheel
window outside the vehicle, the Intelligent Key 1. Place the ignition switch in the OFF position
may function. where the ignition switch position indicator will
not illuminate.
Xtronic Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) model 2. Open or close the door. The ignition switch turns
to the LOCK position.
The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition
switch cannot be switched to the LOCK position 3. Turn the steering wheel 1/6 of a turn to the right
until the shift lever is moved to the P (Park) position. or left from the straight up position.
SSD0436Z
When the ignition switch cannot be switched to the To unlock steering wheel
LOCK position:
The Intelligent Key can only be used for starting the Push the ignition switch, and the steering wheel will
engine when the Intelligent Key is within the speci- 1. [Shift to Park] warning appears on the vehicle be automatically unlocked.
fied operating range j1. information display and a chime sounds.
CAUTION
When the Intelligent Key battery is almost 2. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.
discharged or strong radio waves are present near
• If the battery of the vehicle is discharged, the
3. Push the ignition switch. The ignition switch is push-button ignition switch cannot be
switched to the OFF position. switched from the LOCK position.

• If the steering lock release malfunction indi- ON position
cator appears on the vehicle information dis-
play, push the ignition switch again while ro- The ignition system and the electrical accessory
tating the steering wheel slightly to the right power activate at this position without the engine
and left. turned on.
(See “Vehicle information display” in the “2. In- The ON position has a battery saver feature that will
struments and controls” section.) place the ignition switch in the OFF position, if the
vehicle is not running, after some time under the fol-
IGNITION SWITCH POSITIONS lowing conditions:
WARNING
JVS0394XZ • all doors are closed.
Never place the ignition switch in the OFF posi-

• shift lever is in P (Park) position (Xtronic CVT
When the ignition switch is pushed without depress- model) or N (Neutral) position (MT model).
tion while driving. The steering wheel may lock
ing the brake pedal (Xtronic CVT (Continuously Vari- The battery saver feature will be cancelled if any of
and cause the driver to lose control of the ve-
able Transmission) model) or the clutch pedal (MT the following occur:
hicle, resulting in serious vehicle damage or per-
(Manual Transmission) model), the ignition switch
sonal injury.
will illuminate. • any door is opened.
CAUTION
Push the ignition switch centre: • shift lever is moved out of the P (Park) position.
• Do not leave the vehicle for extended periods
• once to change to ON. • ignition switch changes position.
of time when the ignition switch is in the ON
position and the engine is not running. This • two times to change to OFF. OFF position
can discharge the battery. The ignition switch will automatically return to the The engine is turned off in this position.
• Use electrical accessories with the engine LOCK position when any door is either opened or
Auto ACC position
running to avoid discharging the vehicle bat- closed with the switch in the OFF position.
tery. If you must use accessories while the With the vehicle in the P (Park) position, the Intelli-
engine is not running, do not use them for
LOCK position gent Key with you and the ignition placed from ON
extended periods of time and do not use mul- The ignition switch and steering lock can only be to OFF, the radio can still be used for a period of
tiple electrical accessories at the same time. locked at this position. time, or until the driver’s door is opened. After a
period of time, functions such as radio, navigation
The ignition switch will lock when any door is opened
(where fitted), and Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
or closed with the ignition switched off.
System may be restarted by pressing the
<POWER> button/ <VOLUME> control knob” (See
“Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and au-

STARTING ENGINE (model without
Intelligent Key system)
dio system” in the “4. ” section in this manual) or the 4. Push the ignition switch while depressing the 1. Apply the parking brake.
<UNLOCK> button on the Intelligent Key up to a brake pedal (Xtronic CVT model) or the clutch
2. Depress the footbrake pedal.
total of 30 minutes. pedal (MT model) within 10 seconds after the
chime sounds. The engine will start. 3. Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY model:
DISCHARGE After step 3 is performed, when the ignition switch
is pushed without depressing the brake pedal Move the shift lever to the P (Park) or N (Neutral)
(Xtronic CVT model) or the clutch pedal (MT model), position.
the ignition switch position will change to ON.
The starter is designed to operate only when the
NOTE shift lever is in the proper position.
• When the ignition switch is placed in the ON Manual Transmission (MT) model:
position or the engine is started by the above Move the shift lever to the N (Neutral) position,
procedures, the Key battery low warning ap- and depress the clutch pedal to the floor while
pears (on the Vehicle information display) starting the engine.
even if the Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle.
JVS0404XZ This is not a malfunction. To turn off the warn- The starter is designed to not operate unless
ing, touch the ignition switch with the Intelli- the clutch pedal is depressed.
If the battery of the Intelligent Key is discharged, or gent Key again. 4. Crank the engine with your foot off the accelera-
environmental conditions interfere with the Intelli- • If the Key battery low warning appears (on the tor pedal by turning the ignition switch in the
START position.
gent Key operation, start the engine according to Vehicle information display), replace the bat-
the following procedure: tery as soon as possible. (See “Battery For diesel engine models: Wait until the glow
1. Xtronic CVT (Continuously Variable Transmis- replacement” in the “8. Maintenance and indicator light goes out.
sion) model: do-it-yourself” section.)
5. Immediately release the ignition switch when the
Move the shift lever to the P (Park) or N (Neutral) engine starts. If the engine starts, but fails to run,
position. repeat the above procedures.
MT (Manual Transmission) model: If the engine is very hard to start in extremely cold
or hot weather, depress the accelerator pedal
Move the shift lever to the N (Neutral) position.
and hold it to help start the engine.
2. Firmly depress the brake pedal.
3. Touch the ignition switch with the Intelligent Key
as illustrated. (A chime will sound.)

STARTING ENGINE (model with
Intelligent Key system)
CAUTION 1. Apply the parking brake. If the engine is very hard to start in extremely cold
or hot weather, depress the accelerator pedal
• Do not operate the starter for more than 2. Xtronic CVT (Continuously Variable Transmis-
and hold it. Push the ignition switch for up to 15
15 seconds at a time. If the engine does sion) model:
seconds while holding. Release the accelerator
not start, place the ignition switch off and
Move the shift lever to the P (Park) or the N (Neu- pedal when the engine starts.
wait 10 seconds before cranking the en-
tral) position.
gine again. Otherwise, the starter could be CAUTION
damaged. The starter is designed to operate only when
the shift lever is in the proper position. • As soon as the engine has started, release
• If it becomes necessary to start the engine the ignition switch immediately.
with a booster battery and jumper cables, MT (Manual Transmission) model:
the instructions and cautions contained in • Do not operate the starter for more than
Move the shift lever to the N (Neutral) position. 15 seconds at a time. If the engine does
the “6. In case of emergency” section
The starter is designed to not operate unless not start, place the ignition switch in the
should be carefully followed.
the clutch pedal is fully depressed. OFF position and wait 10 seconds before
6. Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 seconds cranking the engine again. Otherwise, the
after starting the engine to warm-up. Drive at The Intelligent Key must be carried when op- starter could be damaged.
moderate speeds for a short distance first, espe- erating the ignition switch.
cially in cold weather. • If it becomes necessary to start the engine
3. Place the ignition switch in the ON position. De- with a booster battery and jumper cables,
CAUTION press the brake pedal (Xtronic CVT model) or the instructions and cautions contained in
the clutch pedal (MT model) and push the igni- the “6. In case of emergency” section
Do not leave the vehicle unattended while the tion switch to start the engine. should be carefully followed.
engine is warming up.
For diesel engine models: Wait until the glow 5. Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 seconds
indicator light goes out. after starting the engine to warm-up. Drive at
To start the engine immediately, push and re- moderate speeds for a short distance first, espe-
lease the ignition switch while depressing the cially in cold weather.
brake pedal or clutch pedal with the ignition CAUTION
switch in any position.
Do not leave the vehicle unattended while the
4. Immediately release the ignition switch when the engine is warming up.
engine starts. If the engine starts, but fails to run,
repeat the above procedures.

DRIVING VEHICLE
6. To stop the engine, move the shift lever to the P DRIVING WITH XTRONIC any other position. If it does, have your ve-
(Park) position (Xtronic CVT model) or move the CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE hicle checked by a NISSAN dealer or qualified
shift lever to the N (Neutral) position (MT model), workshop.
apply the parking brake and place the ignition
TRANSMISSION (CVT)
switch in the OFF position. The Xtronic Continuously Variable Transmission • Except in an emergency, do not shift to the N
(Neutral) position while driving. Coasting with
(CVT) in your vehicle is electronically controlled to
the transmission in the N (Neutral) position
produce maximum power and smooth operation.
may cause serious damage to the transmis-
The recommended operating procedures for this sion.
transmission are shown on the following pages. Fol-
low these procedures for maximum vehicle perfor- • Shift into the P (Park) position and apply the
parking brake when at a standstill for longer
mance and driving enjoyment.
than a short waiting period.
WARNING • Keep the engine at idling speed while shifting
from the N (Neutral) position to any driving
Do not downshift abruptly on slippery roads. This position.
may cause a loss of control.
CAUTION
• When stopping the vehicle on an uphill grade,
do not hold the vehicle by depressing the ac-
• The cold engine idle speed is high, so use celerator pedal. The footbrake pedal should
caution when shifting the transmission into a be depressed in this situation.
forward or reverse position before the engine
has warmed up.
Starting vehicle
1. After starting the engine, fully depress the foot-
• Avoid revving up the engine while the vehicle
brake pedal before moving the shift lever out of
is stopped. This could cause unexpected ve-
the P (Park) position.
hicle movement.
2. Keep the footbrake pedal depressed and move
• Never shift to either the P (Park) or R (Re-
the shift lever to a driving position.
verse) position while the vehicle is moving.
This could cause serious damage to the trans- 3. Release the parking brake, the footbrake pedal,
mission. and then gradually start the vehicle in motion.
• Start the engine in either the P (Park) or N The Xtronic CVT is designed so the footbrake
(Neutral) position. The engine will not start in pedal MUST be depressed before shifting from
the P (Park) position to any driving position while
the ignition switch is in the ON position.

The shift lever cannot be moved out of the P Shifting lights may not work. Malfunctioning stop
(Park) position and into any of the other posi- lights could cause an accident injuring your-
tions if the ignition switch is placed in the LOCK, self and others.
OFF or ACC position.
CAUTION
CAUTION
To prevent transmission damage, use the P
• DEPRESS THE FOOTBRAKE PEDAL - Shifting (Park) or R (Reverse) position only when the ve-
the shift lever to D, R or manual shift mode hicle is completely stopped.
without depressing the footbrake pedal
After starting the engine, fully depress the foot brake
causes the vehicle to move slowly when the
pedal, push the shift lever button and move the shift
engine is running. Make sure the footbrake
lever out of the P (Park) position.
pedal is depressed fully and the vehicle is JVS0391XZ
stopped before shifting the shift lever. With manual shift mode (LHD model) If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF or ACC
position for any reason while the shift lever is in any
• MAKE SURE OF THE SHIFT LEVER POSITION
Push the button jA while depressing positions other than the P (Park) position, the igni-
- Make sure the shift lever is in the desired
m: the footbrake pedal. tion switch cannot be placed in the LOCK position.
position. D and manual shift mode are used
to move forward and R to reverse. If the ignition switch cannot be placed in the LOCK
m: Push the button j
A. position, perform the following steps:
• WARM UP THE ENGINE - Due to the higher
idle speeds when the engine is cold, extra Just move the shift lever. 1. Apply the parking brake.
caution must be exercised when shifting the
m:
2. Place the ignition switch in the ON position while
shift lever into the driving position immedi- depressing the footbrake pedal.
WARNING
ately after starting the engine.
3. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.
• Apply the parking brake if the shift lever is in
any position while the engine is not running. 4. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK position.
Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to
P (Park):
move unexpectedly or roll away and result in
serious personal injury or property damage. Use this position when the vehicle is parked or when
starting the engine. Make sure that the vehicle is
• If the shift lever cannot be moved from the P completely stopped and move the shift lever into
(Park) position while the engine is running and the P (Park) position. Apply the parking brake.
the footbrake pedal is depressed, the stop When parking on a hill, first depress the footbrake
pedal, apply the parking brake, and then move the
shift lever into the P (Park) position.

R (Reverse): • Moving the shift lever to the same side twice will • In the manual shift mode, the transmission
Use this position to reverse. Make sure that the shift the ranges in succession. However, if this may not shift to the selected gear. This helps
vehicle is completely stopped before selecting the R motion is rapidly done, the second shifting may maintain driving performance and reduces the
(Reverse) position. not be completed properly. chance of vehicle damage or loss of control.
N (Neutral): M7 (Seventh): • When cancelling the manual shift mode, return

Use this position for all normal forward driving. How- the shift lever to the D position. The transmission
Neither the forward nor reverse gear is engaged. returns to the normal driving mode.
The engine can be started in this position. You may ever, you need to shift down the gears manually
shift to the N (Neutral) position and restart a stalled when accelerating or passing another vehicle. • When the Xtronic CVT fluid temperature is ex-
engine while the vehicle is moving. M6 (Sixth) and M5 (Fifth): tremely low, the manual shift mode may not work
and automatically shift as a drive mode. This is
D (Drive): Use these positions when driving up long slopes, or not a malfunction. In this case, return the shift
Use this position for all normal forward driving. for engine braking when driving down long slopes. lever to the D position and drive for a while and
M4 (Fourth), M3 (Third) and M2 (Second): then shift to the manual shift mode.
Manual shift mode
When the shift lever is shifted from the D position to
Use these positions for hill climbing or engine brak- • When the Xtronic CVT fluid temperature is high,
ing on downhill grades. the shift range may upshift in lower rpm than
the manual shift gate with the vehicle stopped or usual. This is not a malfunction.
while driving, the transmission enters the manual M1 (First):
shift mode. Shift ranges can be selected manually. Use this position when climbing steep hills slowly or Accelerator downshift - in the D
In the manual shift mode, the shift range is displayed driving slowly through deep snow, sand or mud or position -
on the position indicator in the meter. for maximum engine braking on steep downhill
For passing or climbing hills, depress the accelera-
grades.
Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows: tor pedal to the floor. This shifts the transmission
→ → → → → →
• Remember not to drive at high speeds for ex- down into a lower gear, depending on the vehicle
M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7 tended periods of time in lower than M7 range. speed.
← ← ← ← ← ←
This reduces fuel economy.
Shift lock release
• When shifting up, move the shift lever to the + • In the manual shift mode, the transmission
If the battery is discharged, the shift lever may not
(up) side. (Shifts to higher range.) automatically shifts down to M1 (First) before
the vehicle comes to a stop. When accelerat- be moved from the P (Park) position even with the
• When shifting down, move the shift lever to the
ing again, it is necessary to shift up to the footbrake pedal depressed.
− (down) side. (Shifts to lower range.)
desired range.

To release the shift lock, perform the following pro- If the shift lever cannot be moved out of the P (Park)
cedure: position, have a NISSAN dealer or qualified work- WARNING
shop check the Xtronic CVT system as soon as When the fail-safe operation occurs, vehicle
possible. speed may be gradually reduced. The reduced
speed may be lower than other traffic, which
High fluid temperature protection mode
could increase the chance of a collision. Be es-
This transmission has a high fluid temperature pro- pecially careful when driving. If necessary, pull to
tection mode. If the fluid temperature becomes too the side of the road at a safe place and allow the
high (for example, when climbing steep grades in transmission to return to normal operation, or
high temperature with heavy loads), engine power have it repaired if necessary.
and, under some conditions, vehicle speed will be
decreased automatically to reduce the chance of DRIVING WITH MANUAL
JVS0392XZ
transmission damage. Vehicle speed can be con- TRANSMISSION (MT)
Example
trolled with the accelerator pedal, but engine and
1. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or LOCK vehicle speed may be limited. WARNING
position.
Fail-safe • Do not downshift abruptly on slippery roads.
2. Apply the parking brake. This may cause a loss of vehicle control.
When the fail-safe operation occurs, the Xtronic
3. Remove the shift lock release cover (shown in CVT will not be shifted to the selected driving posi- • Do not over-rev the engine when shifting to a
the illustration above) using a suitable tool. tion. lower gear. This may cause a loss of vehicle
control or engine damage.
4. Insert the mechanical key and push down the If the vehicle is driven under extreme conditions,
shift lock release. such as excessive wheel spinning and subse- CAUTION
quent hard braking, the fail-safe system may be
5. Press the shift lever button and move the shift
activated. This will occur even if all electrical cir-
• Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal while
lever to the N (Neutral) position while holding driving. This may damage the clutch system.
cuits are functioning properly. In this case, turn
down the shift lock release. Replace the removed
shift lock release cover after the operation.
the ignition switch off and wait for 10 seconds. • Fully depress the clutch pedal before shifting
Then place the ignition switch back in the ON to help prevent transmission damage.
Place the ignition switch in the ON position to re- position. The vehicle should return to its normal
lease the steering wheel lock. operating condition. If it does not return to its
• Stop the vehicle completely before shifting
into the R (Reverse) position.
The vehicle may be moved, by pushing, to the de- normal operating condition, have a NISSAN
sired location. dealer check the transmission and repair it if nec-
essary.

• When the vehicle is stopped for a period of If it is difficult to move the shift lever into the R safe operation. Do not over-rev the engine when
time, for example waiting at stoplights, shift (Reverse) or 1 (1st) position, shift to the N (Neutral) shifting to a lower gear as it may cause engine dam-
to the N (Neutral) position and release the position, and then release the clutch pedal once. age or loss of vehicle control.
clutch pedal with the footbrake pedal Fully depress the clutch pedal again and shift into R
MR20DD engine model:
depressed. or 1.
km/h (MPH)
• Do not shift to the N (Neutral) position while 1st 48 (29)
driving. Coasting with the transmission in the 2nd 84 (52)
N (Neutral) position may cause serious dam- 3rd 117 (72)
age to the transmission. 4th 151 (93)
Starting vehicle 5th & 6th — (—)
1. After starting the engine, depress the clutch MR16DDT engine model:
pedal to the floor and move the shift lever to the km/h (MPH)
1 (1st) or R (Reverse) position. 1st 48 (30)
2. Slowly depress the accelerator pedal, releasing SSD0552Z 2nd 85 (53)
the clutch pedal and parking brake at the same 3rd 135 (84)
4th 183 (114)
time. • To reverse, stop the vehicle and move the shift
5th & 6th — (—)
lever into the N (Neutral) position, and then pull
Shifting gear the ring j1 upward to shift into the R (Reverse) R9M engine model:
To change gears, or when upshifting or downshift- position.
ing, fully depress the clutch pedal, shift into the ap- km/h (MPH)
propriate gear, then slowly and smoothly release the • The pull ring returns to its original position when 1st 35 (22)
the shift lever is moved to the N (Neutral) posi- 2nd 63 (39)
clutch pedal.
tion. 3rd 98 (61)
To ensure smooth gear changes, fully depress the 4th 136 (85)
clutch pedal before operating the shift lever. If the Suggested maximum speed in each gear
5th & 6th — (—)
clutch pedal is not fully depressed before the trans- Downshift to a lower gear if the engine is not run-
mission is shifted, a gear noise may be heard. Trans- ning smoothly, or if you need to accelerate.
mission damage could occur.
Do not exceed the maximum suggested speed
Start the vehicle in the 1 (1st) position and shift to (shown below) in any gear. For level road driving,
the 2 (2nd), 3 (3rd), 4 (4th), 5 (5th) and 6 (6th) gear use the highest gear suggested for that speed. Al-
in sequence according to the vehicle speed. ways observe posted speed limits, and drive ac-
cording to the road conditions which will ensure

STOP/START SYSTEM
(where fitted)
The Stop/Start System is designed to prevent un- NOTE • When the temperature inside the vehicle is
necessary fuel consumption, exhaust emissions, too high or low. (When the air conditioner is
The Stop/Start System will not activate under
and noise during a journey: off, the Stop/Start System will operate.)
the following conditions:
• When you stop the vehicle with the brake pedal
• When the engine is kept idling without any • When the fan speed of the air conditioner is
depressed (Xtronic CVT) or with the shift lever in set to the maximum speed.
driving after the engine is turned on.
N (Neutral) and clutch pedal released (MT), the
engine is turned off automatically. • When the engine coolant temperature is low. • When the Stop/Start OFF switch is turned on.
• When you release the brake pedal (Xtronic CVT) • When the battery capacity is low. • When the power consumption is large.
or push the clutch pedal (MT), the engine is au-
• When the battery temperature is low. • When the vehicle is travelling at altitudes
tomatically turned on. higher than 2000 m (6562 ft) (MT model).
CAUTION
• When the vehicle is moved.
• When the vehicle is travelling at altitudes
At the end of the journey the engine must be
• When the vacuum in the brake servo higher than 1500 m (4922 ft) (R9M engine in
decreases. combination with Xtronic CVT models).
stopped and ignition turned off. Lock the vehicle
as normal. Turning the ignition switch OFF will • When the engine bonnet is opened with the • For Manual Transmission (MT) models
shut down all electrical systems. Failure to do engine running.
– When the shift lever is in any position ex-
this may result in a flat battery.
• When the engine is turned on with the engine cept the N (Neutral) position.
NOTE bonnet open.
– When the clutch pedal is depressed.
For model with Stop/Start System, use the spe- • When the driver’s seat belt is not fastened.
– When the Intelligent Key is not in the ve-
cial battery that is enhanced in regard to the • When the driver’s door is open. hicle.
charge-discharge capacity and life performance.
Avoid using a non-special battery for the Stop/ • When the steering wheel is operated (Xtronic • For Continuously Variable Transmission
Start System, as this may cause early deteriora- CVT model). (Xtronic CVT) models
tion of the battery or a malfunction of the Stop/
Start System. For the battery, it is recommended
• When the Stop/Start System indicator blinks – When the accelerator pedal is depressed.
at a low speed.
to use Genuine NISSAN parts. For more informa- – When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse)
tion, contact a NISSAN dealer or qualified work- • When the fan speed control is in any position position.
shop. other than OFF (0) while the air flow control is
– When the brake pedal is not firmly de-
in the front defogger position.
pressed.
• When the front defogger switch is on.
– When stopping the vehicle on steep slop-
ing roads.

• When the electric power steering warning NOTE • When the accelerator pedal is depressed
light, the Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) (Xtronic CVT model).
When the Stop/Start System indicator illumi-
warning light, or the Electronic Stability Pro-
gramme (ESP) warning light illuminates.
nates, the engine starts running automatically • When the steering wheel is operated. (The
under at least one of the following conditions: steering wheel operation may become heavy,
NOTE but this is not a malfunction.) (Xtronic CVT
• The brake pedal is released with the shift le-
model)
The engine will not restart even if the brake pedal ver in the D (Drive) or N (Neutral) position
is released (Xtronic CVT) or clutch pedal is (Xtronic CVT model). • When the battery capacity is low.
pressed (MT) while the Stop/Start System is ac-
tivated under the following condition:
• The shift lever is placed in the D (Drive) or R • When the power consumption is high.
(Reverse) position from the N (Neutral) or P
• When the shift lever is in the P (Park) position (Park) position (Xtronic CVT model). • When the shift lever is placed in the R (Re-
verse) position (Xtronic CVT model).
(Xtronic CVT model).
• The driver’s seat belt is unfastened, or the
• When the clutch pedal is depressed (MT
• When the engine bonnet is opened. driver’s door is open (Xtronic CVT model).
model).
• When the driver seat belt is unfastened and • The battery voltage becomes low (due to elec-
CAUTION
the driver’s door is opened (MT model). trical load from other vehicle systems like
headlights, heaters, etc., or auxiliary devices Only engage gear when the clutch pedal is fully
• When the gear shift lever is not in the Neutral connected to the 12 volt socket inside the depressed (MT model).
position (MT models). vehicle).
NOTE
NOTE
• The vehicle speed is above about 2 km/h (1
The following conditions will prevent the Stop/
It may take some time until the Stop/Start Sys- MPH).
Start System from automatically restarting the
tem activates under the following conditions:
• The front defogger is operated. engine. Starting the engine with the ignition
• When the battery is discharged.
• When the temperature inside the vehicle is
switch operation is then necessary:
• When the outside temperature is low or high. too high or low. (When the air conditioner is • The driver’s seat belt is unfastened, and driv-
off, the Stop/Start System will operate.) er’s door is open (MT model).
• When the battery is replaced or the battery
terminal is disconnected for extended peri- • When the front defogger is turned on. (The • The bonnet is open.
ods and then reconnected. engine may not starts depending on the out-
Use this system while waiting at stoplight, etc. When
side temperature.)
the vehicle is stopped for long periods of time, turn
• When more than 3 minutes have elapsed since off the engine.
the Stop/Start System was active (Xtronic
CVT model).

When the engine is stopped by the Stop/Start Sys- Stop/Start System ON or OFF The CO2 or fuel saved and the engine stop time
tem, heating, cooling and dehumidifying functions mode shows the following items:
will be deactivated. To avoid the air conditioning
functions from being deactivated, turn off the Idling • The CO2 saved shows the estimated quantity of
CO2 exhaust emissions that were prevented by
Stop mode by pressing the Stop/Start OFF switch.
the Stop/Start System every time the engine is
STOP/START SYSTEM DISPLAY automatically stopped.
Engine stop • The engine stop time shows the time that the
engine has been stopped for by the Stop/Start
System.
For more information, see “Stop/Start System
JVS0638XZ
(where fitted)” earlier in this section.
If the Stop/Start System is activated or deactivated Auto start deactivation

using the Stop/Start System OFF switch, the mes-
sage is shown.
CO2 or fuel saved and engine stop time
JVS0341XZ
When the engine is stopped the information is dis-

played for a few seconds.
JVS0344XZ
If the engine stops when the Stop/Start System is

activated, and will not start automatically, the mes-
JVS0430XZ
sage is shown.

Key LOCK warning This message is displayed when the Stop/Start Sys- switch illuminates. In this condition the Stop/
tem is malfunctioning. Start System cannot prevent unnecessary fuel
consumption, exhaust emissions, or noise dur-
ing your journey.
qualified workshop.
STOP/START OFF SWITCH • If the Stop/Start System is malfunctioning, the
indicator light j
1 on the Stop/Start OFF switch
illuminates.
NOTE
The Stop/Start System ON or OFF messages dis-
JVS0345XZ
played for a few seconds in the vehicle informa-
tion display when the Stop/Start OFF switch is
pressed. See “Stop/Start System display” earlier
The information is displayed and a buzzer sounded in this section.
to remind the driver to turn the ignition switch OFF
to avoid a flat battery.
JVS0433XZ
The message can only be cleared by turning or
pushing the ignition switch OFF (or restarting the
The system can be temporarily deactivated by press-
engine).
ing the Stop/Start OFF switch. Pressing the switch
System fault again or restarting the engine by using the ignition
switch will reactivate the Stop/Start System.
• When the Stop/Start System is deactivated while
the engine is running, the engine is prevented
from automatically stopping.
• When the Stop/Start System is deactivated after
the engine has been automatically stopped by
the Stop/Start System, the engine will immedi-
ately restart if suitable conditions are present.
The engine will then be prevented from automati-
JVS0346XZ cally stopping during the same journey.
• Whenever the Stop/Start System is deactivated
the indicator light j
1 on the Stop/Start OFF

FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE (4WD)
(where fitted)
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE (4WD) MODE LOCK: To engage the LOCK mode, turn the 4WD
SWITCH OPERATIONS mode switch anticlockwise to the LOCK position.
The switch will return to the AUTO position auto-
matically and the Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) LOCK
indicator light in the meter illuminates. To dis-
engage the LOCK mode, turn the switch to the
LOCK position again. The switch will return to the
AUTO position automatically, and the 4WD LOCK
indicator light turns off.
JVS0401XZ
4WD mode switch
The Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) system is used to

select the 2WD (Two-Wheel Drive), AUTO or LOCK
mode depending on the driving conditions.
Turn the 4WD mode switch, located on the centre
console, to select 2WD, AUTO or LOCK.
AUTO: Turn the 4WD mode switch to the neutral
(AUTO) position. The Four-Wheel Drive (4WD)
AUTO indicator light in the meter illuminates.
2WD: Turn the 4WD mode switch clockwise to the
2WD position.

4WD shift tips
4WD mode indicator light • If the 4WD mode switch is operated while mak-
ing a turn, accelerating or decelerating, or if the
4WD mode Wheels driven Use conditions ignition switch is turned off while in the AUTO or
( m ,m ) LOCK mode, you may feel a jolt. This is normal.
Front wheels:
• The oil temperature of power train parts will in-
crease if the vehicle is continuously operated
The wheel drive mode is in under conditions where the difference in rotation
For driving on dry,
2WD Two-Wheel Drive (2WD) Turn off between the front and rear wheels is large (wheel
paved roads
when driving on a normal slip), such as when driving the vehicle on rough
road.*1 roads through sand or mud or when freeing a
Distribution of torque to the stuck vehicle. In these cases, the [4WD High
front and rear wheels Temp. Stop vehicle] warning appears and the
changes automatically, Illuminates 4WD mode changes to the 2WD mode to pro-
depending on road condi- For driving on paved tect the power train parts. If you stop driving with
AUTO
tions encountered (ratio; or slippery roads the engine idling in a safe place and wait until the
100 : 0 (2WD) → 50 : 50 m [4WD High Temp. Stop vehicle] warning disap-
(4WD)). This results in pears, the 4WD returns to the mode previously
improved driving stability. selected.
Illuminate
• Brake distance in the 4WD mode is the same as
Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) For driving on rough 2WD.
LOCK
*2*3* m /m roads
CAUTION
• Depending on the driving condition, the 4WD
*1: The 2WD mode may change to the 4WD mode automatically depending on the driving condition. The 4WD mode mode may automatically change from 2WD to
indicator light does not illuminate. 4WD even when the 2WD mode is selected. If
*2: The LOCK mode will change to the AUTO mode automatically when the vehicle has been driven at a high speed. this occurs while driving, the 4WD mode indi-
The 4WD LOCK indicator light turns off. cator light will not illuminate.
*3: The LOCK mode will automatically be cancelled when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.

• Do not start the engine with the 4WD mode driving mode may change to Two-Wheel Drive
switch in any mode in the following cases: (2WD). If this warning is displayed, stop the vehicle
with the engine idling, as soon as it is safe to do so.
– when the vehicle is placed on a free-roller
Then if the warning turns off, you can continue driv-
or jacking up the vehicle with the front tyres
ing.
raised and the rear tyres on the ground.
The [Tyre size incorrect] warning j 3 may appear if
– when towing the vehicle with the rear tyres
there is a large difference between the diameters of
raised from the ground.
front and rear wheels. Pull off the road in a safe
• Operate the 4WD mode switch only when driv- area, with the engine idling. Check that all tyre sizes
ing straight. Do not operate the 4WD mode are the same, that the tyre pressure is correct and
switch when making a turn or reversing. that the tyres are not excessively worn. Change the
4WD mode switch to the 2WD mode and do not
• Do not operate the 4WD mode switch with the
drive fast.
front wheel spinning.
If any warning message continues to be displayed,
• Engine idling speed is high while warming up
have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer or
the engine. Be especially careful when start-
qualified workshop as soon as possible.
ing or driving on slippery surfaces with the
4WD mode switch set in the AUTO mode. CAUTION
4WD WARNING • Do not operate the engine on a free roller
when any of the wheels raised.
If any malfunction occurs in the Four-Wheel Drive
(4WD) system while the engine is running, warning • If the [4WD system fault] warning appears
messages appear in the vehicle information display. while driving, there may be a malfunction in
JVS0411X the 4WD system. Reduce the vehicle speed
and have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN
If the [4WD system fault] warning j
1 appears, there dealer or qualified workshop as soon as pos-
may be a malfunction in the 4WD system. Reduce sible. Be especially careful when driving.
vehicle speed and have your vehicle checked by a
NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop as soon as
• The power train may be damaged if you con-
tinue driving with the [4WD system fault] warn-
possible. ing on.
The [4WD High Temp. Stop vehicle] (high tempera-
ture) warning j2 may appear while trying to free a
stuck vehicle due to increased oil temperature. The

4WD MODE INDICATOR LIGHTS FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE (4WD) TORQUE CAUTION
The 4WD mode indicator lights ( , ) are DISTRIBUTION INDICATOR The display may not change when the change of
located in the meter. torque distribution is small. This is not a malfunc-
tion.
The 4WD mode indicator lights ( , ) illumi-
nate when the ignition switch is placed in the ON OFF-ROAD DRIVING SAFETY
position. The indicator lights turn off within 1 sec- PRECAUTIONS
ond.
• Drive carefully when off the road and avoid dan-
The 4WD mode indicator lights will display the mode gerous areas. Always wear your seat belts to
selected by the 4WD mode switch while engine is help keep you and your passengers in position
running. when driving over rough terrain.
The 4WD LOCK indicator light illuminates JVS0400XZ
• Before driving up or down grades, check the
simultaneously along with the 4WD AUTO indicator road surface for bumps or potholes. Be sure to
light when selecting the LOCK mode. When the [4x4-i] display is selected, you can view climb a gentle slope and descend a gentle slope.
The 4WD AUTO indicator light illuminates the distribution ratio of the transmission torque to
the front and rear wheels during driving. The [4x4-i]
• Do not drive across steep slopes. Instead drive
when selecting the AUTO mode. either straight up or straight down the slopes.
display is shown on the vehicle information display Off-road vehicles can tip over sideways much
If the 4WD warning message appears in the vehicle
screen. more easily than they can forward or backward.
information display, the 4WD mode indicator lights
will turn off. For more information, see “Trip computer” in the
“2. Instruments and controls” section.
• To prevent damage to the vehicle, do not drive
on dry and hard surface roads in the LOCK
1 Distribution ratio of front wheels
j mode.
2 Distribution ratio of rear wheels

j • Many hills are too steep for any vehicle. If you
drive up them, you may stall. If you drive down
them, you may not be able to control your speed.
WARNING
If you drive across them, you may roll over.
Do not watch the screen for prolonged periods of
time while driving. Doing so could cause an acci- • Do not shift gears while driving on downhill
grades as this could cause loss of control of the
dent.
vehicle.
• Be sure to use the engine brake. The footbrake
performance may be reduced, resulting in a pos-
sible accident.

• Stay alert when driving to the top of a hill. At the • Always drive with the floor mats in place as the TYRES OF 4WD MODEL
top there could be a drop-off or other hazard that floor may become very hot. Particular care
could cause an accident. should be taken if you are barefoot. CAUTION
• If your engine stalls or you cannot make it to the • Lower your speed when encountering strong • Always use tyres of the same size, brand, con-
top of a steep hill, never attempt to turn around. crosswinds. With its higher centre of gravity, struction (bias, bias-belted or radial), and
Your vehicle could tip or roll over. Always back your vehicle is more affected by gusty side winds. tread pattern on all four wheels. Failure to do
straight down in reverse gear. Never back down Slower speeds ensure better vehicle control. so may result in a circumference difference
in the N (Neutral) position using only the brake, between tyres on the front and rear axles
as this could cause loss of control. • Do not drive beyond the performance of the which will cause excessive tyre wear and may
tyres even with 4WD. damage the transmission, transfer case and
• Heavy braking going down a hill could cause the
Sudden acceleration, sharp steering manoeu- rear differential gears.
brakes to overheat and fade, resulting in loss of
control and an accident. Apply brakes lightly and
vres or sudden braking may cause loss of con- • Only use spare tyres specified for each 4WD
trol. model.
use a low gear to control your speed.
• Unsecured luggage can be thrown around when • Always use tyres of the same type, size, brand, If excessive tyre wear is found, it is recommended
construction (bias, bias-belted or radial), and that all four tyres be replaced with tyres of the same
driving over rough terrain. Properly secure it so
tread pattern on all four wheels. Install tyre chains size, brand, construction and tread pattern. The tyre
that it will not be thrown forward and cause injury
on the front wheels when driving on slippery pressure and wheel alignment should also be
to you or your passengers.
roads and drive carefully. checked and corrected as necessary. Contact a
• To avoid raising the centre of gravity excessively,
• Be sure to check the brakes immediately after NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
do not exceed the rated capacity of the roof rack/
driving in mud or water. (See “Brake system” Snow tyres
gear bin (where fitted) and evenly distribute the
later in this section.)
load. Secure heavy loads in the luggage area as If you install snow tyres, they must also be the same
far forward and as low as possible. Do not equip • Whenever you drive off-road through sand, mud size, brand, construction and tread pattern on all
the vehicle with tyres larger than specified. This or water as deep as the wheel hub, more fre- four wheels.
could cause your vehicle to rollover. quent maintenance may be required. For details,
refer to “Maintenance for off-road driving” in a Tyre inflation pressure
• Do not grip the inside or spokes of the steering
separate maintenance booklet. Check the pressures in all tyres, including the spare,
wheel when driving off-road. The steering wheel
could jerk and injure your hands. Instead drive • Avoid parking your vehicle on steep hills. If you with a gauge periodically when at a service station.
with your fingers and thumbs on the outside of get out of the vehicle and it rolls forward, back- Adjust to the specified pressure if necessary. Tyre
the rim. ward or sideways, you could be injured. pressures are shown on the tyre placard.
• Before operating vehicle, ensure that the driver

and all passengers have their seat belts fastened.

ELECTRONIC STABILITY
PROGRAMME (ESP) SYSTEM
Tyre rotation WARNING

• When driving on an unstable surface such as
a turntable, ferry, elevator or ramp, the ESP
NISSAN recommends that tyres be rotated every
5,000 km (3,000 miles). Do not include the spare • The ESP system is designed to help the driver warning light may illuminate. This is not a
maintain stability but does not prevent acci- malfunction. Restart the engine after driving
tyre in the tyre rotation. onto a stable surface.
dents due to abrupt steering operation at high
Tyre chain speeds or by careless or dangerous driving
• If wheels or tyres other than the NISSAN rec-
techniques. Reduce vehicle speed and be es- ommended ones are used, the ESP system
Tyre chains must be installed only on the front
pecially careful when driving and cornering on may not operate properly and the ESP warn-
wheels and not on the rear wheels.
slippery surfaces and always drive carefully. ing light may illuminate.
Do not drive with tyre chains on paved roads which
are clear of snow. Driving with chains in such condi- • Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension. If
• The ESP system is not a substitute for winter
suspension parts such as shock absorbers, tyres or tyre chains on a snow covered road.
tions can cause damage to the various mechanisms
struts, springs, stabiliser bars, bushings and
of the vehicle due to some overstress. The Electronic Stability Programme (ESP) system
wheels are not NISSAN recommended for
your vehicle or are extremely deteriorated, the uses various sensors to monitor driver inputs and
ESP system may not operate properly. This vehicle motion. Under certain driving conditions, the
could adversely affect vehicle handling per- ESP system helps to perform the following func-
formance, and the ESP warning light may tions.
illuminate. • Controls brake pressure to reduce wheel slip on
• If brake related parts such as brake pads, ro- one slipping drive wheel so power is transferred
to a non slipping drive wheel on the same axle.
tors and callipers are not NISSAN
recommended or are extremely deteriorated, • Controls brake pressure and engine output to
the ESP system may not operate properly and reduce drive wheel slip based on vehicle speed
the ESP warning light may illuminate. (traction control function).
• If engine control related parts are not NISSAN • Controls brake pressure at individual wheels and
recommended or are extremely deteriorated, engine output to help the driver maintain control
the ESP warning light may illuminate. of the vehicle in the following conditions:
• When driving on extremely inclined surfaces – understeer (vehicle tends to not follow the
such as higher banked corners, the ESP sys- steered path despite increased steering in-
tem may not operate properly and the ESP put)
warning light may illuminate. Do not drive
on these types of roads. – oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due to cer-
tain road or driving conditions).

The ESP system can help the driver to maintain con- See “Electronic Stability Programme (ESP) off indi- When the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the ESP
trol of the vehicle, but it cannot prevent loss of ve- cator light” in the “2. Instruments and controls” sec- system reduces the engine output to reduce wheel
hicle control in all driving situations. tion and “Electronic Stability Programme (ESP) sys- spin. The engine speed will be reduced even if the
tem OFF switch” later in this section. accelerator is depressed to the floor. If maximum
When the ESP system operates, the ESP warning
engine power is needed to free a stuck vehicle, turn
light in the meter flashes so note the following: The computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that
the ESP system off.
tests the system each time you start the engine and
• The road may be slippery or the system may
move the vehicle forward or in reverse at a slow To turn off the ESP system, push the ESP OFF
determine some action is required to help the
speed. When the self-test occurs, you may hear a switch. The ESP off indicator light will illumi-
vehicle on the steered path.
“clunk” noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake nate.
• You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and pedal. This is normal and is not an indication of a
Push the ESP OFF switch again or restart the en-
hear a noise or vibration from under the bonnet. malfunction.
gine to turn ON the system.
This is normal and indicates that the ESP system
is working properly. ELECTRONIC STABILITY
PROGRAMME (ESP) SYSTEM OFF
• Adjust your speed and driving to the road condi-
SWITCH
tions.
If a malfunction occurs in the system, the ESP warn-
ing light illuminates in the meter. The ESP sys-
tem automatically turns off.
The ESP OFF switch is used to turn off the ESP
system. The ESP off indicator light illuminates
to indicate the ESP system is off. When the ESP
OFF switch is used to turn off the system, the ESP
system still operates to prevent one drive wheel from
slipping by transferring power to a non slipping drive SSD1149Z
wheel. The ESP warning light flashes if this
occurs. All other ESP functions are off and the ESP
warning light will not flash. The ESP system is The vehicle should be driven with the Electronic
automatically reset to on when the ignition switch is Stability Programme (ESP) system ON for most
placed in the OFF position then back to the ON driving conditions.
position.

CHASSIS CONTROL
The chassis control is an electric control module

that includes the following functions:
• Active Trace Control
• Active Engine Brake
• Active Ride Control
ACTIVE TRACE CONTROL
This system senses driving based on the driver’s
steering and acceleration/braking patterns, and con- JVS0403XZ
trols brake pressure at individual wheels to aid trac-
ing at corners and help smooth vehicle response.
When the Active Trace Control is operated and the When the Active Trace Control is operating, you
The Active Trace Control can be set to ON (en- [Chassis Control] mode is selected in the trip com- may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a
abled) or OFF (disabled) through the Vehicle Infor- puter, the Active Trace Control graphics are shown noise. This is normal and indicates that the Active
mation Display [Settings] page. See “Vehicle infor- in the vehicle information display. (See “Trip Trace Control is operating properly.
mation display” in the “2. Instruments and controls” computer” in the “2. Instruments and controls” sec-
section for more information. Even if the Active Trace Control is set to OFF, some
tion.)
functions will remain on to assist the driver (for ex-
When the Electronic Stability Programme (ESP) If the chassis control warning message appears in ample, avoidance scenes).
OFF switch is used to turn off the ESP system, the the vehicle information display, it may indicate that
Active Trace Control is also turned off. the Active Trace Control is not functioning properly. ACTIVE ENGINE BRAKE (Xtronic
Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer or Continuously Variable Transmission
qualified workshop as soon as possible. (See “Ve- (CVT) model)
hicle information display warnings and indicators” in The Active Engine Brake function adds subtle de-
the “2. Instruments and controls” section.) celeration by controlling Xtronic CVT gear ratio, de-
pending on the cornering condition calculated from
WARNING driver’s steering input and plural sensors. This ben-
The Active Trace Control may not be effective efit to easier traceability and less workload of adjust-
depending on the driving condition. Always drive ing speed with braking at corners.
carefully and attentively. The Active Engine Brake also adds subtle decelera-
tion with gear ratio control according to driver’s
brake pedal operation.

The Active Engine Brake can be set to ON (en-
abled) or OFF (disabled) through the Vehicle Infor-
mation Display [Settings] page. See “Vehicle infor-
mation display” in the “2. Instruments and controls”
section for more information.
JVS0403XZ
When the Active Engine Brake is operated at cor- When the Active Engine Brake is operating, the
ners and the [Chassis Control] mode is selected in needle of the tachometer will rise up and you may
the trip computer, the Active Engine Brake graphics hear an engine noise. This is normal and indicates
are shown in the vehicle information display. See that the Active Engine Brake is operating properly.
“Vehicle information display warnings and
indicators” in the “2. Instruments and controls” sec- ACTIVE RIDE CONTROL
tion for more information. This system senses upper body motion based on
If the chassis control warning message appears in wheel speed information and controls engine torque
the vehicle information display, it may indicate that and four wheel brake pressure to enhance ride com-
the Active Engine Brake is not functioning properly. fort in effort to restrain uncomfortable upper body
Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer or movement. This system come into effect above 40
qualified workshop as soon as possible. km/h (25 MPH). When the ESP OFF switch is used
to turn off the ESP system, the Active Ride Control
is also turned off. Engine torque control is available
WARNING for MR20 and QR25 engines only.
The Active Engine Brake may not be effective
depending on the driving condition. Always drive
carefully and attentively.

HILL START ASSIST SYSTEM
The hill start assist system will operate automatically

WARNING under the following conditions:
• Never rely solely on the hill start assist system
• The transmission is shifted to a forward or re-
to prevent the vehicle from moving backward verse gear.
on a hill. Always drive carefully and attentively.
Depress the brake pedal when the vehicle is • The vehicle is stopped completely on a hill by
stopped on a steep hill. Be especially careful applying the brake.
when stopped on a hill on frozen or muddy The maximum holding time is 2 seconds. After 2
roads. Failure to prevent the vehicle from roll- seconds the vehicle will begin to roll back and the
ing backwards may result in a loss of control hill start assist system will stop operating completely.
JVS0398XZ
of the vehicle and possible serious injury or
death. The hill start assist system will not operate when the
When the brake control of the Active Ride Control transmission is shifted to the N (Neutral) or P (Park)
is operated and the [Chassis Control] mode is se- • The hill start assist system is not designed to position or on a flat and level road.
hold the vehicle at a standstill on a hill. De-
lected in the trip computer, the Active Ride Control When the Electronic Stability Programme (ESP)
press the brake pedal when the vehicle is
graphics are shown in the vehicle information dis- warning light illuminates in the meter, the hill start
stopped on a steep hill. Failure to do so may
play. See “Vehicle information display warnings and assist system will not operate. (See “Electronic Sta-
cause the vehicle to roll backwards and may
indicators” in the “2. Instruments and controls” sec- bility Programme (ESP) off indicator light” in the
result in a collision or serious personal injury.
tion for more information. “2. Instruments and controls” section.)
If the chassis control warning message appears in • The hill start assist system may not prevent
the vehicle from rolling backwards on a hill
the vehicle information display, it may indicate that
under all load or road conditions. Always be
the Active Ride Control is not functioning properly.
prepared to depress the brake pedal to pre-
vent the vehicle from rolling backwards. Fail-
qualified workshop as soon as possible.
ure to do so may result in a collision or seri-
When the Active Ride Control is operating, you may ous personal injury.
hear noise and sense slight deceleration. This is
The hill start assist system automatically keeps the
normal and indicates that the Active Ride Control is
brakes applied to help prevent the vehicle from roll-
operating properly.
ing backwards in the time it takes the driver to re-
lease the brake pedal and apply the accelerator
when the vehicle is stopped on a hill.

HILL DESCENT CONTROL
speed on a steep and slippery descent or off the lights illuminate while the hill descent control system
WARNING road without brake or accelerator operation. is applying the brakes to control the vehicle speed.
• Never rely solely on the hill descent control The hill descent control system helps maintain ve- To activate the hill descent control system, satisfy all
system to control vehicle speed when driving hicle speed when driving under 25 km/h (15 MPH) of the following conditions:
on steep downhill grades. Always drive care- on a steep descent that engine braking alone in
fully when using the hill descent control sys- Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) mode cannot control the • Shift the transmission to the forward or reverse
tem and decelerate the vehicle speed by de- gear.
speed.
pressing the brake pedal if necessary. Be • Turn the 4WD mode switch to the LOCK mode
especially careful when driving on frozen, When driving forward on the descent, the speed
and drive the vehicle at a speed under 25 km/h
muddy or extremely steep downhill roads. can be adjusted by the brake or accelerator opera-
(15 MPH).
Failure to control vehicle speed may result in tion. The system maintains the speed for reverse
a loss of control of the vehicle and possible driving on the descent. • Push the hill descent control switch to the ON
serious injury or death. position.
HILL DESCENT CONTROL SWITCH
• The hill descent control system may not con- If the accelerator or brake pedal is depressed while
trol the vehicle speed on a hill under all load the hill descent control system is on, the system will
or road conditions. Always be prepared to de- stop operating temporarily. As soon as the accel-
press the brake pedal to control vehicle erator or brake pedal is released, the hill descent
speed. Failure to do so may result in a colli- control system begins to function again if the hill
sion or serious personal injury. descent control operating conditions are fulfilled.
CAUTION The hill descent control system on indicator light

blinks if the hill descent control switch is on and all
When the hill descent control system operates conditions for system activation are not met, or if the
continuously for a long time, the temperature of system becomes disengaged for any reason.
JVS0402XZ
the Electronic Stability Programme (ESP) system
actuator may increase and the hill descent con- When the vehicle speed exceeds 40 km/h (25
trol system may be temporarily disabled (the hill When additional braking is required on steep down- MPH), the 4WD mode indicator light changes from
descent control system on indicator light will hill roads, activate the hill descent control system by LOCK to AUTO. Once the speed decreases to 25
blink). If the indicator light does not come on pushing the hill descent control switch on. km/h (15 MPH), turn the 4WD mode switch to
continuously after blinking, stop using the sys- LOCK again to turn on the hill descent control sys-
When the hill descent control system is activated, tem.
tem.
the hill descent control system on indicator light
When the hill descent control system is activated, it will illuminate. (See “ Hill descent control sys- To turn off the hill descent control system, push the
automatically applies smooth brakes to control tem on indicator light (where fitted)” in the “2. Instru- hill descent control switch to the OFF position.
ments and controls” section.) Also, the stop/tail

BLIND SPOT WARNING (BSW)
The Blind Spot Warning (BSW) system helps alert – When towing a trailer.
the driver of other vehicles in adjacent lanes when
– When strong light enters the camera unit.
changing lanes.
(For example, light directly shines on the
rear of the vehicle at sunrise or sunset.)
– When ambient brightness changes sud-
denly. (For example, when the vehicle en-
ters or exits a tunnel or passes under a
bridge.)
• Excessive noise (for example, audio system SSD1029Z
volume, open vehicle window) will interfere BSW indicator (in the Vehicle information display)
with the chime sound, and it may not be heard.
The BSW system operates above approximately 32
JVS0390XZ
BSW SYSTEM OPERATION km/h (20 MPH).
The BSW light is shown in the vehicle information
The BSW system uses the rearview camera unit j
1
display if the Blind Spot Warning system is active.
with automatic washer and blower.
To switch the system on or off, see the description
WARNING
When the camera unit detects vehicles in the detec-
• The BSW system is not a replacement for tion zone, the Blind Spot Indicator light located in-
proper driving procedure and is not designed side the outside mirrors will illuminate. If the turn sig-
to prevent contact with vehicles or objects. nal is then activated, the system chimes (twice) and
When changing lanes, always use the side and the Blind Spot Indicator light flashes to alert the
rear mirrors and turn and look in the direction JVS0410XZ
driver.
you will move to ensure it is safe to change Blind Spot Indicator light
lanes. Never rely solely on the BSW system. The Blind Spot Indicator light continues to flash until
the detected vehicle(s) leave the detection zone.
• The camera unit may not function properly
under the following conditions:
• If the camera lens is excessively dirty, the au-
tomatic washer may not be able to completely
clean the lens. This could result in the camera
not detecting vehicles or lane markers.

Detection zone A chime sounds if the camera unit has already de-
tected vehicles when the driver activates the turn WARNING
signal. If a vehicle comes into the detection zone • The camera unit may not be able to detect
after the driver activates the turn signal, then only when certain objects are present such as:
the Blind Spot Indicator light flashes and no chime
sounds. (See “BSW driving situations” later in this – Pedestrians, bicycles, animals
section.) – Some types of small vehicles such as mo-
torcycles and very short length vehicles
Turning on or off the BSW system
– Oncoming vehicles
The BSW system is turned on or off using the set-
tings menu in the vehicle information display. – A vehicle approaching rapidly from behind.
SSD1026Z (See “BSW driving situations” later in this
SYSTEM ON:
section.)
The BSW indicator (white) in the vehicle information
The camera unit can detect vehicles on either side – A vehicle which your vehicle overtakes rap-
display will appear.
of your vehicle when part of another vehicle is within idly. (See “BSW driving situations” later in
the detection zone shown as illustrated. SYSTEM OFF: this section.)
This detection zone typically starts from the outside The BSW indicator in the vehicle information display – A vehicle that merges or changes lanes
mirror of your vehicle and extends approximately 3 will turn off. rapidly directly next to your vehicle.
m (10 ft) behind the rear bumper, and approximately Perform the following steps to enable or disable the
3 m (10 ft) sideways. BSW system.
• The camera unit may not be able to detect
properly when your vehicle travels beside the
The brightness of the Blind Spot Indicator lights is 1. Use the button until [Settings] displays in middle section of a vehicle with long wheel-
adjusted automatically depending on the brightness the vehicle information display. Use the to base (for example, trailer truck, semi-trailer,
of the ambient light. select [Driver Assistance]. Then press the tractor).
ENTER button.
• The camera detection zone is designed based
2. Select [Driving Aids], and press the ENTER but- on a standard lane width. When driving in a
ton. wider lane, the camera unit may not detect
vehicles in an adjacent lane. When driving in a
3. To set the BSW system to on or off, use the narrow lane, the camera unit may detect ve-
buttons to navigate in the menu and use hicles driving two lanes away.
the ENTER button to select [Blind Spot] and
press the ENTER button.

• The camera unit is designed to ignore most vehicle. Always use the side and rear mirrors and Overtaking other vehicles
stationary objects, however objects such as turn and look in the direction your vehicle will move
guardrails, walls, foliage and parked vehicles to ensure it is safe to change lanes.
may occasionally be detected. This is a nor-
mal operating condition.
• The camera unit may detect the reflected im-
age of vehicles or roadside objects that are
not actually in the detection zone, especially
when the road is wet.
BSW DRIVING SITUATIONS
SSD1033Z
Another vehicle approaching from
behind SSD1031Z
The Blind Spot Indicator light illuminates if you over-
take a vehicle and that vehicle stays in the detection
If the driver activates the turn signal, then the Blind zone for approximately 3 seconds.
Spot Indicator light flashes and a chime will sound
twice. The camera unit may not detect slower moving ve-
hicles if they are passed quickly.
NOTE
If the driver activates the turn signal before a
vehicle enters the detection zone, the Blind Spot
Indicator light will flash but no chime will sound
SSD1026Z
when the other vehicle is detected.
The Blind Spot Indicator light illuminates if a vehicle

enters the detection zone from behind in an adja-
cent lane.
SSD1034Z
However, if the overtaking vehicle is travelling much
faster than your vehicle, the indicator light may not
If the driver activates the turn signal while another
illuminate before the detected vehicle is beside your
vehicle is in the detection zone, then the Blind Spot
Indicator light flashes and a chime will sound twice.

LANE DEPARTURE WARNING
(LDW) SYSTEM (where fitted)
BSW TEMPORARY DISABLED Action to take: The Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system helps
STATUS alert the driver when the vehicle is travelling close to
Stop the vehicle in a safe location, turn off and re-
either the left or the right of a travelling lane.
Under the following condition, the BSW system is start the engine. If the BSW indicator continues to
turned off temporarily, the BSW indicator will blink, illuminate, have the BSW system checked by a
and the following message will appear in the vehicle NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
information display: CAMERA UNIT MAINTENANCE
• Back Door Open
When the above condition is corrected, the BSW
system will resume automatically.
BSW AUTOMATIC DEACTIVATION
When dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the cam- JVI0975XZ
era, the BSW system will be turned off automatically

and cannot be removed by the automatic washer The LDW system uses the multi-sensing front cam-
and blower. The BSW indicator will blink and the era unit situated on the windscreen in front of the
[Not available Clean Rear Camera] message will JVS0393XZ
inside rearview mirror j
1.
appear in the vehicle information display.
Action to take: The rearview camera unit j1 for the BSW system is WARNING
located above the rear number plate. To maintain
If the message appears, park the vehicle in a safe
the proper operation of the BSW system and help • This system is only a warning device to inform
place, clean the camera unit with a soft cloth. Then the driver of a potential unintended lane de-
keep the system functioning, be sure to observe the
turn off and restart the engine. parture. It will not steer the vehicle or prevent
following:
loss of control. It is the driver’s responsibility
BSW MALFUNCTION • Always keep the camera unit clean. Be careful to stay alert, drive safely, keep the vehicle in
When the BSW system malfunctions, they will be not to damage the nozzle of automatic washer the travelling lane, and be in control of the
turned off automatically, the BSW indicator will illu- and blower. vehicle at all times.
minate and the [System fault] message will appear
in the vehicle information display.
• Do not attach number plate accessories that re- • The system will not operate at speeds below
flect light. approximately 60 km/h (37 MPH) or if it can-
not detect lane markers.
• Do not strike or damage the areas around the
camera unit.

• If the LDW system malfunctions, it will cancel • On roads where the travelling lane merges or LDW SYSTEM OPERATION
automatically, and the LDW [System fault] separates.
message will appear in the vehicle informa-
tion display. • When the vehicle’s travelling direction does not
align with the lane marker.
• If the LDW [System fault] message appears,
• When travelling close to the vehicle in front of
pull off the road to a safe location and stop
you, which obstructs the lane camera unit detec-
the vehicle. Turn the engine off and restart
tion range.
the engine. If the LDW [System fault] mes-
sage continues to appear, have the system • When rain, snow or dirt adheres to the wind-
checked by a NISSAN dealer or qualified screen in front of the lane camera unit.
workshop.
• When the headlights are not bright due to dirt on JVS0439XZ
• Excessive noise will interfere with the warn- the lens or if the aiming is not adjusted properly.
ing chime sound, and the chime may not be
heard.
• When strong light enters the lane camera unit.
(For example, the light directly shines on the front
The system may not function properly under the fol- of the vehicle at sunrise or sunset.)
lowing conditions:
• When a sudden change in brightness occurs.
• On roads where there are multiple parallel lane (For example, when the vehicle enters or exits a
markers; lane markers that are faded or not tunnel or under a bridge.)
painted clearly; yellow painted lane markers; non-
standard lane markers; or lane markers covered
with water, dirt, snow, etc.
• On roads where the discontinued lane markers SSD0672Z
LDW indicator (in the Vehicle information display)
are still detectable.
The LDW system provides a lane departure warning
• On roads where there are sharp curves.
function when the vehicle is driven at speeds ap-
• On roads where there are sharply contrasting proximately 60 km/h (37 MPH) and above.
objects, such as shadows, snow, water, wheel
When the vehicle approaches either the left or the
ruts, seams or lines remaining after road repairs.
right side of the travelling lane, a warning chime will
(The Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system
sound and the LDW indicator in the vehicle informa-
could detect these items as lane markers.)
tion display will blink to alert the driver.

The warning function will stop when the vehicle re- 2. Select [Driving Aids], and press the <ENTER> MULTI-SENSING CAMERA UNIT
turns inside of the lane markers. button. MAINTENANCE
The LDW system is not designed to warn under the 3. To set the LDW system to on or off, use the
following conditions. buttons to navigate in the menu and use
the <ENTER> button to select [Lane] and press
• When you operate the lane change signal and
the <ENTER> button.
change travelling lanes in the direction of the sig-
nal. (The LDW system will become operable TEMPORARY DISABLED STATUS AT
again approximately 2 seconds after the lane HIGH TEMPERATURE
change signal is turned off.)
If the vehicle is parked in direct sunlight under high
• When the vehicle speed lowers to less than ap- temperature conditions (over approximately 40°C
proximately 60 km/h (37 MPH). (104°F) and then started, the LDW system may be JVI0975XZ
After the above conditions have finished and the deactivated automatically. The [Not available High
necessary operating conditions are satisfied, the cabin temperature] warning message will appear in
the vehicle information display. The multi-sensing camera unit j1 for the LDW sys-
LDW functions will resume.
tem is located on the windscreen in front of the
Turning on or off the LDW system When the interior temperature is reduced, the LDW inside rearview mirror. To maintain the proper op-
system will resume operating automatically. eration of the LDW system and prevent a system
The LDW system is turned on or off using the set-
malfunction be sure to observe the following:
tings menu in the vehicle information display.
SYSTEM ON: • Always keep the windscreen clean.
The LDW indicator in the vehicle information display • Do not attach a sticker (including transparent
will appear. material) or install an accessory near the multi-
sensing lane camera unit.
SYSTEM OFF:
The LDW indicator in the vehicle information display
• Do not place reflective materials, such as white
paper or a mirror, on the instrument panel. The
will turn off. reflection of sunlight may adversely affect the
Perform the following steps to enable or disable the multi-sensing camera unit’s detection capability.
LDW system.
• Do not strike or damage the areas around the
1. Use the button until [Settings] displays in camera unit. Do not touch the camera lens or
the vehicle information display. Use the to remove the screw located on the camera unit. If
select [Driver Assistance]. Then press the the camera unit is damaged due to an accident,
<ENTER> button. contact a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.

SPEED LIMITER (where fitted)
The speed limiter allows you to set the desired ve- 2. RES/+ switch When the vehicle speed exceeds the set speed limit,
hicle speed limit. While the speed limiter is acti- the set speed indicator blinks and the accelerator
3. SET/− switch
vated, the driver can perform normal braking and pedal operation will not work until the vehicle speed
acceleration, but the vehicle will not exceed the set 4. Cruise control MAIN switch (For details, see slows down to the set speed limit.
speed. “Cruise control (where fitted)” later in this sec-
The speed limiter will not automatically reduce
tion.)
the vehicle speed to the set speed limit.
WARNING 5. Speed limiter MAIN switch
Turning on speed limiter
• Always observe posted speed limits. Do not (When this switch is pushed, the speed limiter
set the speed over them. enters the standby mode. If the cruise control Push the speed limiter MAIN switch. The speed lim-
iter and the set speed indicators illuminate on the
• Always confirm the setting status of the speed system is on, the system will turn off and the
speed limiter enters the standby mode.) vehicle information display.
limiter on the vehicle information display.
When the speed limiter is on, the cruise control sys-
Setting speed limit
tem cannot be operated. 1. Push the SET/− switch.
SPEED LIMITER OPERATIONS • When the vehicle is stopped, the speed will
be set at 30 km/h or 20 MPH.
The speed limiter can be set at a speed between 30
to 200 km/h (20 to 124 MPH). • While driving, the speed limit will be set at the
current speed.
2. When the speed limit is set, the SET and the set
speed indicators illuminate on the vehicle infor-
JVS0284XZ
mation display.
Changing set speed limit:
The speed limiter operating condition is shown on
the vehicle information display. Use either of the following operations to change the
speed limit.
1. Speed limiter indicator
2. Set speed indicator
• Push and hold the RES/+ or SET/- switch. The
JVS0427XZ set speed will increase or decrease by approxi-
The speed unit can be converted between km/h mately 5 km/h or 5 MPH.
The speed limiter set switches are located on the and MPH. (See “Vehicle information display” in the
steering wheel. “2. Instruments and controls” section.)
1. CANCEL switch

• Push, then quickly release the RES/+ or SET/- indicator will flash. The speed limiter will automati- Turning off the speed limiter will erase the set speed
switch. Each time you do this, the set speed will cally resume when the vehicle speed drops below limit memory.
increase or decrease by approximately 1 km/h or the set speed limit.
1 MPH. Speed limiter malfunction
Resuming a previous set speed If the speed limiter malfunctions, the speed limiter
The new set speed limit value will be displayed in
the vehicle information display. If a set speed limit has been cancelled, the set speed on the vehicle information display will flash.
will be stored in the speed limiter memory.
When the actual vehicle speed exceeds the set Turn the speed limiter MAIN switch off and have the
speed, an audible warning will be heard a short time This speed limit can be reactivated by pressing the system checked by a NISSAN dealer or qualified
after the set speed is exceeded if driver intervention RES/+ switch upwards. workshop.
is not detected. If the current vehicle speed is higher than the previ-
ous set speed, the accelerator pedal will not work
Cancelling speed limit and the set speed indicator will flash until the vehicle
To cancel the speed limiter, push the <CANCEL> speed drops below the set speed limit.
switch. The speed limiter indicator and the set speed
When the actual vehicle speed exceeds the set
indicator on the vehicle information display will turn
speed, an audible warning will be heard a short time
off.
after the set speed is exceeded and driver interven-
It is also possible to override the speed limiter by tion is not detected.
fully depressing the accelerator pedal beyond the
resistance point. Turning the speed limiter off
The speed limiter system will be turned off when
WARNING one of the following operations is performed:
• The vehicle may accelerate when the speed • Push the speed limiter MAIN switch. The speed
limiter cancels. limiter indicator and the set speed indicator on
the vehicle information display will be turned off.
• When additional floor mats are used, be sure
that they are correctly secured and that they • Push the cruise control MAIN switch. The speed
cannot interfere with the accelerator pedal. limiter information on the vehicle information will
Mats not adapted to the vehicle may prevent be replaced with the cruise control information.
proper operation of the speed limiter. For details see “Cruise control (where fitted)”
Fully depress the accelerator pedal beyond the re-
sistance point. The speed limiter will be suspended • When the vehicle is stopped and the ignition is
to allow driving above the set speed. The set speed placed to the off position.

CRUISE CONTROL (where fitted)
WARNING
PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE
CONTROL
• Always observe the posted speed limits and
• If the cruise control system malfunctions, it will
do not set the speed over them.
cancel automatically. The CRUISE indicator in
• Do not use the cruise control when driving the vehicle information display will then blink to
under the following conditions. Doing so warn the driver.
could cause a loss of vehicle control and re-
sult in an accident. • If the CRUISE indicator blinks, turn the cruise
control MAIN switch off and have the system
– When it is not possible to keep the vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer or qualified work-
JVS0180XZ
at a constant speed shop.
Models without speed limiter
– When driving in heavy traffic • The CRUISE indicator may blink when the cruise
– When driving in traffic that varies speed control MAIN switch is turned ON while pushing
the ACCELERATE/RESUME, COAST/SET or
– When driving in windy areas <CANCEL> switch. To properly set the cruise
– When driving on winding or hilly roads control system, perform the following proce-
dures.
– When driving on slippery (rain, snow, ice,
etc.) roads CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS
CAUTION The cruise control allows driving at speeds above
40 km/h (25 MPH) without keeping your foot on the
JVS0427XZ
On manual Transmission (MT) model, do not shift accelerator pedal.
Models with speed limiter
to the N (Neutral) position without depressing
the clutch pedal when the cruise control is oper- For petrol engine models, the cruise control will au-
1. CANCEL switch ated. Should this occur, depress the clutch pedal tomatically be cancelled if the vehicle slows down
and turn the cruise control MAIN switch off im- more than approximately 13 km/h (8 MPH) below
2. ACCELERATE/RESUME switch
mediately. Failure to do so may cause engine the set speed.
3. COAST/SET switch damage. For diesel engine models, the cruise control will
4. Cruise control MAIN switch automatically be cancelled if the vehicle speed slows
5. Speed limiter MAIN switch to less than approximately 35 km/h (22 MPH).
Moving the shift lever to the N (Neutral) position will
cancel and the CRUISE indicator will off.

FORWARD EMERGENCY
BRAKING SYSTEM (where fitted)
Turning on cruise control Resetting to faster speed: The forward emergency braking system can assist
Use any one of the following methods to reset to a the driver when there is a risk of a forward collision
Push the MAIN switch. The CRUISE indicator in the with the vehicle ahead in the travelling lane.
vehicle information display will appear. faster speed.
Setting cruising speed • Depress the accelerator pedal. When the ve-
hicle reaches the desired speed, push and re-
1. Accelerate to the desired speed. lease the COAST/SET switch.
2. Push the <COAST/SET> switch and release it. • Push and hold the ACCELERATE/RESUME
3. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. switch. When the vehicle reaches the desired
speed, release the ACCELERATE/RESUME
The vehicle will maintain the set speed. switch.
Passing another vehicle: • Quickly push and release the ACCELERATE/
Depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate. After RESUME switch. This will increase the vehicle JVS0435XZ
releasing the accelerator pedal, the vehicle will re- speed by about 1 km/h (1 MPH).
turn to the previously set speed. Resuming at preset speed: The forward emergency braking system uses a ra-
The vehicle may not maintain the set speed when dar sensor j 1 located at the front of the vehicle to
Push and release the ACCELERATE/RESUME
going up or down steep hills. In such cases, drive measure the distance to the vehicle ahead in the
switch.
without the cruise control. travelling lane.
The vehicle will resume the last set cruising speed
Resetting to slower speed: The forward emergency braking system operates at
when the vehicle speed is over 40 km/h (25 MPH).
speeds above approximately 5 km/h (3 MPH).
Use any one of the following methods to reset to a
slower speed.
Cancelling cruising speed
Use any one of the following methods to cancel the WARNING
• Lightly tap the footbrake pedal. When the ve-
set speed. • The forward emergency braking system is a
hicle reaches the desired speed, push and re-
supplemental aid to the driver. It is not a re-
lease the COAST/SET switch. • Push the <CANCEL> switch.
placement for the driver’s attention to traffic
• Push and hold the COAST/SET switch. When • Tap the footbrake pedal. conditions or responsibility to drive safely. It
the vehicle reaches the desired speed, release cannot prevent accidents due to carelessness
the COAST/SET switch.
• Push the cruise control MAIN switch. The
or dangerous driving techniques.
CRUISE indicator will turn off.
• Quickly push and release the COAST/SET • The forward emergency braking system does
switch. This will reduce the vehicle speed by not function in all driving, traffic, weather and
about 1 km/h (1 MPH). road conditions.

SYSTEM OPERATION ward collision or may help mitigate the system will not function when the vehicle is
consequences if a collision should one be unavoid- driven at speeds over approximately 80 km/h
The forward emergency braking system will func- able. (50 MPH).
tion when your vehicle is driven at speeds above
approximately 5 km/h (3 MPH). If the driver is handling the steering wheel, acceler- • The radar sensor may not detect a vehicle
ating or braking, the forward emergency braking ahead in the following conditions:
If a risk of a forward collision is detected, the for- system will function later or will not function.
ward emergency braking system will provide the – Dirt, ice, snow or other material covering
first warning to the driver by flashing the forward The automatic braking will cease under the follow- the radar sensor.
emergency braking system warning light and pro- ing conditions:
– Interference by other radar sources.
viding an audible warning.
• When the steering wheel is turned as far as nec-
– Snow or road spray from travelling
If the driver applies the brakes quickly and forcefully essary to avoid a collision.
vehicles.
after the warning, and the forward emergency brak-
ing system detects that there is still the possibility of
• When the accelerator pedal is depressed.
– If the vehicle ahead is narrow (e.g. motor-
a forward collision, the system will automatically in- • When there is no longer a vehicle detected cycle).
crease the braking force. ahead.
– When driving on a steep downhill slope or
If the driver does not take action, the forward emer- If the forward emergency braking system has roads with sharp curves.
gency braking system issues the second visual stopped the vehicle, the vehicle will remain at a
– When towing a trailer.
warning (red) and audible warning. If the driver re- standstill for approximately 2 seconds before the
leases the accelerator pedal, then the system ap- brakes are released. • In some road or traffic conditions, the forward
plies partial braking. emergency braking system may unexpectedly
WARNING push the accelerator pedal up or apply partial
If the risk of a collision becomes imminent, the for- braking. When acceleration is necessary, con-
ward emergency braking system applies harder • The radar sensor does not detect the follow- tinue to depress the accelerator pedal to over-
braking automatically. ing objects: ride the system.
– Pedestrians, animals or obstacles in the
NOTE
roadway
• Braking distances increase on slippery sur-
The vehicle’s brake lights come on when braking faces.
– Oncoming vehicles
is performed by the forward emergency braking
system.
• Excessive noise will interfere with the warn-
– Crossing vehicles ing chime sound, and the chime may not be
Depending on vehicle speed and distance to the heard.
vehicle ahead, as well as driving and roadway con-
• The radar sensor has some performance limi-
tations. If a stationary vehicle is in the vehi-
ditions, the system may help the driver avoid a for- cle’s path, the forward emergency braking

• The system is designed to automatically emergency braking system warning light (orange)
check the sensor’s functionality, within cer- and the driver assist system forward indicator (or-
tain limitations. The system may not detect ange) will illuminate.
some forms of obstruction of the sensor area
Action to take:
of the front bumper such as ice, snow, stick-
ers, for example. In these cases, the system When the above conditions no longer exist, the for-
may not be able to warn the driver properly. ward emergency braking system will resume auto-
Be sure that you check, clean and clear the matically.
sensor area of the front bumper regularly. Condition B:
Turning the forward emergency braking JVS0299XZ When the sensor area of the front bumper is cov-
system ON/OFF Except for MR16 engine ered with dirt or obstructed, making it impossible to
detect a vehicle ahead, the forward emergency brak-
Perform the following steps to turn the forward
ing system is automatically turned off. The forward
emergency braking system ON or OFF.
emergency braking system warning light (orange)
1. Using the switches and the ENTER button will illuminate and the [Not Available Front Radar
on the left side of the steering wheel, select the Obstructed] warning message will appear in the ve-
Settings menu in the vehicle information display. hicle information display.
(See “Settings” in the “2. Instruments and
Action to take:
controls” section.)
If the warning light (orange) comes on, park the
2. Using the switches and the ENTER button,
vehicle in a safe location and turn the engine off.
navigate to the [Driver Assistance] menu, fol-
JVS0620XZ Check to see if the sensor area of the front bumper
lowed by the [Driving Aids] menu.
For MR16 engine is blocked. If the sensor area of the front bumper is
3. In the [Driving Aids] menu, highlight the [Emer- blocked, remove the blocking material. Restart the
gency Brake] item and use the ENTER button to When the forward emergency braking system is
engine. If the warning light continues to illuminate,
toggle between ON (enabled) or OFF (disabled). turned off, the forward emergency braking system
have the forward emergency braking system
warning light (orange) will illuminate.
checked by a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
System temporarily unavailable
Condition A:
When the radar sensor picks up interference from
another radar source, making it impossible to detect
a vehicle ahead, the forward emergency braking
system is automatically turned off. The forward

ECO MODE SYSTEM (where fitted)
System malfunction – driving on a steep uphill slope

If the forward emergency braking system malfunc- ECO PEDAL GUIDE FUNCTION
tions, it will be turned off automatically, a chime will
sound, the forward emergency braking system
warning light (orange) will illuminate and the warn-
ing message [Malfunction] will appear in the vehicle
information display.
Action to take:
If the warning light (orange) comes on, park the JVS0185XZ
vehicle in a safe location, turn the engine off and
restart the engine. If the warning light continues to
illuminate, have the forward emergency braking sys- The ECO mode system helps to enhance the fuel JVS0201XZ
tem checked by a NISSAN dealer or qualified work- economy by controlling the engine and Xtronic CVT
shop. operation automatically to avoid rapid acceleration.
Use the ECO Pedal Guide function for improving
To turn on the ECO mode system, push the ECO fuel economy.
switch. The ECO mode indicator appears on the
meter. When the ECO Pedal Guide bar is in the green
range j1 , it indicates that the vehicle is driven within
To turn off the ECO mode, push the ECO switch range of economy drive.
again. The ECO mode indicator will turn off.
If the ECO Pedal Guide bar is out of the green
• The ECO mode system cannot be turned off range, it indicates that the accelerator pedal is de-
while the accelerator pedal is depressed even if pressed over the range of economy drive.
the ECO switch is pushed to OFF. Release the
accelerator pedal to turn off the ECO mode sys- The ECO Pedal Guide bar is not displayed when:
tem. • The cruise control system (where fitted) is oper-
ating.
• The ECO mode system will turn off automatically
if a malfunction occurs in the system. • The vehicle speed is less than approximately 4
km/h (2 MPH).
• Turn off the ECO mode system when accelera-
tion is required such as when: • The shift lever is in the P (Park), N (Neutral) or R
– driving with a heavy load of passengers or (Reverse) position.
cargo in the vehicle

To activate or deactivate the ECO Pedal Guide func- • The cruise control system (where fitted) is oper- 4 : The best fuel economy of the past history will be
j
tion, see “Settings” in the “2. Instruments and ating. displayed.
controls” section.
ECO DRIVE REPORT
AMBIENT ECO
JVI0929XZ
JVS0200XZ
When the ignition switch is in the OFF position,

The ambient ECO j 1 is displayed according to the ECO management display appears.
accelerator pedal operation, while driving the ve-
1
j ECO evaluation
hicle in ECO mode.
2
j Previous 5 times (History)
The ambient ECO will illuminate in the directions of
j2 as the driving pattern becomes more ECO 3
j Current fuel economy
friendly.
4
j Best fuel economy
To activate or deactivate the ambient ECO, see
The result of ECO evaluation is displayed when the
“Settings” in the “2. Instruments and controls” sec-
vehicle is driven for about 10 minutes or more.
tion.
1 : The more economically you drive, the more
j
The ambient ECO is not displayed in the following
appear.
conditions
2 : The average fuel economy for the previous 5
j
• The vehicle speed is under 10 km/h (6 MPH). times will be displayed.
• The shift lever is in the P (Park), N (Neutral) or R 3 : The average fuel economy since the last reset
j
(Reverse) position. will be displayed.

PARKING
become involved in a serious accident and

WARNING injure themselves. On hot, sunny days, tem-
• Do not stop or park the vehicle over flam- peratures in a closed vehicle could quickly
mable materials such as dry grass, waste pa- become high enough to cause severe or pos-
per or rags. They may ignite and cause a fire. sibly fatal illness to people and animals.
• Safe parking procedures require that both the

parking brake be applied and the shift lever
placed in the P (Park) position (Xtronic CVT
(Continuously Variable Transmission) model)
or the shift lever placed in an appropriate gear
(MT (Manual Transmission) model). Failure to
do so could cause the vehicle to move unex-
pectedly or roll away and result in an acci-
dent.
• When parking the vehicle, make sure the shift
lever is moved to the P (Park) position. The
shift lever cannot be moved out of the P (Park)
position without depressing the footbrake
pedal (Xtronic CVT (Continuously Variable
Transmission) model).
• Never leave the engine running while the ve-
hicle is unattended.
• When parking for an extended period of time
with Stop/Start System (where fitted) acti-
vated, the engine will restart automatically.
Never leave the vehicle with the ignition switch
in the ON position.
mally require the support of others alone in
the vehicle. Pets should not be left alone ei-
ther. They could unknowingly activate
switches or controls and inadvertently

HEADED UPHILL WITH KERB j
2
Turn the wheels away from the kerb and allow
the vehicle to move back until the kerb side wheel
gently touches the kerb. Then apply the parking
brake.
HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, WITHOUT
KERB j
3
Turn the wheels toward the side of the road so
SSD0488Z
the vehicle will move away from the centre of the
Left-Hand Drive (LHD) model road if the vehicle moves. Then apply the parking
brake.
4. Model with Intelligent Key:
Place the ignition switch in the OFF position.
Model without Intelligent Key:
Place the ignition switch in the LOCK position
and remove the key.
NOTE
For Model with Stop/Start System:
SSD0489Z
Right-Hand Drive (RHD) model Use this system when the vehicle is stopped for
3. To help prevent the vehicle from moving into traf- a period of time, for example waiting at stop-
1. Firmly apply the parking brake. fic when parked on an incline, it is a good prac- lights.
2. Xtronic Continuously Variable Transmission tice to turn the wheels as illustrated. Stop the engine with the ignition switch when
(CVT) model: Move the shift lever to the P (Park) HEADED DOWNHILL WITH KERB j
1 parking, etc. for an extended period of time.
position.
Turn the wheels towards the kerb and move the
Manual Transmission (MT) model: Move the shift vehicle forward until the kerb side wheel gently
lever to the R (Reverse) position. When parking touches the kerb. Then apply the parking brake.
on an uphill grade, move the shift lever to the 1
(1st) position.

PARKING SENSOR SYSTEM (where fitted)
tances to the object. Inclement weather or

ultrasonic sources such as an automatic car
wash, a truck’s compressed-air brakes or a
pneumatic drill may affect the function of the
system; this may include reduced perfor-
mance or a false activation.
• This function is designed as an aid to the driver
in detecting large stationary objects to help
avoid damaging the vehicle. The system is
SSD0723Z not designed to prevent contact with small or
Type A moving objects. Always move slowly.
• The system will not detect small objects be-
low the bumper, and may not detect objects
close to the bumper or on the ground.
• The system may not detect the following ob-
jects.
– Fluffy objects such as snow, cloth, cotton,
glass-wool, etc.
– Thin objects such as rope, wire and chain,
etc.
JVS0437XZ
Type B – Wedge-shaped objects
The parking sensor system sounds a tone to inform The driver is always responsible for safety dur- • If your vehicle sustains damage to the bumper
the driver of obstacles near the bumper. ing parking and other manoeuvres. Always fascia, leaving it misaligned or bent, the sens-
look around and check that it is safe to do so ing zone may be altered causing inaccurate
When the [Display] key is ON, the sensor view will
before parking. measurement of obstacles or false alarms.
automatically appear in the vehicle information dis-
play. • Read and understand the limitations of the CAUTION
parking sensor system as contained in this
WARNING section. The colours of the corner sensor indi- • Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as
possible to hear the tone clearly.
cator and the distance guide lines in the front
• The parking sensor system is a convenience (where fitted)/rear view indicate different dis-
but it is not a substitute for proper parking.

• Keep the sensors (located on the bumper fas- The parking sensor system will turn on automatically
cia) free from snow, ice and large accumula- under the following conditions.
tions of dirt. Do not clean the sensors with
sharp objects. If the sensors are covered, the • When the ignition switch is placed from the OFF
position to the ON position.
accuracy of the sensor function will be dimin-
ished. • When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) posi-
tion.
For the vehicle equipped with rear sensor
(Type A): • When the vehicle speed decrease to 10 km/h (6
MPH).
The system inform with visual and audible signal of
rear obstacles when the shift lever is in the R (Re- NAA1547 The automatic turning on function can be turned on
verse) position. and off by [Sensor] key in the setting menu. See
When the corner of the vehicle moves closer to an “Parking Aids” in the “2. Instruments and controls”
The system is deactivated at speeds above 10 km/h
object, the corner sensor indicators j1 appear section.
(6 MPH). It is reactivated at lower speeds.
(where fitted). Type B:
The intermittent tone will stop after 3 seconds when
an obstacle is detected by only the corner sensor When the centre of the vehicle moves close to an
and the distance does not change. The tone will object, the centre indicator j
2 appears.
stop when the obstacle get away from the vehicle. When the object is detected, the indicator (green)
For the vehicle equipped with front and rear sen- appears and blinks and the tone sounds intermit-
sor (Type B): tently. When the vehicle moves closer to the object,
the colour of the indicator turns yellow and the rate
The system inform with visual and audible signal of of the blinking increase. When the vehicle is very
front obstacles when the shift lever is in the D (Drive) close to the object, the indicator stops blinking and
position and both front and rear obstacles when the turns red, and the tone sounds continuously.
shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position. JVS0438XZ
PARKING SENSOR SYSTEM OFF
The system is deactivated at speeds above 10 km/h
(6 MPH). It is reactivated at lower speeds.
SWITCH (where fitted)
The parking sensor system OFF switch on the in-
Type A: strument panel allows the driver to turn the parking
The intermittent tone will stop after 3 seconds when
an obstacle is detected by only the corner sensor The ENTER button on the steering-wheel-mounted sensor system on and off. To turn the parking sen-
and the distance does not change. The tone will controls allows the driver to turn the parking sensor sor system on and off, the ignition switch must be in
stop when the obstacle moves away from the ve- system off. the ON position.
hicle.

TRAILER TOWING
The indicator light j

1 on the switch will illuminate Rear Sensor Your new vehicle was designed to be used primarily
when the system is turned on. to carry passengers and luggage.
Activate or deactivate the use of sensor.
If the indicator light flashes when the parking sensor Towing a trailer will place additional loads on your
system is not turned off, it may indicate a malfunc- ON (default) - OFF vehicle’s engine, drive train, steering, braking and
tion in the parking sensor system. Display (where fitted) other systems. The towing of a trailer will exagger-
ate other conditions such as sway caused by cross-
The parking sensor system will be turned on auto- Automatically shows the sensor view on the vehicle winds, rough road surfaces or passing trucks.
matically under the following conditions: information display when the sensor is activated.
Your driving style and speed must be adjusted ac-
• When the ignition switch is switched from the ON (default) - OFF cording to the circumstances. Before towing a
OFF position to the ON position.
Volume trailer, see a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop
• When the shift lever is shifted into the R (Re-
Adjust the volume of the tone.
for an explanation about the proper use of towing
verse) position. equipment.
• When the vehicle speed increases to 10 km/h (6 High - Mid (default) - Low OPERATING PRECAUTIONS
MPH) and decreases. Range • Avoid towing a trailer during the running-in pe-
The automatic activation function can be turned on Adjust the detection range of the sensor. riod.
and off by pushing the switch for more than 4 sec-
onds. Far - Mid (default) - Near • Before driving, make sure that the lighting sys-
tem of the trailer works properly.
PARKING SENSOR SYSTEM
SETTING • Observe the legal maximum speeds for trailer
operation.
Moving Object • Avoid abrupt starts, accelerations and stops.
Activate or deactivate the use of sensor. • Avoid sharp turns and lane changes.
ON (default) - OFF • Always drive your vehicle at a moderate speed.
Front Sensor (where fitted) • Select the AUTO mode if your vehicle is
Activate or deactivate the use of sensor. equipped with the Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) sys-
tem.
ON (default) - OFF
• Follow the trailer manufacturer’s instructions.

• Choose proper coupling devices (trailer hitch, SAFETY CHAINS
safety chain, roof carrier, etc.) for your vehicle
and trailer. These devices are available from a Always use a suitable chain between the vehicle
NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop where you and trailer. The chain should be crossed and should
can also obtain more detailed information about be attached to the hitch, not to the vehicle bumper
trailer towing. or axle. Be sure to leave enough slack in the chain
to permit turning corners.
• Never allow the total trailer load (trailer weight
TRAILER BRAKES
plus its cargo weight) to exceed the maximum
set for the vehicle and the coupling device. See Ensure that trailer brakes are installed as required
a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop for more by local regulations. Also check that all other trailer
information. equipment conforms to local regulations.
• The trailer must be loaded so that heavy goods Always block the wheels on both the vehicle and
are placed over the axle. The maximum allowable trailer when parking. Apply the hand brake on the
vertical load on the trailer hitch must not be ex- trailer where fitted. Parking on a steep slope is not
ceeded. recommended.
• Have your vehicle serviced more often than at If parking on a steep slope is unavoidable, place the
the intervals specified in a separate maintenance shift lever in the P (Park) position (Continuously Vari-
booklet. able Transmission model) or the shift lever in an
• Trailer towing requires more fuel than under nor- appropriate gear (Manual Transmission model), and
mal circumstances because of a considerable turn the front wheels towards the kerb.
increase in traction power and resistance. TRAILER DETECTION (where fitted)
While towing a trailer, check the engine coolant When towing a trailer with a genuine NISSAN tow
temperature indicator to prevent the vehicle from bar electrical kit and the turn signal switch is used,
overheating. the electrical system of the vehicle will detect the
TYRE PRESSURE additional electrical load of the trailer lighting. As a
result, the direction indicator tone will be different.
When towing a trailer, inflate the vehicle tyres to the
maximum recommended COLD tyre pressure (for
full loading) indicated on the tyre placard.
Do not tow a trailer when the vehicle is installed with
a temporary spare tyre or a compact spare tyre.

ELECTRIC POWER STEERING
SYSTEM
WARNING
• If the engine is not running or is turned off
while driving, the power assist for the steer-
ing will not work. Steering will be harder to
operate.
• When the electric power steering warning light
illuminates with the engine running, the power
assist for the steering will cease operation.
You will still have control of the vehicle, but
the steering will be much harder to operate.
The electric power steering system is designed to
provide power assist while driving to operate the
steering wheel with light force.
When the steering wheel is operated repeatedly or
continuously while parking or driving at a very low
speed, the power assist for the steering wheel will
be reduced. This is to prevent overheating of the
electric power steering system and protect it from
getting damaged. While the power assist is re-
duced, steering wheel operation will become heavy.
When the temperature of the electric power steer-
JVS0440X
ing system goes down, the power assist level will
return to normal. Avoid repeating such steering
COUPLING DEVICE INSTALLATION • The coupling device, mounting points and instal- wheel operations that could cause the electric
lation parts on your vehicle: as shown as an ex- power steering system to overheat.
NISSAN recommends that the coupling device for ample in the illustration.
trailer towing be installed under the following condi- You may hear a fricative sound when the steering
tions: • Rear overhang of coupling device: j
A 1,080 mm wheel is operated quickly. However, this is not a
(42.5 in) malfunction.
• Maximum permissible vertical load on the cou-
pling device: 981 N (100 kg, 221 lb) Follow all of the coupling device manufacturer’s in-
structions for installation and use.

BRAKE SYSTEM
If the electric power steering warning light illu- The brake system has two separate hydraulic cir- While driving on a slippery surface, be careful when
minates while the engine is running, it may indicate cuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will still have braking, accelerating or downshifting. Abrupt brak-
the electric power steering system is not functioning braking ability at two wheels. ing or acceleration could cause the wheels to skid
properly and may need servicing. Have the electric and result in an accident.
power steering system checked by a NISSAN dealer BRAKE PRECAUTIONS
or qualified workshop. (See “Electric power steer- Wet brakes
Vacuum assisted brakes
ing warning light” in the “2. Instruments and When the vehicle is washed or driven through wa-
controls” section.) The brake booster aids braking by using engine ter, the brakes may get wet. As a result, your brak-
vacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop the ve- ing distance will be longer and the vehicle may pull
When the electric power steering warning light illu- hicle by depressing the foot brake pedal. However,
minates with the engine running, the power assist to one side during braking.
greater foot pressure on the footbrake pedal will be
for the steering will cease operation. You will still required to stop the vehicle. The stopping distance To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe speed
have control of the vehicle. However, greater steer- will be longer. while lightly depressing the brake pedal to heat up
ing effort is needed, especially in sharp turns and at the brakes. Do this until the brakes return to normal.
low speeds. If the engine is not running or is turned off while driv- Avoid driving the vehicle at high speeds until the
ing, the power assisted brakes will not function. brakes function correctly.
Braking will be harder.
Parking brake running-in
WARNING Break in the parking brake shoes whenever the
Do not coast with the engine stopped. stopping effect of the parking brake is weakened or
whenever the parking brake shoes and/or drums/
Using brakes rotors are replaced, in order to assure the best brak-
Avoid resting your foot on the footbrake pedal while ing performance.
driving. This will overheat the brakes, wear out the This procedure is described in the vehicle service
brake linings/pads faster, and increase fuel con- manual and can be performed by a NISSAN dealer
sumption. or qualified workshop.
To help reduce brake wear and to prevent the brakes Driving uphill
from overheating, reduce speed and downshift to a
lower gear before going down a slope or long grade. When starting on a steep grade, it is sometimes dif-
Overheated brakes may reduce braking perfor- ficult to operate both the brake and clutch (for MT
mance and could result in loss of vehicle control. model). Apply the parking brake to hold the vehicle.
Do not slip the clutch. When ready to start, slowly
release the parking brake while depressing the ac-
celerator pedal and releasing the clutch pedal.

Driving downhill tances may also be longer on rough, gravel or Using system
snow covered roads, or if you are using tyre
The engine braking action is effective for controlling chains. Always maintain a safe distance from Depress the brake pedal and hold it down. Depress
the vehicle while descending hills. For Manual Trans- the vehicle in front of you. Ultimately, the the brake pedal with firm steady pressure, but do
mission (MT) model, the shift lever should be placed driver is responsible for safety. not pump the brakes. The ABS will operate to pre-
in the lower speed position prior to descending. For vent the wheels from locking up. Steer the vehicle to
Xtronic Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) • Tyre type and condition may also affect brak- avoid obstacles.
model, the manual shift mode or the L position ing effectiveness.
should be selected. – When replacing tyres, install the specified WARNING
BRAKE ASSIST size of tyres on all four wheels. Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so may re-
– When installing a spare tyre, make sure sult in increased stopping distances.
When the force applied to the brake pedal exceeds
a certain level, the Brake Assist is activated gener- that it is the proper size and type as speci-
Self-test feature
ating greater braking force than a conventional brake fied on the tyre placard. (See “Tyre
booster even with light pedal force. placard” in the “9. Technical information” The ABS includes electronic sensors, electric
section.) pumps, hydraulic solenoids and a computer. The
computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that tests
WARNING – For detailed information, see “Tyres and
the system each time you start the engine and move
wheels” in the “8. Maintenance and
The Brake Assist is only an aid to assist braking the vehicle at a low speed in forward or reverse.
do-it-yourself” section.
operation and is not a collision warning or avoid- When the self-test occurs, you may hear a “clunk”
ance device. It is the driver’s responsibility to The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) controls the noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal. This
stay alert, drive safely and be in control of the brakes so the wheels do not lock during hard brak- is normal and does not indicate a malfunction. If the
vehicle at all times. ing or when braking on slippery surfaces. The sys- computer senses a malfunction, it switches the ABS
tem detects the rotation speed at each wheel and off and illuminates the ABS warning light on the
ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS) varies the brake fluid pressure to prevent each wheel instrument panel. The brake system then operates
from locking and sliding. By preventing each wheel normally, but without anti-lock assistance.
WARNING from locking, the system helps the driver maintain
If the ABS warning light illuminates during the self-
• The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) is a so- steering control and helps to minimise swerving and
spinning on slippery surfaces.
test or while driving, have the vehicle checked by a
phisticated device, but it cannot prevent acci- NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
dents resulting from careless or dangerous
driving techniques. It can help maintain ve- Normal operation
hicle control during braking on slippery sur- The ABS operates at speeds above 5 to 10 km/h (3
faces. Remember that stopping distances on to 6 MPH). The speed varies according to road con-
slippery surfaces will be longer than on nor- ditions.
mal surfaces even with ABS. Stopping dis-

VEHICLE SECURITY COLD WEATHER DRIVING
When the ABS senses that one or more wheels are When leaving your vehicle unoccupied:
close to locking up, the actuator rapidly applies and WARNING
• Always take the key with you - even when leav-
releases hydraulic pressure. This action is similar to
ing the vehicle in your own garage. • Whatever the condition, drive with caution.
pumping the brakes very quickly. You may feel a Accelerate and decelerate with great care. If
pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise from • Close all windows completely and lock all doors. accelerating or decelerating too fast, the drive
under the bonnet or feel a vibration from the actua- wheels will lose even more traction.
tor when it is operating. This is normal and indicates
• Always park your vehicle where it can be seen.
that the ABS is operating properly. However, the
Park in a well lit area during the night. • Allow more stopping distance in cold weather
pulsation may indicate that road conditions are haz- • If the security system is equipped, use it - even driving. Braking should be started sooner than
ardous and extra care is required while driving. for a short period. on dry pavement.
• Never leave children or pets in the vehicle unat- • Keep at a greater distance from the vehicle in
tended. front of you on slippery roads.
• Never leave valuables inside the vehicle. Always • Wet ice (0°C, 32°F and freezing rain), very cold
take valuables with you. snow and ice can be slick and very difficult to
drive on. The vehicle will have a lot less trac-
• Never leave the vehicle documents in the ve- tion or grip under these conditions. Try to
hicle. avoid driving on wet ice until the road is salted
• Never leave articles on a roof rack. Remove them or sanded.
from the rack and keep and lock them inside the • Watch for slippery spots (glaring ice). These
vehicle. may appear on an otherwise clear road in
• Never leave the spare key in the vehicle. shaded areas. If a patch of ice is seen ahead,
brake before reaching it. Try not to brake while
actually on the ice, and avoid any sudden
steering manoeuvres.
• Do not use cruise control on slippery roads.
• Snow can trap dangerous exhaust gas under
your vehicle. Keep snow clear of the exhaust
pipe and from around your vehicle.

BATTERY 4. Snow chains may be used if desired. Make sure • Securely block the wheels.
they are the proper size for the tyres on your
If the battery is not fully charged during extremely To keep the electronic parking brake released after
vehicle and are installed according to the chain
cold weather conditions, the battery fluid may freeze the engine is turned off, see “Parking brake” in the
manufacturer’s instructions. Use chain tension-
and damage the battery. To maintain maximum effi- “3. Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section.
ers when recommended by the tyre chain manu-
ciency, the battery should be checked regularly. For facturer to ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of CORROSION PROTECTION
details, see “Battery” in the “8. Maintenance and the tyre chains must be secured or removed to
do-it-yourself” section of this manual. Chemicals used for road surface de-icing are ex-
prevent the possibility of whipping action dam-
tremely corrosive and will accelerate corrosion and
ENGINE COOLANT age to the fenders or underbody. In addition,
the deterioration of underbody components such as
drive at a reduced speed, otherwise, your ve-
If the vehicle is to be left outside without anti-freeze, the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines, brake
hicle may be damaged and/or vehicle handling
drain the cooling system, including the engine block. cables, floor pan and fenders.
and performance may be adversely affected.
Refill before operating the vehicle. For details, see In the winter, the underbody must be cleaned
“Changing engine coolant” in the “8. Maintenance SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT periodically. For additional information, see “Cor-
and do-it-yourself” section of this manual. It is recommended that the following items be car- rosion protection” in the “7. Appearance and
TYRE EQUIPMENT ried in the vehicle during the winter: care” section of this manual.
1. If you have snow tyres installed on the front/rear • A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to remove ice For additional protection against rust and corrosion,
wheels of your vehicle, they should be of the and snow from the windows. which may be required in some areas, consult a
same size, loading range, construction and type NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
(bias, bias-belted or radial) as the rear/front tyres.
• A sturdy, flat board to be placed under the jack
to give it firm support.
2. If the vehicle is to be operated in severe winter • A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts.
conditions, snow tyres should be installed on all
four wheels. PARKING BRAKE
3. For additional traction on icy roads, studded tyres When parking in an area where the outside tem-
may be used. However, some countries, prov- perature is below 0 °C (32 °F), do not apply the
inces and states prohibit their use. Check local, parking brake to prevent it from freezing. For safe
state and provincial laws before installing stud- parking:
ded tyres.
• Place the shift lever in the P (Park) position
Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow (Xtronic CVT model).
tyres, on wet or dry surfaces, may be poorer
than that of non-studded snow tyres.
• Place the shift lever in the 1 (1st) or R (Reverse)
gear (MT model).

NOTE

6 In case of emergency
Hazard indicator flasher switch ................................ 6-2 Installing spare tyre............................................. 6-7
Flat tyre ................................................................... 6-2 Stowing damaged tyre and tools ......................... 6-8
Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Jump starting ........................................................... 6-9
(where fitted) ...................................................... 6-2 Push starting ........................................................... 6-10
Stopping vehicle ................................................. 6-3 Engine overheat....................................................... 6-11
Preparing tools and spare tyre (where fitted) ....... 6-3 Towing your vehicle ................................................. 6-11
Blocking wheels ................................................. 6-5 Towing precautions ............................................ 6-11
Removing wheel cover (where fitted) .................. 6-6 Towing recommended by NISSAN ..................... 6-12
Removing tyre..................................................... 6-6
HAZARD INDICATOR FLASHER FLAT TYRE
SWITCH
If you have a flat tyre, follow the instructions as fol-

WARNING lows.
Do not turn the hazard warning flasher switch to
TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING
off until you can make sure that it is safe to do
so. Also, the hazard flasher warning may not blink SYSTEM (TPMS) (where fitted)
automatically depending on the force of impact.
WARNING
• If the low tyre pressure warning light illumi-
nates while driving, avoid sudden steering
SIC2475Z
manoeuvres or abrupt braking, reduce vehicle
speed, pull off the road to a safe location and
stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Driving
The hazard indicator flasher switch operates regard- with under-inflated tyres may permanently
less of the ignition switch position except when the damage the tyres and increase the likelihood
battery is discharged. of tyre failure. Serious vehicle damage could
The hazard indicator flasher is used to warn other occur and may lead to an accident and could
drivers when you have to stop or park under emer- result in serious personal injury. Check the
gency conditions. tyre pressure for all four tyres. Adjust the tyre
pressure to the recommended COLD tyre
When the hazard indicator flasher switch is pushed, pressure shown on the tyre placard to turn
all turn signal lights will flash. To turn off the hazard the low tyre pressure warning light off. If the
indicator flasher, push the hazard indicator flasher light still illuminates while driving after adjust-
switch again. ing the tyre pressure, a tyre may be flat. If you
When an impact that could activate the supplemen- have a flat tyre, replace it with a spare tyre
tal air bags is detected, the hazard warning flasher (where fitted) as soon as possible.
lights blink automatically. If the hazard warning
flasher switch is pushed, the hazard warning flash-
• When a spare tyre is mounted or a wheel is
replaced, the TPMS will not function and the
ers will turn off. low tyre pressure warning light will flash for
approximately 1 minute. The light will remain
on after the 1 minute. Contact a NISSAN
dealer or qualified workshop as soon as pos-
sible for tyre replacement and/or system re-
setting.
6-2 In case of emergency

• Replacing tyres with those not originally speci- 1. Safely move the vehicle off the road away from PREPARING TOOLS AND SPARE
fied by NISSAN could affect the proper opera- traffic. TYRE (where fitted)
tion of the TPMS.
2. Turn on the hazard indicator flasher lights.
3. Park on a level surface.
tors tyre pressure of all tyres except the spare. When
the low tyre pressure warning light is lit, one or more 4. Apply the parking brake.
of your tyres is significantly under-inflated. If the ve-
5. Xtronic Continuously Variable Transmission
hicle is being driven with low tyre pressure, the
(CVT) model: Move the shift lever to the P (Park)
TPMS will activate and warn you of it by the low tyre
position.
pressure warning light (in the meter panel). This
system will activate only when the vehicle is driven Manual Transmission (MT) model: Move the shift
at speeds above 25 km/h (16 MPH). lever to the R (Reverse) position.
For more details, see “ Low tyre pressure warning 6. Turn off the engine.
light (where fitted)” in the “2. Instruments and 7. Open the bonnet and set up the triangle reflector
controls” section and “Tyre Pressure Monitoring (where fitted):
System (TPMS) (where fitted)” in the “5. Starting
and driving” section. • To warn other traffic.
STOPPING VEHICLE • To signal professional road assistance per-

sonnel that you need assistance.
WARNING 8. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle and
stand in a safe place, away from other traffic and
• Be sure to apply the parking brake firmly.
clear of the vehicle.
• Be sure to move the shift lever to the P (Park)
position (Xtronic Continuously Variable Trans-
mission (CVT) model) or the shift lever to the JVE0162X
R (Reverse) position (Manual Transmission

(MT) model). Remove the jack, necessary tools and the spare tyre
• Never change tyres when the vehicle is on a from the storage area.
slope, ice or slippery area. This is hazardous.
• Never change tyres when the oncoming traf-
fic is close to your vehicle. Call for profes-
sional road assistance.
In case of emergency 6-3

4. Turn the bottom j 2 of the jack 90 degrees, tilt Spare tyre (Two row model)
the top j 3 of the jack towards you, and then
remove the jack slowly. To store the jack, per-
form this in the reverse order and then tighten the
jack lever so that it does not rattle.
CAUTION
When removing the jack, be careful that your
hands do not hit against the vehicle. Otherwise,
this could result in personal injury.
NOTE
• When storing the jack, do not overtighten the
jack lever using a screw driver. Doing so could
cause deformation of the installation area for
the jack.
• Do not allow the jack to contact the interior
parts. Doing so could cause damage to the
vehicle.
JVE0196X
JVE0164X
1. Remove the storage door by pressing the two

release tabs simultaneously. The spare tyre is located under the luggage floor-
boards.
2. Unhook the clip restraining the jack and tool kit,
and then remove the tool kit. Remove the luggage floorboards.
3. Loosen the jack by turning the jack lever j
1 as
shown in the illustration.

Spare tyre (Three row model) Pull the strap j
2 to raise the seat.
Remove the cover j
3.
SCE0367AZ
Remove the clamp holding the spare tyre. SCE0367AZ
Remove the clamp holding the spare tyre.

BLOCKING WHEELS
JVE0166X
The spare tyre is located under the luggage floor- MCE0001DZ

boards.
Fold the third row seats flat and then remove the WARNING
luggage floorboard j 1 . For folding the third row
seats, see “Third row seats (where fitted)” in the Be sure to block the appropriate wheel to pre-
“1. Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental vent the vehicle from moving, which may cause
restraint system” section. personal injury.

Place suitable blocks j1 at both the front and back REMOVING TYRE
of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tyre j
A to
prevent the vehicle from moving when it is jacked
up.
REMOVING WHEEL COVER
(where fitted)
JVE0165XZ
Jack-up points
SCE0630Z
WARNING
Never use your hands to remove the wheel cover.
This may cause personal injury.
To remove the wheel cover, use the jack rod j
1 as
illustrated.
Apply cloth j
2 between the wheel and jack rod to
prevent damaging the wheel and wheel cover.

Do not remove the wheel nuts until the tyre is
off the ground.
5. Carefully raise the vehicle until the clearance be-
tween the tyre and ground is achieved.
6. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack lever
and rod with both hands and turn the jack lever.
Removing tyre
1. Remove the wheel nuts.
SCE0574Z
2. Remove the damaged tyre.
Jacking up vehicle • Never start or run the engine while the vehicle CAUTION
is on the jack. The vehicle may move sud- The tyre is heavy. Be sure that your feet are clear
WARNING denly, and this may cause an accident. from the tyre and use gloves as necessary to
• Be sure to read and follow the instructions in • Never allow passengers to remain in the ve- avoid injury.
hicle while the tyre is off the ground.
this section. INSTALLING SPARE TYRE
• DO NOT GET UNDER A VEHICLE THAT IS • Be sure to read the caution label attached to
SUPPORTED BY A JACK. the jack body before using.
1. Place the jack directly under the jack-up point as
• Never use a jack which is not provided with
illustrated so that the top of the jack contacts the
your vehicle.
vehicle at the jack-up point.
• The jack, which is provided with your vehicle,
The jack should be placed on firm level
is designed only to lift your vehicle during a
tyre change. Do not use the jack provided with ground.
your vehicle on other vehicles. 2. Align the jack head between the two notches
located at the jack-up point of either the front or
• Never jack up the vehicle at a location other
the rear section.
SCE0039Z
than the jack-up point that is specified.

3. Fit the groove of the jack head between the
• Never lift the vehicle more than necessary.
notches as shown.
WARNING
• Never use blocks on or under the jack.
4. Loosen each wheel nut, anticlockwise, one or • Never use wheel nuts which are not provided
with your vehicle. Incorrect wheel nuts or im-
two turns with the wheel nut wrench.

properly tightened wheel nuts may cause the The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to speci- STOWING DAMAGED TYRE AND
wheel to become loose or come off. This fication at all times. It is recommended that the TOOLS
could cause an accident. wheel nuts be tightened to specification at each
lubrication interval.
• Never use oil or grease on the wheel studs or WARNING
nuts. This may cause the wheel nuts to be-
come loose. WARNING • Be sure that the tyre, jack and tools used are
properly stored after use. Such items can be-
Retighten the wheel nuts when the vehicle has
• The T-type spare tyre is designed for emer-
been driven for 1,000 km (600 miles) (also in
come dangerous projectiles in an accident or
gency use only. sudden stop.
cases of a flat tyre, etc.).
1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface between
For models equipped with Tyre Pressure
• The T-type spare tyre is designed for emer-
the wheel and hub. gency use only.
2. Carefully put the spare tyre on and tighten the
Monitoring System (TPMS) 1. Securely store the damaged tyre, jack and tools
wheel nuts with your fingers. Check that all the • After adjusting the tyre pressure, the TPMS must used in the storage area in the reverse order of
wheel nuts contact the wheel surface horizon- be reset. See “Tyre Pressure Monitoring System removal. (See “Preparing tools and spare tyre
tally. (TPMS) (where fitted)” earlier in this section, (where fitted)” earlier in this section.)
“Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
3. Tighten the wheel nuts alternately and evenly in 2. Replace the luggage floorboards.
(where fitted)” in the “5. Starting and driving”
the sequence illustrated (j
1 -j 5 ), more than 2
section and “Tyre Pressure Monitoring System 3. Close the back door.
times with the wheel nut wrench, until they are
(TPMS) (where fitted)” in the “8. Maintenance
tight. NOTE
and do-it-yourself” section for details about the
4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tyre touches resetting procedure. When stowing the jack and tools, bundle and fas-
the ground. ten them using the band included with the tool
• After adjusting tyre pressure to the COLD tyre
bag, before storing them. Otherwise the tools
5. Tighten the wheel nuts securely, with the wheel pressure, the display of the tyre pressures
may contact each other and produce noise.
nut wrench, in the sequence illustrated. (where fitted in the vehicle information display)
may show higher pressure than the COLD tyre
6. Lower the vehicle completely.
pressure after the vehicle has been driven more
Tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque than 1.6 km (1 mile). This is because the tyre
with a torque wrench as soon as possible. pressurises as the tyre temperature rises. This
Wheel nut tightening torque: does not indicate a system malfunction.
108 N·m (11 kg-m, 80 ft-lb)

JUMP STARTING
WARNING
• Incorrect jump starting can lead to a battery
explosion. The battery explosion may result in
severe injury or death. It may also result in
damage to the vehicle. Be sure to follow the
instructions in this section.
• Explosive hydrogen gas is always present in
the vicinity of the battery. Keep all sparks and
flames away from the battery. JVE0160XZ JVE0193XZ
QR25 engine model R9M engine model
• Always wear suitable eye protection and re-
move rings, bracelets, and any other jewellery 1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle j B,
whenever working on or near a battery. position the two vehicles jA and j B to bring the
batteries into close proximity to each other.
• Never lean over the battery while jump start-
ing. CAUTION
• Never allow battery fluid to come into contact If the battery of vehicle j
A equipped with the
with eyes, skin, clothes or the vehicle’s Intelligent Key system is discharged, the igni-
painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a corrosive tion switch cannot be moved from the LOCK
sulphuric acid which can cause severe burns. position and, if the steering lock is engaged,
If the fluid comes into contact with anything, the steering wheel cannot be moved. Con-
immediately flush the contacted area with JVE0161XZ nect the jumper cables to the booster vehicle
plenty of water. MR16 and MR20 engine models jB before turning or pushing the ignition
switch and disengaging the steering lock.
• Keep the battery out of the reach of children.
2. Apply the parking brake.
• The booster battery must be rated at 12 volts.
Use of an incorrectly rated battery will dam- 3. Xtronic Continuously Variable Transmission
age your vehicle. (CVT) model: Move the shift lever to the P (Park)
position.
• Never attempt to jump start a frozen battery.
It could explode and cause serious injury. Manual Transmission (MT) model: Move the shift
lever to the N (Neutral) position.

PUSH STARTING
4. Switch off all unnecessary electrical systems CAUTION Do not attempt to start the engine by pushing the
(headlights, heater, air conditioner, etc.). vehicle.
Never keep the starter motor engaged for
5. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK position. more than 10 seconds. If the engine does not CAUTION
start right away, place the ignition switch OFF
6. Remove the vent caps, where fitted, on the bat-
and wait at least 10 seconds before trying • Xtronic Continuously Variable Transmission
tery. (CVT)/Manual Transmission (MT) model can-
again.
not be started by pushing. Attempting to do
7. Cover the battery with a firmly wrung out moist
12. After the engine is started, carefully disconnect so may cause damage to the transmission.
cloth to reduce the hazard of an explosion.
the jumper cables in the opposite sequence
8. Connect the jumper cables in the sequence as from that illustrated (j
4,j 3,j 2,j 1 ). • Three-way catalyst equipped model should
not be started by pushing. Attempting to do
illustrated (j
1,j
2,j3,j 4 ).
13. Remove and dispose of the cloth as it may be so may cause damage to the three-way cata-
CAUTION contaminated with corrosive acid. lyst.
• Always connect positive j + to positive j
+ 14. Replace the vent caps, if removed. • Never try to start the engine by towing. When
and negative j - to body ground, NOT to the engine starts, the forward surge could
the battery’s negative j
- . NOTE cause the vehicle to collide with the towing
• Be sure that the jumper cables do not • For model with Stop/Start System, use the vehicle.
special battery that is enhanced in regard to
touch moving parts in the engine compart-
the charge-discharge capacity and life perfor-
• Stop/Start System equipped model cannot be
ment. started by pushing the vehicle.
mance. Avoid using a non-special battery for
• Be sure that the jumper cable’s clamps do the Stop/Start System, as this may cause
not contact any other metal. early deterioration of the battery or a malfunc-
9. Start the engine of the booster vehicle j
B and let tion of the Stop/Start System. For the battery,
it run for a few minutes. it is recommended to use Genuine NISSAN
parts. For more information, contact a NISSAN
10. Depress the accelerator pedal of the booster dealer or qualified workshop.
vehicle j
B at about 2,000 rpm.
11. Start the engine of the jumped vehicle j
A in the
• For model with Stop/Start System, it may take
some time until Stop/Start System activates
normal manner. when the battery is replaced or the battery
terminal is disconnected for extended peri-
ods and then reconnected.

ENGINE OVERHEAT TOWING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Xtronic Continuously Variable Transmission When towing your vehicle, local regulations for tow-
WARNING (CVT) model: Move the shift lever to the P (Park) ing must be followed. Incorrect towing equipment
• Never continue driving if your vehicle over- position. could damage your vehicle. To assure proper tow-
ing and to prevent accidental damage to your ve-
heats. Doing so could cause a vehicle fire. Manual Transmission (MT) model: Move the shift
hicle, NISSAN recommends that you have profes-
• Never open the bonnet if steam is coming lever to the N (Neutral) position.
sional road assistance personnel tow your vehicle. It
out. DO NOT STOP THE ENGINE. is advisable to have the professional road assistant
• Never remove the radiator or coolant reser- 5. Open all the windows.
carefully read the following precautions.
voir cap while the engine is hot. If the radiator
or coolant reservoir cap is removed when the 6. Turn off the air conditioner. Move the tempera- TOWING PRECAUTIONS
engine is hot, pressurised hot water will spurt ture control to maximum hot and the fan control • Be sure that the transmission, steering system,
out and possibly cause burning, scalding or to high speed. and drivetrain are in working condition before
serious injury. 7. Get out of the vehicle. towing. If any units are damaged, the vehicle
must be towed using a dolly or flatbed tow truck.
• If steam or coolant is coming from the engine, 8. Visually inspect and listen for steam or coolant (Two-Wheel Drive (2WD) model)
stand clear of the vehicle to prevent getting escaping from the radiator before opening the
burned. bonnet. Wait until no steam or coolant can be • NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be towed
with the driving (front) wheels off the ground.
• The engine cooling fan can start at any time seen before proceeding.
(Two-Wheel Drive (2WD) model)
when the coolant temperature exceeds pre- 9. Open the engine bonnet.
set degrees.
10. Visually inspect if the cooling fan is running.
• Always attach safety chains before towing.
• Be careful not to allow your hands, hair, jewel-
11. Visually inspect the radiator and radiator hoses
• Never tow Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) model with
lery or clothing to come into contact with, or any of the wheels on the ground as this may
to get caught in the cooling fan or drive belts. for leakage. cause serious and expensive damage to the driv-
If the cooling fan is not running or the coolant is etrain.
If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by the high
temperature indicator), or if you feel a lack of engine leaking, stop the engine.
power, detect unusual noise, etc., take the following 12. After the engine cools down, check the coolant
steps: level in the reservoir with the engine running.
1. Safely move the vehicle off the road away from Do not open the radiator cap.
traffic. 13. Add coolant to the reservoir if necessary.
2. Turn on the hazard indicator flasher lights. Have your vehicle inspected/repaired at a NISSAN
3. Apply the parking brake. dealer or qualified workshop.

TOWING RECOMMENDED BY CAUTION Manual Transmission (MT) model:
NISSAN Never tow the Xtronic Continuously Variable If you have to tow a MT vehicle with all four wheels
Transmission (CVT) model with the front wheels on the ground, perform the following procedures.
Towing Two-Wheel Drive (2WD) model
on the ground. Doing so will cause serious and
CAUTION
expensive damage to the drivetrain.
Manual Transmission (MT) model: • Never tow a manual transmission model back-
ward with all four wheels on the ground.
If you have to tow a MT vehicle with front wheel on
the ground, perform the following procedures.
2. Move the shift lever to the N (Neutral) position.
3. Release the parking brake.
2. Secure the steering wheel in a straight-ahead
position with rope or a similar device.
JVE0167XZ 3. Move the shift lever to the N (Neutral) position.
2WD model
5. Attach the safety chains whenever towing.
Rear wheels on the ground:
2. Move the shift lever to the N (Neutral) position.
4. Attach safety chains whenever towing.
JVE0168XZ
All four wheels on the ground:
2WD model NISSAN recommends that the vehicle be placed on
Front wheels on the ground: a flatbed tow truck as illustrated.
NISSAN recommends that towing dollies be used CAUTION

under the front wheels when towing your vehicle or Never tow the Xtronic CVT model with all four
the vehicle be placed on a flatbed tow truck as illus- wheels on the ground. Doing so will cause seri-
trated. ous and expensive damage to the drivetrain.

Towing Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) model Freeing trapped vehicle Front:
WARNING
• Never allow anyone to stand near the towing
line during the pulling operation.
• Never spin the tyres at high speed. This could
cause them to explode and result in serious
injury. Parts of the vehicle could also overheat
and be damaged.
JVE0169XZ In the event that your vehicle’s tyres become trapped JVE0158XZ
4WD model in sand, snow, or mud, and the vehicle is unable to Front
free itself without being pulled, use the recovery
hooks.
• Use the recovery hooks only. Do not attach the
pulling device to any other part of the vehicle
body. Otherwise, the vehicle body may be dam-
aged.
• Use the recovery hooks to free a vehicle only.
• The recovery hooks are under tremendous stress
when used to free a trapped vehicle. Always pull
SCE0833Z
JVE0170XZ the pulling device straight out from the vehicle.
4WD model Front
Never pull on the recovery hooks at an angle.
NISSAN recommends that towing dollies be used 1 Remove the hook cover from the bumper with
j
under the front or rear wheels when towing your a suitable tool.
vehicle or the vehicle be placed on a flatbed tow 2 Securely install the recovery hook as
j
truck as illustrated. illustrated. (The hook is stored in the storage
CAUTION area under the luggage floorboards.)
Never tow 4WD with any of the wheels on the Make sure that the recovery hook is properly se-
ground. Doing so will cause serious and expen- cured in its storage area after use.
sive damage to the drivetrain.

Rear:
JVE0192XZ
The rear hook is designed as the recovery hook.

7 Appearance and care
Cleaning exterior...................................................... 7-2 Air fresheners ..................................................... 7-4

Washing............................................................. 7-2 Floor mats .......................................................... 7-4
Removing spots.................................................. 7-2 Glass ................................................................. 7-4
Waxing ............................................................... 7-2 Seat belts ........................................................... 7-4
Glass ................................................................. 7-3 Corrosion protection................................................ 7-5
Underbody ......................................................... 7-3 Most common factors contributing to vehicle
Wheels............................................................... 7-3 corrosion ............................................................ 7-5
Aluminium alloy wheels ....................................... 7-3 Environmental factors influence rate of
Chrome parts ..................................................... 7-3 corrosion ............................................................ 7-5
Cleaning interior ...................................................... 7-3 To protect your vehicle from corrosion ................ 7-5
CLEANING EXTERIOR
In order to maintain the appearance of your vehicle, CAUTION REMOVING SPOTS

it is important to take proper care of it.
• Do not wash the vehicle with strong house- Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects,
Whenever possible, park your vehicle inside a ga- hold soap, strong chemical detergents, and tree sap as quickly as possible from the paint
rage or in a covered area to minimise the chances petrol or solvents. surface to avoid lasting damage or staining. Special
of damaging the paint surface of your vehicle. cleaning products are available at a NISSAN dealer
• Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight
or any automotive accessory store.
When it is necessary to park outside, park in a shady or while the vehicle body is hot, as the
area or protect the vehicle with a body cover. Be paint surface may become water-spotted. WAXING
careful not to scratch the paint surface when put-
ting on or removing the body cover. • Avoid using tight-napped or rough cloths, Regular waxing protects the paint surface and helps
such as washing mitts. Care must be taken maintain a new vehicle appearance.
WASHING when removing caked-on dirt or other for-
eign substances so the paint surface is not After waxing, polishing is recommended to remove
In the following instances, wash your vehicle as soon scratched or damaged. built-up residue and to avoid a weathered appear-
as possible to protect the paint surface: ance.
3. Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of clean
• After a rainfall, which may cause the paint sur- water. A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing the
face damage from acid rain. appropriate waxing products.
4. Use a dampened chamois to dry the paint sur-
• After driving on coastal roads, which may cause face and avoid leaving water spots. CAUTION
rusting from the sea breeze.
When washing the vehicle, take care of the follow- • Wash your vehicle thoroughly and completely
• When contaminants such as soot, bird drop- ing: before applying wax to the paint surface.
pings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs get on
the paint surface. • Inside flanges, joints and folds on the doors, • Always follow the manufacturer’s instructions
hatches and bonnet are particularly vulnerable to supplied with the wax.
• When dust or mud builds up on the paint sur- the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areas • Do not use a wax containing any abrasives,
face. must be cleaned regularly. cutting compounds or cleaners that may dam-
1. Wash the vehicle surface with a wet sponge and age the vehicle finish.
plenty of water.
• Be sure that the drain holes in the lower edge of
the doors are not clogged. Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a
2. Clean the vehicle surface gently and thoroughly base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull the finish
using a mild soap, a special vehicle soap or a
• Spray water to the underbody and in the wheel
or leave swirl marks.
wells to loosen the dirt and/or wash away road
general purpose dishwashing liquid mixed with
salt.
clean, lukewarm (never hot) water.
7-2 Appearance and care

CLEANING INTERIOR
GLASS ALUMINIUM ALLOY WHEELS Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior
trim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuum cleaner
Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust film Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge damp- or soft bristled brush. Wipe the vinyl and leather sur-
from the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass to ened in a mild soap solution, especially during win- faces with a clean, soft cloth dampened in mild soap
become coated with a film after the vehicle is parked ter in areas where road salt is used. The salt residue solution, then wipe clean with a dry, soft cloth.
in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a soft cloth will from road salt could discolour the wheels if it is not
easily remove this film. washed off regularly. Regular care and cleaning is required in order to
maintain the appearance of the leather.
UNDERBODY CAUTION
Before using any fabric protector, read the manu-
In areas where road salt is used in the winter, it is Follow the directions below to avoid staining or facturer’s recommendations. Some fabric protec-
necessary to clean the vehicle’s underbody regu- discolouring the wheels: tors contain chemicals that may stain or bleach the
larly in order to prevent dirt and salt from building up
and causing the acceleration of corrosion on the
• Do not use a cleaner that uses strong acid or seat material.
alkali contents to clean the wheels. Use a soft cloth dampened only with water to clean
underbody and suspension.
Before the winter and again in the spring, the under-
• Do not apply wheel cleaners to the wheels the meter and gauge lens covers.
when they are hot. The wheel temperature CAUTION
seal must be checked and, if necessary, re-treated. should be the same as ambient temperature.
WHEELS • Rinse the wheel to completely remove the
• Never use benzine, thinner or any similar ma-
terial.
• Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle to cleaner within 15 minutes after the cleaner is
applied. • Small dirt particles can be abrasive and dam-
maintain their appearance.
aging to leather surfaces and should be re-
• Clean the inner side of the wheels when the CHROME PARTS moved promptly. Do not use saddle soap, car
wheel is changed or the underside of the vehicle Clean all chrome parts regularly with a nonabrasive waxes, polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,
is washed. chrome polish to maintain the finish. solvents, detergents or ammonia-based
cleaners as they damage the natural leather
• Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing the
finish.
wheels.
• Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or corro- • Never use fabric protectors unless recom-
sion. This may cause loss of pressure or damage mended by the manufacturer.
the tyre bead. • Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on meter
or gauge lens covers. It may damage the lens
• NISSAN recommends that the road wheels be
covers.
waxed to protect against road salt in areas where
it is used during winter.
Appearance and care 7-3

AIR FRESHENERS Floor mat positioning aid CAUTION
Most air fresheners use a solvent that could affect When cleaning the inside of the windows, do not
the vehicle interior. If you use an air freshener, take use sharp-edged tools, abrasive cleaners or chlo-
the following precautions: rine-based disinfectant cleaners. They could
damage the electrical conductors, such as rear
• Hanging-type air fresheners can cause perma- window defogger elements.
nent discoloration when they contact vehicle in-
terior surfaces. Place the air freshener in a loca- SEAT BELTS
tion that allows it to hang free and not contact an
interior surface. WARNING
• Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip on the JVA0018XZ • Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in the
vents. These products can cause immediate retractor.
damage and discoloration when spilled on inte-
rior surfaces. This vehicle includes front floor mat brackets to act • Never use bleach, dye or chemical solvents to
as a floor mat positioning aid. NISSAN floor mats clean the seat belts, since these materials
Carefully read and follow the manufacturer’s instruc- have been specially designed for your vehicle model. may severely weaken the seat belt webbing.
tions before using air fresheners.
Position the mat by placing the floor mat bracket The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them with
FLOOR MATS hook through the floor mat grommet hole while cen- a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution.
The use of genuine NISSAN floor mats (where fit- tering the mat in the foot area. Allow the belts to dry completely in the shade before
ted) can extend the life of your vehicle carpet and Periodically check that the mats are properly posi- using them. (See “Seat belts” in the “1. Safety —
make it easier to clean the interior. Regardless of tioned. seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system”
what mats are used, be sure they are fitted for your section.)
vehicle and are properly positioned in the foot well GLASS
to prevent interference with pedal operation. Mats Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust film
should be maintained with regular cleaning and re- from the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass to
placed if they become excessively worn. become coated with a film after the vehicle is parked
in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a soft cloth will
easily remove this film.

CORROSION PROTECTION
MOST COMMON FACTORS Air pollution deterioration of underbody components such as the
CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE exhaust system, fuel and brake lines, brake cables,
Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the air in floor pan and fenders.
CORROSION coastal areas, or heavy road salt use accelerates
the corrosion process. Road salt also accelerates In the winter, the underbody must be cleaned
• The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirt and
the disintegration of paint surfaces. periodically.
debris in body panel sections, cavities, and other
areas. TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM For additional protection against rust and corrosion,
which may be required in some areas, consult a
• Damage to the paint surface and other protec- CORROSION
tive coatings caused by gravel and stone chips
or minor traffic accidents.
• Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep the
vehicle clean.
ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS • Always check for minor damage to the paint sur-
INFLUENCE RATE OF CORROSION face and if any exists, repair it as soon as pos-
sible.
Moisture
The accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the • Keep the drain holes in the lower edge of the
inside floor of the vehicle can accelerate corrosion. doors open to avoid water accumulation.
Wet floor carpet/floor mats will not dry completely • Check the vehicle underbody for accumulation
inside the vehicle. They should be removed and of sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with water
completely dried to avoid floor panel corrosion. as soon as possible.
Relative humidity CAUTION
Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high rela- • Never remove dirt, sand or other debris from
tive humidity. the passenger compartment by washing it out
with a hose. Remove dirt with a vacuum
Temperature cleaner.
High temperatures accelerate the rate of corrosion
to those parts which are not well ventilated.
• Never allow water or other liquids to come in
contact with electronic components inside the
Corrosion will also be accelerated in areas where vehicle as this may damage them.
the temperatures stay above freezing. Chemicals used for road surface deicing are ex-
tremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosion and
Appearance and care 7-5

NOTE

8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Maintenance requirements ....................................... 8-2 Windscreen wiper blades ................................... 8-16

Scheduled maintenance...................................... 8-2 Rear window wiper blade ................................... 8-17
General maintenance.......................................... 8-2 Window washer fluid ............................................... 8-17
Where to go for service ...................................... 8-2 Battery..................................................................... 8-18
General maintenance ............................................... 8-2 Vehicle battery.................................................... 8-18
Explanation of general maintenance items ........... 8-2 Integrated keyfob battery .................................... 8-19
Maintenance precautions .................................... 8-4 Intelligent Key battery.......................................... 8-20
Engine compartment check locations ....................... 8-5 Variable voltage control system (where fitted)........... 8-21
Engine cooling system ............................................. 8-5 Fuses ...................................................................... 8-21
Checking engine coolant level............................. 8-6 Engine compartment........................................... 8-21
Changing engine coolant .................................... 8-6 Passenger compartment ..................................... 8-22
Engine oil................................................................. 8-7 Lights ...................................................................... 8-25
Checking engine oil level .................................... 8-7 Headlights .......................................................... 8-25
Changing engine oil and oil filter ......................... 8-7 Exterior lights...................................................... 8-26
Protect environment............................................ 8-11 Interior lights....................................................... 8-27
Drive belt ................................................................. 8-11 Light locations .................................................... 8-28
Spark plugs (petrol engine models).......................... 8-12 Legal requirement to adjust headlight beam ........ 8-32
Iridium-tipped spark plugs (where fitted) ............. 8-12 Tyres and wheels..................................................... 8-34
Platinum tipped spark plugs (where fitted)........... 8-12 Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Brakes..................................................................... 8-13 (where fitted) ...................................................... 8-34
Checking parking brake...................................... 8-13 Tyre inflation pressure......................................... 8-34
Checking footbrake pedal................................... 8-13 Types of tyres ..................................................... 8-34
Brake booster..................................................... 8-13 Tyre chains ......................................................... 8-34
Brake fluid ............................................................... 8-14 Tyre rotation ....................................................... 8-35
Clutch fluid (where fitted)......................................... 8-14 Tyre wear and damage ....................................... 8-35
Xtronic Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) Tyre age ............................................................. 8-36
fluid (where fitted).................................................... 8-15 Changing tyres and wheels................................. 8-36
Air cleaner filter........................................................ 8-16 Wheel balance.................................................... 8-36
Wiper blades ........................................................... 8-16 Spare tyre .......................................................... 8-36
MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS GENERAL MAINTENANCE
Some day-to-day and regular maintenance is essen- WHERE TO GO FOR SERVICE During normal day-to-day operation of the vehicle,
tial to maintain your vehicle’s good mechanical con- general maintenance should be performed regularly
dition, as well as its emission and engine perfor- If maintenance service is required or your vehicle as prescribed in this section. If you detect any un-
mance. appears to malfunction, have the systems checked usual sounds, vibrations or smells, be sure to check
and tuned by an authorised NISSAN dealer or quali- for the cause or have a NISSAN dealer or qualified
It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure that the fied workshop. workshop do it promptly. In addition, you should
specified maintenance, as well as general mainte-
notify a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop if you
nance, is performed.
think that repairs are required.
As the vehicle owner, you are the only one who can
When performing any checks or maintenance work,
ensure that your vehicle receives the proper mainte-
closely observe “Maintenance precautions” later in
nance care.
this section.
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE EXPLANATION OF GENERAL
For your convenience, the required scheduled main- MAINTENANCE ITEMS
tenance items are described and listed in a separate
Warranty Information and Maintenance booklet. You Additional information on the following items with
must refer to that booklet to ensure that necessary * is found later in this section.
maintenance is performed on your vehicle at regular Outside vehicle
intervals.
The maintenance items listed here should be per-
GENERAL MAINTENANCE formed from time to time, unless otherwise speci-
General maintenance includes those items which fied.
should be checked during normal day-to-day opera- Doors and bonnet:
tion of the vehicle. They are essential if your vehicle
Check that all doors and the bonnet operate
is to continue to operate properly. It is your respon-
smoothly as well as the back door, boot lid and
sibility to perform these procedures regularly as pre-
hatch. Also make sure that all latches lock securely.
scribed.
Lubricate if necessary. Make sure that the second-
Performing general maintenance checks requires ary latch keeps the bonnet from opening when the
minimal mechanical skill and only a few general au- primary latch is released. When driving in areas us-
tomotive tools. ing road salt or other corrosive materials, check lu-
brication frequently.
These checks and inspections can be done by your-
self, a qualified technician, or if you prefer, a
8-2 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Lights*: In the case that front tyres are different size from Accelerator pedal:
Clean the headlights on a regular basis. Make sure rear tyres; Tyres cannot be rotated. Check the pedal for smooth operation and make
that the headlights, stop lights, tail lights, turn signal However, the timing for tyre rotation may vary ac- sure that the pedal does not catch or require uneven
lights, and other lights are all operating properly and cording to your driving habits and the road surface effort. Keep the floor mats away from the pedal.
installed securely. Also check the aim of the head- conditions. Brake pedal*:
lights.
Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Check the pedal for smooth operation and make
Tyres*: transmitter components (where fitted): sure that it is the proper distance from the floor mat
Check the pressure with a gauge often and always Replace the TPMS transmitter grommet seal, valve when depressed fully. Check the brake booster
prior to long distance trips. Adjust the pressure in all core and cap when the tyres are replaced due to function. Be sure to keep the floor mats away from
tyres, including the spare, to the pressure specified. wear or age. the pedal.
Check carefully for damage, cuts or excessive wear. Wheel alignment and balance: Parking brake*:
Tyre rotation*: If the vehicle should pull to either side while driving Check the parking brake operation regularly. Check
on a straight and level road, or if you detect uneven that the lever (where fitted) or the pedal (where fit-
In the case that Two-Wheel Drive (2WD) and front
or abnormal tyre wear, there may be a need for ted) has the proper travel. Also make sure that the
& rear tyres are same size; Tyres should be rotated
wheel alignment. If the steering wheel or seat vi- vehicle is held securely on a fairly steep hill when
every 10,000 km (6,000 miles).
brates at normal highway speeds, wheel balancing only the parking brake is applied.
Tyres marked with directional indicators can only be may be needed.
Seat belts:
rotated between front and rear.
Windscreen: Check that all parts of the seat belt system (for
Make sure that the directional indicators point in the Clean the windscreen on a regular basis. Check the example, buckles, anchors, adjusters and retrac-
direction of wheel rotation after the tyre rotation is windscreen at least every six months for cracks or tors) operate properly and smoothly, and are in-
completed. other damage. Repair as necessary. stalled securely. Check the belt webbing for cuts,
In the case that Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) and front Wiper blades*: fraying, wear or damage.
& rear tyres are same size; Tyres should be rotated Steering wheel:
every 5,000 km (3,000 miles). Check for cracks or wear if not functioning cor-
rectly. Check for changes in the steering condition, such
Tyres marked with directional indicators can only be as excessive play, hard steering or strange noises.
rotated between front and rear. Replace as necessary.
Warning lights and chimes:
Make sure that the directional indicators point in the Inside vehicle
Make sure that all warning lights and chimes are
direction of wheel rotation after the tyre rotation is The maintenance items listed here should be operating properly.
completed. checked on a regular basis, such as when perform-
ing periodic maintenance, cleaning the vehicle, etc.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-3

Windscreen defogger: Engine drive belts*: • Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF or
Check that the air comes out of the defogger outlets Make sure that drive belt(s) is/are not frayed, worn, LOCK position when performing any parts re-
properly and in good quantity when operating the cracked or oily. placement or repairs.
heater or air conditioner. Engine oil level*: • Do not work under the bonnet while the en-
Windscreen wiper and washer*: gine is hot. Always turn off the engine and
Check the level after parking the vehicle (on a level wait until it cools down.
Check that the wipers and washer operate properly ground) and turning off the engine.
and that the wipers do not streak. Fluid leaks:
• If you must work with the engine running,
keep your hands, clothing, hair and tools away
Under bonnet and vehicle Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil, water or other from moving fans, belts and any other moving
The maintenance items listed here should be fluid leaks after the vehicle has been parked for a parts.
while. Water dripping from the air conditioner after
checked periodically (for example, each time you
check the engine oil or refuel). use is normal. If you should notice any leaks or if fuel • It is advisable to secure or remove any loose
clothing and any jewellery, such as rings,
fumes are evident, check for cause and have it cor-
Battery*: watches, etc. before working on your vehicle.
rected immediately.
Except for maintenance free battery, check the fluid Window washer fluid*: • If you must run the engine in an enclosed
level in each cell. It should be between the UPPER space such as a garage, be sure there is
and LOWER lines. Vehicles operated in high tem- Check that there is adequate fluid in the reservoir. proper ventilation for exhaust gases to es-
peratures or under severe conditions require fre- cape.
MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS
quent checks of the battery fluid level.
When performing any inspection or maintenance • Never get under the vehicle while it is sup-
Brake and clutch fluid level(s)*: work on your vehicle, always take care to prevent ported by a jack.
For Manual Transmission (MT) model; make sure serious accidental injury to yourself or damage to • Keep smoking materials, flame and sparks
that the brake and clutch fluid levels are between the vehicle. The following are general precautions away from fuel and the battery.
the MAX and MIN lines on the reservoirs. which should be closely observed.
• Never connect or disconnect either the bat-
Except for Manual Transmission (MT) model; make tery or any transistorised component connec-
sure that the brake fluid level is between the MAX WARNING tor while the ignition switch is in the ON posi-
and MIN lines on the reservoir. • Park the vehicle on a level surface, apply the tion.
parking brake securely and block the wheels
Coolant level*:
to prevent the vehicle from moving. Move the
• On petrol engine models with the Multiport
Check the coolant level when the coolant is cold. Fuel Injection (MFI) system, the fuel filter and
shift lever to the P (Park) position (Continu- fuel lines should be serviced by a NISSAN
Make sure that the coolant level is between the MAX ously Variable Transmission model) or the
and MIN lines on the reservoir. shift lever to the N (Neutral) position (Manual
Transmission model).

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
LOCATIONS
dealer or qualified workshop because the fuel For an overview of the engine compartment, see
lines are under high pressure even when the “Engine compartment” in the “0. Illustrated table WARNING
engine is turned off. of contents” section. • Never remove the radiator or coolant reser-
voir cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns
• Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic
could be caused by high-pressure fluid es-
engine cooling fan. It may come on at any
time without warning, even if the ignition caping from the radiator. Wait until the engine
switch is in the OFF position and the engine is and radiator cool down.
not running. To avoid injury, always discon- • Engine coolant is poisonous and should be
nect the negative battery cable before work- stored carefully in marked containers out of
ing near the fan. the reach of children.
• Always wear eye protection whenever you • If the engine is stopped when the engine is
work on your vehicle. hot, the cooling fan may operate for approxi-
mately 3 minutes after the engine has stopped
• Never leave the engine or transmission re-
to cool the components in the engine com-
lated component harness connector discon-
nected while the ignition switch is in the ON partment. When the cooling fan is operating,
position. be sure that hands or other items do not get
caught in it (for MR16DDT engine).
NISSAN Blue Citizenship
The engine cooling system is filled at the factory
Avoid direct contact with used engine oil and with a high-quality, year-round, anti-freeze coolant
coolant. Improperly disposed engine oil, en- solution. The anti-freeze solution contains rust and
gine coolant, and/or other vehicle fluids can corrosion inhibitors, therefore additional cooling sys-
hurt the environment. Always conform to lo- tem additives are not necessary.
cal regulations for disposal of vehicle fluids.
CAUTION
This “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section
provides instructions regarding only those items • Never use any cooling system additives such
which are relatively easy for an owner to perform. as radiator sealer. Additives may clog the
cooling system and cause damage to the en-
You should be aware that incomplete or improper gine, transmission and/or cooling system.
servicing may result in operating difficulties or ex-
cessive emissions, and could affect your warranty • When adding or replacing coolant, be sure to
coverage. If in doubt about any servicing, have it use only Genuine NISSAN Engine Coolant or
done by a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop. equivalent in its quality with the proper mix-
ture ratio.

Use Genuine NISSAN Engine Coolant or equivalent
in its quality. Genuine NISSAN Engine Coolant is a WARNING
pre-mixed (mixture ratio 50%) type coolant. • To avoid being scalded, never change the
The use of other types of coolant solutions may coolant when the engine is hot.
damage the engine cooling system. • Never remove the radiator or coolant reser-
The radiator is equipped with a pressure cap. To voir cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns
prevent engine damage, use only a Genuine could be caused by high pressure fluid es-
NISSAN radiator cap or its equivalent when replace- caping from the radiator.
ment is required.
JVM0438XZ
• Avoid direct skin contact with used coolant. If
skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with
CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT MR16 and R9M engine
soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible.
LEVEL Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank when
the engine is cold. If the coolant level is below the • Keep coolant out of the reach of children and
pets.
MIN level j 2 , add coolant up to the MAX level j 1.
If the reservoir tank is empty, check the coolant level Engine coolant must be disposed of properly. Check
in the radiator when the engine is cold. If there is your local regulations.
insufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiator
with coolant up to the filler opening and also add it
to the reservoir tank up to the MAX level j 1.
If the cooling system frequently requires coolant,
have it checked by a NISSAN dealer or qualified
JVM0379XZ workshop.
QR25 and MR20 engine
CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT
Contact a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop if
replacement is required.
Major engine cooling system repair should be per-
formed by a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
The service procedures can be found in the appro-
priate NISSAN Service Manual.
Improper servicing can result in reduced heater per-
formance and engine overheating.

ENGINE OIL
CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL 9. Recheck the oil level with the dipstick.
It is normal to add some oil between oil main-
tenance intervals or during the running-in pe-
riod, depending on the severity of operating
conditions.
CAUTION
The oil level should be checked regularly. Oper-
ating your vehicle with an insufficient amount of
JVM0435XZ
oil can damage the engine, and such damage is
R9M engine not covered by the warranty.
JVM0423XZ
QR25 and MR20 engine 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the CHANGING ENGINE OIL AND OIL
parking brake. FILTER
2. Start the engine and warm it up until the engine
temperature reaches the normal operating tem- WARNING
perature (approximately 5 minutes). • Used oil must be disposed of properly. Never
3. Stop the engine. pour or dump oil into the ground, canals, riv-
ers, etc. It should be disposed of at proper
4. Wait at least 10 minutes for the engine oil to waste facilities. NISSAN recommends having
drain back to the oil pan. your oil changed by a NISSAN dealer or quali-
5. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. fied workshop.
MR16 engine
SDI1993Z
6. Reinsert the dipstick all the way. • Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine
oil may be hot.
7. Remove the dipstick and check the oil level. It
should be within the range j
C. • Prolonged and repeated contact with used
engine oil may cause skin cancer.
A , remove the oil filler
8. If the oil level is below j
cap and pour the recommended oil into the open- • Avoid direct skin contact with used oil. If con-
ing. Do not overfill jB. tacted, wash thoroughly with soap or hand
cleaner and plenty of water as soon as pos-
When filling the engine oil, do not remove the sible.
dipstick.
• Store used engine oil in marked containers
out of the reach of children.

Vehicle set-up Engine oil and filter
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the QR25DE, MR20DD and MR16DDT engines:
parking brake.
2. Start the engine and warm it up until the engine
temperature reaches the normal operating tem-
perature (approximately 5 minutes).
3. Stop the engine.
4. Wait at least 10 minutes for the engine oil to
drain back to the oil pan.
5. Raise and support the vehicle using a suitable
floor jack and safety jack stands.
• Place the safety jack stands under the vehicle
jack-up points.
• A suitable adapter should be attached to the
jack stand saddle.
6. Remove the plastic engine undercover (where
fitted).
• Remove the plastic clips from the undercover.
JVM0399X
QR25DE engine
JVM0372X
QR25DE engine

JVM0421XZ SDI2651Z
MR20DD engine MR16DDT engine
1 Oil filler cap

j
2 Oil drain plug
j
3 Oil filter
j
1. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug.
2. Remove the drain plug with a wrench.
3. Remove the oil filler cap and completely drain the
oil.
JVM0597XZ If the oil filter is to be changed, remove and re-
MR16DDT engine place it at this time.
JVM0414X
MR20DD engine CAUTION
Waste oil must be disposed of properly. Check
your local regulations.
4. Remove the plastic cover over the oil filter loca-
tion by removing the small plastic clips as illus-
trated. (For QR25DE engine)
5. Loosen the oil filter with an oil filter wrench.
6. Remove the oil filter by turning it by hand.

7. Wipe the engine oil filter mounting surface with a 16. Check the engine oil level according to the
clean cloth. proper procedure. (See “Checking engine oil
level” earlier in this section.)
Be sure to remove any old gasket remaining on
the mounting surface. R9M engine:
8. Apply new engine oil to the gasket of the new oil
filter.
9. Screw in the oil filter until a slight resistance is
felt and then tighten an additional 2/3 of a turn to
secure the filter. SDI2149Z
Oil filter tightening torque:
15 to 20 N·m
(1.5 to 2.0 kg-m, 11 to 15 ft-lb) 1 Oil filter element
2 O-ring
10. Clean and reinstall the drain plug and new
washer. Securely tighten the drain plug with a 3 Oil filter cover
wrench. Do not use excessive force.
1. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug.
Drain plug tightening torque:
29 to 39 N·m 2. Remove the drain plug with a wrench.
(3.0 to 4.0 kg-m, 22 to 29 ft-lb) 3. Remove the oil filler cap and completely drain the
11. Refill the recommended engine oil and quantity. oil.
(See “Recommended Fluids/lubricants and If the oil filter is to be changed, remove and re-
capacities” in the “9. Technical information” place it at this time.
section.)
CAUTION
When filling the engine oil, do not remove
the dipstick. Waste oil must be disposed of properly. Check
your local regulations.
12. Securely install the oil filler cap. JVM0436X
4. Loosen the oil filter cover with a wrench.
13. Start the engine.
1 Oil filler cap
j 5. Remove the engine oil filter cover then the oil fil-
14. Check the drain plug for any sign of leakage. ter element.
2 Oil drain plug
j
15. Dispose of the used oil in the proper manner. 6. Remove the rubber O-ring from the filter cover.
Check your local regulations. 3 Oil filter
j

DRIVE BELT
7. Wipe the entire oil filter cover with a clean cloth. 17. Check the engine oil level according to the
proper procedure. (See “Checking engine oil
Be sure to remove any old O-ring remaining on
level” earlier in this section.)
the mounting surface.
8. Apply new engine oil to the O-ring. After operation
Install the new O-ring on the new oil filter ele- 1. Lower the vehicle carefully to the ground.
ment. 2. Dispose of waste oil and filter properly.
9. Insert the oil filter element into the engine oil filter PROTECT ENVIRONMENT
cover.
NISSAN Blue Citizenship JVM0398XZ
10. Screw in the oil filter cover until a slight resis- QR25DE engine
tance is felt, and then tighten the filter com- It is illegal to pollute drains, watercourses and soil.
pletely. Use authorised waste collection facilities, including
Oil filter cover tightening torque: civil amenity sites and garages providing facilities 1. Crankshaft pulley
25 N·m for disposal of used oil and used oil filters. If in
2. Drive belt auto-tensioner
(2.6 kg-m, 18 ft-lb) doubt, contact your local authority for advice on dis-
posal. 3. Water pump
11. Clean and reinstall the drain plug and new
The regulations concerning the pollution of the 4. Alternator
washer. Securely tighten the drain plug with a
environment will vary from country to country.
wrench. Do not use excessive force. 5. Air conditioner compressor
Drain plug tightening torque:
50 N·m
(5.1 kg-m, 36.9 ft-lb)
12. Refill the recommended engine oil and quantity.
(See “Recommended Fluids/lubricants and
capacities” in the “9. Technical information”
section.)
13. Securely install the oil filler cap.
14. Start the engine. SDI1881Z
MR20DD and MR16DDT engines
15. Check the drain plug for any sign of leakage.
16. Dispose of the used oil in the proper manner. 1. Alternator
Check your local regulations. 2. Drive belt auto-tensioner

SPARK PLUGS (petrol engine
models)
3. Crankshaft pulley
WARNING
• Always replace with the recommended iri-
dium-tipped spark plugs.
4. Air conditioner compressor
Be sure the engine and ignition switch are off
5. Water pump PLATINUM TIPPED SPARK PLUGS
and that the parking brake is applied.
(where fitted)
Replace the spark plugs according to the mainte-
nance log shown in a separate maintenance book- It is not necessary to replace the platinum-tipped
let. spark plugs as frequently as the conventional type
of spark plugs. These spark plugs are designed to
If replacement is required, contact a NISSAN dealer last much longer than the conventional type of spark
or qualified workshop. plugs.
IRIDIUM-TIPPED SPARK PLUGS CAUTION
(where fitted) • Do not reuse the platinum-tipped spark plugs
by cleaning or re-gapping.
JVM0439XZ
R9M engine • Always replace with the recommended plati-
num- tipped spark plugs.
1. Water pump
2. Idler pulley
3. Alternator
4. Crankshaft pulley
5. Drive belt auto-tensioner
SDI2020Z
6. Air conditioner compressor
Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF position. It is not necessary to replace the iridium-tipped spark
plugs as frequently as the conventional type of spark
Visually inspect the belt for signs of unusual wear,
plugs. These spark plugs are designed to last much
cuts, fraying or looseness. Check regularly for con-
longer than the conventional type of spark plug.
dition. If the belt is in poor condition or loose, have
it replaced or adjusted by a NISSAN dealer or quali- CAUTION
fied workshop.
• Do not reuse the iridium-tipped spark plugs
by cleaning or re-gapping.

BRAKES
CHECKING PARKING BRAKE LHD model RHD model BRAKE BOOSTER

Periodically check the holding ability of the parking A : 75 mm (3.0 in) or
j A : 85 mm (3.3 in) or
j Check the brake booster function as follows:
brake by parking on a steep hill and restraining the more more
1. With the engine off, depress and release the
vehicle by using only the parking brake. If it does not
hold satisfactorily, see a NISSAN dealer or qualified
Self-adjusting brakes footbrake pedal several times. When the brake
pedal movement (distance of travel) remains the
workshop. Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting brakes.
same from one pedal application to the next, con-
The disc-type brakes self-adjust every time the foot-
CHECKING FOOTBRAKE PEDAL brake pedal is applied.
tinue on to the next step.
2. While depressing the footbrake pedal, start the
Brake pad wear warning engine. The pedal height should drop a little.
The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings. 3. With the footbrake pedal depressed, stop the
When a brake pad requires replacement, it will make engine. Keep the pedal depressed for about 30
a high pitched scraping sound when the vehicle is in seconds. The pedal height should not change.
motion. This scraping sound will first occur only
when the brake pedal is depressed. After more wear 4. Run the engine for 1 minute without depressing
of the brake pad, the sound will always be heard the foot brake pedal, then turn it off. Depress the
even if the brake pedal is not depressed. Have the footbrake pedal several times. The pedal travel
DI1020MRZ
brakes checked as soon as possible if the wear distance will decrease gradually with each de-
warning sound is heard. pression as the vacuum is released from the
booster.
Under some driving or climate conditions, occa-
WARNING If the brakes do not operate properly, have the
sional brake squeaks, squeals or other noises may
See a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop for a be heard. Occasional brake noise during light to brakes checked by a NISSAN dealer or qualified
brake system check if the foot brake pedal height moderate stops is normal and does not affect the workshop.
does not return to normal. function or performance of the brake system.
With the engine running, check the distance be- Proper brake inspection intervals should be
tween the upper surface of the pedal and the metal followed. For additional information, see a separate
floor. If it is out the range listed, see a NISSAN maintenance booklet.
dealer or qualified workshop.
Depressing force
490 N (50 kg, 110 lb)

BRAKE FLUID CLUTCH FLUID (where fitted)
WARNING WARNING
• Use only new fluid from a sealed container. • Use only new fluid from a sealed container.
Old, inferior, or contaminated fluid may dam- Old, inferior, or contaminated fluid may dam-
age the brake system. The use of improper age the clutch system.
fluids can damage the brake system and af-
fect the vehicle’s stopping ability. • Clean the filler cap before removing.
• Clean the filler cap before removing. • Clutch fluid is poisonous and should be stored
carefully in marked containers out of the reach
• Brake fluid is poisonous and should be stored
JVM0593XZ
of children.
carefully in marked containers out of the reach
Type B CAUTION
of children.
A LHD models
j Do not spill the clutch fluid on painted surfaces.
CAUTION
This will damage the paint. If clutch fluid is spilled,
B RHD models (Type A)
j
Do not spill the fluid on painted surfaces. This wash it off with plenty of water immediately.
will damage the paint. If fluid is spilled, wash it C RHD models (Type B)
j
off with plenty of water immediately.
Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the fluid is
below the MIN line j 2 , the brake warning light will
illuminate. Add fluid up to the MAX line j 1 . (See
“Recommended Fluids/lubricants and capacities” in
the “9. Technical information” section for recom-
mended types of fluid.)
If the fluid must be added frequently, the system
should be thoroughly checked by a NISSAN dealer
or qualified workshop. JVM0422XZ
Type A
JVM0422XZ
Type A

XTRONIC CONTINUOUSLY
VARIABLE TRANSMISSION (CVT)
FLUID (where fitted)
Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the fluid is Contact a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop if
below the MIN line j 2 , add fluid up to the MAX line checking or replacement is required.
j1 . (See “Recommended Fluids/lubricants and
CAUTION
capacities” in the “9. Technical information” section
for the recommended types of fluid.) • Use only Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3. Do
not mix with other fluids.
If the fluid must be added frequently, the clutch sys-
tem should be thoroughly checked by a NISSAN • Using transmission fluid other than Genuine
dealer or qualified workshop. NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 will damage the
Xtronic CVT, which is not covered by the war-
JVM0594XZ
ranty.
Type B
JVM0595XZ
Type C
A LHD models
j
B RHD models (Type A)
j
C RHD models (Type B)
j
D RHD models (Type C)
j

AIR CLEANER FILTER WIPER BLADES
WINDSCREEN WIPER BLADES

Cleaning
If the windscreen does not become clear after using
the windscreen washer or if the wiper blades chat-
ter when operating the windscreen wipers, wax or
other materials may be on the windscreen and/or
wiper blades.
Clean the outside of the windscreen surface with a
JVM0378XZ washer solution or mild detergent. Your windscreen
is clean if beads do not form when rinsing with wa-
ter.
WARNING Clean the blade by wiping it with a cloth soaked in a
Operating the engine with the air cleaner filter off washer solution or a mild detergent. Rinse the blade
can cause you or others to be burned. The air with water. If your windscreen is still not clear after
cleaner filter not only cleans the intake air, it also cleaning the blades and using the wipers, replace
stops flame if the engine backfires. If the air the blades.
cleaner filter is not installed and the engine back-
fires, you could be burned. Never drive with the
air cleaner filter off. Be cautious working on the
engine when the air cleaner filter is off.
To remove the filter, unlatch the retaining clips j
1, JVM0389X
and pull the cover j2 upward.
The viscous paper type filter element should not be Be careful not to clog the washer nozzle j A . This
cleaned and reused. The dry paper type filter ele- may cause improper windscreen washer operation.
ment may be cleaned and reused. Replace the air If the nozzle is clogged, remove any objects with a
filter according to the maintenance log shown in a needle or small pin j B . Be careful not to damage
separate maintenance booklet. the nozzle.
When replacing the air filter, wipe the inside of the
air cleaner housing and the cover with a damp cloth.

WINDOW WASHER FLUID
SDI2359Z JVM0380XZ
Replacing CAUTION WARNING

Replace the wiper blades if they are worn. • After wiper blade replacement, return the Anti-freeze is poisonous and should be stored
wiper arm to its original position. Otherwise carefully in marked containers out of the reach of
Before replacing the wiper blades, the wiper should the wiper arm or the engine bonnet may be
be in the fully up position to avoid scratching the children.
scratched and may cause damage when the
engine bonnet or damaging the wiper arm. To pull engine bonnet is opened. To check the fluid level, use your finger to plug the
up the wiper arm, see “Wiper and washer switch” in centre hole j1 of the cap/tube assembly, then re-
the “2. Instruments and controls” section. • Worn wiper blades can damage the wind- move it from the reservoir.
screen and impair driver vision.
1. Lift the wiper arm away from the windscreen. If there is no fluid in the tube, add fluid.
2. Push and hold the release tab j
A , and then move
REAR WINDOW WIPER BLADE
Add a washer solvent to the water for better clean-
the wiper blade down the wiper arm to remove Contact a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop if ing. In the winter season, add a windscreen washer
j1. checking or replacement is required. anti-freeze. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions
3. Remove the wiper blade. for the mixture ratio.
4. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper arm CAUTION
until it clicks into place. • Do not substitute anti-freeze engine coolant
for window washer solution. This may result
in damage to the paint.
• Always use window washer fluid recom-
mended by NISSAN.

BATTERY
VEHICLE BATTERY
Caution symbols for battery
m WARNING WARNING
No smoking Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid in the bat-
Never smoke around the battery. Never expose the battery to open flames or
1 No exposed flames tery is low. Low battery fluid can cause a higher
m
j electrical sparks.
No sparks load on the battery which can generate heat, re-
duce battery life, and in some cases lead to an
Handle the battery cautiously. Always wear eye protection glasses to protect explosion.
m
2
j Shield eyes
against explosion or battery acid.
Keep away from Never allow children to handle the battery. Keep the battery out of reach of
m
3
j children children.
Do not allow battery fluid to contact your skin, eyes, fabrics, or painted surfaces.
After handling the battery or battery cap, immediately wash your hands
thoroughly. If the battery fluid gets into your eyes, or onto your skin or clothing,
4 Battery acid
m
j flush with water immediately for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention.
Battery fluid is acid. If the battery fluid gets into your eyes or onto your skin, it
could cause loss of your eyesight or burns.
Note operating Before handling the battery, read this instruction carefully to ensure correct and
m
5
j instructions safe handling.
6 Explosive gas Hydrogen gas, generated by battery fluid, is explosive.

m
j

Checking battery fluid level 2. Add demineralised/distilled water up to the UP- INTEGRATED KEYFOB BATTERY
PER LEVEL j1 line.
Battery replacement
If the side of the battery is not clear, check the
distilled water level by looking directly above the CAUTION
cell; the condition j
dition j
A indicates OK and the con-
B needs more to be added.
• Be careful not to allow children to swallow the
battery and removed parts.
3. Replace and tighten the cell plugs. • An improperly disposed battery can harm the
• Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under environment. Always confirm local regulations
severe conditions require frequent checks of the for battery disposal.
DI0137MDZ
battery fluid level. • When changing batteries, do not let dust or oil
• Keep the battery surface clean and dry. Clean get on the components.
the battery with a solution of baking soda and
water.
• There is danger of explosion if the lithium bat-
tery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with
• Make certain the terminal connections are clean the same or equivalent type.
and securely tightened.
• If the vehicle is not to be used for more than 30
days, disconnect the negative (−) battery termi-
nal cable to prevent battery discharge.
Jump starting
SDI1480DZ If jump starting is necessary, see “Jump starting” in
the “6. In case of emergency” section. If the engine
does not start by jump starting or the battery does
Check the fluid level in each cell. The battery fluid
not charge, the battery may have to be replaced.
level should be between the UPPER LEVEL j 1 and
Contact a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop for
LOWER LEVEL j 2 lines.
replacing the battery.
If it is necessary to add fluid, add only demineralised/
distilled water to bring the level to the indicator in
each filler opening. Do not overfill.
1. Remove the cell plugs j
3 (where fitted) using a
suitable tool.

• Do not touch the internal circuit and electric
terminals as doing so could cause a malfunc-
tion.
• Make sure that the % side faces the bottom
of the case j
B.
3. Close the lid securely.
4. Operate the buttons to check its operation.
See a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop if you
need assistance for replacement.
INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY
Battery replacement
CAUTION
• Be careful not to allow children to swallow the
battery and removed parts.
• An improperly disposed battery can harm the
environment. Always confirm local regulations
for battery disposal.
• When changing batteries, do not let dust or oil
JVM0381X get on the components. JVM0317X
• There is danger of explosion if the lithium bat-

To replace the battery: tery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with To replace the battery:
the same or equivalent type.
A to open
1. Insert a small screwdriver into the slit j 1. Release the lock knob at the back of the key and
the lid. Use a cloth to protect the casing. remove the mechanical key. (See “Mechanical
key” in the “3. Pre-driving checks and
2. Replace the battery with a new one.
adjustments” section.)
Recommended battery: CR2032 or equivalent
2. Insert a flat-blade screwdriver wrapped with a
cloth into the slit of the corner and twist it to
separate the upper part from the lower part.

VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROL FUSES
3. Replace the battery with a new one. The variable voltage control system measures the ENGINE COMPARTMENT
amount of electrical discharge from the battery and
• Recommended battery: CR2032 or equiva-
controls voltage generated by the alternator.
lent
CAUTION
• Do not touch the internal circuit and electric
terminals as doing so could cause a malfunc- • Do not ground accessories directly to the bat-
tion. tery terminal. Doing so will bypass the vari-
able voltage control system and the vehicle
• Make sure that the % side faces the bottom
battery may not charge completely.
of the case.
• Use electrical accessories with the engine
running to avoid discharging the vehicle bat-
JVM0386XZ
tery.
CAUTION
Never use a fuse of a higher or lower amperage
rating than that specified on the fuse box cover.
This could damage the electrical system or cause
a fire.
SDI2452Z If any electrical equipment does not operate, check
for an open fuse.
4. Align the tips of the upper and lower parts j1, 1. Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF position.
and then push them together until it is securely
closed j2. 2. Be sure the headlight switch is in the OFF posi-
tion.
5. Operate the buttons to check its operation.
3. Open the engine bonnet.
See a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop if you
need assistance for replacement. 4. Remove the air cleaner duct. (See “Engine com-
partment check locations” in the “8. Maintenance
and do-it-yourself” section.)
5. Remove the fuse/fusible link box cover by using
a suitable tool and pushing the tab.
6. Locate the fuse that needs to be replaced.

The holder j1 also contains the fuses. For checking
and/or replacing, see a NISSAN dealer or qualified
workshop.
Fusible links
If any electrical equipment does not operate and the
fuses are in good condition, check the fusible links.
If any of these fusible links are melted, replace only
with genuine NISSAN parts.
SDI1754Z PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
CAUTION
7. Remove the fuse using the fuse puller located in
Never use a fuse of a higher or lower amperage
the passenger compartment.
rating than that specified on the fuse box cover.
8. If the fuse is open j
A , replace it with a new fuse This could damage the electrical system or cause
jB. a fire.
If the new fuse also opens, after installing, have the If any electrical equipment does not operate, check
electrical system checked, and if necessary for an open fuse.
repaired, by a NISSAN dealer or qualified work-
shop.
JVM0444XZ

Outer side of the instrument panel
SDI1754Z
JVM0387XZ
For all LHD models A , replace it with a new fuse
jB.
If the new fuse also opens, after installing, have the
electrical system checked, and if necessary
shop.
JVM0445XZ
For Stop/Start System (where fitted)
1. Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF position.

2. Be sure the headlight switch is in the OFF posi-
tion.
3. Remove the fuse box cover.
4. Locate the fuse that needs to be replaced.
5. Remove the fuse using the fuse puller j
A.

Extended storage fuse switch
JVM0388XZ
RHD model JVM0415XZ
Example
Glove box
To reduce battery drain, the extended storage fuse
1. Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF position.
switch comes from the factory switched off. Prior to
2. Be sure the headlight switch is in the OFF posi- delivery of your vehicle, the switch is pushed in
tion. (switched on) and should always remain on.
3. Open the glove box and unlock the damper j
1. If the extended storage fuse switch is not pushed in
(switched on), the [Shipping Mode On Push Stor-
4. Hold the glove box lid so that the distance be-
age Fuse] warning may appear in the vehicle infor-
tween the upper end of the lid and the dash-
mation display. See “Vehicle information display
board is about 5 cm (2 in), and then pull off the
SDI1754Z warnings and indicators” in the “2. Instruments and
hinges j2 located on the underside of the lid.
controls” section.
3 and remove
5. Unlock the left and right stoppers j
A , replace it with a new fuse If any electrical equipment does not operate, re-
the glove box lid.
jB. move the extended storage fuse switch and push it
6. Locate the fuse that needs to be replaced. in again.
If the new fuse also opens, after installing, have the
7. Remove the fuse using the fuse puller. electrical system checked, and if necessary NOTE
If the extended storage fuse switch malfunctions,
shop.
see a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.

LIGHTS
How to remove the extended storage fuse HEADLIGHTS Low-beam:

switch:
1. To remove the extended storage fuse switch, be
LED headlight bulb
sure the ignition switch is in the OFF or LOCK If replacement is required, contact a NISSAN dealer
position. or qualified workshop.
2. Be sure the headlight switch is in the OFF posi- Halogen headlight bulb
tion.
The halogen headlight is a semi-sealed beam type
3. Remove the fuse box cover. which uses replaceable headlight (halogen) bulbs.
4. Pinch the locking tabs j They can be replaced from inside the engine com-
1 found on each side of
partment without removing the headlight assembly.
the extended storage fuse switch.
CAUTION
5. Pull the extended storage fuse switch straight
out from the fuse box j
2. High-pressure halogen gas is sealed inside the
bulb. The bulb may break if the glass envelope is
scratched or the bulb is dropped.
JVM0395X
1. Disconnect the battery negative cable.

2. Disconnect the electrical connector j
1 from
the rear end of the bulb.
3. Remove the headlight bulb j2 by turning it
counter clockwise. Do not shake or rotate the
bulb when removing it.

4. Install the new bulb in the reverse order of 3. Disconnect the electrical connector j
2 from EXTERIOR LIGHTS
removal. the rear end of the bulb.
Item Wattage (W)
High-beam: 4. Remove the headlight bulb j3 by turning it Front turn signal light 21
counter clockwise. Do not shake or rotate the Front clearance light/Daytime LED
bulb when removing it. running light*
5. Install the new bulb in the reverse order of Front fog light (where fitted) 55
removal. Side turn signal light* LED
Rear combination light
CAUTION
Turn signal 21
• When handling the bulb, do not touch the Stop 21
glass envelope. Tail light 5
Reverse light 16
• Use the same number and wattage as origi-
Rear fog light 21
nally installed:
Halogen headlight model High-mounted stop light* LED
High beam bulb: 65W (H9) Number plate light 5
Low beam bulb: 55W (H11)
*: See a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop for
• Do not leave the bulb out of the headlight replacement.
reflector for a long period of time as dust,
moisture and smoke may enter the headlight
body and affect the performance of the head-
light.
Aiming adjustment is not necessary if only the bulbs
are replaced. When aiming adjustment is neces-
sary, contact a NISSAN dealer or qualified work-
JVM0396X shop.
Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the exte-
1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. rior lights in the rain or in a car wash. A temperature
difference between the inside and the outside of the
2. Turn the cover j
1 counter clockwise and
remove the cover. lens causes the fog. This is not a malfunction. If
large drops of water collect inside the lens, contact
a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.

INTERIOR LIGHTS
Item Wattage (W)
Map lights LED
Vanity mirror light 1.8
Console light LED
Room light (where fitted) 8
Rear personal light (where
8
fitted)
Luggage room light 5

LIGHT LOCATIONS
1. Front turn signal light
2. Headlight (high-beam)
3. Headlight (low-beam)
4. Front map light
5. Room light (where fitted)
6. Side turn signal light
7. Clearance light/Daytime running light
8. Front fog light (where fitted)
9. High-mounted stop light
10. Rear combination light (tail light, stop light,
rear turn signal light)
11. Rear personal light (where fitted)
12. Rear fog light
13. Number plate light
14. Reverse light/Tail light
15. Luggage room light
JVM0383X

Replacement procedures
m: REMOVE
m: INSTALL
All other lights are either type A, B, C, D, E or F.

When replacing a bulb, first remove the lens and/or
cover.
JVM0397XZ
Front turn signal light
JVM0417X
SDI1679 Front fog light (where fitted)

JVM0418X JVM0424X JVM0419X
Rear combination light Reverse light/Tail light Number plate light

SDI1839Z SDI2031Z
Vanity mirror light Rear personal light (where fitted)
SDI1499AZ
Room light (where fitted)
JVM0420X
Rear fog light

JVM0426X JVM0393XZ
Luggage room light Units: mm (inch) – Left-Hand Drive (LHD) model
LEGAL REQUIREMENT TO ADJUST

HEADLIGHT BEAM
When the vehicle is driven in a country where the
driving lane is different to your home country, affix
an opaque sticker on the headlight.

3. Affix the sticker by aligning the corner j
B of the
sticker with the position of the mark j C that is
located on the surface of the headlight seen from
front.
Affix the sticker as illustrated by aligning the mark
C with dividing lines j
j D and j
E.
NOTE
C with the centre mark
Align the mark j of
the headlight bulb.
JVM0394XZ
Units: mm (inch) – Right-Hand Drive (RHD) model
1. Place the ignition switch in the OFF position and NOTE

wait until the headlights cool down.
• Use an opaque material that prevents the
2. Prepare the stickers referring to the figure. Make light from passing through it.
the stickers j A that will be affixed to the surface
of the right side headlight and the left side head- • Note that other transparent materials do
not work effectively.
light.

TYRES AND WHEELS
If you have a flat tyre, see “Flat tyre” in the “6. In Insufficient pressure can lead to an overheating of If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icy
case of emergency” section. the tyre and subsequent internal damage. At high conditions, NISSAN recommends the use of snow
speeds, this could result in tread separation and or all season tyres on all four wheels.
TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING even bursting of the tyre.
SYSTEM (TPMS) (where fitted) Snow tyres
TYPES OF TYRES If snow tyres are needed, it is necessary to select
tors tyre pressure of all tyres except the spare. When CAUTION tyres equivalent in size and load rating to the original
the low tyre pressure warning light is lit, one or more equipment tyres. If you do not, it can adversely af-
When changing or replacing tyres, be sure all
of your tyres is significantly under-inflated. fect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
four tyres are of the same type (that is, summer,
The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle is all season or snow) and construction. A NISSAN Generally, snow tyres have lower speed ratings than
driven at speeds above 25 km/h (16 MPH). Also, dealer or qualified workshop may be able to help factory equipped tyres and may not match the po-
this system may not detect a sudden drop in tyre you with information about tyre type, size, speed tential maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed the
pressure (for example a flat tyre while driving). rating and availability. maximum speed rating of the tyre. If you install snow
tyres, they must be the same size, brand, construc-
For more details about the TPMS, see “Tyre Pres- Replacement tyres may have a lower speed rating
tion and tread pattern on all four wheels.
sure Monitoring System (TPMS) (where fitted)” in than the factory equipped tyres, and they may not
the “5. Starting and driving” section and “Tyre Pres- match the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never For additional traction on icy roads, studded tyres
sure Monitoring System (TPMS) (where fitted)” in exceed the maximum speed rating of the tyre. may be used. However, some states and provinces
the “6. In case of emergency” section. prohibit their use. Check local, state and provincial
All season tyres laws before installing studded tyres. Skid and trac-
For additional information, see “Low tyre pressure tion capabilities of studded snow tyres on wet or dry
NISSAN specifies all season tyres on some models
warning light (where fitted)” in the “2. Instruments surfaces may be poorer than that of non-studded
to provide good performance all year, including
and controls” section. snow tyres.
snowy and icy road conditions. All season tyres are
TYRE INFLATION PRESSURE identified by ALL SEASON and/or M&S on the tyre
sidewall. Snow tyres have better snow traction than
TYRE CHAINS
Periodically check the pressure of the tyres, includ- all season tyres and may be more appropriate in CAUTION
ing the spare. An incorrect tyre pressure may ad- some areas.
versely affect tyre life and vehicle handling. The tyre • Tyre chains/cables should not be installed on
pressure should be checked when tyres are COLD. Summer tyres 19-inch size tyres. Doing so will cause dam-
Tyres are considered COLD after the vehicle has age to the vehicle.
NISSAN specifies summer tyres on some models to
been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven less than
1.6 km (1 mile). COLD tyre pressures are shown on
provide superior performance on dry roads. Sum- • If you plan to use tyre chains/cables, you
mer tyre performance is substantially reduced in should install 17-inch or 18-inch size tyres on
the tyre placard. your vehicle.
snow and ice. Summer tyres do not have the tyre
traction rating M&S on the tyre sidewall.

Use of tyre chains may be prohibited according to TYRE ROTATION accident and injury. If in doubt, consult a
location. Check the local laws before installing tyre NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop or the
chains. When installing tyre chains, make sure that tyre manufacturer.
they are of proper size for the tyres on your vehicle
and are installed according to the chain manufactur- For models equipped with Tyre Pressure
er’s instructions. Monitoring System (TPMS)
Use chain tensioners when recommended by the After the tyres are rotated, the TPMS must be reset.
tyre chain manufacturer to ensure a tight fit. Loose See “Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
end links of the tyre chains must be secured or (where fitted)” in the “5. Starting and driving” sec-
removed to prevent the possibility of whipping action for details about the resetting procedure.
tion damage to the fenders or underbody. If pos- SDI1662Z TYRE WEAR AND DAMAGE
sible, avoid fully loading your vehicle when using
tyre chains. In addition, drive at a reduced speed.
Otherwise, your vehicle may be damaged and/or NISSAN recommends that tyres be rotated every
vehicle handling and performance may be adversely 5,000 km (3,000 miles) for Four-Wheel Drive (4WD)
affected. or every 10,000 km (6,000 miles) for Two-Wheel
Drive (2WD) model. However, the timing for tyre
Tyre chains must be installed only on the front rotation may vary according to your driving habits
wheels and not on the rear wheels. Do not use and the road surface conditions. (See “Flat tyre” in
the chains on dry roads. the “6. In case of emergency” section for the tyre
Never install tyre chains on a Temporary-use spare replacement.)
tyre (TEMPORARY USE ONLY) (where fitted). SDI1663Z
WARNING
Do not drive with tyre chains on paved roads which
are clear of snow. Driving with chains in such condi- • After rotating the tyres, adjust the tyre pres- 1 Wear indicator
j
tions can cause damage to the various mechanisms sure.
2 Wear indicator location mark
j
of the vehicle due to some overstress.
• Retighten the wheel nuts when the vehicle
Tyres should be periodically inspected for wear,
has been driven for 1,000 km (600 miles) (also
cracking, bulging or objects caught in the tread. If
in cases of a flat tyre, etc.).
excessive wear, cracks, bulging or deep cuts are
• Do not include the spare tyre in tyre rotation. found, the tyre should be replaced immediately.
• Incorrect tyre selection, fitting, care, or main- The original tyres have a built-in tread wear indica-
tenance can affect vehicle safety with risk of tor. When the wear indicator is visible, the tyre
should be replaced.

Improper service of a spare tyre may result in seri- calibration, headlight aim and bumper height. Some • Replacing tyres with those not originally speci-
ous personal injury. If it is necessary to repair the of these effects may lead to accidents and could fied by NISSAN could affect the proper opera-
spare tyre, contact a NISSAN dealer or qualified result in serious personal injury. tion of the TPMS.
workshop.
If the wheels are changed for any reason, always Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) model
TYRE AGE replace with wheels which have the same offset
CAUTION
dimension. Wheels of a different offset could cause
Never use a tyre over six years old, regardless of early tyre wear, possibly degraded vehicle handling Always use tyres of the same size, brand, con-
whether it has been used or not. characteristics and/or interference with the brake struction (bias, bias-belted or radial), and tread
Tyres degrade with age as well as with the vehicle discs/drums. Such interference can lead to pattern on all four wheels. Failure to do so may
usage. Have your tyres checked and balanced often decreased braking efficiency and/or early brake result in a circumference difference between ty-
by a repair shop or, if you prefer, a NISSAN dealer pad/shoe wear. res on the front and rear axles which will cause
or qualified workshop. Confirm the following for the TPMS (where fitted). excessive tyre wear and may damage the trans-
mission, transfer case and differential gears.
CHANGING TYRES AND WHEELS
WARNING Only use spare tyres specified for each 4WD model.
WARNING
• After a tyre or a wheel is replaced, the TPMS WHEEL BALANCE
Do not install a deformed wheel or tyre even if it must be reset. (See “For models equipped
Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling and
has been repaired. Such wheels or tyres could with Tyre Pressure Monitoring System
tyre life. Even with regular use, wheels can get out
have structural damage and could fail without (TPMS)” earlier in this section, “Tyre Pressure
of balance. Therefore, they should be balanced as
warning. Monitoring System (TPMS) (where fitted)” in
required.
the “5. Starting and driving” section and “Tyre
When replacing a tyre, use the same size, speed Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (where SPARE TYRE
rating and load carrying capacity as originally fitted)” in the “6. In case of emergency” sec-
equipped. (See “Tyres and wheels” in the “8. Tech- tion for details about the resetting procedure.) Temporary-use spare tyre (where fitted)
nical information” section for recommended types
The spare tyre supplied with your vehicle varies de-
and sizes of tyres and wheels.) The use of tyres • When a spare tyre is mounted or a wheel is
pending on the model. See “Flat tyre” in the “6. In
other than those recommended or the mixed use of replaced, the TPMS will not function and the
low tyre pressure warning light will flash for case of emergency” section for applicable spare
tyres of different brands, construction (bias, bias-
approximately 1 minute. The light will remain tyre.
belted, or radial), or tread patterns can adversely
affect the ride, braking, handling, ground clearance, on after 1 minute. Contact a NISSAN dealer or
body-to-tyre clearance, snow chain clearance, Tyre qualified workshop as soon as possible for
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS), speedometer tyre replacement and/or system resetting.

• Periodically check the spare tyre inflation
pressure, and always keep it at 300 kPa (3.0
kgf/cm2, 44psi). (225/65 R17 tyre)
• Do not drive your vehicle at speeds faster than
80 km/h (50 MPH).
• Do not use tyre chains on a spare tyre. Tyre
chains will not fit properly on the spare tyre
and may cause damage to the vehicle.
SDI1912Z • Because the spare tyre is smaller than the

Spare tyre label (where fitted) original tyre, ground clearance is reduced. To
avoid damage to the vehicle do not drive over
A temporary-use spare tyre (different size from the obstacles. Also do not drive the vehicle
original tyre) is supplied with your vehicle. through an automatic car wash since it may
Observe the following precautions if the spare tyre get caught.
must be used, otherwise your vehicle could be dam-
aged or involved in an accident.
• Do not use the spare tyre on other vehicles.
When a spare tyre is mounted, the Tyre Pressure

• Do not use more than one spare tyre at the
same time.
Monitoring System (TPMS) (where fitted) will not
function. • Do not tow a trailer while the spare tyre is
installed.
CAUTION
Conventional spare tyre (where fitted)
• The spare tyre should be used only for emer-
gency. It should be replaced by the standard A standard tyre (the same size as the original tyre) is
tyre at the first opportunity. supplied with your vehicle.
• Drive carefully while the spare tyre is installed.

• Avoid sharp turns and abrupt braking while
driving.
• Periodically check the T-type spare tyre infla-
tion pressure, and always keep it at 420 kPa
(4.2 kgf/cm2, 60 psi). (T155/90 D17 tyre)

NOTE

9 Technical information
Recommended Fluids/lubricants and capacities ....... 9-2 Engine serial number .......................................... 9-9
Fuel information .................................................. 9-4 Tyre placard ....................................................... 9-9
Recommended SAE viscosity number................. 9-4 Air conditioner specification label ........................ 9-9
Air conditioner system refrigerant and lubricant ... 9-5 Radio approval number and information ................... 9-10
Engine ..................................................................... 9-6 Intelligent Key system ......................................... 9-10
Tyres and wheels..................................................... 9-7 For Israel ............................................................ 9-10
Dimensions.............................................................. 9-7 Remote keyless entry system .............................. 9-11
When travelling or registering in another country ...... 9-8 For Israel ............................................................ 9-11
Vehicle identification ................................................ 9-8 NISSAN Anti-Theft System (NATS)
Vehicle identification plate................................... 9-8 immobilizer ......................................................... 9-11
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) plate Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
(where fitted) ...................................................... 9-8 transmitter (where fitted) ..................................... 9-12
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) (chassis
number).............................................................. 9-9
RECOMMENDED FLUIDS/LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES
The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill quantities may be slightly different. When refilling, follow the procedures instructed in the “8. Maintenance
and do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.
Capacity (Approximate)
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Litre Imp measure
Fuel 60 13-1/4 gal See “Fuel information” later in this section.
The approximate capacities listed are for refilling during an engine oil
With oil filter change. For additional information, see “Engine oil” in the
4.6 4 qt
change “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.
QR25DE
Without oil filter Petrol engine:
4.3 3-3/4 qt
change • Genuine NISSAN engine oil
With oil filter • API grade: SL, SM or SN
4.3 3-3/4 qt
change • ILSAC grade: GF-3, GF-4 or GF-5
MR16DDT
Engine oil* Without oil filter • ACEA A1/B1, A3/B3, A3/B4, A5/B5, C2 or C3
4.1 3-5/8 qt
Drain and refill change • For SAE viscosity number, see “Recommended SAE viscosity
With oil filter number” later in this section.
3.8 3-3/8 qt
change Diesel engine:
MR20DD
Without oil filter With Diesel Particulate filter:
3.6 3-1/8 qt • Genuine NISSAN engine oil
change
With oil filter • ACEA C4 LOW SAPS, Viscosity SAE 5W-30
6.2 5-1/2 qt Without Diesel Particulate filter:
change
R9M • Genuine NISSAN engine oil
Without oil filter
5.8 5-1/8 qt • ACEA A3/B4, Viscosity SAE 5W-30
change
QR25DE 8.2 7-1/4 qt
MR16DDT 8.4 7-3/8 • Genuine NISSAN Engine Coolant (blue) or equivalent*
MT model 8.5 7-1/2 qt *Use Genuine NISSAN Engine Coolant, or equivalent in its quality,
Total MR20DD
Xtronic CVT model 8.7 7-5/8 qt in order to avoid possible aluminium corrosion within the engine
Cooling system (with MT model 7.9 7 qt cooling system caused by the use of non-genuine engine coolant.
R9M
reservoir) Xtronic CVT model 8.1 7-1/8 qt Note that any repairs for the incidents within the engine cool-
QR25DE and ing system while using non-genuine engine coolant may not
— 0.85 3/4 qt be covered by the warranty even if such incidents occurred
MR20DD
Reservoir during the warranty period.
MR16DDT and
— 0.57 1/2 qt
R9M
Differential gear oil — — • Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid Super GL-5 80W-90 or
Transfer oil — — API GL-5, Viscosity SAE 80W-90 or equivalent (mineral oil)
9-2 Technical information

Capacity (Approximate)
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Litre Imp measure
• Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3
• Use only Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3. Using transmission
Xtronic Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid — —
fluid other than Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 will damage
the Xtronic CVT, such damage is not covered by the warranty.
R9M engine:
• Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi
75W-85 or equivalent
• If Genuine NISSAN gear oil (Nissan MT-XZ Gear Oil TL/JR type)
is not available, API GL-4+, Viscosity SAE 75W-80 may be used
as a temporary replacement. However, use Genuine NISSAN gear
oil (Nissan MT-XZ Gear Oil TL/JR Type) as soon as it is available.
Manual Transmission (MT) gear oil — —
MR16DDT and MR20DD engine:
• Genuine NISSAN gear oil (Nissan MT-XZ Gear Oil TL/JR type)
75W-80, or equivalent
• If Genuine NISSAN gear oil (Nissan MT-XZ Gear Oil TL/JR type)
is not available, API GL-4+, Viscosity SAE 75W-80 may be used
as a temporary replacement. However, use Genuine NISSAN gear
oil (Nissan MT-XZ Gear Oil TL/JR Type) as soon as it is available.
Refill to the proper fluid level according to the
• Genuine NISSAN Brake Fluid, or equivalent DOT3 or DOT 4
Brake and clutch fluid instructions in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-
• Never mix different types of fluids (DOT3 or DOT4).
yourself” section.
Multi-purpose grease — — NLGI No. 2 (Lithium soap base)
For Europe:
• HFO-1234yf (R-1234yf)
Air conditioner system refrigerant — —
• HFC-134a (R-134a)
For Europe:
• ND-OIL12
Air conditioner system lubricants — —
• ND-OIL8
*For additional information, see “Changing engine oil and oil filter” later in this section.
Technical information 9-3

FUEL INFORMATION • Below −7°C (20°F) ... Winter type diesel fuel. Outside Temperature Range
Petrol engine (model with three-way CAUTION Anticipated Before Next Oil Change
PETROL ENGINE OIL (For MR16DDT engine
catalyst) • Do not use home heating oil, petrol or other
model)
alternate fuels in your diesel engine. The use
CAUTION
of those or adding those to diesel fuel can
Do not use leaded petrol. Using leaded petrol will cause engine damage.
damage the three-way catalyst.
• Do not use summer fuel at temperatures be-
QR25DE engine model: low −7°C (20°F). The cold temperatures will
Use UNLEADED REGULAR petrol with an octane cause wax to form in the fuel. As a result, it
may prevent the engine from running
m
rating of at least 91 (RON).
smoothly.
MR20DD engine model:
Use UNLEADED REGULAR petrol with an octane RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY
rating of at least 91 (RON). NUMBER
MR16DDT engine model: Petrol engine oil
Use UNLEADED PREMIUM petrol with an octane For MR16DDT engine model:
rating of at least 95 (RON). 0W-20 is preferable.
If unleaded premium petrol is not used, UNLEADED If 0W-20 is not available, select the viscosity, from
REGULAR petrol with an octane rating of at least 91 the chart below, that is suitable for the outside
(RON) may be used at slightly reduced temperature range.
performance. However, for maximum vehicle per-
formance and the best driveability, the use of un-
leaded premium petrol is recommended. NTI311
Diesel engine* Except for MR16DDT engine model:
Diesel fuel above 51 cetane and with less than 10 5W-30 is preferable.
ppm of sulphur (EN590) must be used.
If 5W-30 is not available, select the viscosity, from
* If two types of diesel fuel are available, use the chart below, that is suitable for the outside
summer or winter fuel properly according to temperature range.
the following temperature conditions.
• Above −7°C (20°F) ... Summer type diesel fuel.

Outside Temperature Range Without Diesel Particulate filter: The release of refrigerants into the atmosphere is
Anticipated Before Next Oil Change Genuine NISSAN engine oil. prohibited in many countries and regions. The re-
frigerant in your vehicle will not harm the Earth’s
PETROL ENGINE OIL (Except for MR16DDT
ACEA A3/B4, Viscosity SAE 5W-30. ozone layer. However, it may contribute in a small
engine model)
part to the global warming effect. NISSAN recom-
AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
mends that the refrigerant be appropriately recov-
REFRIGERANT AND LUBRICANT ered and recycled. Contact a NISSAN dealer when
The air conditioner system of your vehicle must be servicing the air conditioner system.
charged with the specified refrigerant and compres-
sor oil or equivalent.
• Refrigerant
m
– For Europe: HFO-1234yf (R-1234yf)
– For Ukraine and Kazakhstan: HFC-134a (R-
134a)
• Compressor Oil
– For Europe: Compressor Oil ND-OIL12
– For Ukraine and Kazakhstan: Compressor Oil
ND-OIL8
CAUTION
Use of any other refrigerants or lubricants will
cause severe damage, and you may need to re-
STI0589 place your vehicle’s entire air conditioner sys-
tem.
Diesel engine oil
With Diesel Particulate filter:
Genuine NISSAN engine oil.
ACEA C4 LOW SAPS, Viscosity SAE 5W-30.

ENGINE
Engine model QR25DE MR20DD MR16DDT R9M

Type Petrol, 4-cycle, DOHC Petrol, 4-cycle, DOHC Petrol, 4-cycle, DOHC Diesel, 4-cycle
Cylinder arrangement 4-cylinder, in-line 4-cylinder, in-line 4-cylinder, in-line 4-cylinder, in-line
89.0 × 100.0 (3.504 × 84.0 × 90.1 (3.307 × 79.7 × 81.1 (3.138 ×
Bore × Stroke mm (in) 80.0 × 79.5 (3.15 × 3.13)
3.937) 3.547) 3.193)
3
Displacement cm (cu in) 2,488 (151.82) 1,997 (121.86) 1,618 (98.78) 1,598 (97.51)
Xtronic CVT: 650±50
Idle speed rpm 650±50 600±50 850±50
MT: 700±50
Ignition timing
degree at idle 10° 0±2° 5±2° -
(B.T.D.C.)
Spark plugs
Type Standard FXE20HE-11C DILKAR7D11H DILKAR7E9HS -
Gap mm (in) 1.1 (0.043) 1.1 (0.043) 0.9 (0.035) -
Camshaft operation Timing chain Timing chain Timing chain Timing chain

TYRES AND WHEELS DIMENSIONS
Unit: mm (in)
Standard Spare Overall length 4,640 (182.7)

Tyre size 225/65 R17 Conventional Overall width 1,820 (71.7)
T155/90 D17*1 Overall height 1,710 (67.3)
1,715 (67.5)*1
225/60 R18 225/65 R17*1
Front tread 1,575 (62)
T155/90 D17*1
Rear tread 1,575 (62)
225/55 R19 T155/90 D17*1
Wheelbase 2,705 (106.5)
*1: Roof rail equipped model
Size Offset mm (in)
Road wheel Standard Steel 17 × 7J 45 (1.77)
Aluminium 17 × 7J 45 (1.77)
18 × 7J 45 (1.77)
19 × 7J 40 (1.57)
Spare Steel 17 × 4T 30 (1.18)
17× 7J 45 (1.77)
*1: Temporary use only

WHEN TRAVELLING OR VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
REGISTERING IN ANOTHER
COUNTRY
When planning to travel in another country or re- It is prohibited to cover, paint, weld, cut, drill, alter VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
gion, find out whether the fuel required for your or remove Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). (VIN) PLATE (where fitted)
vehicle is available in that country or region. Using a
low octane rated fuel may cause engine damage. VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION PLATE
Therefore, be sure that the required fuel is available
wherever you go. For additional information regard-
ing recommended fuel, see earlier in this section.
When transferring the registration of your vehicle
to another country, state, province or district,
contact the appropriate authorities to find out that
the vehicle complies with the local legal require-
ments. In some cases, a vehicle cannot meet the
JVT0352XZ
legal requirements, and it may be necessary to
modify the vehicle to meet local laws and regula- JVT0285XZ
tions. In addition, there may be possibilities that a The vehicle identification number plate j 1 is at-
vehicle cannot be adapted in certain areas. The vehicle identification plate is affixed as shown. tached as shown. This number is the identification
for your vehicle and is used in the vehicle registra-
The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emission BUILT DATE (where fitted) tion.
control and safety standards vary according to the
country, state, province or district; therefore, the Built date is stamped on the vehicle identification
vehicle specification may differ. plate.
When any vehicles are to be taken into another The built date means the calendar month and the
country, state, province or district, its modifica- year in which the body shell and power train subas-
tion, transportation, registration, and any other semblies are conjoined and the vehicle is driven or
expenses which may result, are the responsibil- moved from the production line.
ity of the user. NISSAN is not responsible for any
inconveniences that may result.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER TYRE PLACARD
(VIN) (chassis number)
STI0785Z
MR engine STI0494Z
JVT0286XZ
The cold tyre pressures are shown on the tyre plac-

The vehicle identification number is located as ard affixed to the driver’s side centre pillar.
shown.
AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION
Remove the cover to access the number. LABEL
ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER
JVT0289XZ
R9M engine
The engine serial number is stamped on the engine

as shown.
JVT0274XZ
SDI2121Z
QR engine

RADIO APPROVAL NUMBER AND
INFORMATION
INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM FOR ISRAEL
NTI283
JVT0314X NTI284
JVT0313X

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM FOR ISRAEL NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM (NATS)
IMMOBILIZER
NTI282
JVT0315X
JVT0316X

TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM (TPMS) TRANSMITTER
(where fitted)
JVT0400X
Hereby, Continental Automotive GmbH, declares

JVT0309X that this S 180150006 is in compliance with the
essential requirements and other relevant provisions
of Directive 1999/5/EC.
Hereby, Continental Automotive GmbH, declares
that this S 180052048 is in compliance with the
essential requirements and other relevant provisions
of Directive 1999/5/EC.

10 Index
– Specification label ........................................................... 9-9

A
Air fresheners ........................................................................ 7-4
Antenna .............................................................................. 4-38
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
Anti-Lock Braking System (ABS) ......................................... 5-55
– Warning light ................................................................... 2-6
Armrests ............................................................................... 1-7
Active engine brake ............................................................. 5-29
Around View Monitor ............................................................. 4-6
Active ride control ............................................................... 5-30
– Camera aiding corner sensor function ........................... 4-11
Active trace control ............................................................. 5-29
– Guide lines - Differences ............................................... 4-10
Aids
– Moving object detection (MOD) ..................................... 4-12
– Around View Monitor ....................................................... 4-6 – Park Assist (PA) ............................................................ 4-14
– Blind Spot Warning (BSW) ........................................... 5-33 – Settings ......................................................................... 4-22
– Chassis control ............................................................. 5-29 Audio .................................................................................. 4-30
– Forward emergency braking system .............................. 5-42
– Anti-theft system ............................................................ 4-39
– Hill Start Assist system .................................................. 5-31
– AUX socket ................................................. 4-47, 4-53, 4-54
– Lane Departure Warning (LDW) .................................... 5-36
– Bluetooth® operation ........................................... 4-46, 4-52
– Parking sensors ............................................................. 5-49
– CD/DVD/USB Memory care and cleaning ..................... 4-55
Air bags
– FM-AM radio with CD player (Type A) ........................... 4-39
– Overview ......................................................................... 0-2 – FM-AM radio with CD player (Type B) ........................... 4-47
– Precautions ................................................................... 1-30 – iPod® player operation ......................................... 4-45, 4-51
– Repair and replacement ................................................. 1-39 – NissanConnect App smartphone integration .................. 4-53
– Status light .................................................................... 2-11 – Operation precautions ................................................... 4-30
– Supplemental Restraint System ..................................... 1-30 – Safety precautions ........................................................... 4-2
– Warning labels .............................................................. 1-34 – Settings ........................................................................... 4-5
– Warning light ........................................................ 1-34, 2-10 – Steering wheel switches ................................................ 4-54
– Warning light - Passenger ............................................. 1-37 – USB Connection Port .................................................... 4-53
Air cleaner filter ................................................................... 8-16 Automatic transmission
Air conditioner – Position indicator ............................................................. 2-4
– Automatic ...................................................................... 4-28 AUX (AUXILIARY)
– Heater and air conditioner .............................................. 4-24 – Socket .......................................................................... 4-54
– Manual .......................................................................... 4-26
– Operation ...................................................................... 4-25
– Refrigerant and lubricant .................................................. 9-5
– Servicing ....................................................................... 4-29
– Brake booster ............................................................... 8-13
B
– Checking ...................................................................... 8-13
– Checking footbrake ....................................................... 8-13
Back door ........................................................................... 3-24 – Fluid .............................................................................. 8-14
– Auto closure .................................................................. 3-27 – Maintenance .................................................................. 8-13
– Garage mode system .................................................... 3-28 – Parking brake ................................................................ 3-31
– Manual back door operation .......................................... 3-24 – Precautions ................................................................... 5-54
– Power back door operation ............................................ 3-24 – Trailer ............................................................................ 5-52
– Release lever ................................................................. 3-27 – Warning light ................................................................... 2-7
Battery ................................................................................ 8-18 Brightness
– Caution label ................................................................. 8-18 – Instrument panel .............................................................. 2-3
– Cold weather ................................................................ 5-57
– Intelligent Key battery discharge .................................... 5-11
– Jump starting ................................................................... 6-9 C
– Replacement - Integrated key fob .................................. 8-19
– Replacement - Intelligent Key ......................................... 8-20 Capacities and recommendations .......................................... 9-2
– Warning light ................................................................... 2-7 – Coolant ........................................................................... 9-2
Blind Spot Warning (BSW) ................................................. 5-33 – Fuel ................................................................................. 9-2
– Driving situations ........................................................... 5-35 – Oil ................................................................................... 9-2
– Maintenance .................................................................. 5-36 – Refrigerant ...................................................................... 9-2
– Operation ...................................................................... 5-33 Car phone or CB radio ........................................................ 4-55
Bluetooth® CB Radio ............................................................................ 4-55
– Hands-Free Phone System (Type A) .............................. 4-56 Centre multi-function control panel ........................................ 4-2
– Hands-Free Phone System (Type B) .............................. 4-63
– How to read the screen ................................................... 4-3
– Operation ...................................................................... 4-59
– Vehicle information and settings (models with navigation
– Pairing ........................................................................... 4-64
system) ........................................................................... 4-4
– Phone settings .............................................................. 4-65
Changing
– Precautions ................................................................... 4-32
– Engine coolant ................................................................. 8-6
– Regulatory information .......................................... 4-56, 4-63
– Engine oil filter ................................................................. 8-7
– Settings ................................................................ 4-57, 4-65
Chassis control ................................................................... 5-29
– Steering-wheel switches ................................................ 4-64
Bonnet ................................................................................ 3-23 – Active engine brake ....................................................... 5-29
– Active Ride Control ....................................................... 5-30
– Closing ......................................................................... 3-23
– Active trace control ........................................................ 5-29
– Opening ........................................................................ 3-23
Checking
Brakes ....................................................................... 5-54, 8-13
– Brake pedal ................................................................... 8-13
– Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) .................................... 5-55
– Engine coolant level ......................................................... 8-6
– Audible reminder ........................................................... 2-13
– Engine oil level ................................................................ 8-7
– Brake assist .................................................................. 5-55
10-2 Index
– Indicator lights ................................................................. 2-6 Compact Disc (CD)/USB device with MP3/WMA
– Parking brake ................................................................ 8-13 – Precautions ................................................................... 4-33
Child restraints .................................................................... 1-15 Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
– Anchorage ........................................................... 1-22, 1-23 – Position indicator ............................................................. 2-4
– ISOFIX .......................................................................... 1-19 Controls
– ISOFIX installation ......................................................... 1-24 – Display ............................................................................ 4-3
– Seat belt installation ....................................................... 1-26 Coolant
– Universal child restraints (front and rear seats) ............... 1-16 – Capacities ....................................................................... 9-2
Child safety ......................................................................... 1-12 – Changing engine coolant ................................................. 8-6
– Rear door locks ............................................................... 3-6 – Checking coolant level ..................................................... 8-6
Cleaning – Cold weather ................................................................ 5-57
– Alloy wheels .................................................................... 7-3 – Engine cooling system ..................................................... 8-5
– Chrome parts .................................................................. 7-3 – Temperature gauge ......................................................... 2-3
– Exterior ............................................................................ 7-2 Corrosion protection ............................................................. 7-5
– Glass ....................................................................... 7-3, 7-4 – Cold weather ................................................................ 5-57
– Interior ............................................................................ 7-3 – Environmental factors ...................................................... 7-5
– Removing spots ............................................................... 7-2 Cruise control ..................................................................... 5-41
– Seat belts ........................................................................ 7-4 – Operation ...................................................................... 5-41
– Underbody ...................................................................... 7-3 – Precautions ................................................................... 5-41
– Washing .......................................................................... 7-2
– Waxing ............................................................................ 7-2
– Wheels ............................................................................ 7-3 D
– Window washer nozzle .................................................. 8-16
– Wiper blades ................................................................. 8-16 Defogger
Clock .................................................................................. 2-31
– Switch ........................................................................... 2-46
Clutch Diesel
– Fluid .............................................................................. 8-14 – Fuel recommendation ...................................................... 9-4
Cockpit Dimensions ........................................................................... 9-7
– Overview ......................................................................... 0-6 – Engine ............................................................................. 9-6
Cold weather ...................................................................... 5-56 – Tyres ............................................................................... 9-7
– Battery .......................................................................... 5-57 Display
– Corrosion protection ...................................................... 5-57 – Brightness ....................................................................... 2-3
– Engine coolant ............................................................... 5-57 – Controls .......................................................................... 4-3
– Parking brake ................................................................ 5-57 – Vehicle information display ............................................. 2-14
– Tyre equipment .............................................................. 5-57 Door locks
– Winter equipment .......................................................... 5-57
– Remote keyless entry system .................................. 3-18, 3-7
Index 10-3
Doors – Cold start period ............................................................. 5-6
– Back door ..................................................................... 3-24 – Compartment ................................................................ 0-13
– Child safety rear door lock ............................................... 3-6 – Cooling system ............................................................... 8-5
– Locking (inside lock knob) ............................................... 3-5 – Data ................................................................................ 9-6
– Locking (key) ................................................................... 3-4 – Fuel information ............................................................... 0-1
– Locking (power door lock switch) .................................... 3-6 – Malfunction Indicator Light (MI or MIL) ......................... 2-12
– Locks .............................................................................. 3-4 – Malfunction warning light ................................................. 2-9
Drive belts ........................................................................... 8-11 – MR16DDT engine overview ........................................... 0-14
Driver Attention Alert ........................................................... 2-32 – MR20DD engine overview ............................................. 0-15
Driving ................................................................................ 5-13 – Oil ................................................................................... 8-7
– Overheat ....................................................................... 6-11
– Care ................................................................................ 5-6
– QR25DE engine overview .............................................. 0-13
– Cold weather ................................................................ 5-56
– R9M engine overview .................................................... 0-16
– Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) ..................... 5-13
– Running-in schedule ........................................................ 5-2
– Hill descent control system ............................................ 5-32
– Serial number .................................................................. 9-9
– Hill Start Assist system .................................................. 5-31
– Spark plugs ................................................................... 8-12
– Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system ........................ 5-36
– Starting (Without Intelligent Key) .................................... 5-11
– Manual Transmission (MT) ............................................. 5-16
– Three-way catalyst ........................................................... 5-3
– On-pavement and off-road precautions ............................ 5-6
Exhaust gas ........................................................................... 5-3
– Precautions ..................................................................... 5-2
– Stop/Start System ......................................................... 5-18 Exterior
– Wet conditions ................................................................ 5-6 – Cleaning .......................................................................... 7-2
– Winter conditions ............................................................ 5-7 – Lights — Bulb information ............................................. 8-26
– Overview ......................................................................... 0-3
E
F
ECO mode system .............................................................. 5-45
Electric power steering ........................................................ 5-53 Filter
Electronic Stability Programme (ESP) .................................. 5-27 – Air cleaner ..................................................................... 8-16
– Engine Oil ....................................................................... 8-7
– OFF switch ................................................................... 5-28
Flat tyre ................................................................................. 6-2
– Warning light ................................................................. 2-10
Engine – Changing ........................................................................ 6-6
– Preparing tools ................................................................ 6-3
– Before starting the engine ................................................ 5-2
– Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ....................... 6-2
– Changing engine coolant ................................................. 8-6
Floor mats ............................................................................. 7-4
– Changing oil filter ............................................................ 8-7
– Checking coolant level ..................................................... 8-6 Fluids
– Checking engine oil level ................................................. 8-7 – Air conditioner ................................................................. 9-2
– Brake ............................................................................ 8-14
10-4 Index
– Clutch ........................................................................... 8-14 – Odometer ........................................................................ 2-2
– Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) ..................... 8-15 – Speedometer .................................................................. 2-2
– Recommendations and capacities .................................... 9-2 – Tachometer ..................................................................... 2-2
– Window washer ............................................................ 8-17 Glass
FM AM radio with CD player – Cleaning .................................................................. 7-3, 7-4
– Settings (Type A) ........................................................... 4-39
– Settings (Type B) .......................................................... 4-47
Fog lights ............................................................................ 2-42 H
– Bulb information ............................................................ 8-26
– Front — Operation ........................................................ 2-42 Hazard indicator operation
– Locations ...................................................................... 8-28 – Remote keyless entry ....................................................... 3-8
– Rear — Operation ......................................................... 2-42 Hazard warning
– Replacement ................................................................. 8-29 – Operation ........................................................................ 6-2
Forward emergency braking system .................................... 5-42 Head restraints ...................................................................... 1-8
– Operation ...................................................................... 5-43 – Adjustment ............................................................... 1-8, 1-9
– Warning light ................................................................... 2-7 – Installation ....................................................................... 1-9
Four-wheel drive ................................................................. 5-22 – Removal .......................................................................... 1-8
– 4WD warning light ......................................................... 5-24 Headlights
– Operation ...................................................................... 5-22 – Aiming control ............................................................... 2-37
– Torque distribution indicator .......................................... 5-25 – Cleaner ......................................................................... 2-41
Fuel – Replacement ................................................................. 8-25
– Capacities ....................................................................... 9-2 – Switch ........................................................................... 2-35
– Filler cap ....................................................................... 3-28 Heated seats ......................................................................... 1-5
– Gauge ............................................................................. 2-3 Heated windscreen ............................................................. 4-30
– Information ............................................................... 0-1, 9-4 Heater and air conditioner ................................................... 4-24
– Opening fuel filler lid ...................................................... 3-28 – Automatic air conditioner ............................................... 4-28
Fuses .................................................................................. 8-21 – Manual air conditioner ................................................... 4-26
– Engine compartment ...................................................... 8-21 – Operation ...................................................................... 4-25
– Passenger compartment ................................................ 8-22 – Safety precautions ........................................................... 4-2
– Servicing ....................................................................... 4-29
– Tips ............................................................................... 4-25
G – Vents ............................................................................. 4-23
Hill descent control system .................................................. 5-32
Gauges – Switch ........................................................................... 5-32
– Engine coolant temperature ............................................. 2-3 Hill Start Assist system ........................................................ 5-31
– Fuel ................................................................................. 2-3 – Indicator light ................................................................. 2-12
– Meters and gauges .......................................................... 2-2 Horn ................................................................................... 2-47
Index 10-5
I J
Ignition Jump starting ......................................................................... 6-9

– Ignition key positions (Models without Intelligent Key
system) ........................................................................... 5-7
– Ignition switch positions (model with Intelligent Key K
system) ......................................................................... 5-10
– Push-button ignition switch .............................................. 5-8 Keys ...................................................................................... 3-2
– Switch ............................................................................. 5-7 – Intelligent Key .................................................................. 3-2
Indicator lights – Intelligent Key battery discharge .................................... 5-11
– Overview ......................................................................... 2-5 – Intelligent Key battery replacement ................................. 8-20
Injured persons ................................................................... 1-13 – Key fob battery replacement .......................................... 8-19
Instrument panel – Locking ........................................................................... 3-4
– Overview ....................................................................... 0-10 – Mechanical key ................................................................ 3-2
Intelligent Key ................................................................. 3-2, 3-9 – NISSAN Anti-Theft System (NATS) key ........................... 3-2
– Operating range (Intelligent Key) ................................... 3-11
– Operation (Intelligent Key) ............................................. 3-11
– Battery replacement ...................................................... 8-20
– Positions (Ignition switch) ................................................ 5-8
– Operating range ............................................................ 3-11
– Radio approval number and information ......................... 9-10
– Operation ...................................................................... 3-11
– Remote keyless entry ....................................................... 3-7
– Using Intelligent Key system ............................................ 3-9
– Remote keyless entry .............................................. 3-18, 3-7
– Using remote keyless entry system ......................... 3-18, 3-7
– Starting engine .............................................................. 5-12
– Steering lock ................................................................... 5-9
– System ............................................................................ 5-8 L
– Troubleshooting guide ................................................... 3-16
– Warning signals ............................................................. 3-14
Labels
Interior
– Air bag .......................................................................... 1-34
– Lights — Bulb information ............................................. 8-27
– Air conditioner ................................................................. 9-9
– Lights — Operation ....................................................... 2-58
– Battery cautions ............................................................ 8-18
– Lights — Replacement .................................................. 8-29
– Chassis number .............................................................. 9-9
– Overview ......................................................................... 0-5
– Tyres ............................................................................... 9-9
ISOFIX
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) .......................................... 5-36
– Anchor locations ............................................................ 1-22
– Lane camera unit maintenance ....................................... 5-38
– Child restraints .............................................................. 1-19
– Operation ...................................................................... 5-37
– Installation ..................................................................... 1-24
Lights .................................................................................. 8-25
10-6 Index
– Console light ................................................................. 2-58 – Precautions ..................................................................... 8-4
– Exterior lights — Bulb information .................................. 8-26 – Requirements .................................................................. 8-2
– Hazard warning ............................................................... 6-2 – Scheduled maintenance .................................................. 8-2
– Headlight aiming control ................................................ 2-37 – Seat belts ...................................................................... 1-15
– Headlight cleaner .......................................................... 2-41 – Where to go for service ................................................... 8-2
– Indicator lights ............................................................... 2-10 Malfunction warning light ....................................................... 2-9
– Interior .......................................................................... 2-58 Manual Transmission (MT)
– Interior lights — Bulb information ................................... 8-27 – Driving ........................................................................... 5-16
– Locations ...................................................................... 8-28 Meters and gauges ............................................................... 2-2
– Luggage room ............................................................... 2-59 – Engine coolant temperature ............................................. 2-3
– Map lights ..................................................................... 2-58 – Fuel ................................................................................. 2-3
– Rear personal lights ....................................................... 2-59 – Odometer ........................................................................ 2-2
– Replacement ........................................................ 8-25, 8-29 – Overview ....................................................................... 0-12
– Room light operation ...................................................... 2-59 – Speedometer .................................................................. 2-2
– Switch — Fog lights ...................................................... 2-42 – Tachometer ..................................................................... 2-2
– Switch — Headlights ..................................................... 2-35 Mirrors ................................................................................ 3-29
– Switch — Turn signal .................................................... 2-35
– Inside rear view mirror ................................................... 3-29
– Vanity mirror lights ......................................................... 2-59
– Outside rearview mirrors ............................................... 3-30
– Warning lights ................................................................. 2-6
– Vanity mirror .................................................................. 3-31
– Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders ................ 2-5
Mobile phone integration
Locks
– Type A .......................................................................... 4-56
– Child safety ..................................................................... 3-6
– Type B .......................................................................... 4-63
– Door locks ....................................................................... 3-4
– Hazard indicator operation ............................................... 3-8
– Locking (inside lock knob) ............................................... 3-5 N
– Locking (key) ................................................................... 3-4
– Locking (power door lock switch) .................................... 3-6
NISSAN Anti-Theft System (NATS) ..................................... 3-22
– Steering lock ............................................................ 5-8, 5-9
– Key ................................................................................. 3-2
– Super lock system ........................................................... 3-4
Luggage
– Loading ........................................................................... 5-6
O
M
Odometer ............................................................................. 2-2
Off-road
Maintenance
– Precautions ................................................................... 5-25
– Camera unit .................................................................. 5-36
– General maintenance ....................................................... 8-2
Index 10-7
Oil – Bluetooth® Hands-Free (Type B) .................................. 4-63
– Capacities and recommendations .................................... 9-2 – Button .................................................................. 4-57, 4-64
– Changing engine oil filter ................................................. 8-7 – Pairing ........................................................................... 4-64
– Checking engine oil level ................................................. 8-7 – Settings ................................................................ 4-62, 4-65
– Disposal ........................................................................ 8-11 Power
– Engine oil ........................................................................ 8-7 – Electric power steering .................................................. 5-53
– SAE viscosity number ...................................................... 9-4 – Outlet ............................................................................ 2-51
Overheat – Power windows ............................................................. 2-47
– Coolant temperature gauge ............................................. 2-3 Precautions
– Engine ........................................................................... 6-11 – Audio ............................................................................ 4-30
Overview – Brakes .......................................................................... 5-54
– Cockpit ........................................................................... 0-6 – Cruise control ............................................................... 5-41
– Engine compartment ...................................................... 0-13 – Heater and air conditioner, and audio system ................... 4-2
– Exterior ............................................................................ 0-3 – Parking .......................................................................... 5-47
– Instrument panel ............................................................ 0-10 – Push-button ignition switch .............................................. 5-8
– Interior ............................................................................ 0-5 – Seat belt usage ............................................................. 1-10
– Meters and gauges ........................................................ 0-12 – Supplemental Restraint System ..................................... 1-30
– Seats, Seat belts, Supplemental restraint system ............. 0-2 – Towing .......................................................................... 6-11
– Trailer towing ................................................................ 5-51
– When starting and driving ................................................ 5-2
P Pregnant women ................................................................. 1-13
Protection
Parking – Corrosion ........................................................................ 7-5
– Brake ............................................................................ 3-31 – Environment .................................................................. 8-11
– Park Assist (PA) ............................................................ 4-14 Push starting ....................................................................... 6-10
– Parking sensor system ................................................... 5-49 Push-button ignition ............................................................... 5-8
– Precautions ................................................................... 5-47
Parking brake ...................................................................... 3-31
– Audible reminder ........................................................... 2-13 Q
– Cold weather ................................................................ 5-57
– Warning light ................................................................... 2-7 Quick reference .................................................................... 0-6
Parking sensors .................................................................. 5-49
– OFF switch ................................................................... 5-50
Petrol R
– Fuel recommendation ...................................................... 9-4
Phone Radio
– Bluetooth® Hands-Free (Type A) ................................... 4-56 – Anti-theft system ............................................................ 4-39
10-8 Index
– Approval number and information ................................... 9-10 – Child restraints .............................................................. 1-15
– FM AM radio with CD — Bluetooth ...................... 4-46, 4-52 – Child safety rear door locks ............................................. 3-6
– FM AM radio with CD — CD ................................ 4-43, 4-49 – Children ........................................................................ 1-12
– FM AM radio with CD — Media ..................................... 4-47 – Head restraints ................................................................ 1-8
– FM AM radio with CD — Radio ............................ 4-42, 4-48 – Injured persons ............................................................. 1-13
– FM AM radio with CD — USB ....................................... 4-50 – Pregnant women ........................................................... 1-13
– FM-AM radio with CD player (Type A) ........................... 4-39 – Seat belts ...................................................................... 1-10
– FM-AM radio with CD player (Type B) ........................... 4-47 Scheduled maintenance ........................................................ 8-2
– iPod operation ...................................................... 4-45, 4-51 Seat belts ............................................................................ 1-10
– Steering wheel switches ................................................ 4-54 – Adjustment .................................................................... 1-14
– USB Connection Port .................................................... 4-53 – CENTER mark ............................................................... 1-13
Radio approval numbers ...................................................... 9-10 – Child restraint installation ............................................... 1-26
Rear seats – Cleaning .......................................................................... 7-4
– Folding ..................................................................... 1-5, 1-7 – Maintenance .................................................................. 1-15
Remote keyless entry ............................................................ 3-7 – Overview ......................................................................... 0-2
– Intelligent Key ................................................................ 3-18 – Precautions on usage .................................................... 1-10
– Operation ........................................................................ 3-7 – Warning light ................................................................... 2-9
Replacement Seats .................................................................................... 1-2
– Air bags ........................................................................ 1-39 – Adjustment - Manual ........................................................ 1-2
– Air cleaner filter ............................................................. 8-16 – Adjustment - Power ......................................................... 1-3
– Engine coolant ................................................................. 8-6 – Armrest ........................................................................... 1-7
– Engine oil filter ................................................................. 8-7 – Head restraints ................................................................ 1-8
– Flat tyre ........................................................................... 6-6 – Heating ........................................................................... 1-5
– Headlights ..................................................................... 8-25 – ISOFIX child restraints .................................................. 1-19
– Integrated key fob battery .............................................. 8-19 – Overview ......................................................................... 0-2
– Intelligent Key battery .................................................... 8-20 – Rear seats - Folding ................................................. 1-5, 1-7
– Lights ............................................................................ 8-29 – Seat belts ...................................................................... 1-10
– Spark plugs ................................................................... 8-12 – Second row .................................................................... 1-5
– Wiper blades ................................................................. 8-17 – Third row ......................................................................... 1-7
Roof rail .............................................................................. 2-57 – Universal child restraints (front and rear seats) ............... 1-16
Running-in schedule .............................................................. 5-2 Security system ................................................................... 3-20
– NISSAN Anti-Theft System (NATS) ............................... 3-22
Settings
S – Around View Monitor ..................................................... 4-22
– Bluetooth® ........................................................... 4-57, 4-65
Safety Spare tyre ............................................................................. 6-3
– Chains (Trailer) .............................................................. 5-52
Index 10-9
Spark plugs Supplemental Restraint System ........................................... 1-30
– Information .................................................................... 8-12 – Overview ......................................................................... 0-2
– Replacement ................................................................. 8-12 – Precautions ................................................................... 1-30
Speed limiter ....................................................................... 5-39 Switches
– Operation ...................................................................... 5-39 – Brightness ....................................................................... 2-3
Speedometer ........................................................................ 2-2 – Cruise control ............................................................... 5-41
Starting – Defogger ....................................................................... 2-46
– Before starting the engine ................................................ 5-2 – Electronic Stability Programme (ESP) ............................ 5-28
– Jump starting ................................................................... 6-9 – Fog lights ...................................................................... 2-42
– Precautions ..................................................................... 5-2 – Four-wheel drive ............................................................ 5-22
– Push starting ................................................................. 6-10 – Hazard warning ............................................................... 6-2
– With Intelligent Key ........................................................ 5-12 – Headlight aiming control ................................................ 2-37
– Without Intelligent Key ................................................... 5-11 – Headlight cleaner ................................................. 2-41, 2-46
Steering – Headlight switch ............................................................ 2-35
– Power steering system .................................................. 5-53 – Hill descent control system ............................................ 5-32
– Warning light ................................................................... 2-7 – Ignition switch positions ................................................. 5-10
Steering wheel .................................................................... 3-29 – Interior light ................................................................... 2-58
– Locking with power door lock switch ............................... 3-6
– Electric power steering .................................................. 5-53
– Parking sensor system ................................................... 5-49
– Switches - Cruise control .............................................. 5-41
– Power windows ............................................................. 2-47
– Switches - Speed limiter ................................................ 5-39
– Push-button ignition ......................................................... 5-8
Stop/Start System ............................................................... 5-18
– Rear window wiper and washer ..................................... 2-45
– Audible reminder ........................................................... 2-13 – Seat heating .................................................................... 1-5
– Display .......................................................................... 5-20 – Speed limiter ................................................................. 5-39
– OFF switch ................................................................... 5-21 – Thermaclear Heated Windscreen ................................... 4-30
Storage ............................................................................... 2-52 – Wiper and washer ......................................................... 2-43
– Bottle holder .................................................................. 2-53
– Card holder ................................................................... 2-54
– Coat hooks ................................................................... 2-56 T
– Console box .................................................................. 2-52
– Cup holders .................................................................. 2-52 Tachometer ........................................................................... 2-2
– Glove box ...................................................................... 2-52 Theft warning system .......................................................... 3-20
– Luggage compartment ................................................... 2-54
ThermaClear Heated Windscreen ....................................... 4-30
– Luggage hooks ............................................................. 2-54
– Tonneau cover ............................................................... 2-57 Three-way catalyst ................................................................. 5-3
Sunroof Tools ..................................................................................... 6-3
– Automatic sunroof ......................................................... 2-49 Towing
– Sunshade ...................................................................... 2-49 – Precautions ................................................................... 6-11
10-10 Index
– Recommendations ......................................................... 6-12 – Rotation ......................................................................... 8-35
– Tow bar Installation ....................................................... 5-53 – Sizes ............................................................................... 9-7
– Trailer ............................................................................ 5-51 – Snow chains ................................................................. 8-34
– Your vehicle .................................................................. 6-11 – Spare .............................................................................. 6-3
Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) ............................................ 2-33 – Spare tyre ..................................................................... 8-36
Trailer – Trailer tyre pressure ....................................................... 5-52
– Brakes .......................................................................... 5-52 – Types ............................................................................ 8-34
– Precautions ................................................................... 5-51 – Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) .............. 6-2, 8-34
– Safety chains ................................................................. 5-52 – Wear and damage ......................................................... 8-35
– Tow bar Installation ....................................................... 5-53 – Wheel balance .............................................................. 8-36
– Towing .......................................................................... 5-51 – Wheels and tyres ................................................... 8-34, 9-7
– Trailer detection ............................................................. 5-52
– Tyre pressure ................................................................ 5-52
U
Transmission
– Automatic Transmission (AT) position indicator ................ 2-4
– Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid ............. 8-15 Universal child restraints
– Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) operation ..... 5-13 – Front and rear seats ...................................................... 1-16
– Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) position USB (Universal Serial Bus)
indicator .......................................................................... 2-4 – Connection Port ............................................................ 4-53
– Driving — Manual .......................................................... 5-16 – Device operation ........................................................... 4-50
– Driving — Xtronic .......................................................... 5-13 – Precautions ................................................................... 4-31
Troubleshooting guide
– Intelligent key ................................................................ 3-16
V
Turn signal
– Bulb information ............................................................ 8-26
Variable voltage control ....................................................... 8-21
– Replacement ................................................................. 8-29
Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ...................... 5-4, 6-2 Vehicle identification .............................................................. 9-8
– Indicator light ................................................................... 2-8 – Air conditioner label ......................................................... 9-9
Tyres – Engine serial number ....................................................... 9-9
– Number (VIN) (chassis number) ....................................... 9-9
– 4WD model ................................................................... 5-26
– Number (VIN) plate .......................................................... 9-8
– Age ............................................................................... 8-36
– Plate ................................................................................ 9-8
– Changing tyres and wheels ........................................... 8-36
– Tyre placard .................................................................... 9-9
– Cold weather ................................................................ 5-57
Vehicle information and settings (models with navigation
– Flat tyre ........................................................................... 6-2
– Inflation pressure ........................................................... 8-34 system) ................................................................................. 4-4
– Placard .................................................................... 0-1, 9-9 Vehicle information display .................................................. 2-14
– Pressure information ........................................................ 0-1 – Driver Attention Alert ..................................................... 2-32
Index 10-11
– Oil control system .......................................................... 2-28 Winter
– Settings ......................................................................... 2-14 – Special equipment ......................................................... 5-57
– Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) ...................................... 2-33 Wiper blades ....................................................................... 8-16
– Trip computer ................................................................ 2-29 – Cleaning ........................................................................ 8-16
– Warnings and indicators ................................................ 2-22 – Replacement ................................................................. 8-17
Vehicle security .......................................................... 3-20, 5-56 Wipers
Vents .................................................................................. 4-23 – Operation (Rear window) ............................................... 2-45
Viscosity number (SAE) ......................................................... 9-4 – Operation (Windscreen) ................................................ 2-43
– Rain-sensing auto wiper ................................................ 2-44
– Wiper and washer switch .............................................. 2-43
W
Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders ...................... 2-5 X

– Air bag .......................................................................... 1-34
– Air bag - Passenger ....................................................... 1-37 Xtronic transmission
– Audible reminders ......................................................... 2-13 – Driving ............................................................................. 5-9
– Indicator lights ............................................................... 2-10 – Fluid .............................................................................. 8-15
– Warning lights ................................................................. 2-6
Washing ............................................................................... 7-2
Waxing .................................................................................. 7-2
Wheels
– Balance ......................................................................... 8-36
– Blocking .......................................................................... 6-5
– Changing tyres and wheels ........................................... 8-36
– Cleaning .......................................................................... 7-3
– Installation ....................................................................... 6-7
– Removal .......................................................................... 6-6
– Sizes ............................................................................... 9-7
– Tools and spare wheel ..................................................... 6-3
– Wheels and tyres ................................................... 8-34, 9-7
Window washer
– Fluid .............................................................................. 8-17
Windows ............................................................................. 2-47
– Power windows ............................................................. 2-47
Windscreen
– Thermaclear Heated Windscreen ................................... 4-30
– Wiper and washer switch .............................................. 2-43
10-12 Index
PETROL STATION INFORMATION ENVIRONMENT (End of Life
Vehicles)
FUEL INFORMATION • Below −7°C (20°F) ... Winter type diesel fuel. ENVIRONMENTAL CONCERN
Petrol engine (model with three-way CAUTION NISSAN BLUE CITIZENSHIP
catalyst) • Do not use home heating oil, petrol or other Today, the efforts made by NISSAN to fulfil our
alternate fuels in your diesel engine. The use responsibilities to protect and sustain the environ-
CAUTION
of those or adding those to diesel fuel can ment are far-reaching. Within NISSAN, we promote
Do not use leaded petrol. Using leaded petrol will cause engine damage. the highest levels of practice in every region and in
damage the three-way catalyst. every area of operations.
• Do not use summer fuel at temperatures be-
QR25DE engine model: low −7°C (20°F). The cold temperatures will COMPLIANCE AT EVERY STEP
Use UNLEADED REGULAR petrol with an octane cause wax to form in the fuel. As a result, it
may prevent the engine from running NISSAN focuses on ensuring that end of life vehicle
rating of at least 91 (RON).
smoothly. components are reused, recycled or recovered, and
MR20DD engine model: guarantees compliance with EU legislation (the End
Use UNLEADED REGULAR petrol with an octane RECOMMENDED ENGINE OIL of Life Vehicle Directive).
rating of at least 91 (RON). See “Recommended Fluids/lubricants and WE BUILD OUR VEHICLES WITH
MR16DDT engine model: capacities” in the “9. Technical information” section. RECYCLING IN MIND
Use UNLEADED REGULAR petrol with an octane TYRE COLD PRESSURE Reducing landfill waste, emissions, conserving natu-
rating of at least 95 (RON). See the tyre placard affixed to the driver’s side ral resources, and enhancing recycling activities are
If unleaded premium petrol is not used, UNLEADED centre pillar. emphasised daily in our manufacturing, sales and
REGULAR petrol with an octane rating of at least 91 service operations and in the disposal of end of life
(RON) may be used at slightly reduced vehicles (ELV).
performance. However, for maximum vehicle per- Design phase
formance and the best driveability, the use of un-
leaded premium petrol is recommended. To reduce environmental impact we have developed
your NISSAN vehicle to be 95% recoverable. We
Diesel engine* mark the components to facilitate dismantling, recy-
cling and to reduce hazardous substances. We
Diesel fuel above 51 cetane and with less than 10
carefully verify and control substances of concern.
ppm of sulphur (EN590) must be used.
We have already reduced to a minimum the cad-
* If two types of diesel fuel are available, use mium, mercury and lead in your NISSAN vehicle.
summer or winter fuel properly according to NISSAN includes recycled material in your vehicle
the following temperature conditions. and looks for opportunities to increase the percent-
age of recycled materials used.
• Above −7°C (20°F) ... Summer type diesel fuel.
Manufacturing phase collection networks in your area. Our collection net- Use the roof rack only when necessary
works guarantee no cost for the treatment of your
NISSAN plants based in the UK and Spain already ELV. For further information on how and where to Only install the roof luggage system when you really
achieve a recycling rate of over 90% and are look- dispose of your ELV refer to your local NISSAN need it, otherwise put it inside the vehicle or store it
ing for further improvements. The UK plant installed dealer or consult: www.nissan-europe.com. in your garage. Do not drive around with an empty
10 wind turbines to cut carbon dioxide emissions at roof rack, kayak holder, or ski rack, this will reduce
power plants by more than 3,000 tonnes per year. PROTECT THE ENVIRONMENT your aerodynamic drag significantly.
NMISA (Spain) uses a solar panel water heating WHEN DRIVING Optimise the use of air conditioning
system to save energy. This will generate 33% of
the energy consumed in the baths during the paint- Your driving behaviour has significant impact on fuel
The air conditioning system has a positive effect on
ing of your vehicle. economy and the environment. Follow the tips be-
driving and vehicle safety through comfort cooling
low for better fuel-efficiency, better driving habits,
and dehumidifying, drivers are more alert and have
Production and distribution phase and to be environmentally friendly by reducing emis-
better visibility when window demisting/defogging
sions:
Using resources efficiently to reduce the amount of becomes necessary. However, use of the air condi-
waste generated during the production and distribu- Fuel efficient driving tioning system will increase fuel consumption sub-
tion stage. NISSAN promotes activities based on stantially in an urban environment. Optimise the use
Reducing, Reusing, and Recycling materials when- Anticipating traffic conditions and acting accordingly of air conditioning by using the vents as much as
ever possible. NISSAN’s goal is to achieve a 100% reduces fuel consumption, helping to protect of our possible.
recycling rate for operations in Japan and globally. natural environment. Take your foot off the accelera-
tor while approaching traffic lights and avoid last Use the parking brake on slopes
Use and service phase minute braking when the light turns red.
Use the parking brake when holding your vehicle on
Avoid speeding, harsh acceleration, and strong
NISSAN dealers are our window to you, our cus- a slope. Avoid using the clutch (manual transmis-
braking. The gain in time does not offset pollution of
tomer. In order to meet your expectations they pro- sion) or the accelerator (automatic transmission or
the environment. Try to maintain speed when driving
vide not only high quality services but are also envi- continuously variable transmission) to hold your ve-
uphill to reduce fuel consumption and pollution.
ronmentally responsible. NISSAN promotes activi- hicle as this leads to unnecessary fuel consumption
Maintain speed or allow the vehicle to go slower
ties to recycle the waste generated as a result of and wear.
where traffic allows.
service centre activities.
Use the parking brake when holding your vehicle on
Disposal phase Close windows when driving a slope. Avoid using the clutch (manual transmis-
Driving with a window open at 100 km/h (62 MPH) sion) or the accelerator (continuously variable trans-
Recycle your end of life vehicle or its components. mission) to hold your vehicle as this leads to unnec-
increases fuel consumption by up to 4%. Driving
When your NISSAN reaches the end of its life, and essary fuel consumption and wear.
with the windows closed allows for better fuel
is no longer suitable for daily use, it still has value.
economy.
You can help prevent waste affecting the environ-
ment by bringing your NISSAN to be recycled at our
Maintain a safe distance
Anticipate traffic conditions for a smoother drive and
to assure comfort and safety during your trip. Drive
and maintain a safe distance from other vehicles
while in traffic. This will help reduce fuel consump-
tion as you will not be constantly tapping your
brakes.
Check your tyre pressure
Low tyre pressure increases fuel consumption as
well as the use of non-recommended tyres. Correct
tyre pressure will maximise the grip of your vehicle
and optimise fuel consumption.
Have your car serviced regularly
Regular service allows you to run your vehicle in
optimal condition and with the best fuel efficiency.
Have your vehicle serviced by your NISSAN dealer
or a qualified workshop to ensure that it is main-
tained to its original standard.
AIRBAG LABEL (where fitted)
m
m
QUICK REFERENCE
• In case of emergency ... “Hazard indicator flasher

switch” in the “6. In case of emergency” section
(Flat tyre, engine will not start, overheating, tow-
ing)
• How to start the engine ... “Before starting
engine” in the “5. Starting and driving” section
• How to read the meters and gauges ... “Meters
and gauges” in the “2. Instruments and controls”
section
• Maintenance and do-it-yourself ... “Maintenance
requirements” in the “8. Maintenance and
do-it-yourself” section
• Technical information ... “Recommended Fluids/
lubricants and capacities” in the “9. Technical
information” section
SECURITY INFORMATION SECURITY INFORMATION
As owner of this vehicle important codes have
been supplied to you that may be required by
your NISSAN dealer to duplicate keys or re- Radio security code
pair the radio. (where fitted)
Please fill in the allocated areas or attach stick-
er(s) if available. Remove this page and keep
it in a safe place, not in the vehicle.
When selling your vehicle, we kindly request Key number
you to hand over this page to the buyer.
Wheel lock key code

(where fitted)
Remove this page from the manual and keep it in a safe place, not in the vehicle.
When selling your vehicle, we kindly request you to hand over this page to the buyer.
NISSAN X-TRAIL
X-TRAIL
BETRIEBSANLEITUNG
Deutschland : Österreich : Schweiz :
00800/83 83 80 80 0800/100 990 0800 647 726
International : International : International :
+49 (0)2232/57 23 45 +43 (0)1 317 77 27 +41 (0) 22 341 08 41
Printing: June 2015 (01)
T32-G4
Publication No.: OM15G-0T32E0E
Printed in France
OM15G-0T32E0E Nissan International SA - Switzerland T32-G4
G
T32

Nissan Xtrail Car Book 2016 ENG

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Nissan Xtrail Car Book 2016 ENG

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Nissan Xtrail Car Book 2016 ENG

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

NISSAN X-TRAIL

Printing: June 2015 (01)

IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE

The Blue Citizenship symbol indicates environmentally friendly information and

“NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE

iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc.

Instruments and controls 2

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3

Starting and driving 5

Appearance and care 7

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8

11. Child restraint anchor point (for top tether

0-2 Illustrated table of contents

11. Parking sensor system* (P. 5-49)

1. Engine bonnet (P. 3-23) 6. Power windows (P. 2-47)

Illustrated table of contents 0-3

— Remote keyless entry system* (P. 3-7)

1. Rear window defogger (P. 2-46) 5. Roof rail* (P. 2-57)

0-4 Illustrated table of contents

11. Door armrest

Illustrated table of contents 0-5

5. Steering wheel (P. 3-29)

0-6 Illustrated table of contents

Illustrated table of contents 0-7

0-8 Illustrated table of contents

Illustrated table of contents 0-9

8. Bonnet release handle (P. 3-23)

LEFT-HAND DRIVE (LHD) MODEL — Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System

0-10 Illustrated table of contents

RIGHT-HAND DRIVE (RHD) MODEL (without navigation)* (P. 4-56)

Illustrated table of contents 0-11

1. Tachometer (P. 2-2) 6. Fuel gauge (P. 2-3)

0-12 Illustrated table of contents

QR25DE ENGINE MODEL 6. Window washer fluid reservoir (P. 8-17)

Illustrated table of contents 0-13

MR16DDT ENGINE MODEL 5. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-5)

0-14 Illustrated table of contents

MR20DD ENGINE MODEL 6. Engine drive belts (P. 8-11)

Illustrated table of contents 0-15

R9M ENGINE MODEL 5. Air cleaner (P. 8-16)

0-16 Illustrated table of contents

Seats....................................................................... 1-2 Seat belt maintenance ........................................ 1-15

1-2 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3

Forward and backward: Seat lifter (where fitted):

The seatback may be reclined to allow occupants to

1-4 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5

1-6 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

To fold the third row seats flat for maximum cargo

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7

1-8 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

For adjustable head restraint

To raise the head restraint, pull it up.

1. Align the head restraint stalks with the holes in

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9

1-10 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11

1-12 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13